JP2017099578A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Gaming machine

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display symbols variably based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the end of the fluctuation display. Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbol is not changing (during playing), allowing the player to easily find a vacant platform, It is suppressing that the operation of the game falls.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further suppresses the decrease in the operation of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which suppresses the decrease in the operation of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that the first acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information and the first information acquired by the first acquisition means. a first determination means capable of implementing the decision, the first demonstration execution means for executing the result to the first directing a first effect period based the first judgment by the first judging means, second information A second acquisition unit that can be acquired, a second determination unit that can perform a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and the second determination unit and a second demonstration execution means for executing a second effect based on the second determination result in the second directing period, and after the execution period of the first effect has passed, if the timing condition is satisfied a first time counting means for starting a first timing, the execution period of the second effect After a lapse of a second time counting means for starting a second timing when the timing condition is satisfied, based on said first timing becomes the first set value, starts the execution of the first notification manner and, the second time measurement based on the fact that a second set value, and has a notification executing means for starting execution of the second notification manner, the.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination is performed based on the first acquisition unit capable of acquiring the first information , and the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit. It is possible to acquire the second information and the first effect execution means that executes the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period. A second acquisition unit, a second determination unit capable of performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit, and a result of the second determination by the second determination unit And second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the second effect period, and the first clocking condition is satisfied when the time counting condition is satisfied after the execution period of the first effect has elapsed. The first counting means to be started, and after the execution period of the second effect has elapsed, The execution of the first notification mode is started based on the second clocking means for starting the second clocking when the condition is satisfied and the fact that the first clocking becomes the first set value, and clocking on the basis of the fact that a second set value, Ru der having a notification executing means for starting execution of the second notification manner, the.

  Thereby, even in the state in which the second effect is being performed, it is possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a rotary body lifting unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotary body raising and lowering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotary body raising / lowering unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a central unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a container. (A) is a side view of the container in the arrow XVIIIa direction view of FIG. 17, (b) is a front view of the container in the arrow XVIIIb direction of FIG. 18 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st rotary body. It is a table which shows the combination of the figure of the 1st rotation object and the 2nd rotation object. It is a side schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body being rotated. It is a side schematic diagram of the 1st rotating body and the 2nd rotating body which show the transition state at the time of a 1st rotating body and a 2nd rotating body being rotated. It is a front view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. (A) is a front view of the central rotation unit in the state of being disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a front view of the central rotation unit in the state of being disposed at the overhanging position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a central rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a central rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. (A) is a front view of a connection displacement member, (b) is a side view of the connection displacement member in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. 32 (a) It is sectional drawing of the connection displacement member in an XXXIIa-XXXIIa line. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a connection displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic of the front base and a connection displacement member in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a front base and a 1st displacement member, (b) is a front base and the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLb direction view of Fig.40 (a). It is a side surface schematic diagram, and (c) is a cross section schematic diagram of the front base and the 1st displacement member in the XLc-XLc line of Drawing 40 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a rear view of the left rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is sectional drawing of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a base side engagement member and a displacement side engagement member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st displacement member in the XLVIII part of Drawing 47 (c), and the 2nd displacement member, (b) is the 1st displacement member in the arrow XLVIIIb direction view of Drawing 48 (a). 12 and 13 are side views of the second displacement member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is a front view of the winning device, (b) is a rear view of the winning device, and (c) is a top view of the winning device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning apparatus in the LIIa-LIIa line of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the prize-winning device in the LIIIa-LIIIa line of FIG. 52 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the prize-winning device in the LIIIb-LIIIb line of FIG. 52 (b). It is the elements on larger scale sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. It is a back schematic diagram of a prize-winning apparatus. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board which expanded the LVI part of FIG. 2 partially. It is a front perspective view of a center frame. It is a front view of a field formation part. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of a region formation portion along the line LX-LX in FIG. 59. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a top view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. (A) to (c) are front schematic diagrams of the right rotation unit in the fourth embodiment, and (d) to (g) are front schematic diagrams of the right rotation unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of a guidance part. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left rotation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a left rotation unit. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a cage, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage at line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in (a), (c) is a line CXVIIc-CXVIIc in (a) It is sectional drawing of a holder. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the left rotation unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating an outward path from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a going path from a retracted position toward a projected position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a front view of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit in each state at the time of operating a return from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of a front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in (a). It is a fragmentary cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a base side engagement member and a displacement side engagement member. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 13th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of a front base, (b) is sectional drawing of the front base in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line | wire in (a). It is a fragmentary cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a front base and a displacement side engagement member. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 14th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the left rotation unit in a state where the second displacement member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross section of the left rotation unit along line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb in (a) It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the left rotation unit in a state in which the second displacement member is disposed at the extended position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the left rotation unit along line CXXXIXb-CXXXIXb in (a) It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 15th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of a front base, (b) is sectional drawing of the front base in the CXLIb-CXLIb line | wire in (a). It is a fragmentary cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a base side engagement member and a displacement side engagement member. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of a front base, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in (a). It is a fragmentary cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a front base (opening) and a displacement side engagement member. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the left rotation unit in 17th Embodiment. It is an upper surface schematic diagram of the left rotation unit for demonstrating the engagement effect | action by a back surface base and a displacement side engagement member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right rotation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the front half section at the time of operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the right rotation unit in 19th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right rotation unit. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a backside schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position. It is a front view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit in each state in the first half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit in each state in the front half section at the time of operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 20th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the prize-winning device in 21st Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the prize-winning device in 22nd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the prize-winning device in 23rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a prize-winning apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the prize-winning apparatus in 24th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is a front view of a rotating shaft, (b) is a side view of the rotating shaft in the arrow CLXXIb direction view of (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 172 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device along the line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the prize-winning device in a 25th embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a prize-winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 1st state, (b) is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device in the state in which the seesaw member formed the 2nd state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176 (a), (c) Fig. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the prize-winning device taken along line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in Fig. 176 (b). It is a front view of the center frame of a pachinko machine. (A) And (b) is an enlarged view of the CLXXIX part in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the time change of the time change of operation of a flow path solenoid, and the opening-and-closing timing of the opening-and-closing board for every big hit classification. FIG. 17 is a schematic view schematically showing a method of transition from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in the case where all the symbol rows on the upper, middle and lower are changing in the variable display effect, and (b) is a stop display of the jackpot stop display It is a figure showing an example of display contents when reach effect which suggests that a player is highly likely to occur is generated. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of reach production. (A) is a figure showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is out in the normal state or the definite change state, and (b) shows an example of the customer waiting demo screen It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing an example of a demonstration screen during special figure 2 change. (A) is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation in the latent state, (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content in the case of 30 seconds or less after the end of variation display c) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the case of 30 seconds or more after the end of the fluctuation display. (A) is a figure which showed this latency state completion screen, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the result screen displayed after a latency state is complete | finished. It is a figure showing an example of resurrection production which is a kind of production performed during a latent state. FIG. 5 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic view It is the model which showed the content of the 2nd per random number table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is the model which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is the model which showed the content of the table for common use typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a table for ordinary use, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a table for latent confirmation. It is the model which showed the content of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table typically. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the model which showed the content of the screen display selection table typically. FIG. 6 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 out-of-variation fluctuation | variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a Tokusatsu 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting presentation processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the waiting command processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining frequency update process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a front view which shows the inside of the distribution unit in a 2nd control example. FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing a transition method of the gaming state in the second control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a schematic view showing a display screen in the case where the additional effect is not executed in the remaining period, and (b) is a display screen in the case where the additional effect A is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period FIG. (A) is a schematic view showing a display screen when additional effect B is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period, and (b) is an additional effect C as a type of additional effect during the remaining period It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen in, when it is performed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display screen in, when additional production D is performed as a classification of additional production during a remaining period. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation | variation in the 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the demonstration display A screen (the customer waiting demonstration screen) in the third symbol display device, (b) is a demonstration display B screen (the customer waiting demonstration screen in the third symbol display device) ) Is a diagram showing an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the special display A screen in the 3rd symbol display device, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the special display B screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the type of jackpot in the second control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection table in the second control example It is the model which showed the structure typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a normal table (for two or less times after completion of latent confirmation) in the second control example, and (b) is a normal table in the second control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 3 to 8 times after completion | finish of latent confirmation. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latency table in the second control example It is. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection table in the second control example It is. It is the model which showed typically the content of the additional presentation selection table in the 2nd control example. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation under-execution processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing under execution of the 2nd special symbol variation performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining frequency update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation resumption processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in another example of the 2nd control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of the 2nd control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the flow of the special figure fluctuation in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state, and (b) is a hit during the latent state (during a small hit game) It is the model which showed typically an example of the display screen of 2.). (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the content displayed when the additional effect D (see point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation of the latent state, (b) is a schematic view It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the final production in a latent state. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit presentation in a latent state. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the winning effect table in the third control example is there. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st winning a prize process 2 performed by MPU in the main control in the 3rd example of control. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd winning a prize processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the win related command processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pending | holding notice production | presentation is performed. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed the display mode when a pressing addition production is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure showing the display mode when pressing addition production is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a display mode when a non-display mode in which the remaining number is not displayed in the latent state is set. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the non-display mode in a latent state. (A) is the figure which showed the display content when the remaining frequency of the actual latent state becomes 0 in a non-display mode, and a latent state is complete | finished, (b) is a non-display mode FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) in the case where a jackpot is set and the number of remaining latent confirmation states is five or less; (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) schematically shows the content of the participation degree normal table in the fourth control example It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the participation degree low table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot table in the fourth control example It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically composition of a pressing period table in the 4th example of control. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special table in the fourth control example is there. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the reservation notice determination table in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pressing process under addition production which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the pressing-in-holding depression processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the additional production setting processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation announcement setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed remaining definite variation frequency command processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the non-display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the decision command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a variation pattern selection in the first modification of the first control example It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latent (second half) table in the first modification of the first control example, and (b) is a diagram in the first modification of the first control example It is the model which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table typically. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a first modified example of the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 1st modification of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a screen display selection 3 table in the second modified example of the first control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is the voice lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example Is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a second normal table (for three or more times after the completion of the latent state) in the first modified example of the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the pressing process during reach which is performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot inside pressing processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the depression end processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st deformation example of the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 6 which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st deformation example of the 4th control example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a remaining certainty number-of-variations command processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the fourth control example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the depression related command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in-reach pressing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modified example of the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is a first modification of the fourth control example It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot middle pressing command processing which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of a character storage area in a second modification of the fourth control example, and (b) is a character storage area in the second modification of the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the storage area for symbol arrays in the 2nd modification of the 4th control example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the second modification of the fourth control example.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16 a is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. Port 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 1640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the second through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball inlet 64, the second ball inlet 1640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640. . Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entry 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball exit 1640, the first symbol The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 has a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (in a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second ball entry port 1640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening 1640 refers to the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the motorized accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 1640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 1640 as compared with the case where the motorized part 1640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second ball entry port 1640 during definite change or time, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 or changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, it is per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized part 1640a is opened more than during normal times. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 1640a is open at the time and once when the electric symbol 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640 is opened or the number of times the motorized accessory 1640a is opened at one time does not occur during definite change or time, but the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 as a trigger while being synchronized with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display 37A, 37B. Triggered by the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 as a third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for fluctuating display of the second symbol is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86. Further, when the rotating body lifting and lowering unit 300, the central floating unit 400 and the left and right rotation unit 500, which will be described later, are operated, at least a part of their relative displacement member 450 and driven member 560 project into the opening of the center frame 86 It is made visible through the department.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  In the second symbol display device, each time a ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a symbol of "o" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (the second symbol (not shown)) And are alternately displayed for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized part 1640a attached to the second ball entry port 1640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 1640a of the second entrance 1640 to be in the open state. Therefore, the ball can be made more likely to win the second ball entrance 1640 during definite change and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball entry port 1640 during definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increase the number of times of opening of the motorized symbol 1640a with respect to one hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric role thing 1640a with respect to may be made constant irrespective of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the left area of the variable display unit 80, and the second through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 are configured such that, among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol It is also displayed on a holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 and the second through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 where balls can be won is disposed. When a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main ball is turned on due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. The jackpot lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, the second ball entrance 1640 is disposed on the right side in a front view of the first ball entrance 64. When the ball hits the second entrance 1640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made with the device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is a winning opening where three balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is winning (entering ball), and the second ball entry port 1640 is a ball winning (entry ball) Then one ball is one of the winning openings that will be paid out as a winning ball. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first entrance 64 is different from the number of winning balls that are paid out when the second win 1640 is hit. However, the same number (for example, five) as the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball is paid to the first ball entrance 64 and the ball to be paid when the ball is won to the second ball entrance 1640 It may be configured as

  In addition, the second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by a motorized accessory 1640 a. The motorized prize 1640 a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized prize 1640 a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second ball entry port 1640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the second through gate 67, the motorized role 1640a is in the open state The state is (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be awarded to the second entrance 1640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the electrically-driven accessory 1640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the motorized accessory 1640a is opened is also usually longer than in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entrance 1640 compared to the normal time during definite variation or during time saving.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is the same in the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball hits the second entrance 1640. is there. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is greater than the case where the ball wins the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball wins the second entrance 1640 Is also set high. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have the electric role piece 1640a which exists in the second ball entry port 1640, and the ball is in a state in which the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 1640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 1640. Aim the ball to the left of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and winning many prizes at the first entrance 64 A player who aims to be a big hit will be advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the second through gate 67, the motorized accessory 1640a attached to the second entrance 1640 is likely to be in the open state during definite change or time, and the second entrance 1640 wins. The ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display 80 toward the second entrance 1640 (so-called “right-handed”) toward the second entrance 1640, and passes the second through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second entrance 1640 as well as opening the motorized role 1640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  The variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper side of the second ball entry port 1640, and on the right side thereof, an opening / closing plate that prevents the ball from entering the inside of the variable winning device 65 by being closed. 65f1 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the open / close plate 65f1, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or five balls are won).

  The opening and closing plate 65f1 is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65f1 can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes the opening / closing plate 65f1 that prevents entry into the entrance portion (specific winning opening 65a) of the variable winning device 65 and the lower side of the opening / closing plate to the right And a large opening solenoid (not shown). The opening and closing plate 65f1 is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The special opening game provided separately from the special winning hole 65a is triggered by the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 while the special winning hole 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of variable winning devices 65 is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, three) may be arranged. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the upper side of the second entrance 1640, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65f of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the variable winning device 65 A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the right as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these via the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. As shown in FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the rotating body lifting unit 300 in the lowered position, and the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 in the extended positions, respectively. A state is shown in which the body lifting and lowering unit 300 is disposed at the lifting position, and the central rotation unit 500, the right rotation unit 600, and the left rotation unit 700 are disposed at the retraction position.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 is provided with a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 210, the rotating body lifting unit 300 emits light downward. The right rotation unit 600 and the left rotation unit 700 are disposed on the left and right of the decoration unit 400 and the central rotation unit 500, respectively.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (the left front side in FIG. 6) is opened by these wall portions 211 and 212. Formed in the shape of In the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, a rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center thereof, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (ie, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The rotating body lifting unit 300 is a box-shaped container 330 in which a plurality (three in the present embodiment) are arranged in parallel in the width direction, and a plurality (two in the present embodiment) accommodated in the respective containers 330. And the second rotary body 340b).

  The plurality of containers 330 are formed independently so as to be movable up and down in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 7 and 8). In this case, in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and are not visible to the player. On the other hand, in the raised position (see FIG. 8), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are lifted to the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86), and the player can see through the opening. Be done.

  The first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotatably supported by the housing body 330, and the player visually recognizes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface by rotation. Let The first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are formed as a columnar body having a triangular cross section, and different figures are drawn on three surfaces of the outer periphery.

  In the present embodiment, the drive source of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b is shared by the drive motor 350 of one to reduce the cost of parts, while the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body A combination of figures of 340b can be changed to allow the player to visually recognize a total of nine combinations (see FIG. 20). The details will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 400 mainly includes a base body 410 and a light emitting device 420 disposed in a central portion of the base body 410, and light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 421 disposed inside the light emitting device 420. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 421 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

  The central rotation unit 500 includes a back surface base 510 and a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported at the base end side on the back surface base 510, and is disposed on the back surface side of the light emission decoration unit 400. The pair of displacement members 530 is retracted to the projecting position (see FIG. 7) which projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and to the back side of the light emission decoration unit 400 and is made invisible to the player. It is rotated between the retracted position (see FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

  The right rotation unit 600 includes a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 315 of the rotary unit elevating unit 300, and a displacement at which the proximal end is rotatably supported by the base body. And a member (a first displacement member 630 and a second displacement member 640). On the other hand, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body (a rear base 610 and a front base 620) disposed on the front surface of the front base 317 of the rotary unit elevating unit 300 and a base end rotatably supported on the base body. And a displacement member (a first displacement member 630 and a second displacement member 640). Each displacement member is at an overhanging position (see FIG. 7) which projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and an evacuation position at which it is retracted to the back side of the game board 13 and made invisible to the player. (See FIG. 8). The details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 60, the detailed configurations of the rotating body lifting unit 300, the light emitting decoration unit 400, the central rotating unit 500, the right rotating unit 600, and the left rotating unit 700 will be described. First, the detailed configuration of the rotating body lifting unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 22.

  FIG. 9 is a front view of the rotating body lifting unit 300. As shown in FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary unit elevating unit 300, and FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary unit elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the rotating body lifting unit 300 includes a central unit 300C for raising and lowering the central housing 330, and a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R for raising and lowering the left and right housings 330, respectively. And 3 units. The left unit 300L is superimposed on the front side of the central unit 300C, and the right unit 300R is connected to the right end of the central unit 300C, whereby three containers 330 are juxtaposed in the width direction.

  Here, detailed configurations of the central unit 300C, the left unit 300L, and the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. First, the central unit 300C will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the central unit 300C, and FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central unit 300C.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the central unit 300C has a rear base 311 in the L shape in front view, a front base 312 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 311, and a front side of the front base 312. Drive motor 320 disposed, container 330 raised and lowered relative to back base 311 and front base 312 by the driving force of drive motor 320, and first rotary body 340a and the first rotary member 340 housed in container 330. It mainly includes a 2-rotary body 340 b and a transmission mechanism housed between the facing surfaces of the back surface base 311 and the front surface base 312 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 320 to the housing 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the central unit 300C includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a transmission gear 322 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 meshed with the transmission gear 322. A rack gear 324 is formed as a rack which is meshed with the pinion gear 323 and cut off on the side surface of the flat member, and the rack gear 324 is disposed on one side and the housing 330 is disposed on the other side. And a connecting member 325 provided.

  A pair of shafts project from the front of the rear surface base 311, and the transmission gear 322 and the pinion gear 323 are rotatably supported on these shafts. Further, slide guides 351 and 352 are disposed in parallel on the front of the rear surface base 311 in a posture in which the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 12). And the housing 330 are guided in the vertical direction. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 325 and the housing body 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational drive force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the transmission gear 322 and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 is converted to the linear movement of the rack gear 324. With the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the housing 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 325 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the connecting member 325 connects the lower portion of the vertically elongated portion in which the rack gear 324 is disposed and the vertically elongated portion in which the housing body 330 is disposed with the horizontally elongated portion. In the front view, it is formed in a U-shape. Thus, even when the central housing body 330 is disposed in the raised position with the left housing body 330 disposed in the lowered position, the horizontally elongated portion of the connecting member 325 is positioned on the back surface of the front base 312 It can avoid being viewed from the player.

  The slide guide 351 is a linear guide including a guide groove formed in the front of the rear surface base 311 and a sliding member slidably formed along the guide groove and fixed to the rear surface of the connecting member 325. It is formed as a mechanism. The same applies to a left unit 300L and a right unit 300R described later. In addition, the slide guide 352 is interposed between the first rail fixed to the rear surface base 311, the second rail fixed to the connecting member 325 or the housing 330, and between the first rail and the second rail. It is formed as a telescopic linear guiding mechanism consisting of an intermediate rail for allowing relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, since the left housing body 330 is juxtaposed (see FIG. 9) on the side (the left side in FIG. 12) of the central housing body 330 (see FIG. 9), the width of the connecting member 325 (FIG. 12 left-right direction) ) The dimensions become longer. Furthermore, as described above, in order to avoid visual recognition from the player, since the horizontally elongated portion is interposed, the connecting member 325 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and the rigidity thereof is reduced. Therefore, the posture of the central housing body 330 tends to be unstable (swinging in the left and right direction is likely to occur).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the telescopic linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) is disposed on the back side of the central housing body 330, the central housing body 330 is disposed at the raised position. However, swinging in the left and right direction can be restricted by the extended slide guide 352, and the posture of the central housing body 330 can be stabilized. On the other hand, in a state in which the central housing body 330 is disposed at the lowered position (see FIG. 9), the slide guide 352 can be shortened to avoid visual recognition from the player.

  Next, the left unit 300L will be described with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the left unit 300L, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left unit 300L.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the left unit 300L is formed longitudinally in a front view, and a rear base 313 disposed on the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C and its rear base 313. An intermediate base 314 overlapped on the front side, a front base 315 overlapped on the front side of the intermediate base 314, a drive motor 320 disposed on the back side of the intermediate base 314, and a driving force of the drive motor 320 Between the opposing surfaces of the bases 313 to 315, the housing 330 moved up and down with respect to each of the bases 313 to 315, the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b housed in the housing 330, and And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 320 to the housing body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the left unit 300L includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, transmission gears 322a and 322b meshed with the drive gear 321, and a pinion gear 323 coaxially fixed to the transmission gear 322b. And a rack gear 324 formed in the form of a rack meshed with the pinion gear 323 and cut on the side surface of the flat member, and a connecting member 326 connecting the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

  A shaft projects from the front of the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322a is rotatably supported by the shaft. Further, a bearing hole is bored in the intermediate base 314, and the transmission gear 322b and the pinion gear 323 are coaxially fixed to the bearing hole so as to be rotatably supported.

  A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear surface base 313 so that the guide direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14), and the connection member 326 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction by the slide guide 351 . Further, a guide plate 353 is fastened and fixed to the front of the front base 312 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300. In the guide plate 353, a guide groove 353a which is an elongated hole-shaped opening is extended along the vertical direction, and in this guide groove 353a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the containing body 330 is via a collar C. It is interpolated. Therefore, the housing body 330 is vertically guided along the guide groove 353 a of the guide plate 353. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 326 and the housing body 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational drive force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 through the drive gear 321 and the transmission gears 322a and 322b and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, the rotational movement of the pinion gear 323 causes the linear movement of the rack gear 324. As a result of the linear movement of the rack gear 324, the housing 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 326 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  Next, the right unit 300R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded front perspective view of the right unit 300R.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the right unit 300L is formed in a substantially L-shape on the front surface and is connected to the right end of the back base 311 (see FIG. 12) of the central unit 300C. A front base 317 superimposed on the front side of the back base 313, a drive motor 320 disposed on the front side of the front base 317, and raising and lowering with respect to the back base 316 and the front base 317 by the driving force of the drive motor 320 And the first rotary body 340 a and the second rotary body 340 b housed in the housing 330, and the facing surface of the back base 316 and the front base 317, which accommodates the driving force of the drive motor 320. And a transmission mechanism for transmitting to the body 330.

  The transmission mechanism in the right unit 300R includes a drive gear 321 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 320, a pinion gear 323 meshed with the drive gear 321, and a flat member meshed with the pinion gear 323. The rack gear 324 is formed as a rack whose side is geared, and a connecting member 327 which connects the rack gear 324 to the housing body 330.

  A shaft protrudes from the front of the rear surface base 316, and a pinion gear 323 is rotatably supported by the shaft. A slide guide 351 is disposed on the front of the rear surface base 316 in a posture in which the guiding direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 16), and the connecting member 327 (rack gear 324) is guided in the vertical direction . Further, in the front base 316, a guide groove 316a which is an elongated opening is extended along the vertical direction, and in this guide groove 316a, a protruding pin located on the lower end side of the containing body 330 is a collar (see FIG. Interpolated through (not shown). Accordingly, the housing body 330 is guided vertically along the guide groove 316 a of the back surface base 316. That is, the moving direction of the connecting member 327 and the housing body 330 is restricted in the vertical direction.

  Therefore, when the rotational drive force of the drive motor 320 is transmitted to the pinion gear 323 via the drive gear 321 and the pinion gear 323 is rotated, z of the pinion gear 323 is converted into linear motion of the rack gear 324 and the rack gear 324 is rotated. Along with the linear movement, the housing 330 is vertically displaced (lifted) together with the connecting member 327 (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  As described above, in the central unit 300C, the width dimension of the connecting member 325 is long (see FIG. 12), and the posture of the central housing body 330 tends to be unstable (swinging in the lateral direction is likely to occur). On the other hand, in the left unit 300L and the right unit 300R, since the rack gear 323 is provided at a position close to the side surface of the left housing body 330 and the right housing body 330, the lateral width of the connecting members 326 and 327 (FIGS. The horizontal dimension can be shortened to increase its rigidity. Therefore, the postures of the left and right housings 330 can be stabilized (it is difficult to shake in the left and right direction).

  Along with this, it is not necessary to arrange an extendable linear guide mechanism (slide guide 352) on the back side of the left and right housings 330, and the guide plate 353 or the guide groove 353a or 316a of the back base 316 The attitude can be stabilized sufficiently. As a result, parts cost can be reduced.

  Next, the housing 330 and the first rotary body 340 a and the second rotary body 340 b housed in the housing 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the container 330. 18 (a) is a side view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIa in FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (b) is a front view of the container 330 in the direction of arrow XVIIIb in FIG. It is. 18 (a) and 18 (b), the state in which the side wall 332, the partition 334 and the decorative body 335 are removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the housing body 330 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 331, left and right side wall bodies 332 and 333 disposed on the left and right of the base body 331, and the left side wall body 332. And a decorative body 335 disposed on the front surface of the base body 331, and the respective sections 331 to 335 are integrated by fastening and fixing to form a box shape.

  The base body 331 is a member that forms the back surface (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 18B), the upper surface and the lower surface (the upper and lower surfaces in FIG. 18B) of the container 330, and combines three plate members And integrally formed. In a portion forming the back surface of the housing body 330, a reflecting portion RF formed as a mirror that reflects visible light is disposed on the front.

  The reflecting portion RF is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and when viewed from the front of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, the reflecting portion RF has a size projecting at least in the vertical direction than the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b. (See FIG. 18B).

  The side wall bodies 332 and 333 are rectangular plate-like members that form the left and right side surfaces of the housing body 330, and holding holes 332a and 333a are formed in two places, respectively. The holding holes 332a and 333a are holes through which a fixed shaft 341 of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b described later is inserted, and holds the fixed shaft 341 in a non-rotatable manner. The holding holes 332a and 333a have a shape in which the axial straight cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface thereof is a shape obtained by removing one of the circles divided by connecting two points on the circumference with a straight line.

  The partition body 334 is a rectangular plate-like member having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the side wall body 332, and rotatably supports the transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 between opposing surfaces with the side wall body 332. Further, in the partition body 334, insertion holes 334a for inserting the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are formed in two places.

  The decorative body 335 is a member for decorating the front of the housing body 330, and is formed in a front view frame shape by forming a rectangular opening 335a at the center. The player can visually recognize the manner of rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b and the graphic drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the both rotary bodies 340a and 340b through the opening 335 (see FIG. 9). ).

  In the container 330 thus formed, the drive motor 350 disposed in the partition 334, the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 350, and the drive A transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 350 to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, and a detection mechanism for detecting the rotational position of the first rotary body 340a are mainly accommodated.

  The transmission mechanism in the housing body 330 includes a drive gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 350, and a transmission gear 352, a first gear 353, an intermediate gear 354, and a second gear 355 meshed in order with the drive gear 351. And a gear train comprising The transmission gear 352 and the intermediate gear 354 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the side wall body 332 and the partition body 334, and the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 are formed of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. Each is fixed to the axial end face.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the detailed configuration of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the first rotating body 340a.

  In addition, since the 1st rotary body 340a and the 2nd rotary body 340b are the configurations substantially the same except that the graphics drawn on the outer peripheral surface are different, in the following, the first rotary body 340a is a representative example And the description of the second rotating body 340b is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first rotary body 340a includes a fixed shaft 341, a pair of end plates 342 rotatably supported at both axial ends (shaft portions 341a) of the fixed shaft 341, and a pair of the end plates 342. It mainly includes three display boards (a first display board 343A, a second display board 343B and a third display board 343C) which are provided between the end face plates 342.

  The fixed shaft 341 includes a body portion 341b and shaft portions 341a connected to both axial ends of the body portion 341b. The fixed shaft 341 is a portion held non-rotatably by the side wall bodies 332 and 333 (see FIG. 17) of the housing body 330, and connects a pair of shaft portions 341a located at both ends in the axial direction and a pair of shaft portions 341a. And a torso portion 341b.

  The axial portion 341a has a shape in which the axial straight cross-sectional shape is divided by connecting two points on the circumference of a circle by a straight line and removing one side (a shape in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of a cylinder is chamfered with a plane) The side walls 332, 333 have similar shapes slightly smaller than the holding holes 332a, 333a (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the fixed shaft 341 can be non-rotatably held by the housing body 330 (sidewalls 332 and 333) by inserting the shaft portion 341a into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side walls 332 and 333.

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) LEDs 344 are attached to the body portion 341b, and the light emitted from the LEDs 344 can be applied to the inner surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C.

  In this case, in the state where the trunk portion 341b is inserted into the holding holes 332a and 333a of the side wall bodies 332 and 333 and held in a non-rotatable manner, the body portion 341b irradiates the LED 344 to the front surface of the housing 330 18 (b) is disposed in a posture (rotational position) facing the opening 335a of FIG. Therefore, irradiating the light emitted from the LED 344 on the inner surface of the display plate disposed on the front surface (the “visual position” described later) of the container 330 among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. it can.

  In addition, since the fixed shaft 341 (shaft portion 341a, body portion 341b) is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with both ends opened in the axial direction, the wiring of the LED 344 is routed using the internal space and the wiring is It can be pulled out of the housing 330 from the opening at the direction end. Further, as described above, since the fixed shaft 341 can not rotate with respect to the housing body 330, external force of twisting or pulling acts on the wiring of the LED 344 even when the first rotating body 340a is rotated. Can be avoided.

  The end face plate 342 is a member formed in a triangular shape in a front view, and an axial support hole 342 a having a circular axial straight cross section is formed at the center. The inner diameter of the shaft support hole 342 a is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 341 a of the fixed shaft 341. Therefore, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably supported with respect to the fixed shaft 341 by inserting the shaft portion 341 a into the shaft support hole 342 a. Thus, the end surface plate 342 is rotatably held inside the container 330 via the fixed shaft 341.

  Here, since the fixed shaft 341 is formed to have a larger diameter than the shaft 341a, the body 341b is larger in diameter than the shaft 341a, so that the end face plate 342 is formed between the side walls 332 and 333 of the housing 330 and the body 341b of the fixed shaft 341. The axial position can be defined, and the fixed shaft 341 can be held between the pair of side walls 332, 333 via the end face plate 342.

  A first gear 353 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end face plates 342, and a base gear 361 described later in the detection mechanism is fixed to the other. Although the second gear 355 in the transmission mechanism is fixed to one of the pair of end surface plates 342 in the second rotary body 340b, the mounting of the base gear 361 in the other is omitted (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

  Each of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and by connecting the outer edges at both ends in the longitudinal direction to the outer edges (three sides) of the end surface plate 342, a pair of It is installed between the end face plates 342 and forms a triangular prism with the end face plates 342.

  Figures are drawn on the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C. Therefore, when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the figures respectively drawn on the outer surfaces of the display plates 343A to 343C are made visible to the player sequentially through the openings 335a of the decorative body 335.

  At least a part of the outer surface of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C is formed to be curved in an arc shape convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. Thereby, as described later, even if there is a deviation of a predetermined rotational angle (for example, 12 degrees) of the rotational position between the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, each display plate 343A It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the figure drawn on the outer surface of ~ 343C to recognize the deviation of the predetermined rotation angle.

  In the present embodiment, in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341, the end portions in the width direction of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are formed to be curved outward in a circular arc shape. A central portion in the width direction is formed into a substantially flat surface. As a result, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the figure and making it difficult to recognize the deviation between the rotating bodies 340a and 340b. In addition, the radius of the arc of the arc-shaped portion formed to be curved is a value larger than the maximum distance from the axial center of the fixed shaft 341 to the outer surface of each display plate 343A to 343C (for example, 2 times or more and 4 times Or less).

  Here, in the following, as the arrangement position of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C when the triangular columnar body is rotated, the front surface of the containing body 330 (the surface on the front side of the paper surface of FIG. The position where the graphic drawn on the outer surface is visible to the player through the opening 335a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as the "visual position", and the outer surface is directed to the inner surface of the container 330 (substrate 331). The position where the figure drawn on the outer surface is not visible to the player through the opening 335 a of the decorative body 335 is referred to as “shielded position”.

  Thus, for example, when the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position, the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are disposed at the shielding position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). . When the triangular prisms are rotated in the forward or reverse direction by 120 degrees from this state, one of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is disposed at the viewing position, and the second display plate 343B or the third display The other of the plate 343C and the first display plate 343A are disposed in the shielding position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first display plate 343A is formed in such a form that the whole does not transmit light, while the second display plate 343B and the third display plate 343C are transmissive portions PN capable of transmitting light. It is formed to prepare for part. In addition, on the inner surface of the first display plate 343A, a reflection part RF formed as a mirror for reflecting visible light is disposed.

  As described above, the LED 344 is disposed at a position at which the inner surface of the display plate disposed at the viewing position among the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C can be irradiated. Therefore, in a state where the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C is disposed at the visual recognition position, light emitted from the LED 344 is transmitted through the transmissive portions PN of the display plates 343B and 343C and is directly visible to the player It can be done.

  On the other hand, in the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position (see FIGS. 18A and 18B), the light emitted from the LED 344 is reflected on the reflection portion RF of the inner surface of the first display plate 343A. , And transmits the transmission part PN of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C, and then reflects the reflection part RF of the base body 331 of the container 330, and the reflected light from the reflection part RF of the base body 331. Can be indirectly viewed by the player.

  For example, the first rotary body 340a is stopped at the rotational position where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position, and the LED 344 emits light to visually recognize the reflected light reflected by the reflective portion RF of the base body 331 of the housing 330. The figure of the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C arranged at a position (shielded position) which can not be recognized by the player can be reminded of the player who made the game. As a result, the player can be expected or suggested that the first rotary body 340a is rotated to a position where the graphic on the second display plate 343B or the third display plate 343C can be viewed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are formed in a triangular shape in cross section, when the rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated, the reflecting plate is rotated along with the rotation. The distance between the RF and the outer surface (the display plates 343A to 343C) of the rotating members 340a and 340b, the distance between the outer surfaces of the rotating members 340a and 340b (the vertical distance in FIG. 18B), or The apparent diameter (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 18B) of each of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b can be increased or decreased, and the facing of the outer surface (each display plate 343A to 343C) of each rotating body 340a or 340b to the reflecting plate RF The angle can be changed. That is, with respect to the player who visually recognizes the light emitted from the LED 344 and emitted from the transmitting portion PN as the reflected light from the reflecting portion RF of the base 331 as the rotating bodies 340a and 340b rotate, Aspects (for example, the size of the area in which light is viewed) can be changed periodically.

  Referring back to FIG. 17 and FIG. The detection mechanism includes a base gear 361 fixed to the end surface plate 342 of the first rotary body 340a, an intermediate gear 362 meshed with the base gear 361, and a gear meshed with the intermediate gear 362 and having a diameter An end gear 363 is provided with a detection plate 363 a projecting outward in the direction, and a sensor device 364 for detecting the detection plate 363 a of the end gear 363.

  The intermediate gear 362 and the end gear 363 are rotatably held by the side wall body 333, and the sensor device 364 is disposed on the base body 331 in a state where the detection region is disposed on the movement trajectory of the detection target plate 363 a. Therefore, the sensor device 364 can detect the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a based on the detection state of the detection target plate 363a. That is, based on the detection result of the sensor device 364, the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotating body 340 b can be controlled (for example, stopped at an arbitrary position).

  Next, rotation operations of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b will be described. When the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b via the transmission mechanism, and both the rotary bodies 340a and 340b are rotated.

  Specifically, when the drive motor 350 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first gear 353 via the drive gear 351 and the transmission gear 352, and the first gear 353 is rotated. Thereby, the first rotating body 340a is rotated. In addition, when the first gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 355 via the intermediate gear 354 and the second gear 355 is rotated. Thereby, the second rotating body 340b is rotated in the same direction as the first rotating body 340a. In addition, when the rotation direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in the opposite direction to the case described above.

  As a result, the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340 a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340 b visually recognized by the player is sequentially changed. In this case, the combination of the figures of both rotating bodies 340a and 340b is limited to three in the conventional product.

  That is, since the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotationally driven in synchronization by the drive motor 1, the combination that can be formed is, for example, the first display plate 343A of the first rotary body 340a and the first display plate 343A. The first combination in which the first display plate 343A of the two rotating body 340b is disposed at the display position, the second display plate 343B of the first rotating body 340a, and the second display plate 343B of the second rotating body 340b at the display position The second combination to be arranged is only the third set of the third combination in which the third display plate 343C of the first rotary body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotary body 340b are arranged at the display position.

  On the other hand, by adopting a structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are independently rotationally driven by different drive motors, a maximum of nine combinations can be formed, and the combination can be It can be made to appear arbitrarily. However, in this case, the cost of parts increases due to the need for two drive motors.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the number of drive motors 350 is limited to only one, nine combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be formed, and the combinations It can be made to appear arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, nine sets of combinations are rapidly realized by requiring a predetermined amount of rotational position deviation without requiring complete matching of the rotational positions of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. You can get it out. The combination of the figures of the two rotating bodies 340a and 340b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 20 is a table showing combinations of figures of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. 21 and 22 are side schematic views of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b showing transition states when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated, respectively. (A) to (e) of FIG. In the states shown as 1 to 5 in FIG. It corresponds to the state shown as 6-10, respectively.

  In FIG. 20, as a combination of the figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, the state where the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position is a visual recognition position by the code "A" or "A '". The state in which the second display plate 343B is arranged is indicated by the code "B" or "B '", and the state in which the third display plate 343C is arranged at the viewing position is indicated by the code "C" or "C'". Be done.

  For example, in FIG. In the state represented by 10 “A, C ′”, the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the third display plate 343C of the second rotating body 340b are disposed at the viewing positions, respectively, and the first rotating body The figures drawn on the first display plate 343A from 340a correspond to the situation in which the figures drawn on the third display plate 343C from the second rotary body 340b are viewed by the player.

  Further, in FIG. 21, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the first rotary body 340a are denoted by reference numerals “A to C”, and the second The first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C of the rotary body 340b are respectively illustrated using symbols "A 'to C'".

  Here, the number of teeth of the first gear 353 and the second gear 355 fixed to each of the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotating body 340 b is set to different values. In this embodiment, when the number of teeth of the first gear 353 is 14 and the number of teeth of the second gear 355 is 20, and the first rotary body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees, the second rotary body 340b is rotated by 108 degrees. It is formed to

  The numbers in FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 21 (a), when the first display plate 343A of the first rotating body 340a and the first display plate 343A of the second rotating body 340b are respectively disposed at the visual recognition position (No. No. 1 “A ′, A” (first combination), when the first display 3403 B is disposed at the visual recognition position by rotating the first rotary body 340 a by 120 degrees. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21 (b), the second rotary body 340b arranges the second display plate 343B at the viewing position. Thereby, the second combination (No. 2 “B ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  In this case, since the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is 108 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a of 120 degrees, a difference (shift) of 12 degrees occurs in the rotational positions of the two, but each rotary body 340a , 340b from the direction perpendicular to the axis, it is difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the rotational angle of 12 degrees, and as a result, each second display plate of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b It can be recognized that the figures drawn on the outer surface of 343 B are arranged at the visual recognition positions (the second combination is formed).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the outer surfaces of the first display plate 343A to the third display plate 343C are curved in an arc shape that is convex outward in the axial direction of the fixed shaft 341. (That is, the surface on which the graphic is drawn is curved along the rotational direction of each of the rotary members 340a and 340b), so the player who faces the graphic drawn on the outer surface of each display plate 343A to 343C is It can be made difficult to recognize the difference (displacement) in the rotational position of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  The numbers in FIG. 2 and FIG. 21 (b), when the first rotary body 340a is rotated by 120 degrees and the third display plate 343C is disposed at the visual recognition position, No. 1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 21 (c), the second rotary body 340b arranges its rotational position at a position shifted with respect to the first rotary body 340a. That is, in this state, since the difference of the rotation angle of 24 degrees is formed between the two, the player is made to recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" in FIG. 20). be able to.

  Similarly, in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. In the rotation of the section to the state shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22D, while the first rotary body 340a arranges each of the display plates 343A to 343C at the visual recognition position for each rotation of 120 degrees, the second rotary body In the position 340b, the rotational position is displaced relative to the first rotary body 340a. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the deviation of the figure (the combination is not established, No. 4 "-, A" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20).

  The numbers in FIG. 9 and FIG. 22D (No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20), when the first display plate 343A is disposed at the visual recognition position by rotating the first rotary body 340a by 120 degrees. 20 No. As shown in FIG. 10E and FIG. 22E, the second rotating body 340b places the third display plate 343C at the viewing position. Thereby, the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Note that according to the present embodiment, the second rotation is also performed in the section where the misalignment of the figures (the combination is not established, No. 3 "-, C" to No. 9 "-, C" in FIG. 20) is formed. Since the rotation of the body 340b can be continued and the figures visually recognized by the player can be switched continuously, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which figure is to be combined in the third combination.

  The subsequent steps are substantially the same as the above-described embodiment (rotation of the section from the state shown in No. 1 of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 (a) to the state shown in No. 9 of FIG. 20 and FIG. The aspect is repeated twice more to complete one cycle (the table is cycled from the start to the end).

  In this case, in FIG. 11 to No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 20, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be considered to be different by 120 degrees, and the fourth combination may be considered (No. 11 of FIG. B ′ ′), the fifth combination (No. 12 “B ′, C” in FIG. 20) and the sixth combination (No. 20 “C ′, B” in FIG. 20) can be formed.

  Also, in FIG. 21 to No. In the section of the state shown in FIG. 30, the phase of the first rotating body 340a in FIGS. 21 and 22 may be considered to be different by 240 degrees, and the seventh combination may be considered (No. 21 of FIG. C ′ ′), an eighth combination (No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20) and a ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 350 to each of the first rotary body 340 a and the second rotary body 340 b has a plurality of gears (the drive gear 351 to the second gear 355). And the transmission of the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b at different rotation ratios.

  Thereby, the rotation period of the first rotating body 340a and the rotation period of the second rotating body 340b can be made different. As a result, even with only one drive motor 350, nine combinations of figures of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b can be formed, and the combination can be arbitrarily changed (desired You can make the combination appear arbitrarily).

  Also, by forming the transmission mechanism as a gear train, not only it is possible to simplify the structure and to reduce the cost of parts and to improve the durability and reliability, the gears are always meshed. Therefore, by switching the rotational direction of the drive motor 350 forward and reverse, it is possible to switch the traveling direction of the table shown in FIG.

  Therefore, for example, the table of FIG. 20 is advanced in the positive direction (downward direction of FIG. 20), and the section (for example, No. 3 to No. 9 of FIG. After the third combination (No. 10 “C ′, A” in FIG. 20) appears or immediately before it appears, the rotational direction of the drive motor 350 is reversed to reverse the table in FIG. A series of operations of returning in the direction (upward in FIG. 20) can be repeated, and thereby, it is possible to produce an effect of making the player expect the appearance of the third combination.

  Alternatively, for example, the ninth combination (No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20) is revealed from the state in which the first combination (No. 1 “A ′, A” in FIG. 20) is formed. In addition to advancing the table of FIG. 20 in the forward direction (downward direction of FIG. 20) to make the ninth combination appear, the table of FIG. 20 is reversed (upward direction of FIG. 20). And the ninth combination can be revealed. That is, in the case of the former, it is necessary to repeat 120 degrees of rotation of the first rotary body 340a 30 times, while in the case of the latter, the rotation of the first rotary body 340a is once 120 degrees. Since it is only necessary to carry out, a desired combination of figures can be made to appear quickly.

  Here, in the case where the second rotary body 340b is rotated 60 degrees with respect to the rotation of the first rotary body 340a by 120 degrees (that is, the rotation of the second rotary body 340b is the rotation of the first rotary body 340a). On the other hand, when “1 / integer” is set), a plurality of combinations of figures are formed without generating a difference (shift) in the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. Can. However, in this case, the maximum number of combinations of figures is three.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first, fourth, and seventh combinations (No. 1 “A ′, A”, No. 11 “A ′, B”, and No. 1 in FIG. In the remaining six combinations (the second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth combinations) except 21 (A ', C)), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body Allowing a difference (deviation) of a predetermined rotation angle to occur at the rotational position of 340 b. As a result, the number of combinations of figures can be nine.

  That is, in the structure in which the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are rotated by one drive motor 350, setting the number of combinable figures to nine sets the rotation of the drive motor 350 to the first rotary body 340a. And the transmission mechanism for transmitting to each of the second rotary body 340b can not be achieved only by forming as a gear train, and as in the present embodiment, the rotational positions of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b. This is made possible for the first time by allowing the difference (deviation) of the predetermined rotation angle to occur. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost by suppressing the required number of drive motors 350 while improving the rendering effect by increasing the number of combinations of figures.

  In this case, combinations of figures (second, third, fifth, sixth, eighth and ninth) in which a difference (shift) in the predetermined rotation angle occurs at the rotational positions of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. In the combination), the stop position at which the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are stopped may be corrected.

  For example, in the second, fifth and eighth combinations (No. 2 “B ′, B”, No. 12 “B ′, C” and No. 22 “B ′, A” in FIG. 20), FIG. As shown in (b), since the phase of the second rotary body 340b is delayed, the first rotary body 340a is stopped at a rotational position advanced in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotary body 340b, the first rotary body 340a is not stopped at the rotational position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). For example, stop at the rotational position rotated 126 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference surface can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotating body 340 b so as to be inconspicuous.

  Similarly, for example, in the third, sixth, and ninth combinations (No. 10 “C ′, A”, No. 20 “C ′, B”, and No. 30 “C ′, C” in FIG. 20). As shown in FIG. 22E, since the phase of the second rotary body 340b is advanced, the first rotary body 340a is stopped at a rotational position delayed in phase by a predetermined angle. That is, since the positional deviation from the reference plane is concentrated only on the second rotary body 340b, the first rotary body 340a is not stopped at the rotational position rotated 120 degrees from the state shown in FIG. For example, stop at the rotational position rotated by 114 degrees. Thereby, the positional deviation from the reference surface can be dispersed to the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotating body 340 b so as to be inconspicuous.

  As described above, in the rotating body lifting unit 300, the respective storage bodies 300 are formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and in the lowered position (see FIG. 7), the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b Can be made invisible to the player. Therefore, a desired combination of the combination of the graphic of the first rotary body 340a and the graphic of the second rotary body 340b can be rapidly developed at a required timing.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the combination of nine sets of figures can be formed, the table becomes long (the number of stages of the table in FIG. 20 increases). It is necessary to rotate the one rotation body 340a and the second rotation body 340b relatively many times, and the time is increased accordingly.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b are retracted to a position where they can not be seen by the player by arranging the respective containers 300 at the lowered position (see FIG. 7). Can. As a result, without the player being aware of the rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b, the rotational position can be previously rotated to a predetermined rotational position, and as a result, it is necessary. When the timing comes, arrange each container 300 at the raised position (refer to FIG. 8), and execute the remaining rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, to speed up the desired combination. Can be made to

  The arrangement of the containers 300 at the lowered position may be performed only when the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b are rotated in a specific variation pattern. For example, in a variation pattern in which the time from the start of the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b to the display of the result (stopping the rotation) is relatively short, each container 300 is not disposed at the lowered position. While the start and stop of the rotation of the rotating bodies 340a and 340b are performed at a position where the player can visually recognize, the time from the start of the rotation of each rotating body 340a and 340b to the display of the result (stopping the rotation) is relatively long In the variation pattern, the preliminary rotation of each of the rotary bodies 340a and 340b may be performed at a position where it is not possible for the player to visually recognize.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, prior rotation of the first and second rotating bodies 340a and 340b at the lowered positions is performed when a predetermined operation means is operated. Thereby, the player can be prevented from recognizing the previous rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b.

  That is, when rotating the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b, a relatively loud sound is generated, and therefore, even if the player is moved to the lowered position and made invisible to the player, the rotation is not performed. The generated sound may cause the player to recognize that the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b have been rotated in advance.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b can be incorporated into the operation by performing the operation of the predetermined operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b.

  As the operation means, for example, a payout device 133, an audio output device 226, or a ball launch unit 112a (all refer to FIG. 3 or FIG. 4) are exemplified. In the state where these operating means are operated, for example, a relatively loud sound is generated as the ball is dispensed, the sound is output, or the ball is fired. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the first rotary body 340a and the second rotary body 340b.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to this, when the effect displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is a predetermined effect, the first rotating body 340a and the second rotating body 340b. The pre-rotation may be performed. When the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a predetermined effect, the player's awareness can be concentrated on the predetermined effect, and accordingly, the first rotating body 340 a and the second rotation This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the previous rotation of the body 340b.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a front view of the light emission decoration unit 400. FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emission decoration unit 400, and FIG. 25 is an exploded back perspective view of the light emission decoration unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 25, the light emitting decorative unit 400 has a base body 410 with a rectangular shape in a front view and a horizontally long rectangular shape disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (refer to FIG. Light emitting device 420 disposed on the front in the center of the direction, a light shielding member 430 disposed on the front surface of the light emitting device 420, and a cover member 440 disposed on the front surface of the light shielding member 430 and made of a light transmitting material The light emitting device 420, the light shielding member 430, and the outer peripheral decoration 450 and 460 in a front view annular shape surrounding the periphery of the cover member 440 are mainly included.

  A plurality of (15 in this embodiment) light emitters (LEDs 421) are disposed on the front surface side of the light emitting device 420 in a dispersed state over the entire surface, and are formed to be able to emit light to the back surface of the light shielding member 430. . Here, the light shielding member 430 includes a main body 431 formed of a light shielding material (light non-transmissive material), and a partition wall 432 erected from the front and back of the main body 431.

  The main body 431 of the light shielding member 430 is formed with a circular opening 431a at a plurality of locations (15 locations in the present embodiment). The plurality of openings 431 a are disposed at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 421 of the light emitting device 420 in a front view. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 421 can reach the back surface of the cover 440 through the opening 431 a of the light blocking member 430.

  The partition wall 432 is formed in a front view annular shape having a diameter smaller than that of the main body 431, and is disposed at a position eccentric to the center of the main body 431. Thus, the space between the light emitting device 420 and the cover body 440 is a first space circular in a front view circle surrounded by the partition wall 432 and a crescent-shaped first space in a front view located at an outer peripheral side of the partition wall 431. It is divided into two spaces.

  Thus, the formation of the section by the section wall 431 makes it possible to clarify the outline of the light viewed from the cover member 440. That is, when only the LED 421 in the first space emits light, a circular shape can be visually recognized, and when only the LED 421 in the second space emits light, a crescent shape can be visually recognized.

  Next, the central rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 (a) is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in the state of being disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 26 (b) is a front view of the central rotation unit 500 in the state of being disposed at the extended position. . 27 is an exploded front perspective view of central rotation unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of central rotation unit 500.

  As shown in FIG. 26 to FIG. 28, the central rotation unit 500 has a back surface base 510 disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the back surface case 210 and a front surface superimposed on the front surface of the back surface base 510. A base 520, a pair of displacement members 530 rotatably supported at their proximal ends on the back surface base 510 and the front surface 520, and a drive motor 540 generating a driving force for rotationally driving the displacement members 530; And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530.

  Axial support holes 511 and 521 for rotatably supporting the proximal end side (rotational shaft 531) of the displacement member 530 are recessedly provided on the front surface of the rear surface base 510 and the rear surface of the front surface 520, respectively. Further, on the front surface of the rear surface base 510, a support shaft 512 for rotatably supporting the crank gear 542 in the transmission mechanism is provided in a protruding manner.

  The displacement member 530 is a member decorated on the front surface on the tip end side, and mainly includes a rotation shaft 531, a coupling gear 532 and a crank groove 533. As described above, the rotation shaft 531 is a shaft pivotally supported by the support holes 511 and 521 of the back surface base 510 and the front surface 520, and is protruded from the front and back surfaces on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530.

  The connection gear 532 is a gear that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface on the proximal end side of the displacement member 530 with the rotation shaft 531 as a rotation center. The coupling gear 532 transmits the rotation to the other coupling gear 532 to rotate the coupling gear 532 when the one displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531. Thus, the other displacement member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531.

  The crank groove 533 is a front view linear groove through which a connection pin 542a of a crank gear 542, which will be described later, of the transmission mechanism is slidably inserted, and one of the pair of displacement members 530 (FIG. 27 left, FIG. The right side of the displacement member 530 is recessed on the back surface. As described later, when the rotation of the crank gear 542 is transmitted to the crank groove 533 via the connection pin 542a, one displacement member 530 is rotated around the rotation shaft 531.

  As described above, the transmission mechanism is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 540 to the displacement member 530, and is engaged with the pinion 541 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 and the pinion 541 The crank gear 542 is mainly provided. The crank gear 542 is provided with a connection pin 542 a which is provided in a position eccentric to the center of rotation (the support shaft 512) and inserted into the crank groove 533 of the displacement member 530.

  According to the central rotation unit 500 configured in this manner, when the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 540 is transmitted to the crank gear 542 via the pinion 541 and the crank gear 542 is rotated, the rotation of the crank gear 542 is With rotation, the connecting pin 542a is displaced while drawing an arc-like locus, and the displacement of the connecting pin 542a acts on the inner wall surface of the crank groove 533, whereby displacement of one (left in FIG. 27, right in FIG. 28) The member 530 is rotated about the rotation shaft 531. In this case, the other displacement member 530 is also synchronously rotated via the connecting gear 532. As a result, the pair of displacement members 530 is retracted to the projecting position (see FIG. 7 and FIG. 26 (a)) which projects into the opening of the game board 13 (center frame 86) and the back of the light emission decoration unit 400. It can be rotated between the retracted position (see FIGS. 8 and 26 (b)).

  Next, the right rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 600, and FIGS. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the right rotation unit 600. In FIG. 31, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 600 is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the right rotation unit 600 includes a base body including a back surface base 610 and a front surface base 620, and a first displacement displaceably disposed on the front side of the front surface base 620 of the base body. The member 630 and the second displacement member 640, a drive motor 650 for generating a driving force for displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, and a drive motor 650 disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 610 And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 650.

  A portion of the transmission mechanism (a first pinion 651, a rack member 652, and a second pinion 653) is accommodated between the opposing surfaces of the back surface base 610 and the front surface 620. A bearing recess 621 for rotatably supporting the first pinion 651 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, and a sliding groove of the rack member 652 for defining the moving direction of the rack member 652 A pair of insertion pins 622 which are inserted into the holes 652a are provided in a protruding manner.

  Further, the front base 620 is provided with circular support holes 624 and 625 of a front view circular shape, which are formed so as to rotatably support the rotary shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 and the rotary shaft 654a of the transmission member 654. The front base 620 is juxtaposed with a predetermined distance in the width direction (short side direction) of the front base 620.

  Note that the pivot support hole 624 for pivotally supporting the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the game board 13 than the pivotal support hole 625 for pivotally supporting the transmission member 654 (the projecting position of the first displacement member 630, FIG. 29). Since it is disposed on the left side, as described later, while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can secure the overhang area toward the opening side of the game board 13 at the overhang position, the retraction position And between the extended positions, the transfer member 654 can be easily concealed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630.

  At the front of the front base 620, a protrusion 626 and a bearing 627 are provided in a protruding manner. The ridges 626 are laterally long protrusions extending along the width direction of the front base 620, and the cross section is formed in a substantially triangular shape. The ridges 626 are formed such that the tops thereof are curved in an arc shape centering on the pivot holes 624 in a front view. When the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced, the tops of the ridges 626 can be brought into contact, and as will be described later, as compared with the case where the front of the front base 620 entirely contacts. As a result, the contact area can be reduced, and the sliding resistance can be suppressed, and the formation of fogging due to rubbing on the connection displacement member 642 made of the light transmitting material can be suppressed.

  On the left side in front view of the front base 620 (the left side in FIG. 29, that is, the opening side of the game board 13), an inclined surface 620a formed by beveling the side and front ridgeline portions is disposed. . Therefore, as described later, when the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and can not be displaced when retracting to the retraction position (see FIG. 33).

  The bearing portion 627 is formed as a cylindrical body concentric with the support hole 624, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 together with the support hole 624 on the inner peripheral surface thereof. From the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, the protruding portion 628 is formed so as to protrude radially outward and downward of the front base 620. The protrusion 628 can restrict the rotation of the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range, and can suppress the forward inclination of the first displacement member 630. The details will be described later (see FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, the bearing recess 621 is recessed on the back surface of the front base 620, so that the first pinion 651 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the back base 610 and the front base 620 using the bearing recess 621. It can be held rotatably. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the first pinion 651 to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, so the number of parts can be reduced, and parts cost and assembly cost can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the bearing recess 621 is recessed on the rear surface of the front base 620, the protruding portion 623 is projected from the front of the front base 620 along with the recess. In the present embodiment, since a part of the second displacement member 640 is pivotally supported on the tip end side of the first displacement member 630, when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced, The second displacement member 640 may interfere with the projecting portion 623, but such interference can be suppressed by the ridges 626. The details will be described later (see FIG. 39).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 651 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 650, a second pinion 653 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654, and the first pinion 651 and the second pinion 653 And a rack member 652 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be engaged is cut in a side surface of a flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 652 is provided with two sliding grooves 652a in the form of a long hole in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and the pair of insertion pins 622 of the front base 620 are respectively inserted into these sliding grooves 652a. Thus, the moving direction is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 652 is held between the facing surfaces of the back surface base 610 and the front surface base 620 so as to be linearly moved.

  The transmission member 654 has a rotary shaft 654a protruding from the rear surface at one end, a drive pin 654b protruding from the front of the other end opposite to the rotary shaft 654a, and the rotary shaft 654a and the drive pin The rotary shaft 654 a is rotatably inserted to the front side of the front base 620 by inserting the rotary shaft 654 a into the support hole 625. Be supported.

  The drive pin 654b is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a first groove 635 and a second groove 641b of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, which will be described later. The arc shape of the concave portion 654c in a front view is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 (that is, a shape that can receive the bearing portion 627 on the inner circumferential side thereof).

  Therefore, the transmission member is prevented from interfering with the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 while the disposition position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 is made close to the disposition position of the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630. The rotatable range of 654 can be enlarged. Therefore, as described later, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be displaced by a larger amount while achieving downsizing of the entire right rotation unit 600 (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 651 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650, the rotation of the first pinion 651 is transmitted to the second pinion 653 through the linear motion of the rack member 652 When the second pinion 653 is rotated, the transmission member 654 is rotated about the pivot hole 625 of the front base 620 as a rotation center. As described later, the transmission member 654 is rotated to cause the drive pin 654b to act on the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b, whereby the displacement according to the shape of the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b can be The first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be independently performed (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  At the back of the first displacement member 630, the rotary shaft 631, the support shafts 632, 633, and the contact portion 634 are provided in a protruding manner, and the first groove 635 is provided in a recessed manner. As described above, the rotation shaft 631 is an axial body inserted into the support hole 624 of the front base 620, and the first displacement member 630 is the front base 620 via the rotation shaft 631 and the support hole 624. It is pivotally supported by A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 624 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotation shaft 631, whereby the removal of the rotation shaft 631 from the shaft support hole 624 is restricted.

  The support shafts 632, 633 are shaft-like members of circular cross section for rotatably supporting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640, respectively. That is, the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 are rotatably held on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 via the support shafts 632, 633, respectively.

  The contact portions 634 are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction about the rotation shaft 631. The projection 628 of the front base 620 is disposed between the pair of contact parts 634 in a state where the first displacement member 630 is assembled to the front base 620. Thus, as described later, when the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 with respect to the front base 620, the contact portion 634 is in contact with the side surface of the projection 628 of the front base 620. Thus, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be restricted within a predetermined range.

  The first groove 635 is a concave groove through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and is formed to be bent in a generally U-shape in a front view. In detail, the first groove 635 is a first displacement while being curved in an arc shape in which the action section 635a extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630 and the rotary shaft 631 are concaved. And a non-interference section 635 b extending in the width direction of the member 630 (that is, formed in a shape in which the annular shape concentric with the rotation shaft 631 is divided). As described later, the action section 635a is a section which receives the action from the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, and the non-interference section 635b is a section where the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 does not interfere.

  The second displacement member 640 is formed by being divided into two members of the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642. A shaft support hole 641a is formed through the driven member 641 at the center in the longitudinal direction, and a second groove 641b and a connection groove 641c are respectively formed at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction. The coupling displacement member 642 is formed of a light transmitting resin material.

  As described above, the shaft support hole 641a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the driven member 641 is displaced by the first displacement via the support shaft 632. It is rotatably supported at the back of the member 630. A screw having a head with a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 641a is fastened to the axial end surface of the support shaft 632 to restrict the removal of the support shaft 632 from the shaft support hole 641a. .

  The second groove 641 b is a groove-shaped opening through which the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 is slidably inserted, and linearly extends along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641. In a state where the driven member 641 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the second groove 641b is superimposed on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 can be inserted into the first groove 635 through the second groove 641b. The second groove 641 b is formed as an action section that receives an action from the drive pin 654 b of the transmission member 654 as described later.

  The connection groove 641 c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 641, and a connection pin 643 of a connection displacement member 642 described later is slidably inserted. That is, the second displacement member 640 is formed to be able to transmit the rotation of the driven member 641 to the coupling displacement member 642 via the coupling groove 641 c and the coupling pin 643.

  The coupling displacement member 642 is formed with a pivotal support hole 642a penetrating therethrough, and a decorative portion 642b and an overhanging portion 642c are formed so as to protrude outward with the pivotal support hole 642a interposed therebetween. Further, the connection displacement member 642 is provided with a connection pin 643 projecting toward the front side.

  As described above, the bearing support hole 642a is a hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 633 of the first displacement member 630 is rotatably inserted, and the connection displacement member 642 is the first displacement via the support shaft 633. It is rotatably supported at the back of the member 630. A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the end face in the axial direction of the support shaft 633, whereby the removal of the rotation shaft 633 from the shaft support hole 642a is restricted.

  As described above, the connection pin 643 is inserted into the connection groove 641 c of the driven member 641, whereby the rotation of the driven member 641 can be transmitted to the connection displacement member 642. That is, by rotating the driven member 641 with the support shaft 632 as the rotation center, it is possible to form rotation with the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 642 as the rotation center.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the drive member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643 while the second displacement member 640 is connected. Since the link mechanism is configured by being pivotally supported by the displacement member 640, the first displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decor portion 642b) as described later by using the amplification effect of the link mechanism. The amount of relative displacement with respect to the member 630 can be increased (see FIG. 37). As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the connection displacement member 642 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a) is a front view of the connection displacement member 642, FIG. 32 (b) is a side view of the connection displacement member 642 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the connection displacement member 642 taken along line XXXIIa-XXXIIa of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the coupling displacement member 642, since the overhanging portion 642c is formed to project on the opposite side to the decorative portion 642b with the axial support hole 642a interposed, as described later, the decorative portion 642b is upward The overhanging portion 642c can serve as a weight for balancing when lifting up and after lifting up.

  In this case, the overhanging portion 642c is formed to project on the front side (the lower side in FIG. 32B) than the decorative portion 642b and is formed to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thus, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), rattling of the connection displacement member 642 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed. Further, since the overhanging portion 642c has both the role as a weight and the role as an abutting portion to the first displacement member 630, the structure can be simplified and the part cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the overhang portion 642c, four side walls are erected on the back side from the four sides of the bottom wall that forms the front side (the side facing the back side of the first displacement member 630) of the coupling displacement member 642. , The back side is formed in a box-like open. Therefore, the weight and the rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape. Therefore, as described later, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced (rotated), a state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 (that is, a state in which it is not visible from the front) is secured. Therefore, the function as a weight and the function of suppressing looseness in contact with the first displacement member 630 can be reliably exhibited.

  In the overhanging portion 642c, a convex strip 642c1 is formed extending from the bottom wall and extending along a circular arc centered on the shaft support hole 642a, and the top of the convex strip 642c1 is the first displacement member It is formed to be able to abut on the back surface of 630. Therefore, as compared with the case where the entire bottom wall of the overhanging portion 642c abuts on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  The connection pin 643 is formed of a metal material (brass material in this embodiment) and has a hardness higher than that of the resin material, and the rear end surface (upper surface in FIG. 32C) is the back surface of the connection displacement member 642. , And is embedded (insert-molded) in the connection displacement member 642 in a manner exposed from the surface facing the front base 620.

  In this case, since the ridges 626 of the front base 620 extend along the displacement locus of the connection pin 643 when the coupling displacement member 642 is displaced, the ridges 626 of the front base 620 The rear end surface of the connection pin 643 can be mainly brought into contact with the connector. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the formation of fogging due to rubbing between the connection displacement member 642 made of a light transmitting resin material and the ridges 626 of the front base 620. Therefore, the rendering effect by transmitting light to the connecting displacement member 642 can be exhibited continuously.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39, the operation of the right rotation unit 600 will be described. 33 and 34 are front views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhang position, and FIGS. 35 and 36 operate between the retracted position and the overhang position. It is a rear view of the right rotation unit 600 in each state at the time of doing. FIGS. 37 and 38 are schematic rear views of the right rotation unit 600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  Note that FIG. 33 (a) shows FIGS. 35 (a) and 37 (a) and FIG. 33 (b) shows FIG. 35 (b) and FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 35 (c) and FIG. 37 (c) are respectively in the same state, and FIG. 34 (a) is the same as FIG. 36 (a), FIG. 38 (a) and FIG. 34 (b). , FIG. 38 (b) and FIG. 34 (c) are respectively in the same state as FIG. 36 (c) and FIG. 38 (c). In this case, FIG. 33 (c) is the same as FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 35 (c) is FIG. 36 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is FIG. 38 (a). is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 630 is in the upright state, and the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are frontal. It is disposed in front of the base 620.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37A), the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second of the second displacement member 640 The inner wall surface of the groove 641b is pushed by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the projecting direction (right side in FIG. 37A), as shown in FIGS. 33B, 35B and 37B. As shown, the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the extending direction. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and thus the first displacement It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above case. The inner wall surface of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the first displacement member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 is extended by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 (FIG. 37B) And the first displacement member 630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 as a rotation axis in the projecting direction, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (ie, FIG. 36 (a) and 38 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 acts on the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. The connection part of is reached.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 33 (c), 35 (c) and 37 (c) (ie, FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a)), the first displacement member 630 is used. When one contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 is in contact with one side surface of the projection 628 of the front base 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the overhang direction is It is regulated.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38A) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a), The drive pin 654b moves along the non-interference section 635b with respect to the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 without interfering with the inner wall surface thereof. Thereby, the first displacement member 630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 38 (a).

  On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 38A) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connection groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)). The rotation of the driven member 641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 642 through the connection of the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643, and the connection displacement member 642 lifts the decorative portion 642 b with the support shaft 633 as a rotation center ( 38 (b) is rotated clockwise). That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), similar to the above case. In addition, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630. Thereafter, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the end of the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 38 (c), the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the extended position.

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 rotates in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38C) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c). When driven, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 moves along the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, whereby the first displacement member 630 moves to the position shown in FIG. It is maintained in the state (position) shown.

  On the other hand, in the second displacement member 640, the inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed upward (upward in FIG. 38C) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 38 (b), the driven member 641 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction to lower the connecting groove 641c (clockwise in FIG. 38 (b)), and the connecting displacement member It is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38B) in which the decoration portion 642b is swung down about the support shaft 633 as a rotation center. That is, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 38 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), Similarly, while the first displacement member 630 is stopped, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement portion 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 630 in the direction of swinging down the decorative portion 642b.

  After the states shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 36 (b) and 38 (b), the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a), 36 (a) and 38 (a) (i.e., FIG. When the state shown in FIGS. 35C and 37C is reached, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 acts on the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. The connection part of is reached.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 37C) from the states shown in FIGS. 33C, 35C, and 37C, the first displacement is generated. The inner wall surfaces of the first groove 635 (action section 635a) of the member 630 and the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640 are pushed by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 in the standing direction (left side in FIG. 37C) Then, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the first displacement member 630 is rotated in the standing direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, the second displacement member 640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 630 because the second groove 641b has the same outer shape as the action section 635b of the first groove 635, and thus the first displacement It is displaced integrally with the member 630.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 37 (b)) from the states shown in FIGS. 33 (b), 35 (b) and 37 (b), the same as in the above case. The first displacement member 630 is rotated in the rising direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation axis, and the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630. After that, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action end 635a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630 and the starting end of the second groove 641b of the second displacement member 640, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 35A and 37A, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In the standing position shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the other contact portion 634 of the pair of contact portions 634 of the first displacement member 630 is the front base. By being in contact with the other side surface of the projecting portion 628 of 620, the rotation of the first displacement member 630 in the rising direction is restricted.

  Thus, in the right rotation unit 600, the first displacement member 630 is in a posture in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are superimposed in the thickness direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34). Because the first and second displacement members 640 are disposed on the front side of the front base 620, the first grooves 635 can be compared to the prior art in which the first and second grooves are juxtaposed in the same plane. And the second groove 641b (i.e., the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640) can reduce the planar space required for the disposition. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the outer shape (planar space) in front view.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the enlargement of the display device (the third symbol display device 81) is required. However, even in this case, the space in the thickness direction (the front-rear direction, for example, the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 10 and FIG. 11) has a relatively large margin. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, as long as the first groove 635 and the second groove 641b are overlapped and a space in the thickness direction with a relatively large margin is used, the external shape of the right rotation unit 600 can be small in front view This is particularly effective for increasing the size of the display device.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first groove 635 and the second groove 641 b are overlapped, the rotational driving force of the transmission member 654 is transmitted to each of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 by one drive pin 654 b. As in the prior art, it is unnecessary to separately provide the drive pin (transmission member) for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be used in common, and part costs can be reduced accordingly.

  As described above, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642, and the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are connected by the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. Since the link mechanism is configured to be rotatably supported by the support shafts 632, 633 of the first displacement member 630, the amplification effect of the link mechanism can be utilized. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, the relative displacement amount of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be increased. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 640 is divided into the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 to form a link mechanism, and a support shaft for pivotally supporting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 By disposing 632 and 633 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a), 35 (a) and 37 (a), the driven member can be driven at the retracted position. A posture in which the member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 are superimposed can be formed.

  Thereby, the second displacement member 640 can be easily concealed on the back surface side of the first displacement member 630 (not easily visible to the player). Therefore, in the retracted position, it is possible not only to miniaturize the external shape of the right rotation unit 600 in a front view (see FIG. 33A), but also when the first displacement member 630 is tilted from the standing posture to the overhanging posture. (See FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (c)) after the first displacement member 630 is tilted to the extended position while hiding the presence of the second displacement member 640 (decorative portion 642b) from the player. The second displacement member 640 can be made to pop out from the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 34A to 34C), and it is easy to perform an effect of giving an impact to the player.

  As described above, the operations of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 33 (a) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 34 (c) are first performed from FIG. 33 (a) As shown in FIG. 33C, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced (rotated) in the overhanging direction (that is, the direction in which they fall down, referred to as the “first direction”) while being integrated. As shown in FIG. 34 (c) and FIG. 34 (a), after the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 630 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c), the second displacement The connection displacement member 642 of the member 640 is operated to displace (rotate) the decorative portion 642 b in a direction (referred to as “second direction”) for lifting the decorative portion 642 b. That is, the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other.

  Thereby, the inertial force accompanying the stop of the first displacement member 630 displaced in the first direction can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member 640 starts the displacement in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform a series of operations from the retracted position to the extended position, and not only it is possible to enhance the rendering effect, but also to reduce the load of parts by the action of the inertial force and improve the durability. Can be

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the weight of the first displacement member 630 is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member 640, so the overhanging position shown in FIG. 34C from the retracted position shown in FIG. In the operation of displacing the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640, the heavy first displacement member 630 may be stopped first, and the light second displacement member 640 may be finally stopped. As a result, the load imposed on the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652 and the second pinion 653, see FIGS. 29 and 30) in the transmission mechanism can be reduced.

  That is, from the state (see FIGS. 33A to 33C) in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced integrally in the projecting direction (first direction) as described above, The displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33C and 34A), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (the second direction). The transition from the displaced state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) is that the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 transitions from the action section 635a of the first groove 635 to the non-interference section 635b. As it is performed, the rotation of the drive motor 650 and the gears (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) in the transmission mechanism can be continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member 630 is stopped during the transition of such a state, it is possible to avoid the load on the gear of the drive motor 650 transmission mechanism accompanying the stop.

  On the other hand, the displacement of the first displacement member 630 is stopped (see FIGS. 33C and 34A), and the connecting displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 lifts the decorative portion 642b (the The transition from the state (see FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c)) displaced in two directions) to the state (see FIG. 34 (c)) in which the second displacement member 640 is stopped And the gears of the transmission mechanism (the first pinion 651, the rack member 652, and the second pinion 653) must be stopped, and the inertia force when the second displacement member 640 is stopped is applied to the gears. However, since the only member to be stopped in this case is the second displacement member 640 which is light in weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, as described above, the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is outwardly moved to the side opposite to the decorative portion 642b with the portion (shaft support hole 642a) axially supported by the first displacement member 630 interposed therebetween. An overhanging portion 642c is formed to be overhanging (see FIG. 32), and the overhanging portion 642c can be made to play a role of a weight.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, when rotating the connecting displacement member 642 to lift the decorative portion 642b upward, the overhanging portion 642c is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion 642b. Thus, the weight of the overhanging portion 642c can be used to make it easy to lift the decorative portion 642b upward. Therefore, the decorative portion 642b can be lifted quickly, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced, and the driving force of the drive motor 650 required for the lifting operation can be suppressed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 36 (c) and 38 (c), after the decorative portion 642b is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion 642b and the weight of the overhang portion 642c are suspended. Therefore, the decoration portion 642b can stabilize the lifted posture and is required to maintain the posture, as compared to the cantilever state where only the decoration portion 642b is formed. The drive force of the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the overhanging portion 642c of the connection displacement member 642 is formed so as to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member 630, as described above, the bottom wall (convex line 642c1, see FIG. 32). As shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, when the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated), the overhanging portion 642c is abutted against the back surface of the first displacement member 630, thereby causing connection displacement. The rattling of the member 642 (decorative portion 642 b) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture at the time of displacement of the decorative portion 642b can be stabilized, and the rendering effect can be enhanced, and at the same time, wear and breakage of the pivotally supported portion due to rattling can be suppressed.

  In addition to the role as a weight, the overhanging portion 642c abuts against the first displacement member 630 and also serves to suppress rattling, so it is necessary to separately provide a portion for both of these roles. Therefore, the structure of the connecting displacement member 642 can be simplified. As a result, parts cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the overhanging portion 642c of the connection displacement member 642 is formed in a substantially box shape as described above (see FIG. 32). Thereby, the weight and the rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer shape of the overhang portion 642c. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, FIG. 36 and FIG. 38, in the state in which the overhanging portion 642c is hidden on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (that is, in the state invisible from the front player) While ensuring the displacement of the member 642 (decorative portion 642b), the overhanging portion 642c reliably exerts the function as a weight and the function of suppressing rattling by coming in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. It can be done.

  Here, in the front base 620, as described above, the pivot support hole 624 for pivotally supporting the first displacement member 630 is closer to the opening side of the gaming board 13 than the pivotal support hole 625 for pivotally supporting the transmission member 654 (See FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member are in the overhang position. While the projected area of the game board 13 can be secured, the transmission member 654 can be easily concealed on the back surface of the first displacement member 630 while being displaced from the retracted position to the projected position.

  In this case, as described above, the front base 620 is provided with the bearing portion 627 for supporting the rotation shaft 631 of the first displacement member 630 (see FIG. 29), and the transmission member 654 is shown in FIG. As shown in (c), when the second displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, the second displacement member 640 is formed so as to be able to abut on the bearing portion 627. The rotation can be regulated within a predetermined range. That is, the transmission member 654 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 650 can also serve as a stopper that restricts the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 within a predetermined range. Therefore, the structure can be simplified, and the part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, since the bearing portion 627 is a portion for bulking the first displacement member 630 from the front base 620 and arranging the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 in an overlapping posture (see FIG. 29), the rigidity is relatively high, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side, and as shown in FIG. 38C, the transmission member 654 is in contact with the bearing 627. Therefore, the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member 640 with respect to the first displacement member 630 can be secured, and the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be effectively used. Can be implemented.

  Furthermore, as described above, the concave portion 654c corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion 627 is recessed in the transmission member 654 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), and as shown in FIG. When the displacement member 640 is extended to the extended position, the bearing portion 627 is formed so as to be receivable in the recessed portion 654c, so the movable range of the transmission member 654 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be secured accordingly. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft 654a of the transmission member 654 can be made close to the bearing portion 627 while securing the movable range of the transmission member 654, while the outer shape of the first displacement member 630 is suppressed, FIG. And as shown in FIG. 38, the transmission member 654 is hidden behind the first displacement member 630 while the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position (ie, , And a state in which the player can not visually recognize from the front player can be easily formed.

  As described above, the front base 620 is formed to be inclined to the left side in the front view (the opening side of the game board 13, for example, the left side of FIG. Inclined surface 620a is provided. Therefore, the connecting displacement member 642 is displaced (rotated) in the direction to lower the decorative portion 642b from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and passes through the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) to obtain the state shown in FIG. When forming it, it can be suppressed by the inclined surface 620 a that the connection displacement member 642 is locked to the side surface of the front base 620 and can not be displaced. Similarly, the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) is displaced (rotated) toward the retracted position integrally with the first displacement member 630 from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c), FIG. 33 (b) Even when the state shown in FIG. 33 (a) is formed, the inclined surface 620a can suppress the connection displacement member 642 from being locked by the side surface of the front base 620 and not being displaced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilevered state with the rotation shaft 631 as a fulcrum, and the second displacement member 640 is disposed on the first displacement member 630, and the weight The first displacement member 630 is likely to sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33) (that is, sway in the direction to move the coupling displacement member 642 closer to or away from the front base 620). It is easy to be locked to the side of the front base 620. Therefore, the configuration in which the inclined surface 620 a is provided on the front base 620 is particularly effective.

  Further, as described above, the front base 620 is provided with the projected streaks 626 which are protruded from the front surface and extended along the displacement direction (rotational direction) of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 and FIG. 37, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, only the top of the ridge 626 is the second displacement member 640. Can be in contact with Therefore, as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the front base 620 is in contact with the second displacement member 640, the contact area can be reduced, and the sliding resistance can be suppressed. As a result, the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 can be smoothly displaced, and the driving force required for the drive motor 650 can be suppressed.

  Here, the relationship between the ridges 626 of the front base 620 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the connection displacement member 642, and FIG. 39 (b) is a front base 620 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39 (a). 18 is a schematic sectional view of the connection displacement member 642.

  As described above, the connection displacement member 642 of the second displacement member 640 is formed of a light transmissive resin material. Therefore, the decorative effect can be enhanced by transmitting light emitted from the light emitter or the display device. On the other hand, since the coupling displacement member 642 is a member disposed facing the front base 620 (see FIGS. 29 to 31), occurrence of shaking or rattling when the second displacement member 640 is displaced. Along with the front of the front base 620. In this case, when the front surface of the front base 620 comes in contact with the connection displacement member 642, rubbing with the front surface of the front base 620 causes fogging of the connection displacement member 642 and the light transmission is impaired.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ridges 626 are formed on the front surface of the front base 620, and only the tops of the ridges 626 can be brought into contact with the connection displacement member 642. It is possible to partially suppress fogging (a portion where the light transmission is impaired) due to rubbing formed on the connection displacement member 642.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the second displacement member 640 is provided with a metal connection pin 643 for connecting the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 to the connection displacement member 642. The ridges 626 of the front base 620 are along the path of the connection pin 643 when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 33, 35 and 37). It will be extended.

  Accordingly, when the second displacement member 640 is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 630, the rear end surface (the surface on the right side of FIG. 39B) of the connection pin 642 It can be connected. Therefore, the surface pressure acting on the connection displacement member 642 from the top of the ridge 626 is received on the rear end surface of the connection pin 642, and the surface pressure acting on the other portion of the connection displacement member 642 is weakened accordingly. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of haze on the other part of the coupling displacement member 642 by rubbing with the ridges 626 and to suppress the loss of the function of transmitting the light.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the function of the protrusion 628 of the front base 620 will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a schematic front view for explaining the positional relationship between the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front base viewed in the direction of the arrow XLb in FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the front base 620 and the first displacement member 630 taken along line XLc-XLc of FIG. 40 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 40, the front base 620 includes a bearing portion 627 rotatably supporting the first displacement member 630, and the height of the bearing portion 627 corresponds to the front surface of the front base 620. Since it is axially supported in a raised state, a space in which the second displacement member 640 is disposed can be formed between the front surface of the front base 620 and the back surface of the first displacement member 630. That is, as described above, the second displacement member 640 can be disposed so as to overlap the back surface of the first displacement member 630 (see FIGS. 29 to 31).

  As described above, the front base 620 is provided with the projecting portion 628 which is formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627, and the first displacement member 630 is provided to project from the back surface thereof. And the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 is in contact with the projection 628 of the front base 620, whereby the relative rotation of the first displacement member 630 with respect to the front base 620 is within a predetermined range. It can be regulated within.

  In this case, the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620 is erected from the front of the front base 620 as a large diameter cylindrical body, and its rigidity is increased, and a dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side. The projection 628 protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 627, and the projection 628 is in contact with the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630, whereby the first displacement is achieved. The rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the member 630 with respect to the front base 620 can be secured, and the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 40A) of the first displacement member 630 is set to a size including the projection 628 of the front base 620 in front view. That is, the front surface (the front surface on the paper surface of FIG. 40A) of the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 is formed in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630. Thus, it is possible to suppress rattling when the first displacement member 630 is displaced or tilting of the first displacement member 630 in the forward direction (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C).

  Further, in addition to the role as a stopper that receives the contact portion 634 of the first displacement member 630 on the side surface of the projection 628 of the front base 620 and regulates the relative displacement, the back surface of the first displacement member 630 Since it is possible to combine it with the role of suppressing rattling and tilting, it is unnecessary to provide separate parts for these two roles, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, parts cost can be reduced.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first displacement member 630 is disposed in a cantilever state with the rotation shaft 631 (the bearing portion 627 of the front base 620) as a fulcrum, and the first displacement member 630 Since the displacement member 640 is disposed and the weight is increased, the first displacement member 630 is likely to shake in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 40A). The swing in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 approaches the front base 620 (the direction opposite to the arrow X in FIG. 40C) causes the front base 620 (convex bar 626) of the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642). Of the first displacement member 630 in the direction in which the first displacement member 630 separates from the front base 620 (the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40 (c)) can not be regulated. Because it is bulky, it is likely to cause damage near the fulcrum. Therefore, a configuration in which the front displacement of the first displacement member 630 can be suppressed by bringing the front surface of the projection 628 of the front base 620 into contact with the back surface of the first displacement member 630 is particularly effective.

  In this case, since the projecting portion 628 of the front base 620 is provided so as to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion 627 and continuously with the front of the front base 620, the rigidity of the projecting portion 628 can be enhanced. In particular, when the first displacement member 630 tilts forward (in the direction of the arrow Fr in FIG. 40C), the direction in which the tilt is supported (ie, the protrusion 628 corresponds to the back surface of the first displacement member 630 and the front base 620). Since the rigidity in the direction of being sandwiched between the front and the front can be enhanced, the forward tilt of the first displacement member 630 can be effectively suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 48, the left rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 41 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 700, and FIG. 42 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 43 is a partially exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 700.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the left rotation unit 700 has a base body including a back surface base 710 and a front surface base 720, and a base end side of the base body is displaceably disposed on the front side. First displacing member 730, second displacing member 740 displaceably disposed on the tip side of the first displacing member 730, and driving force for displacing the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 And a transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 750, and a connecting member for connecting the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740. A first connecting member 760 and a second connecting member 770), and a cover body 780 provided on the front surface of the lower end side of the front base 720 are mainly provided.

  A portion of the transmission mechanism (a first pinion 751, a rack member 752, and a second pinion 753) is accommodated between the facing surfaces of the back surface base 710 and the front surface base 720. On the back surface of the front base 720, a pair of insertion pins 722 which are inserted into the slide grooves 752a of the rack member 752 in order to define the moving direction of the rack member 752 are provided in a protruding manner.

  Axial support holes 723, 724, 725 having a circular front view are formed through the front base 720, and the rotational shafts 731 of the first displacement member 730 and the transmission member 754 are formed in the respective axial support holes 723, 724, 725. The rotation shaft 754a and the rotation shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 are rotatably supported. Similarly, in the cover body 780, a support hole 781 having a circular shape in a front view is formed to penetrate, and the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported by the support hole 781.

  Further, on the front of the front base 720, a base side engaging member 726 is provided in a protruding manner, and a receiving recess 727 is provided in a recessed manner. The base side engaging member 726 includes a base 726a erected from the front of the front base 720, and a bent portion 726b formed by bending the tip of the base 726a and having an inner surface as an engagement surface, and the retracted position In the second displacement member 740, the engagement surfaces are formed engageable with a displacement engagement member 742 described later. Thereby, as described later, tilting of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 forward with respect to the front base 720 can be suppressed (see FIG. 47).

  The receiving recess 727 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view that is recessed at a position facing the bent portion 726 b of the base side engaging member 726. By being formed to have an opening area larger than the outer shape, the bending portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 742 is formed to be receivable. Thus, as described later, relative displacement in the approaching direction of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 can be permitted at the retracted position, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  The transmission mechanism includes a first pinion 751 attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 750, a second pinion 753 fastened and fixed to the rotation shaft 754a of the transmission member 754, and the first pinion 751 and the second pinion 753 And a rack member 752 formed as a rack in which a rack gear to be engaged is cut in a side surface of a flat plate-like member.

  The rack member 752 is provided with two sliding grooves 752a in the form of a long hole in the front view extending along the longitudinal direction, and the pair of insertion pins 722 of the front base 720 are respectively inserted into these sliding grooves 752a. Thus, the moving direction is maintained in a defined state. That is, the rack member 752 is held between the facing surfaces of the back surface base 710 and the front surface base 720 so as to be linearly movable.

  The transmission member 754 includes a rotating shaft 754a protruding from the rear surface at one end and a drive pin 754b protruding from the front of the other end opposite to the rotating shaft 754a. By being inserted into the shaft support hole 724, the front base 720 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. The drive pin 754 b is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a drive groove 762 described later of the connecting first member 760.

  According to the transmission mechanism, when the first pinion 751 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 750, the rotation of the first pinion 751 is transmitted to the second pinion 753 via the linear motion of the rack member 752. When the second pinion 753 is rotated, the transmission member 754 is rotated about the pivot hole 724 of the front base 720 as a rotation center.

  When the transmission member 754 is rotated, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 acts on the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 to drive the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770, as described later. . As a result, while relatively displacing the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 via the coupling first member 760 and the coupling second member 770, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 Can be displaced relative to the front base 720 (see FIG. 46).

  The first displacement member 730 has a rotary shaft 731 projecting on one end side (the lower side in FIG. 42) in the longitudinal direction and a shaft on the other longitudinal end side (the upper side in FIG. 42) opposite to the rotary shaft 731. A support hole 732 is formed in a penetrating manner, and on the rear surface of the first displacement member 730, a sliding groove 733 having an oblong view in a front view is recessed, and a connection pin 734 is protruded. Further, an engaged portion 735 is formed on the outer edge on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and on the side of the shaft support hole 732.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 731 is a shaft-like body inserted into the shaft support hole 723 of the front base 720 and the shaft support hole 781 of the cover body 780. By being inserted through the support holes 723 and 781, the front base 720 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front base 720. That is, the proximal end of the first displacement member 730 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 720 and the cover body 780.

  The axial support hole 732 is a circular hole in a front view, and rotatably supports the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740. The sliding groove 733 is a recessed groove extending in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730, and the end of the connecting shaft 790 is slidably inserted. The connecting shaft 790 supports the other ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 so as to be relatively rotatable. As will be described later, when the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are driven, the connecting shaft 790 acts on the sliding groove 733 with respect to the first displacement member 730, so that the first displacement member 730 is frontal. It is displaced (rotated) with respect to the base 720 (see FIG. 45).

  The connecting pin 734 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section inserted into a later-described sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770, and is an extension of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 in the extending direction. Will be placed. Therefore, the direction in which the connecting shaft 790 slides along the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the direction in which the connecting pin 734 slides along the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770 coincide with each other. Can. That is, as described later, when the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are driven, the form of relative displacement of the second connecting member 770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is linear motion (slide displacement). (See FIG. 45).

  The engaged portion 735 is a portion formed on the outer edge of the first displacement member 730 that projects to a position overlapping the second displacement member 740 in a rear view, and the displacement of the second displacement member 740 described later at the overhang position. The side engagement member 742 (the engagement surface of the bending portion 742b) is formed to be engageable (see FIG. 48). Thereby, as described later, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhang position (see FIG. 48).

  The second displacement member 740 has a rotary shaft 741 and a displacement side engaging portion 742 protruding from the back, a receiving recess 743 recessed from the back, and a flange member fastened and fixed to the end face of the rotary shaft 741 And 744.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 741 is a shaft-like body inserted into the shaft support hole 732 of the first displacement member 730, and the rotation shaft 741 is inserted into the shaft support hole 732 to form the first displacement member. The second displacement member 740 is rotatably supported at the longitudinal tip end side of 730. The flange member 744 is formed such that the base end side to be fastened and fixed to the rotating shaft 741 has a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 732, whereby the detachment of the rotating shaft 741 from the shaft support hole 732 is restricted.

  A connection pin 744a is provided on the rear surface of the flange member 744 so as to be eccentric from the axial center of the rotating shaft 741. The connection pin 744a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is inserted into a connection groove 772 described later of the second connection member 770. As will be described later, when the connection first member 760 and the connection second member 770 are driven, the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 receives an action from the connection groove 772 of the connection second member 770, whereby the second displacement is performed. The member 740 is relatively displaced (relatively rotated) with respect to the first displacement member 730 (see FIG. 46).

  The displacement side engagement member 742 includes a base 742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base 742a and having an inner surface as an engagement surface, As described above, in the retracted position, the engagement surfaces are formed to be engageable with the displacement-side engagement member 726 of the front base 720, and in the overhanging position, the engagement of the first displacement member 730 is performed. The engaging portion 735 is formed to be engageable with the engagement surface.

  The receiving recess 743 is a recess having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and recessed at a position facing the bending portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 742, and the outer shape of the bending portion 726 b of the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 Also, by forming with a large opening area, the bent portion 726b of the base side engagement member 726 can be received. Thus, as described later, relative displacement in the approaching direction of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the front base 720 can be permitted at the retracted position, and damage due to a collision can be suppressed (see FIG. 47C).

  In the first connecting member 760, the rotary shaft 761 is protruded from the back surface at one end side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 42) and a sliding groove 762 is opened at a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction. The connecting groove 771 and the sliding groove 772 are opened at one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 42) and the central portion in the longitudinal direction, respectively.

  The rotation shaft 761 of the first connecting member 760 is rotatably supported by the axial support hole 725 of the front base 720, and the connecting groove 771 of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740. The pin 744a is inserted. Further, the other longitudinal ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are rotatably supported relative to each other by a connecting shaft 790 inserted into the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730.

  That is, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is displaceably connected to the front base 720, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the connecting second member 770 is displaceably connected to the second displacement member 740. A connection portion (connection pin 790) of the other longitudinal end of the connection second member 770 is movably connected to the first displacement member 730.

  Thereby, as described later, while the relative displacement of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 and the relative displacement with respect to the front base 720 are enabled, the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 770 can be It can be hidden behind the displacement member 730 to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, in the overhanging position, the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 are exposed, and the appearance is prevented from being impaired (see FIGS. 44C and 45C).

  As described above, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is inserted into the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760, and the sliding groove 772 of the second connecting member 770 is the first displacement member 730. The connection pin 734 is inserted.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a front view of left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhang position, and FIG. 45 is in each state when operating between the retraction position and the overhang position. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the left rotation unit 700. FIG. 46 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 700 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In FIG. 44, a state in which the cover body 780 is omitted is illustrated. Further, FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (a) and 46 (a), FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram of FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (b), and FIG. 44 (c) is a diagram 45 (c) and FIG. 46 (c) are respectively in the same state.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the upright state, and are disposed in front of the front base 720. It will be set up.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46A), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 is extended by the drive pin 754 b of the transmission member 754. By being pushed in the direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)), the connecting first member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the extending direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (a)).

  When the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 connects the other ends of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 to each other. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 45 (b) and FIG. 6 (b), the first displacement member 730 has its axis of rotation by being pushed in the extension direction (left side in FIG. 46 (a)) by 790. It is rotated in the overhang direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46A) with 731 as the rotation center.

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the connecting second member 770 whose connecting first member 760 and the other end are connected by the connecting shaft 790 is downward (FIG. 46 (a) And the inner wall surface of the connection groove 771 of the connection second member 770 pushes down the connection pin 744a in the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (a)) with its rotation axis 741 as the rotation center. ).

  In this case, the connecting second member 770 is formed along the extending direction of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 and the sliding groove 772 of the connecting second member 770. The respective connection pins 734 are slid, so that linear movement (slide displacement) is performed along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is When rotated in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46B) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 extends around the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center in the same manner as described above. The second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction with its rotation axis 741 as the rotation center (clockwise in FIG. 46B). Relative displacement (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, the transfer member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, whereby the first displacement member 730 is tilted as shown in FIGS. 44 (c), 45 (c) and 46 (c). The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed in the extended position, and the second displacement member 740 is displaced relative to the first displacement member 730 at maximum relative displacement (relative rotation).

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 754 rotates in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46C) from the overhanging position shown in FIGS. When driven, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 is pushed by the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 in the retraction direction (right side in FIG. 46C), such connection first member 760 It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center.

  When the coupling first member 760 is rotated in the retraction direction, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 couples the other end of the coupling first member 760 and the other end of the coupling second member 770 As shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 6 (b), the first displacement member 730 rotates its rotation shaft 731 by being pushed in the retraction direction (right side in FIG. 46 (c)). It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (c)) as the rotation center.

  Also, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 770 whose connecting first member 760 and the other end are connected by the connecting shaft 790 moves upward (upper side in FIG. 46C). The inner wall surface of the sliding groove 772 of the second connection member 770 is pushed up, and pushes up the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and As shown in FIG. 6 (b), relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the rotation center. ).

  From the state shown in FIGS. 44 (b), 45 (b) and 46 (b), the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)), and the connecting first member 760 is When it is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with the rotation shaft 761 as the rotation center, the first displacement member 730 retracts around the rotation shaft 731 as shown in FIG. 46 (b) and the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 in the second direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46 (b)) with its rotation axis 741 as the center of rotation. It is displaced (relative rotation).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the start end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a), 45 (a) and 46 (a), the first displacement member 730 is erected. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and a state in which the relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is minimized is formed.

  As described above, according to the left rotation unit 700, since the connecting member (the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770) for connecting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 is provided, such a connecting member can be obtained. By acting between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, with the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730, relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 730 with respect to the first displacement member 730 ) Can be.

  In this case, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is bridged between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the first displacement member 730 is displaced in a direction (projecting direction) in which the first displacement member 730 overhangs and is separated from the front base 720. In this case, the connecting member is exposed between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740 and becomes visible to the player, so the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting member is divided into two members of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the connecting first member 760 is connected to the front base 720; The other longitudinal end of the connecting second member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, and the other longitudinal ends of the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770 are relatively displaceably connected, and the connection is made Since the portion (coupling shaft 790) is movably coupled to the first displacement member 730, even when the first displacement member 730 is displaced in the direction in which the first displacement member 730 overhangs and is separated from the front base 720, the coupling member (The first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770) can be hidden behind the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being impaired.

  In this case, as described above, the second connecting member 770 is held by the first displacing member 730 in the form of linear movement (sliding displacement) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacing member 730. The displacement amount (rotation angle) to be displaced (rotated) in a direction (projection direction) in which 730 is projected and separated from the front base 720 is large (that is, displacement amounts of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 770 Even if it is necessary to increase the size, the second connecting member 770 can be kept hidden behind the first displacement member 730 to avoid being viewed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being impaired.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the second displacement member 740 includes a light emitter (not shown), and an electrical connection line W for supplying power to the light emitter is wired on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. (See Figure 45). In this case, the connection line W is introduced from the opening formed on the back surface of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 and connected to the light emitter. Therefore, the connection line W is wired along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 on the back surface of the first displacement member 730. Therefore, when the connection member is displaced on the back surface of the first displacement member 730, the connection member may interfere and damage the connection line W.

  In this case, as described above, the connecting member (the connecting second member 770) is disposed on the first displacement member 730 so as to linearly move (slide) along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730. The second connecting member 770 can be prevented from interfering with the connection line W. Therefore, interference with the second connecting member 770 can be avoided without securing a large space for wiring the connecting wire W (that is, the dimension in the width direction of the first displacement member 730). The space for the disposition of the line W can be reduced, and accordingly, the size of the first displacement member 730 in a front view (in particular, the dimension in the width direction) can be reduced.

  Here, if the connecting members (the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770) described above are provided, the drive force of the drive motor 750 is applied to the first displacement member 730 (that is, the first displacement member 730). Even when the drive groove is provided and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the drive groove), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can perform the same operation as described above. it can.

  However, in the case of this configuration, an increase in the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 is caused. That is, the connecting member needs to connect the connecting portion of the other end of the connecting first member 760 and the other end of the connecting second member 770 to the sliding groove 733 of the first displacement member 730 so as to be displaceable. It is disposed between the facing surfaces of the displacement member 730 and the front base 720. Therefore, when the drive groove is provided in the first displacement member 730 and the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is coupled to the drive groove, the transmission member 754 and the coupling member (the coupling first member 760 and the coupling second member 770) It is necessary to provide the first displacement member 730 with a drive groove at a position not overlapping the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 a size (area) including both of the displacement trajectory of the connection member and the drive groove, and the front shape of the first displacement member 730 Increase in size.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive groove 762 is provided in the first connecting member 760, and the driving pin 754b of the transmission member 754 is connected to the driving groove 762 of the first connecting member 760 to drive the driving motor 750. Is applied to the connecting first member 760, so that the front displacement shape of the first displacement member 730 can be miniaturized.

  That is, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the transfer member 754 and the connecting member (the connecting first member 760 and the connecting second member 770), and the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 corresponds to only the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. The size (area) may be set, and the size (area) including the drive groove does not have to be set, so the front view shape of the first displacement member 730 can be miniaturized accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the engaging action by the base side engaging member 726 and the displacement side engaging member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of left rotation unit 700 for illustrating the engaging action by base-side engaging member 726 and displacing-side engaging member 742 and corresponds to the cross section along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. Do.

  47 (a) shows a state immediately before the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the first displacement member 730 and the second. A state in which the displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated. Further, FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the direction approaching the front base 720 in FIG. 47 (b).

  As described above, the base side engaging member 726 is provided in a protruding manner on the front surface of the front base 720, and the displacement side engaging member 742 is provided in a protruding manner on the back surface of the second displacement member 740. The engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 are disposed in a posture in which the open sides (the tip end sides of the bending portions 726b) face each other (see FIGS. 41 to 43).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced in the retraction direction (upper side in FIG. 47) with respect to the front base 720, the bent portions 726b mutually move. , 742 b can be advanced to the inner surface side of the other bent portion 726 b, 742 b, and as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position The inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other.

  Here, in the conventional product in which the connecting member is bridged between the front base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the front base 720 and the second displacement are relatively separated from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. The member 740 is connected by the connecting member. Therefore, in the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 attempts to tilt the tip portion (that is, the second displacement member 740) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 in a direction (forward) away from the front base 720. By the action of the connection member interposed between the base 720 and the second displacement member 740, the tilting can be suppressed.

  However, in the present embodiment, one longitudinal end of the second connecting member 770 is connected to the second displacement member 740, while one longitudinal end of the first connecting member 760 is relatively to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It is connected to the front base 720 at a close position. Therefore, in the retracted position, the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 becomes a base end (fulcrum), and the tip end portion (that is, the second displacement member 740 side) opposite to the rotation shaft 731 becomes a free end In the state, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are in the standing posture. Therefore, the first displacement member 730 has a free end by the weight of itself and the weight of the second displacement member 740 (a side opposite to the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730, ie, the second displacement member 740 side). Can be easily tilted in the direction of moving away from the front base 720 (forward, right side in FIG. 47B).

  On the other hand, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the second displacement member is used for the base side engaging member 726 of the front base 720 Since the displacement side engagement member 742 of 740 can be engaged, the direction (forward, the tip end portion of the first displacement member 730 opposite to the rotation shaft 731 (the second displacement member 740) is separated from the front base 720 It is possible to suppress tilting to the right side of FIG.

  In addition, although the displacement side engaging member 742 may be protruded from the back surface of the first displacement member 730, in the present embodiment, the displacement side engaging member 742 protrudes from the back surface of the second displacement member 740. Be done. Therefore, the engagement position between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be set to a position away from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. Thereby, it is effective that the tip portion (second displacement member 740) of the first displacement member 730 on the opposite side to the rotation shaft 731 is inclined in a direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47B) separating from the front base 720. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the displacement side engagement member 742 is formed on the second displacement member 740, the displacement side engagement member 742 is located at a distance from the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730. It becomes susceptible to the vibration of the front and rear direction 730 (the left and right direction in FIG. 47), and the positional relationship between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 becomes unstable. Therefore, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, it becomes difficult to engage the base engagement member 726 with the displacement engagement member 742.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the engagement surface of the inner surface of the bending portion 742b moves from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the base 742a side) of the displacement side engaging member 742 The displacement member 740 is formed to be inclined in a direction close to the back surface. Thereby, on the receiving side of the displacement side engagement member 742 (the tip end side of the bending portion 742b, the upper side in FIG. 47A), the distance between the engagement surface and the back surface of the second displacement member 740 can be widened. Even when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced toward the retracted position, the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be easily engaged even if a swing occurs. .

  As described above, when the engagement between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 is facilitated while the engagement between them is started, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are at the retracted position. The second displacement member 740 is brought closer to the front base 720 side (left side in FIG. 47B) as the engagement surface of the base side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) inclines as it is displaced toward the same. be able to.

  Thus, at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 separate the tip portion (the second displacement member 740 side) from the front base 720 with the rotation shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum. Not only can the tilting in the direction (forward, right side in FIG. 47 (b)) can be suppressed, but also the projecting dimension of the second displacement member 740 from the front base 720 can be suppressed. The first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 generally involve some elastic deformation due to the proximity of the first displacement member 730 and the front surface base of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 using the elastic recovery force. By suppressing rattling at 720, the posture can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  On the other hand, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 make the tip end portion (the second displacement member 740 side) approach the front base 720 with the rotary shaft 731 of the first displacement member 730 as a fulcrum , It is permissible to tilt to the left in FIG. In this case, the base-side engagement member 726 and the displacement-side engagement member 742 are plate-like members bent in a V-shaped cross section, and the back or front base of the second displacement member 740 at the time of tilting. When it collides with the front of 720, since it is denatured in the bending direction, there is a high risk of breakage.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the receiving concave portions 727 and 743 for receiving the opposite bending portions 726b and 742b are concaved on the front surface of the front base 720 and the rear surface of the second displacement member 740. As shown in FIG. 47 (c), the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are tilted in the direction toward the front base 720 (front, left side in FIG. 47 (b)). When it is done, the other bent portions 726b and 742b can be received by the receiving recesses 727 and 743. Thus, breakage due to a collision between the base side engagement member 726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 can be suppressed.

  At the time of tilting, the back surface of the second connecting member 770 facing parallel to the front surface of the front base 720 is collided in a face-to-face manner over the entire surface, so the contact pressure at the time of collision is reduced. It can be (distributed). Therefore, damage can be suppressed.

  FIG. 48 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in the XLVIIIa portion of FIG. 45 (c), and FIG. 48 (b) is the arrow XLVIIIb direction of FIG. FIG. 16 is a side view of the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 in a view.

  As described above, when the left rotation unit 700 is shifted from the retracted position to the extended position, the first displacement member 730 is extended, and the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is extended. Are relatively displaced (rotated) about the axis of rotation 741 (see FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c)).

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), according to the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the extended position (FIG. 45 (c)) (See reference), the engagement surface of the displacement side engagement member 742 (bending portion 742b) is engaged with the engaged portion 735 of the first displacement member 730, whereby the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 And can be combined. Accordingly, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed at the overhang position.

  In particular, since the engaging surface of the displacing side engaging member 742 is inclined as described above, the first displacing member 730 and the second displacing member 740 are accompanied by some elastic deformation by the amount of the inclination. It can be displaced in a direction close to each other. Therefore, in the retracted position, rattling between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 can be suppressed, and the posture thereof can be stably maintained in the stopped state.

  Also, in addition to the role of engaging the second displacement member 740 with the front base 720 by engaging the displacement side engagement member 742 with the base side engagement member 726 of the front base 720 at the retracted position, Since the second displaceable member 740 can be combined with the first displaceable member 730 by engaging with the engaged portion 735 of the first displaceable member 730, parts for both of these functions can be separately provided. It can be dispensed with, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. As a result, parts cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55, the winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 49 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 50 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 65. 51 (a) is a front view of the winning device 65, FIG. 51 (b) is a rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 51 (c) is a top view of the winning device 65.

  52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning device 65 taken along line LIIa-LIIa of FIG. 51, and FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are FIG. 52 (a). And FIG. 52 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along the lines LIIIa-LIIIa and LIIIb-LIIIb.

  In FIG. 51, the opening and closing plate 860 is omitted, and in FIG. 53, the illustration of the guide rib 813a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 52 (a), the state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the first state is shown in FIG. 52 (b), the state in which the seesaw member 840 has formed the second state.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the winning device 65 includes a front base 810, an intermediate base 820 superimposed on the back side of the front base 810, and a back base 830 overlapped on the back side of the middle base 820. , And a seesaw member 840 and a driven member 850 disposed between the facing surfaces of the front surface base 810 and the intermediate base 820, and an opening / closing plate 860 for opening and closing the winning opening 65a.

  The winning device 65 is formed in a box shape having an inner space by the front base 810, the front base 820, and the rear base 830, and in the inner space, a guide passage through which balls paid from the winning opening 65a are guided The game ball is formed so that the weight of the game ball acts on the seesaw member 840 when the game ball passes through the guide passage.

  The seesaw member 840 forms a first state in which the one end side (one end decoration portion 853) is lowered and the other end side (the other end decoration portion 843) is raised in the state where the weight of the game ball is not applied (see FIG. When the weight of the gaming ball is applied to the other end side (see 52 (a)), the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered to form a second state (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  That is, the winning device 65 causes the seesaw member 840 to alternately show the first state and the second state using the weight of the game ball passing through the guide passage, and one end side of the seesaw member 840 (one end decoration An effect of displacing the body 853) and the other end side (the other end side decoration 843) up and down is executable.

  Here, as described later, the length dimension of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is made larger than the length dimension of the receiving surface 844 in the direction connecting the one end side and the other end side as described later. Ru. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass continuously, the gaming balls are retained on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the second state is easily maintained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when a plurality of gaming balls pass continuously, the weight of the gaming balls prevents the seesaw member 840 from remaining in the second state, and the first state and the second state It is configured to be able to reliably execute an effect that alternately appears. Hereinafter, the configuration of the winning device 65 for performing such an effect will be described.

  The front base 810 has a front substrate 811 forming the front thereof, and front first side walls 812, front second side walls 813, front first bottom walls 814 and front second bottom walls 815 projecting from the back of the front substrate 811. And mainly.

  In the front base 810, concave notches 811a and 811b formed by denting the lower edge side are arranged in parallel at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and the seesaw member 840 is formed via the concave notches 811a and 811b. A part of the driven member 850 (one end side decoration portion 853 and the other end side decoration portion 843) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

  The front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 are portions that form the side walls of a guide passage for guiding a game ball, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval. The front first bottom wall 814 and the front second bottom wall 815 are portions that form the bottom wall of the guide passage, and are connected to the lower ends of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813, respectively.

  The opening portion on the upper end side of the front first side wall 812 and the front second side wall 813 is the winning opening 65a, and the gaming ball flows into the guide passage from the opening portion (winning opening 65a). In this case, the front second side wall 813 is formed substantially vertically, while the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814 are inclined downward to the front second bottom wall 815 and the front first bottom The front second bottom wall 815 is disposed at a lower position than the wall 814. Therefore, the gaming balls introduced into the guide passage from the winning opening 65a can be guided to the front second bottom wall 815 by the downward inclination of the front first side wall 812 and the front first bottom wall 814.

  The front second bottom wall 815 is formed with a guide bottom surface 815 a that is inclined downward toward the side (that is, the side of the intermediate base 830) away from the front substrate 811. Therefore, the gaming balls guided to the front second bottom wall 815 roll along the downward slope of the guiding bottom surface 815a and are guided to the guiding passage (inlet 821b) of the intermediate base 830.

  In the front second side wall 813, guide ribs 813a are provided upright at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). The guide rib 813 a is formed in such a shape that the height at which the guide rib 813 a is separated from the front base 811 decreases from the front second side wall 813, whereby the front end surface of the guide rib 813 a becomes an inclined surface. Thus, for example, when the game ball is collided with the front first side wall 812 and bounced back when it is introduced (dropped) from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage, the gaming ball advances to the front second side wall 813 at a relatively high speed. Even in this case, such a game ball can be smoothly guided toward the guide passage of the intermediate base 830 by the inclined surface of the standing end of the guide rib 813a.

  The intermediate base 820 has an intermediate substrate 821 facing the front substrate 811 of the front surface base 810 at a predetermined distance, and an intermediate first side wall 822, an intermediate second side wall 823 and an intermediate bottom wall projecting from the back surface of the intermediate substrate 821. And 824.

  An opening / closing plate advancing / retreating port 821a, an inlet / outlet 821b, a delivery port 821c, and an outlet port 821d are formed in the intermediate substrate 821, and a support shaft 821e, a bearing 821f, and the like are provided in front of the intermediate substrate 821. , And stopper portions 821g and 821h are provided in a protruding manner.

  The opening and closing plate advancing and retracting opening 821a of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for permitting the advancing and retreating of the opening and closing plate 860, and the opening and closing plate 860 is advanced (projected) to the front base 810 side from the opening and closing plate advancing and retracting opening 821a. The opening 65a is closed, and the opening / closing plate 860 is retracted (retracted) to the opening / closing plate entrance / exit 821a, whereby the winning opening 65a is opened.

  The receiving port 821b of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving the game ball guided from the front second bottom wall 815 (guide bottom surface 815a) of the front base 810 into the guide passage on the intermediate base 820 side, and the bottom surface of the opening The (receiving bottom surface 821b1) is formed to be continuous with the guiding bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815.

  The delivery port 821c of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for delivering gaming balls from the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is a guide bottom surface 824a described later of the middle bottom wall 824. It is formed by That is, the gaming balls having passed through the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 roll on the guide bottom surface 824 a of the middle bottom wall 824 and are delivered from the delivery port 821 c to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840.

  The discharge port 821 d of the intermediate substrate 821 is an opening for receiving gaming balls discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, and the bottom surface of the opening is formed by the discharge bottom wall 825. The game ball discharged from the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and received by the discharge port 821 d rolls on the discharge bottom wall 825 to a discharge passage (not shown) connected to the back side of the back base 830 Be sent out.

  The support shaft 821e of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840, and is inserted into the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The bearing 821f of the intermediate substrate 821 is a shaft hole for rotatably supporting the driven member 850, and the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850 is inserted.

  The stopper portions 821g and 821h of the intermediate substrate 821 are portions for coming into contact with the lower surface of the seesaw member 840 to regulate the rotation of the seesaw member 840, and the stopper portion 821g is on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction. The lower surface (the surface opposite to the discharge surface 846) is formed to be abuttable, and the stopper portion 821h is formed to be abuttable to the lower surface (the surface opposite to the receiving surface 844) at one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 Be done.

  The first state of the seesaw member 840 is formed by restricting the rotation of the seesaw member 840 by the stopper portion 821 h (see FIG. 52A), and in the second state, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is a stopper It is formed by being regulated by the portion 821g (see FIG. 52 (b)).

  Here, as described above, since the stopper portion 821 g is formed at a position where it can contact the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, the discharge of the game ball can be stabilized. That is, when the gaming ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 and the second state is formed by its weight, the stopper 821g supports the lower surface opposite to the discharge surface 846, so for example, the stopper 821h As compared with the case where the stopper portion 821g supports a position close to the support shaft 821e (for example, the lower surface opposite to the inclined surface 845), the sway of the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840 can be suppressed. As a result, the discharge of the game balls from the discharge surface 846 can be stabilized.

  The intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 form a side wall of a guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 (a passage for guiding the gaming ball received from the receiving port 821 b to the delivery port 821 c) They are disposed to face each other while being separated. That is, the middle first side wall 822 and the middle second side wall 823 receive the game ball sent along the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 52A) from the guide passage on the front base 810 side from the receiving port 821b The received gaming balls are guided toward the intermediate bottom wall 824 along a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52 (a)).

  The middle bottom wall 824 is a portion that forms the bottom wall of the guide passage on the middle base 820 side, and is connected to the lower ends of the middle first side wall 822 and the middle second side wall 823, respectively. The middle bottom wall 824 is formed with a guide bottom surface 824a that is inclined downward toward the delivery port 821c (ie, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840). The gaming ball guided by the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 rolls on the guide bottom surface 824a of the middle bottom wall 824, and is substantially horizontal to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 via the delivery port 821c (see FIG. 52 (a) is sent out along the left and right direction).

  As described above, the middle bottom wall 824 (guide bottom surface 824a) is provided in the guide passage on the middle base 820 side, and the gaming balls rolled on the guide bottom surface 824a are generally horizontal to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. The game balls can be sequentially guided one ball at a time to the receiving surface 844 because they are guided from the side, and a plurality of games are received on the receiving surface 844 as in the case of dropping the game balls from above the receiving surface 844 It is possible to prevent the balls from being piled up. Thereby, as described later, even in the case where a plurality of gaming balls pass continuously through the guide passage, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 alternately.

  Here, among the guide passages on the side of the intermediate base 820, the extension length of the guide passage for guiding the game ball along the substantially horizontal direction toward the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is twice the diameter of the game ball It is preferable to set to the following. In this embodiment, the horizontal distance L (see FIG. 52A) from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the rear wall 831 described later of the rear base 830 is set to 1.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball Be done. Thereby, as described later, even when a plurality of game balls pass continuously through the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced apart one ball at a time.

  In addition, the facing distance between the middle first side wall 822 and the middle second side wall 823 is set to the same size as the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, since the positions of the gaming balls can be defined between the facing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823, the gaming balls which are rolled out from the guide bottom surface 824a and sent out from the sending port 821c are always seesaw members 840 (Into the same position of the receiving surface 844).

  In this case, in the first state, the guide bottom surface 824a of the middle bottom wall 824 is formed such that the height position of its downward slope end is higher than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 ( See FIG. 53 (a)). Thereby, as described later, the gaming ball can be smoothly guided from the guiding bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the transition to the second state can be rapidly performed.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the height position of the downward slope end is formed to be lower than the height position of the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (see FIG. 53 (b)). Thereby, as will be described later, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered by utilizing the step formed between the guide bottom surface 824a and the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, and the first state is formed. It can be easy to do.

  The rear base 830 mainly includes a rear wall 831, a discharge side wall 832, and a discharge ceiling wall 833. The back wall 831 is in contact with the end face on the back side of the middle first side wall 822, the middle second side wall 823 and the middle bottom wall 824 of the middle base body 820 (that is, covered on the back open portion) It is a part and forms the back wall (back wall) of a guide way.

  The discharge side wall 832 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 form a side wall and a ceiling wall of a guide passage for guiding the gaming ball from the discharge port 821 d of the middle base 820 to the discharge passage (not shown), and the discharge port 821 d Extend along the outer edge of the That is, the sectional shape of the guide passage taken in by the discharge bottom wall 825 of the middle base 820, the discharge side wall 832 of the back base 830 and the discharge ceiling wall 833 is substantially the same as the shape of the discharge port 821d of the middle base 820. Ru. Thereby, since the width of the guide passage can be secured, the plurality of game balls can be smoothly guided. Further, even when the game ball after it collides with the previous game ball and bounces up on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball after. Details will be described later.

  The seesaw member 840 has a bearing 841 formed in a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction, a connection pin 842 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction, an other end decoration portion 843 formed on the other end side in the longitudinal direction, Mainly provided are the receiving surface 844 formed, the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846, and the claw portion 847 erected on the discharge surface 846.

  As described above, the bearing 841 is a circular hole having a circular cross section through which the support shaft 821 e protruding from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820 is rotatably inserted, and the seesaw member via the support shaft 821 e and the bearing 841. 840 is rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the middle base 820.

  The connecting pin 842 is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, and is slidably inserted into a connecting groove 852 described later of the driven member 850. Thus, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 can be transmitted to the driven member 850. That is, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with the support shaft 821e as the rotation center, the connection pin 842 acts on the connection groove 852 so that the rotation around the rotation shaft 851 of the driven member 850 can be formed. .

  The other end decoration portion 843 is a portion on the front side of which decoration such as a pattern is given, and is exposed so as to be visible to the player through the concave portion 811b of the front base 810 as described above.

  The receiving surface 844 is a flat surface-like portion that rolls the guiding bottom surface 824a and receives the gaming balls sent out from the delivery port 821c in the guide passage of the intermediate base 820, and the inclined surface 845 has the receiving surface 844 It is a flat surface-like portion for rolling the received game ball to the discharge surface 846.

  The receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 do not depend on the rotational position of the seesaw member 840, that is, no load state where the gaming ball is not mounted on the seesaw member 840 (ie, first state, see FIG. 52A). ) Is formed in a shape having a downward slope toward the discharge surface 846. Therefore, in any state of the first state or the second state, the gaming balls received by the receiving surface 644 can be rolled from the receiving surface 644 and the inclined surface 643 toward the discharge surface 646.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the receiving surface 844 is located on one end side (left side in FIG. 52A) of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the axial center of the bearing 841. When the receiving surface 844 receives the gaming ball in the state where the one end side is raised as shown in FIG. 52, the longitudinal direction one end side (the receiving surface 844 side) is selected by the weight of the received gaming ball It can be lowered. As a result, as described later, even when a plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  The discharge surface 846 is a flat surface portion for sending (discharging) the game ball from the seesaw member 840 to the discharge port 821 d of the middle base 820, and the middle base 820 side from the front base 810 side (FIG. 52 (b) It is formed to be inclined downward from the front side to the rear side of the drawing). Therefore, when the gaming ball rolls to the discharge surface 846, the gaming ball can be rolled toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820 by the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846.

  When the gaming ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 switches the rolling direction of the gaming ball in the direction toward the discharge opening 821d of the intermediate base 820. And a guide surface 847a formed as an inclined surface for guiding the abutted gaming ball toward the discharge port 821d. As a result, the game balls rolling on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made to flow into the discharge port 821 d quickly. Therefore, as described later, the time during which the gaming ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state Can be switched smoothly.

  In this case, the claw portion 847 is formed on the other end side of the seesaw member 840 in the longitudinal direction, and is biased toward the side closer to the front base 810 (the opposite side to the discharge port 821d) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840 It will be set up. Thus, as described later, when the positions of the gaming balls rolling on the exposed surface 846 vary in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the gaming balls are placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 The time during which the second state is formed can be easily made constant, and as a result, the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

  The driven member 850 has a rotary shaft 851 protruding from the rear surface on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 850, and is arranged below the rotary shaft 851 and has a long hole shaped front view on the rear surface of the driven member 850. Connection groove 852 which is recessed as a groove of one end, and an end decoration 853 which is formed in the front of the driven member 850 and is visible to the player visually through the recessed portion 811b of the front base 810. Prepare for

  As described above, the rotating shaft 851 is a shaft-like body rotatably inserted in the bearing 821 f protruding from the intermediate substrate 821 of the intermediate base 820, and the driven member 850 via the rotating shaft 851 and the bearing 821 f Are rotatably supported between the facing surfaces of the front base 810 and the middle base 820.

  As described above, the connection groove 852 is a recessed groove through which the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is slidably inserted, and the connection pin 842 is slid along the extending direction of the connection groove 852. The driven member 850 is rotated as the seesaw member 840 rotates.

  When the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed up by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates around the rotation shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (A) By rotating clockwise, the co-driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) is lifted (see FIG. 52 (b)). On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 is shifted from the second state to the first state, the inner wall surface of the connection groove 852 is pushed down by the connection pin 842 of the seesaw member 840, and the driven member 850 rotates around the rotation shaft 851 as shown in FIG. (A) By rotating clockwise, the co-driven member 850 (one end decoration part 853) is lowered (see FIG. 52A).

  In this embodiment, the link pin 842 of the seesaw member 840 is thus connected to the connection groove 852 of the driven member 850, and the link mechanism configured to rotate the driven member 850 with the rotation of the seesaw member 840 is provided. The link ratio of the link mechanism is set to a ratio that amplifies the rotation angle of the driven member 850 with respect to the rotation angle of the seesaw member 840. As a result, the movable range of the driven member 850 (one-end decorative portion 853) can be expanded, and the rendering effect associated with the displacement can be enhanced.

  Here, since the transition from the first state to the second state can rotate the seesaw member 840 using the weight of the gaming ball, the operation can be easily performed at high speed and can be performed in a relatively short time. On the other hand, in the transition from the second state to the first state, the rotation of the seesaw member 840 needs to be performed only by its own weight, so the operation becomes slow and time is increased. In order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 reliably when a plurality of gaming balls pass the guide passage successively, the transition from the second state to the first state Needs to be done promptly.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the driven member 850 is connected to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, the weight of the driven member 850 is an external force that lowers the one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 It can be used as (i.e., an assisting force for transitioning from the second state to the first state). As a result, the time required for transitioning from the second state to the first state can be shortened, and as a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls pass the guiding passage continuously, the number of the seesaw member 840 can be reduced. Alternate switching between the 1 state and the second state can be facilitated.

  Next, the operation of the winning device 65 will be described. When the game balls are introduced from the winning opening 65a into the guide passage on the front base 810 side, the game balls are collected on the front second bottom wall 815 and roll on the guide bottom surface 815a of the front second bottom wall 815. As a result, it is guided in a substantially horizontal direction (right direction in FIGS. 53A and 53B), and flows into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 from the receiving port 821b of the intermediate base 820.

  The gaming ball introduced into the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 has a substantially vertical direction between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823 (downward direction in FIGS. 53A and 53B). , And reach the middle bottom wall 824. The guidance direction of the game ball reached to the middle bottom wall 824 is switched. That is, the game balls are guided in a substantially horizontal direction (left direction in FIGS. 53A and 53B) by rolling on the guide bottom surface 824a of the middle bottom wall 824, and the feeding of the middle base 820 is performed. It is delivered to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 from the outlet 821 c.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the seesaw member 840 forming the first state receives the gaming ball on its receiving surface 844, the gaming ball rolls the receiving surface 844 and the inclined surface 845 toward the discharge surface 846. 52A is moved clockwise and the seesaw member 840 is rotated clockwise about the rotation shaft 841 by the weight of the game ball (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side is lowered)), As shown in 52 (b), a second state is formed. However, in FIG. 52 (b), illustration of the gaming balls is omitted.

  When the game ball is discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821 d of the intermediate base 820 and a no-load state in which the weight of the game ball is not applied is formed on the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 rotates the rotating shaft 841 by its own weight. 52 (b) is rotated counterclockwise as the center (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side is raised)), and the first state is formed as shown in FIG. 52 (a) ( The seesaw member 840 is returned to the first state).

  In this case, when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided to the seesaw member 840, the seesaw member 840 is lowered in the second state (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side). State), and there is a possibility that the first state and the second state can not be switched alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the seesaw member 840 has its receiving surface 844 located on one end side (left side in FIG. 52B) in the longitudinal direction with respect to the rotating shaft 841. As shown, even when the seesaw member 840 forming the second state receives the gaming ball on its receiving surface 844, the longitudinal direction one end side can be lowered by the weight of the gaming ball supported by the receiving surface 844. That is, the seesaw member 840 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 52 (b) with the rotation axis 841 as the rotation center (the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the other end decoration portion 843 side is raised)), as shown in FIG. The second state can be formed (facilitated). As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, a guide passage for guiding the gaming balls is formed in the internal space of the front base 810, the middle base 820 and the back base 830, so a plurality of gaming balls are obtained from the winning opening 65a. Even in the case of being continuously introduced, it is possible to store a plurality of gaming balls using the guide passage and to sequentially guide the plurality of gaming balls to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. it can.

  However, even when a plurality of game balls are stored using the guide passage and the game balls are sequentially guided to the guide surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball is the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. In the configuration where the game balls are guided by being dropped from above, the plurality of gaming balls are easily stacked on the receiving surface 844 and the rolling of the gaming balls from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 is inhibited. Switching between the first state and the second state can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824 having a guide bottom surface 824a extending in a substantially horizontal direction and on which the game balls roll is provided on the terminal end side (sending port 821b side) of the guide passage. Guiding the gaming ball, which is formed by rolling the guiding bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 in the substantially horizontal direction (FIGS. 53A and 5B). Can. Thus, the gaming balls can be sequentially guided one ball at a time from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the receiving surface 844 can receive the game balls one by one from the horizontal passage), A plurality of game balls can be prevented from being stacked vertically on the receiving surface 844. Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member 840 alternately.

  In this case, as described above, the guide passage on the side of the intermediate base 820 extends along the game ball in the substantially vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52A) between the opposing surfaces of the intermediate first side wall 822 and the intermediate second side wall 823. And a horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is connected downstream of the passage (upstream passage) to be guided, and the extension length of the horizontal passage is shorter than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the guide passage, the game balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced apart one ball at a time.

  That is, the extended length of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball (in the present embodiment, from the extended end of the guide bottom surface 824a to the back surface) The horizontal distance dimension L from the base 830 to the rear wall 831 described later is approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball), and only one gaming ball can be present in such a horizontal passage, and Since the extending direction of the horizontal passage and the extending direction of the upstream passage are different from each other, when the ball flows from the upstream passage into the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, Due to the change in direction, it is possible to increase the time required for the flow into the horizontal passage.

  Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) is guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the game ball (next game ball) after the upstream passage changes direction. While taking time, the game ball is introduced into the horizontal passage, and the gaming ball after such is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840. That is, the later game balls are spaced apart from the previous game balls. As a result, the gaming balls can be guided to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 while being spaced apart one ball at a time.

  In the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is above the falling sloped end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53 (b). Since it is positioned, it is possible to form a step in the height direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) between the receiving surface 844 and the guiding bottom surface 824a. Thereby, in the second state, when guiding the gaming ball to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 by rolling the guiding bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the game ball is allowed to ride on the receiving surface 844 (colliding with the step Can make it easy to lower the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 (move downward in FIG. 53 (b)). That is, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 can be easily lowered, and the first state can be easily formed. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided, the first It is possible to easily switch between the state and the second state.

  On the other hand, when the seesaw member 840 forms the first state (see FIGS. 52A and 53A), the seesaw member 840 is in the unloaded state, and the guide bottom surface of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824) The other end side of the seesaw member 840 is obtained by causing the gaming ball guided from the 824a and received by the receiving surface 844 to be rapidly rolled to the inclined surface 845 and the discharging surface 846 side and applying the weight of the gaming ball. It is required to lower (form a second state).

  In this case, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53 (a), in the first state, from the descending inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). Since the game ball is not located on the lower side as in the case of the second state described above, it is not necessary for the gaming ball to run on the receiving surface 844 (collide with a step), and a time lag can be avoided in such an operation. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly rolled from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to facilitate the formation of the second state.

  In the first state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is formed at the same height position (the same position) as the downward inclined end of the guide bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage (intermediate bottom wall 824). It is preferable to do. When the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 is positioned lower than the guiding bottom surface 824a of the horizontal passage, the gaming ball is dropped from the guiding bottom surface 824a to the receiving surface 844 so that the gaming ball bounces. While a time lag occurs and the load of the rotating shaft 841 of the seesaw member 840 is increased due to the impact of the drop, these can be eliminated if they are at the same height position.

  Next, the claws 847 of the seesaw member 840 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the winning device 65 taken along line LIV-LIV of FIG. 52 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, the seesaw member 840 is provided with a claw portion 847 standing from the discharge surface 846 thereof. The claw portion 847 includes a guide surface 847a which is formed to be inclined so as to be closer to the discharge port 821d from the inclined surface 825 side toward the other end decoration portion 843 side. Thus, when the gaming ball rolls on the discharge surface 846 toward the other end decoration portion 843 (right side in FIG. 54) along the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 54) of the seesaw member 840, the game ball Can be brought into contact with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847, and the rolling direction can be switched to the direction (upper side in FIG. 54) toward the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 820. The time during which the game ball is placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened, and as a result, switching between the first state and the second state is alternately performed. It can be done smoothly.

  In this case, as described above, the claw portion 847 is the other end side (the other end decoration portion 843 side, the right side in FIG. 54) of the seesaw member 840 on the discharge surface 846 and the width direction of the seesaw member 840 ( In the vertical direction of FIG. 54), it is disposed on the side (the opposite side to the discharge port 821 d, the lower side of FIG. 54) close to the front base 810. Thus, when the positions of the game balls rolling on the exposed surface 846 vary in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the game balls are placed on the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the second state is The formed time) can be easily made constant, and as a result, switching between the first state and the second state can be smoothly performed.

  That is, in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54) of the seesaw member 840, the gaming ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the front base 810 (the opposite side to the discharge port 821d, lower side in FIG. 54) The game ball rolling the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the intermediate base 820 (the side close to the discharge port 821 d, the upper side in FIG. 54) to the distance 821 d is long, the distance to the discharge port 821 d becomes short.

  Therefore, by disposing the claw portion 847 on the side close to the front base 810 (the side opposite to the discharge port 821 d, the lower side in FIG. 54) in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the claw portion 847 approaches the front base 810 The former game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the lower side (FIG. 54 lower side) is made to collide with the guide surface 847a of the claw portion 847 at an early stage and discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d With regard to the latter gaming balls rolling on the discharge surface 846 on the side close to the 820 (the upper side in FIG. 54), the collision of the claws 847 with the guide surface 847a can be delayed or prevented from colliding. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, it is possible to make the total time in which the gaming balls roll on the discharge surface 846 as close as possible. As a result, even when the rolling position of the gaming ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member 840, the time during which the weight of the gaming ball acts on the discharge surface 846 can be easily made constant.

  Next, the outlet 821d of the intermediate base 820 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic rear view of the winning device 65, and FIG. 55 (a) is in the first state shown in FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. 55 (b) is in the second state shown in FIG. Correspond to each.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b)) of the discharge port 821d is more than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. It is set to a large size (about 2.5 times in the present embodiment). Thus, with the previous game ball existing on the other end side (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B) of the seesaw member 840, the next game ball is further moved to the other end side in the longitudinal direction. Even in the case of rolling toward the end, each of the gaming balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d.

  For example, the game ball after the game ball collides with the game ball on the discharge surface 846, and the later game ball is repelled in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (ie, the distance between both game balls (FIG. 55) (B) of FIG. 55 (b) is enlarged in the width direction of the discharge opening 821d), and even when the respective game balls are discharged to the discharge opening 821d, the width dimension of the discharge opening 821 is sufficient Can be made to flow smoothly.

  Further, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d (vertical dimension in FIG. 55A and FIG. 55B) is the height dimension on the inclined surface 845 side than the height dimension on the discharge surface 846 side of the seesaw member 840 Are set to larger dimensions. Also with this, with the previous game ball existing on the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (the left side in FIGS. 55A and 55B), the next game ball is further on the other end side in the longitudinal direction Even in the case of rolling toward the end, each of the gaming balls can smoothly flow into the discharge port 821d.

  That is, the later game ball collides with the previous game ball rolling on the discharge surface 846, and the later game ball bounces upward, or bounces in the opposite direction to the rolling direction and the inclined surface Even in the case of being flipped upward at 845, the height dimension of the discharge port 821d on the side of the inclined surface 845 can be used to smoothly flow the subsequent game ball into the discharge port 821. On the other hand, even if the previous game ball collides with the later game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the space required for the discharge port 821d can be obtained by suppressing the height dimension of the discharge port 821d at the discharge surface 846 side low. Can be secured, and a space for disposing other members can be secured accordingly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the game area will be described. 56 and 57 are partially enlarged views of the game board 13 in which the LVI portion of FIG. 2 is partially enlarged. In FIG. 57, a state in which the center frame 86 is removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 assembled with a nail, a windmill, an inner rail 61, an outer rail 62, various winning openings (see FIG. 2), a center frame 86 and the like. The area formed on the front of the game board 13 and divided by the inner rail 12 is the game area (the area in which nails, winning openings, etc. are disposed and the shot balls flow down), as described above. Ru.

  An opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 so that a third symbol display device 81 which is a display device can be viewed. In this case, conventionally, the opening of the game board 13 is made larger than the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81, and a rendering device disposed displaceably on the back side of the game board 13 (the base plate 60) by that amount It is practiced to secure a visible area. However, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down, there is a limit in enlarging the opening of the game board 13.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center frame 86 installed in the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed of a light transmitting material, and a part of the center frame 86 (hereinafter The “area forming unit R” forms a part of the game area. As a result, it is possible to visually recognize the rendering device (in the present embodiment, the left rotation unit 700) via (watermarking) the area forming unit R of the center frame 86. Therefore, the area | region which can visually recognize the left rotation unit 700 can be enlarged, ensuring the area | region for balls to flow down. However, in FIG. 56, in order to simplify the drawing, the illustration of the left rotation unit 700 which is viewed through the area forming unit R is omitted.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening of the game board 13 (the opening 60a of the base plate 60) is formed with its inner edge reaching the outer edge of the game area (that is, the inner rail 61). The area | region which can visually recognize a presentation apparatus (left rotation unit 700) via the area | region formation part R of 86 can be ensured to the maximum.

  On the other hand, since the width dimension of the area forming portion R of the center frame 86 is set to allow passage of only one game ball, the area forming portion R is formed through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, the area is formed An area in which the rendering device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed can be secured to a maximum extent without passing through the part R.

  The detailed configuration of the region forming portion R in the center frame 86 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 59 is a front view of the area forming portion R. FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the region forming portion R in the line LX-LX in FIG. In FIG. 60, the left rotation unit 700 is schematically shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the center frame 86 has a frame plate base 910 formed in a frame shape in a front view, and the inside of the center frame 86 erected from the back surface of the frame plate base 910 and fitted into the opening 60a of the base plate 60. It mainly includes a fitting wall portion 920 and an inner edge defining wall portion 930 erected from the front surface of the frame base 910 opposite to the inner fitting wall portion 920 and defining the inner edge of the game area.

  The frame plate base 910 is a portion superimposed on the front surface of the base plate 60, and the front surface side is a region where the gaming balls flow down. In the frame plate base 910, insertion holes 911 for inserting a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the center frame 86 to the base plate 60 are formed at a plurality of locations. Further, the outer edge of the frame plate base 910 is formed to be inclined downward so as to be smoothly connected to the front surface of the base plate 60. By this inclination, rolling of the gaming ball can be made smooth.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, in the region forming portion R of the center frame 86, a columnar portion 940, a side wall portion 950, and a downstream wall portion 960 are erected from the front surface of the frame plate base 910.

  The columnar portion 940 is formed as a columnar body having a substantially rhombus cross section, and is disposed at an intermediate position between the inner rail 61 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930 (see FIG. 56). Thus, in the upstream portion of the region forming portion R, the first path M1 is partitioned between the columnar body 940 and the inner rail 61, and the second path between the columnar body 940 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. M2 is divided.

  The side wall portion 950 is formed as a wall portion provided in parallel to the inner rail 61 on the downstream side of the columnar body 940, and defines a third path M3 between the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. In this case, in the inner edge defining wall portion 930, the portion facing the side wall portion 950 is closer to the inner rail 61 than the portion facing the columnar body 940.

  As a result, the downstream side of the second path M2 is bent toward the inner rail 61 side (side wall portion 450 side). On the other hand, since the first path M1 and the third path M3 are paths formed along the inner rail 61, they are continuous in a substantially straight line. In addition, the first path M1 and the third path M3 are formed as straight paths which allow the sphere to flow down in the inclined direction in front view.

  A recessed groove 971 is recessed in the front surface of the frame plate base 910. The concave groove 971 is a portion for suppressing the flow-down speed of the gaming ball, and is formed as a concave portion having an inverted triangular cross-sectional shape, and is repeatedly bent to the left and right in a sawtooth shape in a front view. It extends along the path direction of the three paths M3.

  Protrusions 972 are respectively provided on the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. The projection 972 is a portion for suppressing the flow-down speed of the gaming ball, is formed in a substantially semicircular cross section, and extends along the erecting direction of the both wall portions 930 and 950. Each of the protrusions 972 is disposed at a position out of phase with the bent portion of the recessed groove 971 along the path direction of the third path M3.

  The downstream wall portion 960 is formed as a wall portion connected to the downstream end portion of the side wall portion 950, and faces the downstream side of the third path M3. In detail, it forms as a wall part substantially orthogonal to the flow-down direction of 3rd path | route M3. In this case, the inner edge defining wall portion 930 has a portion corresponding to the downstream wall portion 940 formed along the downstream wall portion 960, whereby a fourth portion between the inner edge defining wall portion 930 and the downstream wall portion 940 is formed. The route M4 is divided.

  The width of the first path M1 (the distance between the inner rail 61 and the pillars 640), the width of the second path M2 (the distance between the pillars 640 and the inner edge defining wall 930), the width of the third path M3. Only one game ball can pass through the dimensions (the facing distance between the side wall 950 and the inner edge defining wall 930) and the width of the fourth path M4 (the facing distance between the downstream wall 960 and the inner edge defining wall 930). Each is set to the width dimension. In the present embodiment, the diameter is set to about 1.2 times the diameter of the gaming ball.

  Next, the action of the area forming unit R formed in this way on the game balls flowing down will be described. The game balls guided by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and flowed down from the upper area of the game area are bounced by nails or rolled along the inner edge defining wall 930, and then the first path M1 or the first path M1 It flows into the region forming portion R from any of the two paths M2. The gaming ball flowing down the third path M3 after passing through the first path M1 or the second path M2 collides with the downstream wall portion 960, and flows down to the lower area of the game area through the fourth path M4.

  Here, the region forming portion R is a part of the center frame 86 and is formed of a resin material, so that nails can not be implanted. Therefore, the flow-down speed of the game ball can not be reduced, and it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected on the downstream side of the third path M3 (the joining portion of the third path M3 and the fourth path M4) in the area forming portion R. By the collision with the downstream wall portion 960, it is possible to reduce the flow-down speed of the gaming ball, and to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the flowing gaming ball.

  In this case, the downstream wall portion 960 is erected from the frame plate substrate 910, that is, integrally formed with the center frame 86, so that it can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold. There is no need to perform a complicated operation such as forming as a separate part and fastening and fixing it to the frame plate substrate 910. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, if the third path M3 is formed in a straight line and the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is relatively fast, the downstream wall portion 960 formed of resin material bears the portion where such gaming balls repeatedly collide. , There is a risk of damage. On the other hand, since the downstream wall portion 960 is connected to the downstream side of the side wall portion 950, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be enhanced, and the breakage of the downstream wall portion 960 can be suppressed.

  In this case, an inclined surface 961 that is inclined toward the fourth path M4 is formed at the connection portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960. Thus, the connecting portion between the side wall portion 950 and the downstream wall portion 960 can be formed into a triangular shape in a front view as shown in FIG. 59, and accordingly, the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960 can be increased.

  In addition, when the game ball which has flowed down the third route M3 collides with the downstream wall portion 960 after having collided with the inclined surface 961, it is possible to suppress the game ball from bouncing back in the direction of flowing back the third route M3. It can be made to flow down to the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing its flow rate. Thus, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth route M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the downstream wall 960 can be suppressed also from this point.

  The side wall portion 950 is also a portion integrally formed with the center frame 86 and can be easily formed by resin molding using a mold, so as in the case of the downstream wall portion 960, it is formed as a separate part There is no need to perform complicated operations such as fastening and fixing to the frame plate substrate 910, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition, since the side wall portion 950 serving to divide the third path M3 can also play a role to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion 960, the structure is simplified and the part cost is reduced accordingly. Can.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the inner rail 61 is the one that collides with the nail and then collides, so the speed is relatively slow and this collision is It was difficult to cause damage to the inner rail 61.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the area where the rendering device (the left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed through the opening of the center frame 86 (that is, without the area forming portion R). In order to ensure the maximum, the width of the region forming portion R is set to a narrow dimension (in the present embodiment, the third route M3 is a width dimension that allows passage of only one game ball). That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming unit R. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area formation unit R, it is necessary to largely change the flow-down direction of the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to form the second path M2). In this mode, a part of the gaming balls (the gaming balls flowing down the second path M2) collides with the inner rail 61 at a relatively high speed, which may cause damage to the inner rail 61 (curvature due to the collision). .

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 750 is provided in parallel to the inner rail 61, the side wall portion 950 receives the game ball having flowed down the second path M2 and collides with the inner rail 61. It can be avoided. As a result, the inner rail 61 can be prevented from being damaged (bent due to collision).

  That is, it is conceivable that the inner rail 61 also serves to divide the third path M3 without forming the side wall portion 750, but in this case, it is necessary to avoid the collision of the game ball with the inner rail 61. Therefore, the width can not be narrowed on the upstream side of the region forming portion R, and the opening (inner edge defining wall portion 930) of the center frame 86 has to be disposed in the direction away from the inner rail 61. Therefore, the area | region which can visually recognize a presentation apparatus (left rotation unit 700) directly reduces that much. Therefore, in the present embodiment in which the side wall portion 750 is arranged in parallel to the inner rail 61, as a result, an area in which the rendering device (left rotation unit 700) can be directly viewed can be secured to the maximum extent.

  As described above, since the side wall portion 750 is integrally formed as a part of the center frame 86 made of a light transmitting material, from the light emitter on the back side of the center frame 86 (side wall portion 950, concave groove 971, etc.) It can function as a light guide for guiding the emitted light P to the game area. For example, the light P emitted from the back side and introduced into the side wall portion 950 is guided to the standing end surface (upper surface in FIG. 60) of the side wall portion 950 and irradiated from the standing end surface. It is possible not only to exert the rendering effect by the light P emitted, but also to irradiate the light P guided to the side of the side wall 950 (the side facing the inner edge defining wall 930) from the side of the side wall 950 can do. As a result, the light is guided to the front surface (upper surface in FIG. 60) of the frame plate base 910 and the side surface (opposing surface with the side wall 950) of the inner edge defining wall 930, and the light P emitted from the upper surface or the side It is possible to exert a rendering effect by the light P that illuminates the area where the ball rolls (the game ball rolls when the game ball rolls).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 950 is juxtaposed to the inner rail 61, the light P emitted from the back side of the center frame 86 and introduced into the side wall portion 750 is the inner rail 61 side (inner edge defining wall Leakage from the side surface opposite to the portion 930 to the outside can be reduced by the inner rail 61. That is, the inner rail 61 can reflect the light P toward the standing end surface or the side surface (the side surface facing the inner edge defining wall portion 930). Therefore, the amount of light that can be emitted from the standing end surface or the side surface of the side wall portion 950 can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the light P guided can be enhanced.

  The light emitter is disposed in the left rotation unit 700 (not shown), and the retracted position of the left rotation unit 700 is the back of the area forming portion R. Therefore, in a state where left rotation unit 700 is disposed at the retracted position, light P emitted from the light emitter is guided through side wall portion 950 while left rotation unit 700 can be visually recognized through region forming portion R. It is possible to make the player visually recognize after having made it. That is, the shape of the left rotation unit 700 visually recognized through the area forming portion R can be associated with the light P emitted from the standing end surface of the side wall portion 950 to make the player visually recognize, as a result, The effect of light P can be enhanced.

  Here, as described above, the protrusions 972 are respectively provided to protrude from the facing surfaces of the side wall portion 950 and the inner edge defining wall portion 930. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third path M3 can be made to collide with the projection 972 to inhibit the flow down. As a result, in the area forming unit R where the nail can not be implanted, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be reduced to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down.

  In this case, the protrusions 972 protruding from the side wall portion 950 and the protrusions 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall portion 930 are disposed out of phase with each other along the path direction of the third path M3. That is, they are arranged in a staggered manner on the left and right opposing surfaces. Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the third path M3, the gaming ball can be made to collide with the left and right protrusions 972 alternately, and the gaming ball can meander to the left and right. This makes it easy to slow down the flow of the gaming ball, and gives the gaming ball a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction (the direction of the third path M3) to give a change to the movement of the gaming ball. Can.

  Furthermore, on the front surface of the frame plate base 910, as described above, a recessed groove 971 formed in a saw blade shape in a front view is recessedly provided. Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the third path M3, the gaming ball can be guided along the inner surface of the recessed groove 971 to meander to the left and right. Therefore, this also makes it easy to slow down the flow-down speed of the gaming ball, and also imparts to the gaming ball a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction (the third route M3 path direction) to change the movement of the gaming ball Can be given.

  When light emitted from the back side of the area forming portion R is guided toward the front of the game area, the concave groove 971 recessed in the front of the frame plate base 910 is used to diffuse or collect the light. Since it can be used as a lens to be made to light, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by the guided light.

  In this case, the bent portion of the concave groove 971 has a phase along the path direction of the third path M3 against the projection 972 protruding from the side wall 950 and the projection 972 protruding from the inner edge defining wall 930. Are placed out of alignment. Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the third path M3, the gaming balls guided by the inner surface of the concave groove 971 and meandering to the left and right can be made to easily collide with the left and right projections 972, and the concave groove A synergetic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by 971 and the action by the protrusion 972. As a result, it is possible to make the flow speed of the gaming ball slower and to make the change of the movement of the gaming ball larger.

  In addition, since these projections 972 and the concave groove 971 slow down the flow-down speed of the gaming ball flowing down the third path M3, it is possible to suppress the damage of the downstream wall portion 960 and to play the game from the third path M3 to the fourth path M4. Contributing to smooth guidance of the ball.

  In addition, the end side of the recessed groove 971 (a portion provided parallel to the inclined surface 961) has its extension direction overlapping the downstream wall portion 960 and points to the outlet of the third path M3. As a result, the gaming ball guided to the end side of the recessed groove 971 can collide with the downstream wall portion 960 from an oblique direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing back in the direction of back flow of the third path M3, and to flow it down toward the outlet of the third path M3 while reducing its flow-down speed. Thus, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the fourth route M4, and the burden on the downstream wall portion 960 can be reduced.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 2013 according to the second embodiment. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 2013 in the second embodiment, the formation range of the area forming portion R is expanded to the substantially top of the game area with respect to the game board 13 in the first embodiment. As a result, the rendering device (in this embodiment, the central rotation unit 400, the central rotation unit 500, and the left rotation unit 700) is directly connected via the opening of the center frame 2086 (that is, not via the area forming portion R). The visible area can be further enlarged than in the first embodiment.

  In the region forming member R, the formation of the columnar body 940 (see FIG. 59) is omitted, and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is extended along the outer rail 62. As a result, in the area above the return ball preventing member 68, the fifth path M5 and the sixth path M6 are defined between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

  The facing distance between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 is set to a size larger than twice and smaller than three times the diameter of the gaming ball. In this embodiment, it is set to about 2.5 times the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, while forming passages (fifth path M5 and sixth path M6) between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930, which allow game balls to pass each other without collision, the center frame 2086 is formed. It is possible to maximize the above-mentioned area in which the rendering device can be directly viewed through the opening.

  Further, the rotational axis of the wind turbine WM is disposed substantially at the center between the outer rail 62 and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 facing each other. As a result, the game balls can pass between the outer rail 62 and the rotation axis of the wind turbine WM, and between the rotation axis of the wind turbine WM and the inner edge defining wall portion 2930.

  According to the area forming unit R formed in this manner, the gaming balls, which are fired from the ball firing unit and guided to the upper area of the gaming area by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, are guided along the outer rails 62. Thus, after passing the windmill WM, the fifth route M5 is moved. In this case, by setting the firing intensity to a value larger than the reference value, it is possible to make the game ball flow down to the right region beyond the upper top of the game area, while setting the firing intensity to a value smaller than the reference value By doing this, the game ball can be made to flow down (move the sixth path M6) along the inner edge defining wall portion 2930 without exceeding the top of the game area. The gaming ball having moved the sixth route M6 flows down to the third route M3 after passing the wind turbine WM.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 67. In the right rotation unit 600 according to the first embodiment, the case where the two members of the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 640 (connection displacement member 642) can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 654 will be described. However, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment includes three members of a first displacement member 3630, a second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642), and a third displacement member 3660 in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 654. Is made displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 3600. 62 and 63, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 3600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right rotation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is configured such that the third displacement member 3660 slidably disposed on one end side (upper side in FIG. 62) of the first displacement member 3630 is slidable. Prepare. As will be described later, the tip of the connection pin 3641 d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is a sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 3630. The third displacement member 3660 can be displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 (slide displacement) by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 3630. .

  The through groove 3636 is a groove-shaped opening formed by being curved in a circular arc centering on the support shaft 632, and the groove width is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. Be done. Therefore, the connection pin 3641d is displaced along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, whereby rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 is permitted.

  The connection pin 3641 d is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, which is inserted into the through groove 3636, and the height at which the connection pin 3641 d protrudes from the front surface of the first displacement member 3630 is set. That is, in the assembled state, the tip end side of the connection pin 3641 d can be inserted into a sliding groove 3661 described later of the third displacement member 3660 through the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630.

  A sliding groove 3661 is recessed on the back surface of the third displacement member 3660, and a slide rail 3662 is disposed above the sliding groove 3661. As described above, the sliding groove 3661 is a recessed groove through which the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is The diameter is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641.

  The slide rail 3662 is a telescopic linear guide mechanism interposed between the first displacement member 3630 and the third displacement member 3660, and the back side rail fixed to the first displacement member 3630 and the back side thereof It consists of a front side rail to which relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the rail. The third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by the slide rail 3662 being expanded and contracted by relative displacement of the back side rail and the front side rail in the longitudinal direction.

  When the third displacement member 3660 is disposed on the front side of the first displacement member 3630, only a part of the sliding groove 3661 is superimposed on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 3630 (with the sliding groove 3661 The through groove 3636 is crossed). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 3630 and displacing the connection pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 3660 can be slide-displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 of 3660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 by the connection pin 3641 d).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67, the operation of the right rotation unit 3600 will be described. 64 and 65 are front views of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 66 and 67 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 3600 in each state at the time of doing.

  64 (a) to 64 (c), and FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), and FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c) from FIG. 67 (a) to FIG. and c) are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 64 (c) is the same as FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 66 (c) is the same as FIG. 67 (a).

  Here, in the third embodiment, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 3630, the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member Since the displacement modes of the first displacement member 3630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), in the retracted position, the slide rail 3662 of the third displacement member 3660 is shortened, and the connection pin of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 3641d is positioned on one end side of the slide groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (end on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, right side in FIG. 66). In this case, the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 is the dimension h1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 66 (a)), it passes through the states shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 66 (b), as shown in FIGS. As shown in 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 is rotated in the overhang direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

  Thus, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 3660. Therefore, since the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 does not slide on the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660, the third displacement member 3660 is also integrated with the first displacement member 3630. Be displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIG. 64 (a) to FIG. 64 (c) and FIG. 66 (a) to FIG. 66 (c), the length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 Is maintained at the dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), the first displacement member 3630 is in FIG. 67 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630 while being maintained in the shown state (position), and the state shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b) is shown. After passing, it is placed at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 65 (c) and FIG. 67 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is determined by connecting the connecting pin 3641d to the other end side of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (support shaft The rotation in the direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 67 (a)) is made to slide toward the end portion on the side closer to the shaft support hole 641a and the shaft support hole 641a, left side in FIG. 67 (a).

  Therefore, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, upper side in FIG. 67A) is connected by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. The slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63) is pushed up in the extending direction. As a result, the third displacement member 3660 is slidingly displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630, and in the sections shown in FIGS. 65 (a) through 65 (c) and 67 (a) through 67 (c), The length from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the tip of the third displacement member 3660 is changed (increased) to the dimension h3 through the dimension h1 through the dimension h2 (h1 <h2 <h3).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 67 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and 67 (c), the first displacement While the member 3630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 67 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 in FIG. After passing through the state shown in b) and FIG. 67 (b), it is arranged in the state shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a).

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 is performed by connecting the connecting pin 3641 d to one end side of the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660 (the end far from the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641 a 67 (c) and the rotation in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 67 (c)).

  Accordingly, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 3661 in the third displacement member 3660 (the inner wall surface on the side closer to the support shaft 632 and the shaft support hole 641a, lower side in FIG. 67C) is by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641. The third displacement member 3660 is slide-displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630 to be pushed downward in a direction to shorten the slide rail 3662 (see FIG. 63), and from the base end of the first displacement member 3630 to the third displacement member 3660 The length to the tip is reduced to the dimension h1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 66 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 66 (c), the first displacement member 3630 rotates around the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the rising direction as a rotation axis, and is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 3630. Therefore, the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is the sliding groove 3661 of the third displacement member 3660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 3630.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 3660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, and the first displacement member 3630, the second displacement member 3640, and The third displacement member 3660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 64 and 66), and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 3630 are maintained while the first displacement member 3630 is stopped. A configuration (see FIGS. 65 and 67) can be formed in which the third displacement members 3660 are individually displaced relative to one another.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. In the third embodiment, the case is described where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first displacement member 3630, but the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment The third displacement member 4660 is rotatable relative to the one displacement member 4630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 68 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 4600. 68 and 69, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 4600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment includes a third displacement member 4660 rotatably supported at the front end of the first displacement member 4630 (upper side in FIG. 68). . As will be described later, the tip of the connection pin 3641 d of the second displacement member 3640 (driven member 3641) is a sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 through the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 4630. The third displacement member 4660 can be displaced (rotated) relative to the first displacement member 4630 by rotating the driven member 3641 relative to the first displacement member 4630.

  A sliding groove 4661 is recessed on the rear surface of the third displacement member 4660, and a rotating shaft 4662 is protruded above the sliding groove 4661. As described above, the sliding groove 4661 is a concave groove through which the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641 is slidably inserted, and is formed linearly with a constant groove width, and the groove width is The diameter is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641.

  The rotation shaft 4662 is a shaft-like body inserted into a shaft support hole 4637 formed on one end side (the upper side in FIG. 68) of the first displacement member 4630, and via the rotation shaft 4662 and the shaft support hole 4637, The third displacement member 4660 is rotatably supported by the first displacement member 4630. In addition, a holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 4637 is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the rotation shaft 4662, whereby the detachment of the rotation shaft 4662 from the shaft support hole 4637 is restricted.

  In a state where the third displacement member 4660 is disposed (axially supported) on the front side of the first displacement member 4630, only a part of the sliding groove 4661 is superimposed on the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 4630 (sliding The moving groove 4661 and the through groove 3636 are crossed). Therefore, by rotating the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 4630 and displacing the connection pin 3641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the connection pin 3641d is moved to the third displacement member. The third displacement member 4660 can be rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630 by acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the 4660 (pressing the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 by the connection pin 3641 d).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 73, the operation of the right rotation unit 4600 will be described. 70 and 71 are front views of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the overhang position, and FIGS. 72 and 73 operate between the retracted position and the overhang position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 4600 in each state at the time of doing.

  70 (a) through 70 (c) are shown in FIGS. 72 (a) through 72 (c), and FIGS. 71 (a) through 71 (c) are shown in FIG. 73 (a) through FIG. and c) are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 70 (c) is the same as FIG. 71 (a) and FIG. 72 (c) is the same as FIG. 73 (a).

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 4630, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and the third displacement member Since the displacement modes of the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 3640 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a), at the retracted position, an imaginary line L1 passing through the axial center of the support hole 4637 (rotation shaft 4662) and along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 4630 An angle formed by passing through the axial center of the shaft support hole 4637 (the rotation shaft 4662) and the imaginary line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the third displacement member 4660 is a crossing angle θ1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 72 (a)), the states shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 72 (b) are passed to FIGS. 70 (c) and 70. As shown in 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation shaft 631 as the rotation shaft. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630, and is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

  Therefore, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the third displacement member 4660, and the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 in the second displacement member 3640 is a sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The third displacement member 4660 is also displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630. That is, in the sections shown in FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle made with L2) is maintained at the crossing angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 73 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is in FIG. 73 (a). The second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while being maintained in the shown state (position), and the state shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and 73 (b) is shown. After passing, it is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 71 (c) and FIG. 73 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 3641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 3641 is determined by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 (the direction of movement of the connecting pin 3641d). The inner wall surface, the upper side in FIG. 73 (a), is in the direction of being pushed up by the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641.

  As a result, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and in the section shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c) and 73 (a) to 73 (c). The angle between the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 through the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 < θ2 <θ1).

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 73 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 73 (c), the first displacement While the member 4630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 73 (c), the second displacement member 3640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630 in FIG. After passing through the state shown in b) and FIG. 73 (b), the state shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 73 (a) is arranged.

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 3641 about the support shaft 632 is performed by the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660 (the inner wall surface of the connection pin 3641 d in the direction of travel, FIG. ) Is pushed down by the connecting pin 3641 d of the driven member 3641. Thus, the third displacement member 4660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle between the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) intersects It is increased to the angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 72 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 70 (c) and 72 (c), the first displacement member 4630 rotates around the rotation shaft 631. It is rotated in the rising direction as the rotation axis, and is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 72 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 4630. Therefore, the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 3641 is a sliding groove 4661 of the third displacement member 4660. The second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 3640, and The third displacement member 4660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and the second displacement member 3640 and the first displacement member 4630 are maintained while the first displacement member 4630 is stopped. A configuration (see FIGS. 71 and 73) can be formed in which the third displacement members 4660 are individually displaced relative to one another.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the third embodiment, the case where the right rotation unit 3600 is formed so that the third displacement member 3660 is slidably displaceable with respect to the first displacement member 3630 is described, but the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment The third displacing member 5660 can be extended and retracted in the front-rear direction with respect to the 1 displacing member 5630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 5600. 74 and 75, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 5600 (the back base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, in the right rotation unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment, the third displacement member 5660 is in front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 74) of the first displacement member 5630 (for example, FIG. a) It is arranged to be able to appear and retreat in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface). As will be described later, the tip end of the connection pin 5641d of the second displacement member 5640 (driven member 5641) is a sliding inclined portion of the third displacement member 5660 via the through groove 3636 formed in the first displacement member 5630. The third displacing member 5660 is displaced relative to the first displacing member 5630 by being abutted against the back surface of the 5663 and the driven member 5641 is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacing member 5630 You can make it happen.

  The first displacement member 5630 is provided with a pair of sliding holes 5638. The slide hole 5638 is a hole having a circular cross section through which a slide guide rod 5664 of the third displacement member 5660 to be described later is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is set to a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the slide guide rod 5664 Ru. That is, the sliding guide rod 5664 is supported so as to be slidable along the direction in which the sliding hole 5638 is bored, whereby the third displacement member 5660 is supported so as to be able to protrude and retract relative to the first displacement member 5630. Be done.

  The connection pin 5641 d is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section, which is inserted into the through groove 3636, and is set to a protruding height at which the tip is positioned in the through groove 3636. That is, in the assembled state, in the through groove 3636 of the first displacement member 5630, the tip of the connection pin 5641d is abutted against the sliding slope 5663 of the third displacement member 5660.

  A sliding inclined portion 5663 and a sliding guide rod 5664 are provided on the back of the third displacement member 5660 in a protruding manner. As described above, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is a plate-like portion on which the connection pin 5641 d of the driven member 5641 slides, and the back surface on which the connection pin 5641 d slides is one end (right side in FIG. 75) It is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward to the other end (left side in FIG. 75). That is, the protruding height of the sliding inclined portion 5663 from the third displacement member 5660 is gradually increased from one end to the other end. Therefore, when the connecting pin 5641d is slid from the one end to the other end (or in the opposite direction) of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 with the rotation of the driven member 5641, the driven member The distance between the 5641 and the third displacement member 5660 is expanded (reduced).

  Here, the slide inclined portion 5663 is set to have a plate thickness slightly smaller than the groove width of the through groove 3636, and is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the through groove 3636 in a rear view shape. That is, in the assembled state, the protruding leading end side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636 in a state where it can slide in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the third displacement member 5660 is advanced and retracted in the front-rear direction with respect to the first displacement member 5630, the sliding of the third displacement member 5660 is performed not only by the sliding guide rod 5664 but also by the sliding inclined portion 5663. Since the movement can be supported (i.e., supported at three places), the third displacement member 5660 can be prevented from tilting forward, and its projection and retraction operations can be stabilized.

  The sliding guide rod 5664 is, as described above, a shaft-like body having a circular cross section, which is slidably supported by the sliding hole 5638 of the first displacement member 5630. The holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the holder is fastened and fixed, whereby the removal of the sliding guide rod 5664 from the sliding hole 5638 is restricted.

  In this case, the biasing member S formed as a coil spring is interposed between the holding body C and the first displacement member 5630 in a state where the elastic compression is performed (a state in which the overall length is shortened). The elastic recovery force of the biasing member S acts in the direction of moving the holder C away from the rear surface of the first displacement member 5630. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is urged in the direction approaching the first displacement member 5630, and the sliding slope 5663 is inserted into the through groove 3636.

  Therefore, by rotating the driven member 5641 about the support shaft 632 of the first displacement member 5630 and displacing the connection pin 5641d along the extending direction of the through groove 3636, the tip of the connection pin 5641d can be The third displacement member 5660 is moved back and forth with respect to the first displacement member 5630 by causing the third displacement member 5660 to act on the back surface of the slide slope portion 5663 of the three displacement member 5660 (slide the connecting pin 5641 d along the back surface of the slide slope portion 5663). You can make it appear in the direction.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80, the operation of the right rotation unit 5600 will be described. 76 and 77 are front views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 78 and 79 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state at the time of doing. 80 and 81 are top views of the right rotation unit 5600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position.

  FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c) correspond to FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c) and FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) and FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c). Is the same state as FIG. 79 (a) to FIG. 79 (c) and FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c). In this case, FIG. 76 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (a), FIG. 78 (c) is FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 80 (c) is the same as FIG. 81 (a). is there.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 5630, the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and the third displacement member Since the displacement modes of the first displacement member 5630 and the second displacement member 5640 are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 80 (a), in the retracted position, the third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630, and the second displacement member 5640 is formed. The connection pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 at one end of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (the end at which the height at which the third displacement member 5660 projects from the back surface is low, FIG. 78 (a And the right side of FIG. 80 (a)). In this case, the projection amount of the first displacement member 5630 from the front surface to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660 is a dimension J1.

  From this state, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 78 (a)), the state shown in FIGS. 76 (b), 78 (b) and 80 (b) is obtained. As shown in 76 (c), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated in the overhanging direction with the rotation axis 631 as the rotation axis. In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, but is displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630.

  Thus, the second displacement member 5640 does not displace relative to the third displacement member 5660. Therefore, the third displacement member 5660 is also integral with the first displacement member 5630 because the connection pin 5641 d of the driven member 5641 in the second displacement member 5640 does not slide on the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 And become displaced. That is, in the sections shown in FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (c), FIG. 78 (a) to FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 80 (a) to FIG. The first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the closest state (the projection amount is set to the dimension J1).

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 67 (a)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a), the first displacement member 5630 While maintaining the state (position) shown in FIG. 79 (a), the second displacement member 5640 (connection displacement member 642) is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 5630, as shown in FIGS. 77 (b) and 79 (b). After passing through the state shown in b) and FIG. 81 (b), the sheet is placed at the overhanging position shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c).

  In this case, when the driven member 5641 is rotated about the support shaft 632, the rotation of the driven member 5641 is performed by moving the tip of the connection pin 5641d to the other side of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660. Direction of sliding toward the end side (the end on the side where the height of the third displacement member 5660 from the back surface is high, the upper left side of FIG. 79 (a), the left side of FIG. 81 (a)) Counterclockwise) rotation.

  Therefore, the rear surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 is pushed forward (upper side in FIG. 81) by the connection pin 5641 d of the driven member 5641. As a result, the third displacement member 5660 is projected forward with respect to the first displacement member 5630, as shown in FIGS. 77 (a) through 77 (c) and 79 (a) through 79 (c) and 81 (a). In the section shown in FIG. 81C to FIG. 81C, the amount of projection from the front of the first displacement member 5630 to the front of the third displacement member 5660 is changed (increased) from dimension J1 to dimension J3 through dimension J2 (J1 <J2 <J3).

  Contrary to the case described above, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 79 (c)) from the states shown in FIGS. 77 (c), 79 (c) and 81 (c). Then, while the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 79C, the second displacement member 5640 (connection displacement member 642) is in the opposite direction relative to the first displacement member 5630. 77 (b), 79 (b) and 81 (b), and then placed in the states shown in FIGS. 77 (a), 79 (a) and 81 (a). Ru.

  In this case, the rotation of the driven member 5641 about the support shaft 632 is performed by connecting the connecting pin 5641 d to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 of the third displacement member 5660 (protrusion from the back surface of the third displacement member 5660) It is considered that rotation is made in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (c)) to slide to the end on the lower side of the installation height, the lower right side in FIG.

  Therefore, by moving the connecting pin 5641d to one end side of the back surface of the sliding inclined portion 5663 in the third displacement member 5660, the sliding inclined portion 5663 is retracted backward (backwardly) by that amount. The third displacement member 5660 is brought close to the first displacement member 5630 by the elastic recovery force of the biasing member S, and from the front surface of the first displacement member 5630 to the front surface of the third displacement member 5660. The amount of protrusion is reduced to dimension J1.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 78) from the states shown in FIGS. 76 (c), 78 (c) and 80 (c), the first displacement member 5630 is rotated about the rotation shaft 631 in the erecting direction, and is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 80 (a). In this case, as described above, the second displacement member 5640 is not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630. Therefore, the connection pin 5641d of the driven member 5641 is a sliding slope portion of the third displacement member 5660. The second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 5630 because they do not slide on the back surface of the 5663.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second displacement member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are not displaced relative to the first displacement member 5630, and the first displacement member 5630, the second displacement member 5640, and The third displacement member 5660 is integrally displaced (see FIGS. 76, 78, and 81), and the first displacement member 5630 is maintained in the stopped state while the second displacement is performed relative to the first displacement member 5630. A form (see FIGS. 77, 79 and 81) can be formed in which the member 5640 and the third displacement member 5660 are individually displaced relative to each other. In particular, according to the fifth embodiment, since the displacement direction of the third displacement member 5660 is the front-back direction, interference with the displacement in another adjacent unit can be avoided, and the movable range in the other unit is It can be secured. Further, the third displacement member 5660 can be brought closer to the player by the forward protrusion of the third displacement member 5660, and an effect can be performed with force.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. In the third embodiment, the right rotation unit 3600 is formed such that the period in which the second displacement member 3640 is displaced coincides with the period in which the third displacement member 3660 is displaced. In the right rotation unit 6600, the period in which the second displacement member 6640 is displaced is different from the period in which the third displacement member 4660 is displaced. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 6600. 82 and 83, a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 6600 (the rear base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is the third displacement member on the front end side (the upper side in FIG. 82) of the first displacement member 4630 as in the fourth embodiment. 4660 is rotatably supported and the driven member 6641 is relatively rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, whereby the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are subjected to the first displacement. Relative displacement (rotation) with respect to member 4630.

  In this case, in the fourth embodiment, the connection groove 641c of the driven member 3641 is formed in a straight line, while the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 in the sixth embodiment has an action section 6641c1 as described later. And the non-interference section 6641 c 2 so as to be bent in a generally U-shape in a front view.

  Thus, while the connection pin 643 passes through the action section 6641c1, while both the second displacement member 6640 (connection displacement member 642) and the third displacement member 4660 are rotated with respect to the first displacement member 4630, the connection pin While the second displacement member 6640 is stopped, only the third displacement member 4660 can be rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630 while the second displacement member 6640 is in the non-interference section 6641 c 2.

  The connection groove 6641 c is a groove-shaped opening through which the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted, and an action section 6641 c 1 extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 661, It is extended along the width direction of the driven member 661 while curving in an arc shape in which the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) side is concave (that is, a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape concentric with the rotation shaft 631) And a non-interference section 6641 c 2).

  As described later, the action section 6641c1 is a section that exerts an effect on the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642, and the non-interference section 6641c2 is a section that does not interfere with the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the operation of the right rotation unit 6600 will be described. 84 and 85 are front views of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 86 and 87 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the right rotation unit 6600 in each state at the time of doing.

  84 (a) to 84 (c) are shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (c), and FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c) are shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c). and c) are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 84 (c) is the same as FIG. 85 (a) and FIG. 86 (c) is the same as FIG. 87 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment is substantially the same as the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment except that the shape of the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 is different. Since the same part is formed, the description of the same part is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 86, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 86A) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 6640 (the driven member 6641) with respect to the first displacement member 4630 is not formed. The second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 4630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIG. 84 (a) to FIG. 84 (c) and FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 86 (c), as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line The angle between L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 85A and 87A, the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is the start end of the action section 6641c1 in the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641 (action section 6641c and non-interference section 6641c2 It is located at the end opposite to the connecting portion (right side in FIG. 87 (a)). In this case, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is located at the connection portion of the action section 635a and the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 87 (a), the first displacement member 4630 is in FIG. 87 (a). The driven member 6641 whose inner wall surface of the second groove 641b is pushed downward (downward in FIG. 87A) by the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 while maintaining the state (position) shown is the support shaft 632 As a center, the connecting groove 6641c is rotated in the direction of raising (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (b)).

  By the rotation of the driven member 6641, the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is pushed upward by the inner wall surface of the action section 6641c1 while sliding on the action section 6641c1 in the connection groove 6641c of the driven member 6641. As a result, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 as a rotation center in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b (clockwise in FIG. 87 (a)). As a result, the connecting pin 643 is reached at the connecting portion of the action section 6641c1 and the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connecting groove 6641c, and the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b) (the decorative portion 642b is lifted to the top) State) is formed.

  In this case, the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is disposed on the same side (left side in FIG. 87B) as the decorative portion 642b (that is, the center of gravity of the connection displacement member 642) with respect to the pivot support hole 642a. The connection groove 6641 c of the driven member 6641 is formed so that the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641 c 2 can support the connection pin 643 from the lower side. That is, the non-interference section 6641 c 2 is formed as a surface where the inner wall surface intersects with the moving direction of the connection pin 643 at a predetermined angle when the connection displacement member 642 rotates around the pivot hole 642 a by its own weight. Be done.

  Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 85B and 87B, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 from the lower side (restricting the movement of the connection pin 643), the connection displacement member It can regulate that 642 rotates by its own weight centering on axial support hole 642a. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in the stopped state with respect to the first displacement member 4630.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 85B and 87B, as described above, in the third displacement member 4660, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 is pushed up by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 6641. Thus, the first displacement member 4630 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 4630, and the angle between the first displacement member 4630 (the imaginary line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (the imaginary line L2) changes to the intersection angle θ2 ( Decreased) (θ2 <θ1).

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 87 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 87 (b), the inside of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 4660 is The wall surface is pushed up by the connection pin 3641d of the driven member 6641, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the first displacement member 4630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 4660 (virtual line) The angle formed with L2) is changed (decreased) to the crossing angle θ3 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1).

  In this case, since the non-interference section 6641c2 of the connection groove 6641c is curved in an arc shape centering on the support shaft 632 (axial support hole 641a), the driven member 6641 can be used as the support shaft 632 (axial support hole 641a). Even when it is rotated counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 87 (b) as the center, the inner wall surface of the non-interference section 6641c2 supports the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 from below, and the connection displacement member 642 carries the pivoting hole 642a. Although it restricts rotation by its own weight as the center, it does not push up the connection pin 643 upward, and therefore it does not rotate the connection displacement member 642 in the direction of lifting the decorative portion 642b around the support shaft 633. That is, the connection displacement member 642 can be maintained in a substantially stopped state, and the rotation of the third displacement member 4660 can be continued.

  Contrary to the case described above, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 87 (c)) from the state shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c), the connection displacement member While the connecting pin 643 of 642 passes through the non-interference section 6641 c 2, the connecting displacement member 642 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIGS. 85 (c) and 87 (c) (FIG. 85 (b)) And FIG. 87B), while the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 passes the action section 6641c1, the decoration pin 643 is lowered by the connection pin 643 being pushed down by the inner wall surface of the action section 6641c1. The connection displacement member 642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 in the direction.

  The operation aspect of the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment thus formed will be described with reference to FIG. 88 in comparison with the operation aspect of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment.

  88 (a) to 88 (c) are front schematic views of the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 88 (d) to 88 (g) are right rotation units in the sixth embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of 6600, and each state at the time of operating between a retreat position and a projection position is illustrated, respectively.

  In the right rotation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are not relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630, and the first displacement member 4630 and the The form (form between FIG. 88 (a) and FIG. 88 (b)) which displaces the 2 displacement member 3640 and the 3rd displacement member 4660 integrally, and maintaining the 1st displacement member 4630 in a halt condition, Forming a form (form between FIG. 88 (b) and FIG. 88 (c)) in which the second displacement member 3640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630. it can. In this case, in the latter mode, the period of displacement (the beginning and the end) of the second displacement member 3640 is substantially the same as the period of the displacement (the beginning and the end) of the third displacement member 4660.

  On the other hand, in the right rotation unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment, the first displacement member 4630, the second displacement member 6640, and the third displacement member 4660 are integrally displaced (FIGS. 88 (d) and 88 (e)). And a form in which the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 are relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member 4630 while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 in the stopped state (FIG. 88). (E) and FIG. 88 (f)), and while maintaining the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640 in the stopped state, with respect to the first displacement member 4630 and the second displacement member 6640. Thus, it is possible to form a form in which the third displacement member 4660 is relatively displaced (a form between FIG. 88 (f) and FIG. 88 (g)).

  That is, in the sixth embodiment, the period of displacement (the beginning and the end) of the second displacement member 6640 and the period of the displacement (the beginning and the end) of the third displacement member 4660 can be made different. More specifically, while simultaneously starting the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660, the timing of stopping the displacement of the second displacement member 6640 and the third displacement member 4660 is shifted (second displacement member 6640) The first displacement member 4660 can be stopped first, and then the displacement of the third displacement member 4660 can be stopped.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In the third embodiment, the connection displacement member 642 and the third displacement member 3660 are disposed on the first displacement member 3630 so as to be displaceable, respectively, to form the right rotation unit 3600. However, in the seventh embodiment, In the right rotation unit 7600, the third displacement member 7660 is disposed displaceably in the first displacement member 7630, and the connection displacement member 642 is disposed displaceably in the third displacement member 7660. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 90 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 7600. 89 and 90 illustrate a state in which a part of the right rotation unit 7600 (the back base 610 and the front base 620) is assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the right rotation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment has a third displacement member 7660 rotatably supported at the front end of the first displacement member 7630 (upper side in FIG. 89). The connection displacement member 642 is rotatably supported by the third displacement member 7660. As described later, when the driven member 7641 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated. Along with this, the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated while changing the position of the rotation center with a curved locus.

  The first displacement member 7630 has a notch 7639 cut out at the edge on one end side (upper side in FIG. 90), and the space created by the notch 7639 is a support shaft 7665 of the third displacement member 7660 described later. Space for A connection groove 7641 c is bored in the driven member 7641 of the second displacement member 7640. The connection groove 7641 c is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is slidably inserted.

  The groove width of the connection groove 7641 c is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the connection pin 643. Further, the total length (groove length) of the connection groove 7641c is longer than that of the connection groove 641c in the fourth embodiment. Thereby, the relative displacement amount (relative rotation angle) of the connection displacement member 642 with respect to the driven member 7641 can be secured.

  A support shaft 7665 is provided on the back of the third displacement member 7660 in a protruding manner. The support shaft 7665 is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section, which is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 642. The connection displacement member 642 is a third displacement member 7660 via the support shaft 7665 and the shaft support hole 642a. Rotatably supported on the back of the

  A holding body C having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 642a is fastened and fixed to the axial end surface of the support shaft 7665, whereby the detachment of the instruction shaft 7665 from the shaft support hole 642a is restricted. In the support shaft 7665, a large diameter portion is formed on the base side, a small diameter portion smaller than the large diameter portion is formed on the distal end side, and the small diameter portion is inserted into the shaft support hole 642a. That is, the large diameter portion is a portion for bulking the connection displacement member 642 from the back surface of the third displacement member 7660, and the bulking of the large diameter portion causes the connection displacement member 642 to move relative to the driven member 7641 The positional relationship in FIG. 91A (in the direction perpendicular to the sheet) is set to be the same as in the case of the fourth embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, the operation of the right rotation unit 7600 will be described. 91 and 92 are front views of the right rotation unit 7600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 93 and 94 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of right rotation unit 7600 in each state at the time of doing.

  91 (a) to 91 (c), FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c), and FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c) are FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (c). and c) are in the same state. In this case, FIG. 91 (c) is the same as FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 93 (c) is the same as FIG. 94 (a).

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, when the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 slides on the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 7630, the first displacement member 7630, the second displacement member 7640, and the third displacement member Since the displacement modes of the first displacement member 7630 and the third displacement member 7660 are the same as in the fourth embodiment described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, when the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 93A) from the retracted position shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 93 (a), As described above, while the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes the action section 635a of the first groove 635, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 7640 (the driven member 7641) with respect to the first displacement member 7630 is not formed. The second displacement member 7640 and the third displacement member 7660 are displaced integrally with the first displacement member 7630.

  That is, in the sections shown in FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (c) and FIG. 93 (a) to FIG. 93 (c), as in the case of the fourth embodiment described above, the first displacement members 7630 (virtual lines The angle between L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtual line L2) is maintained at the intersection angle θ1.

  When the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 94 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 94 (a), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is in the first groove 635. The driven member 7641 rotates the support shaft 632 (the shaft support hole 641a) while the first displacement member 7630 is maintained in the state (position) shown in FIG. 94 (a) by passing through the non-interference section 635b. As shown in FIG. 94A, the connection groove 7641c and the connection pin 3641d are rotated in a direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 94A).

  Thus, the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 4661 in the third displacement member 7660 is connected to the connection pin 3641 d of the driven member 7641, and the connection pin 643 of the connection displacement member 642 is connected to the inner wall surface of the connection groove 7641 c of the driven member 7641. , Are respectively pushed upward (upper side in FIG. 94 (a)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 94, the third displacement member 7660 is rotated relative to the first displacement member 7630, and the first displacement member 7630 (virtual line L1) and the third displacement member 7660 (virtually The angle formed with the line L2) is changed (decreased) from the crossing angle θ1 to the crossing angle θ3 through the crossing angle θ2 (θ3 <θ2 <θ1), and the connecting displacement member 642 is the support shaft 7665 (axial support hole 642a 94 (a) is rotated clockwise to lift the decorative portion 642b upward.

  In this case, since the third displacement member 7660 is rotated in the direction of lifting the support shaft 7665 upward about the rotation shaft 4662, the third displacement member 7660 is utilized by utilizing the rotation of the third displacement member 7660. The connection displacement member 642 itself, which is pivotally supported by the support shaft 7665, can be lifted upward.

  That is, according to the seventh embodiment, while the connecting displacement member 642 is rotated with respect to the third displacement member 7660 around the support shaft 7665 as a rotation center, an arc-shaped locus with respect to the first displacement member 7630 It can be displaced (lifted) upward. As a result, the displacement of the connection displacement member 642 (decorative portion 642b) can be interlocked with the displacement of the third displacement member 7660 to make a more complicated aspect, and the amount by which the decorative portion 642b projects upward (first An intersection angle θ4 which is an angle formed by an imaginary line L3 passing through the axial center of the pivotal support hole 642a (support shaft 7665) and along the longitudinal direction of the connection displacement member 64 with respect to the displacement member 4630 (imaginary line L1) Can be expanded to have a posture in which it is made to project further upward.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 105. In the first embodiment, the mode of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the same in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retraction position. In the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, the aspect of the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the forward path and the return path. It is different. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 96 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 8700. FIG. 97 is a front view of the guide portion 8773. In FIGS. 95 and 96, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 8700 (the back base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, in the left rotation unit 8700 in the eighth embodiment, a guide portion 8773 is recessed in the front of one end side (upper side in FIG. 95) of the second connecting member 8770 in the longitudinal direction. As described later, the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circumferential path, and the connection pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is guided along the guide portion 8773 so that the relative position of the second displacement member 740 to the first displacement member 730. The form of displacement can be different between the forward path and the return path.

  The connecting pin 8744a is a shaft-like member having a circular cross section, which protrudes from the rear surface of the flange member 8744 and is arranged eccentrically from the axial center of the rotating shaft 741 and has a diameter slightly larger than the groove width of the guide portion 8773. By being set to a small size, it can be moved along the guide portion 8773. An elastic body (not shown) formed of a coil spring is accommodated in the second connection member 8770 in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic body is used to connect the connection pin 8744a to the second connection member 8770. It acts in a direction to project from the back of the Therefore, when the connection pin 8744a moves along the guide portion 8773, the tip of the connection pin 8744a is maintained in contact with the bottom surface of the guide portion 8773.

  The guide portion 8773 is a U-shaped concave groove for guiding the connection pin 8744a, and is formed as a circumferential path, and a plurality of steps (first to third steps 8773h to 8773j) in the path. Are formed with directionality (see FIG. 97).

  Specifically, the guide portion 8773 is extended in a substantially linear shape in a front view along the width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction, a lateral direction in FIG. 97) of the second connecting member 8770 with the position P1 as a starting end. A first groove 8773a and a terminal end of the first groove 8773a and extending in a substantially straight line in a longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 97) of the second connecting member 8770 with the position P2 as a starting end The second groove 8773b and the second groove 8773b are connected to the end of the second groove 8773b and are curved and extended in an arc shape (in the present embodiment, an arc shape which is convex in a direction away from the position P2) starting from the position P3 The end is formed of a third groove 8773c connected to the beginning of the first groove 8773a.

  A first step 8773 h is formed at the connection between the first groove 8773 a and the second groove 8773 b. The bottom surface of the first step 8773h of the second groove 8773b at the start end (position P2) is lower than the bottom surface of the end of the first groove 8773a (located on the back side in FIG. 97), It is a vertical plane connecting the two. Thus, movement of the connection pin 8744a from the end of the first groove 8773a to the beginning of the second groove 8773b is permitted, while the movement of the connection pin 8744a from the start of the second groove 8773b to the end of the first groove 8773a is It can be regulated by one step 8773 h.

  Similarly, a second step 8773i and a third step 8773j are respectively formed at the connecting portion between the second groove 8773b and the third groove 8773c and at the connecting portion between the third groove 8773c and the first groove 8773a. The second step 8773i is such that the bottom surface on the start end side (position P3) of the third groove 8773c is lower than the bottom surface on the end side of the second groove 8773b, and the third step 8773j is on the start end side of the first groove 8773a The bottom surface of the (position P1) is formed lower than the bottom surface of the end of the third groove 8773c.

  Thus, while movement of the connection pin 8744a from the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) to the start end of the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) is permitted, the third groove 8773c (first groove 8773a) The movement of the connecting pin 8744a from the beginning of the groove to the end of the second groove 8773b (third groove 8773c) can be regulated by the second step 8773i (third step 8773j).

  That is, the connecting pin 8744a permits only the circumferential movement of sequentially moving the first groove 8773a, the second groove 8773b, and the third groove 8773c along the directions of the arrows L1, L2, and L3. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 will be described.

  Here, in the eighth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member When the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are respectively displaced, the displacement modes of the first connection member 760, the second connection member 8770, and the first displacement member 730 are the same as the first embodiment described above. As it is the same as the case of the embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  98 and 99 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 100 and 101 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state at the time of operating an outward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 100 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are erected, and are disposed on the front of the front base 720.

  In this case, an axial line center of the axial support hole 732 (rotational shaft 741) and an imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and an axial center of the axial support hole 732 (rotational shaft 741) The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction is the crossing angle α1. Further, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P1 (the start end of the first groove 8773a) of the guiding portion 8773 (see FIG. 97), and the connecting second member 8770 is the uppermost (FIG. 100 (a) upper side). It is in the state of being pushed up to).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (a)), the connecting first member 760 extends around the rotational shaft 761 as a rotation center (FIG. 100 (a) counterclockwise). By being rotated, the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the overhang direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 100A). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction.

  In addition, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the connecting second member 8770 is drawn downward (the lower side in FIG. 101 (a)), and the guide portion 8773 of the connecting second member 8770 (first The inner wall surface of the groove 8773a) pushes the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740 downward, whereby the connecting pin 8744a arranged at the position P1 follows the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a. And is guided in the direction of arrow L1 (see FIG. 97).

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center (FIG. 100 (a)). Is relatively displaced (relative rotation), and the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the crossing angle α1 to the crossing angle α2 (Α1 <α2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 100 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b), as in the case described above, the first connecting member As the 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (b)), the first displacement member 730 extends about the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 100 (b)). Counterclockwise) and further tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a).

  In addition, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further drawn downward (the lower right side in FIG. 101B), and the guide portion 8773 of the connecting second member 8770 ( The inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a) pushes the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 of the second displacement member 740 downward, whereby the connecting pin 8744a guides the guide portion 8773 along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1. Further guidance will be provided (see FIG. 97).

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a), the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 100 (b) clock) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. Is further relatively displaced (relatively rotated), and the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the crossing angle α2 to the crossing angle α3. ) (Α1 <α2 <α3).

  Thereafter, when the transfer member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 101 (b), the first displacement member 730 is maximally tilted, and A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhanging position.

  In this case, the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the first groove 8773a in the direction of the arrow L1 along the first groove 8773a, passes through (jumps off) the first step 8773h, and then strikes the inner wall surface of the second groove 8773b. , Position P2 (see FIG. 97). Thereby, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the intersection angle α3 to the intersection angle α4 (α1 <α2 <α3) <Α4).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. 105, the operation of the left rotation unit 8700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracted position will be described.

  102 and 103 are front views of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 104 and 105 are directed from the overhanging position to the retracted position It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 8700 in each state at the time of operating a return path. FIG. 98 (a) is the same as FIG. 103 (b) and FIG. 99 (b) is the same as FIG. 102 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 101 (a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 98 (b) and 100 (b). .

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 104 (a), at the extended position, the connecting pin 8744a of the flange member 8744 is positioned at the position P2 of the guiding portion 8773 (starting end of the second groove 8773b) ( The second connecting member 8770 is drawn to the lowermost position (the lower right side in FIG. 104 (a)) (see FIG. 97).

  Contrary to the case described above (forward path shown in FIG. 98 to FIG. 101), the transmitting member 754 is in the reverse direction (FIG. 104 (a) counterclockwise) from the extended position shown in FIG. 102 (a) and FIG. 104 (a). When the first connection member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104 (a)) as the rotation center. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), the first displacement member 730 is rotated (stand up) in the retraction direction.

  In addition, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retraction direction, the second connecting member 8770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104A), and the connecting pin 8744a disposed at the position P2 is a guide portion. 8773 is guided along the second groove 8773b in the direction of arrow L2 (see FIG. 97). In this case, the second groove 8773b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 8770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 8770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the length of each other. The linear movement (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b (see FIG. 97), the second displacement member for the first displacement member 730 is used. The relative displacement (relative rotation) centering on the rotation shaft 741 of 740 is not formed. Thus, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 104 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 104 (b), as in the case described above, When the member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 104B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the retraction direction (FIG. 104B). It is further rotated in the retraction direction as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a).

  In addition, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 8770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 104 (b)), whereby the connecting pin 8744a performs the second guiding portion 8773. After being guided further along the groove 8773b in the direction of the arrow L2 and passing (jumping down) the second step 8773i, it is positioned at a position P3 by abutting against the inner wall surface of the third groove 8773c (see FIG. 97).

  As described above, in the section in which the connection pin 8744a is guided along the second groove 8773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) centering on the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 105 (a), the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the crossing angle α4. Be done.

  Thereafter, when the transfer member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 105 (b), the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement A state in which relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 8770 is pushed up to the uppermost side, whereby the connecting pin 8744a guides the guiding portion 8773 along the third groove 8773c in the direction of the arrow L3 and passes the third step 8773j ( After jumping (jumping), by hitting the inner wall surface of the first groove 8773a, it is positioned (returned) to the position P1 (see FIG. 97). As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface 720 in the forward path from the retracted position toward the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retraction position Of the second displacement member 740 relative to the first displacement member 730 may be different.

  Specifically, in the forward path, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is the displacement of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface 720 In the return path, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle α4 while being gradually increased in proportion to the amount (rotation amount) It is possible to form an aspect in which the position is displaced toward the retracted position, and the intersection angle α4 is decreased from the intersection angle α4 to the intersection angle α1 in a short time immediately before being disposed at the retracted position.

  In addition, since the connecting pin 8744a is guided along the grooves 8773a to 8773c of the guiding portion 8773, even in the case where the transmission member 754 (the first displacement member 730) is rotationally driven (displaced) at a relatively high speed, The rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed.

The Ninth Embodiment
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the guide portion 8773 is formed as a circumferential route in which the U-shaped concave groove is continuously connected in an endless manner has been described. However, in the guide portion 9773 in the ninth embodiment, the connecting pin 744a It is formed as a loosely fitted opening. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 106 is an exploded front perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 107 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left rotation unit 9700. 106 and 107, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 9700 (the rear base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, in the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment, a guide portion 9773 is formed at one end side (upper side in FIG. 106) of the second connecting member 9770 in the longitudinal direction. As will be described later, as the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 is displaced in the guide portion 9773, the form of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 differs between the outward path and the return path. can do.

  The guide portion 9773 is connected to a first inner wall 9773a which extends substantially linearly in a front view along a width direction (direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) of the second connecting member 9770 and a terminal end of the first inner wall 9773a And the second inner wall 9773b extending substantially linearly along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106) of the second connecting member 9770, and the end of the second inner wall 9773b while being arc-shaped (In this embodiment, it is curved and extended in a curved shape that is convex in a direction away from the connecting portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b) and its end is connected to the beginning of the first inner wall 9773a The inner wall 9773c is formed as an opening that is an inner wall surface.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 115.

  Here, in the ninth embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member When the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, the displacement modes of the first coupling member 760 and the second coupling member 9770 and the first displacement member 730 are the same as in the first embodiment described above. As it is the same as the case of the embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  FIGS. 108 and 109 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 110 and 111 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) and 110 (a), at the retracted position, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are erected and disposed on the front of the front base 720.

  In this case, an axial line center of the axial support hole 732 (rotational shaft 741) and an imaginary line M1 along the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 730 and an axial center of the axial support hole 732 (rotational shaft 741) The angle between the second displacement member 740 and the imaginary line M2 along the longitudinal direction is the crossing angle β1. Further, the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 is positioned at the connection portion (the start end of the first inner wall 9773a) of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c of the guide portion 9773. 110 (a) (upper side) is pushed up.

  The center of gravity G, which is the center of mass of the second displacement member 740 (the point of application of the resultant force of gravity acting on the second displacement member 740), is viewed in the axial center direction of the rotation shaft 741 (axial support hole 732) (ie In 110 (a), the opposite side to the connecting pin 744a (FIG. 110 (a) on the left side, passing through the axis of the rotating shaft 741 (axial support hole 732) and sandwiching the vertical line Z parallel to the direction of gravity. Located in).

  Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in a direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward (counterclockwise in FIG. 110A) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. With the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a is abutted (pressed) on the first inner wall 9773a of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110 (a)), the connecting first member 760 extends around the rotation shaft 761 as a rotation center (FIG. 110 (a) counterclockwise). By being rotated, the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the overhang direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction.

  In addition, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the second connecting member 9770 is drawn downward (the lower side in FIG. 110A), and the inner wall surface of the guiding portion 9773 of the second connecting member 9770 The (first inner wall 9773a) pushes the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 downward, whereby the connecting pin 744a directs the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a to the second inner wall 9773b. You will be guided in the direction.

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction (FIG. 110 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. Is relatively displaced (relatively rotated), and the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the crossing angle β1 to the crossing angle β2 (Β1 <β2).

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 110) from the states shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b), as in the case described above, the first connecting member When the 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the overhanging direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110B), the first displacement member 730 extends about the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center (FIG. 110B (FIG. 110B). ) And is further tilted in the overhang direction as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a).

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further drawn downward (the lower right side in FIG. 110B), and the guide portion 9773 of the connecting second member 9770 The inner wall surface (first inner wall 9773a) pushes down the connecting pin 744a of the flange member 744 of the second displacement member 740 downward, whereby the connecting pin 744a guides the guide portion 9773 along the first inner wall 9773a. You will be further guided in the direction of

  Thus, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a), the second displacement member 740 rotates relative to the first displacement member 730 in the first direction with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center (FIG. 110 (b)). The relative displacement (relative rotation) is further made to (rotational), and the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) changes (increases) from the crossing angle β2 to the crossing angle β3. ) (Β1 <β2 <β3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 109 (b) and 111 (b), the first displacement member 730 is maximally tilted, and A state in which the second displacement member 740 is maximally displaced (relatively rotated) relative to the member 730 is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the overhanging position.

  In this case, the connection pin 744a is guided along the first inner wall 9773a by the guide portion 9773 and abuts against the inner wall surface of the second inner wall 9773b, thereby connecting the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b (second inner wall Located at the beginning of 9773b). Thereby, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is changed (increased) from the crossing angle β3 to the crossing angle β4 (β1 <β2 <β3 <Β4).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the operation of the left rotation unit 9700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracted position will be described.

  FIGS. 112 and 113 are front views of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhang position to the retraction position, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are directed to the retraction position from the overhang position It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 9700 in each state at the time of operating a return path. Note that FIG. 112 (a) is the same as FIG. 109 (b), and FIG. 113 (b) is the same as FIG. 108 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 111 (a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 110 (b). .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 114 (a), in the extended position, the connection pin 744a of the flange member 744 is a connection portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion The second connecting member 9770 is positioned at the beginning of the second inner wall 9773b, and is pulled down to the lowermost side (the lower right side in FIG. 114 (a)).

  Further, the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 corresponds to the connection pin 744a with respect to the perpendicular line Z in the axial center direction view of the rotation shaft 741 (axial support hole 732) (that is, in the state of FIG. 114A). It is located on the same side (right side in FIG. 114 (a)). Therefore, the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of pushing down the connecting pin 744a (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center. With the rotation of the second displacement member 740 due to its own weight, the connection pin 744a is abutted (pressed) on the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773.

  From this state, contrary to the case described above (forward path shown in FIGS. 108 to 111), the transmitting member 754 is in the reverse direction (FIG. 114 (FIG. 114 (a)) from the overhanging position shown in FIG. a) When the first connection member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the retracting direction (clockwise in FIG. 114A) when the first connection member 760 is rotationally driven counterclockwise), the first displacement member 730 is rotated. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114 (a)) with the rotation shaft 731 as the rotation center. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), the first displacement member 730 is rotated (raised) in the retraction direction.

  Also, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retraction direction, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114A). As described above, since the connection pin 744a is in a state of being abutted (pressed) on the second inner wall 9773b of the guide portion 9773 as the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight, It is guided along the second inner wall 9773b in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c.

  In this case, the second inner wall 9773b is extended along the longitudinal direction of the second connecting member 9770 as described above, and the relative displacement of the second connecting member 9770 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is the length of each other. The linear movement (slide displacement) in the direction along the direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), in the section where the connecting pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730. Relative displacement (relative rotation) is not formed. As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is maintained at the intersection angle β4.

  When the transmission member 754 is further rotationally driven in the reverse direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 114 (b)) from the state shown in FIGS. 112 (b) and 114 (b), as in the case described above, When the member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 114B), the first displacement member 730 rotates about the rotation shaft 731 in the retraction direction (FIG. 114B). It is rotated (rotated) and further rotated (raised) in the retraction direction as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 115 (a).

  Further, when the connecting first member 760 is rotated in the retracting direction, the connecting second member 9770 is further pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 114 (b)), whereby the connecting pin 744a moves the guide portion 9773 It is further guided in the direction toward the third inner wall 9773c along the inner wall 9773b, and abuts against the inner wall surface of the third inner wall 9773c, whereby the connection portion of the second inner wall 9773b and the third inner wall 9773c (starting end of the third inner wall 9773c) Be positioned.

  As described above, in the section in which the connection pin 744a is guided along the second inner wall 9773b, relative displacement (relative rotation) centering on the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is not formed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 113A and 115A, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is maintained at the crossing angle β4. Be done.

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 115 (b), the first displacement member 730 is maximally erected and the first displacement A state in which relative displacement (relative rotation) of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the member 730 is minimized is formed. That is, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the retracted position.

  In this case, the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up to the uppermost side, whereby the connecting pin 744a is guided in the direction toward the first inner wall 9773a along the third inner wall 9773c and the first inner wall 9773a. It abuts on the inner wall surface of the (i.e., return) of the connection portion of the first inner wall 9773a and the third inner wall 9773c (the start end of the first inner wall 9773a). As a result, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1.

  In this embodiment, since the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 crosses the vertical line Z when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 115A to the state shown in FIG. And can be rotated prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770.

  Specifically, in a state where the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the same side as the connecting pin 744a (right side in FIG. 115A) with respect to the vertical line Z, the second displacement member 740 is Since the connecting pin 744a is pressed against the third inner wall 9773c by rotation by its own weight, it is gradually rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 115 (a) as the connecting second member 9770 is pushed up (in synchronization). On the other hand, when the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is positioned on the opposite side to the connecting pin 744a (left side in FIG. 115) beyond the vertical line Z by this rotation, the second displacement member 740 Is rotated in the direction of lifting the connecting pin 744a upward by its own weight. That is, it is rotated prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface 720 in the forward path from the retracted position to the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position to the retraction position. While the aspect can be made identical, not only can the aspect of relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 be different, but in the return path, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement The angle formed with the member 740 (virtual line M2) is displaced toward the retracted position while maintaining the intersection angle β4, and immediately before being disposed at the retracted position, from the intersection angle β4 to the intersection angle β1 at high speed (short time) An aspect of reducing can be formed.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment differs from the left rotation unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment only in that the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment is provided with a holder 10746, and the other configurations are the same.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic rear view of the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates a state in which the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 is located on the vertical line Z. As shown in FIG. 116, in the left rotation unit 10700 in the tenth embodiment, a holder 10746 is disposed on the back of the second displacement member 740. Here, the holder 10746 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the cage 10746, FIG. 117 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the cage 10746 taken along line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 117 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the holder | retainer 10746 in the CXVIIc-CXVIIc line | wire of FIG. 117 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 117, the retainer 10746 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular cross-sectional internal space, and a predetermined heavy load is accommodated displaceably in the internal space. In the present embodiment, a predetermined weight is used as the liquid LQ, and about 1/3 of the volume of the internal space is filled with the liquid LQ. Therefore, according to the inclination of the holder 10746, the liquid LQ can be displaced to one end side or the other end side (right side or left side in FIG. 117 (c) of the holder 10746) (see FIGS. 118 to 121).

  Referring back to FIG. The cage 10746 has a posture (horizontal posture) in which the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 116) is orthogonal to the vertical line Z in the axial center direction view of the rotation shaft 741 (axial support hole 732) (ie, the state of FIG. 116). The second displacement member 740 is disposed on the back of the second displacement member 740 at a position where its longitudinal center coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740.

  Therefore, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as a rotation center, the holder 10746 in the horizontal attitude is set to an inclined attitude in which one side or the other side is positioned downward. And displacing the stored heavy load (liquid LQ) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction (ie, the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G).

  As a result, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated about the rotation shaft 741, the second displacement member 740 and the retainer 10746 are both integral members as compared with the case where the holder 10746 is not provided. The amount of change in the position of the center of gravity (center of gravity G ′) when it is regarded as being can be made larger.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121, the operation of the left rotation unit 10700 will be described. 118 and 119 are schematic rear views of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 120 and 121 are from the extended position to the retracted position It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 10700 in each state at the time of facing and operating a return path.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 to 121, the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the first displacement member 730 is rotated with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface 720, and the first displacement member When the second displacement member 740 is relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to 730, the holder 10746 is inclined according to the rotation position of the second displacement member 740, and the liquid LQ filled in the internal space thereof is The holder 10746 can be displaced to one end or the other end in the longitudinal direction.

  Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G 'of the second displacement member 740 and the holder 10746 can be arranged at a position farther from the vertical line Z as compared with the case where the holder 10746 is not provided.

  Therefore, in the section in which the connection pin 744a is displaced along the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c of the guide portion 9773, the rotation of the second displacement member 740 using its center of gravity G 'is secured to secure the rotation by its own weight. Can be easily maintained in contact with the first to third inner walls 9773a to 9773c. As a result, rattling of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be suppressed, and the relative displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, in the section in which the second displacement member 740 is rotated by its own weight prior to the push-up by the second connecting member 9770, the center of gravity G 'can be used to make sure that the second displacement member 740 precedes. As a result, the rotation from the crossing angle β4 to the crossing angle β1 can be performed at a higher speed (short time) immediately before being disposed at the retracted position.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 130. In the first embodiment, the case where the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed in the forward path from the retracted position toward the overhang position and the return path from the overhang position toward the retracted position However, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed only in the outward path, and not formed in the return path. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 is an exploded back perspective view of the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 122, a state in which a part of the left rotation unit 11700 (the back base 710 and the front base 720) is assembled is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the left rotation unit 11700 in the eleventh embodiment, the second displacement member 740 and the connection second member 11770 are connected by a rack and pinion mechanism including a pinion gear 11747 and a rack gear 11774. In this case, as described later, since the pinion gear 11747 is configured as a one-way clutch, the linear movement of the connecting second member 11770 is converted to the rotational movement of the second displacement member 740 in the forward path, while the connecting second in the return path. The relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be formed only in the forward path by restricting the linear motion of the member 11770 from being converted into the rotational motion of the second displacement member 740.

  The pinion gear 11747 is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring, and the rotation shaft 741 of the second displacement member 740 is fastened and fixed to the inner ring. The gear engaged with the gear is engraved. In this case, when the outer ring is rotated clockwise in the rear view of second displacement member 740, pinion gear 11747 transmits the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) while the outer ring rotates counterclockwise. Then, the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740) is cut off.

  The rack gear 11774 is a gear engraved on the side surface of the second connecting member 11770, and is meshed with the pinion gear 11747. The engraved range of the rack gear 11774 is a range in which the engagement with the pinion gear 11747 is released in a state in which the second connecting member 11770 is pulled downward to the maximum (see FIGS. 126 (b) and 129). ).

  Between the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740, a biasing spring SP formed as a metal torsion spring is interposed. In the biasing spring SP, in a state in which the coil portion is externally fitted to the rotation shaft 741 and elastically deformed in a torsional manner, an arm extended from one end of the coil portion is locked to the first displacement member 730, An arm extending from the other end of the coil portion is engaged with the second displacement member 740, and its elastic recovery force is obtained by combining the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2). It acts in the direction of maintaining the angle made by the cross angle .gamma.1.

  Next, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 130.

  Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the drive pin 754b of the transmission member 754 slides on the drive groove 762 of the connection first member 760 (presses the inner wall surface), whereby the connection first member 760 and the connection second member When the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are displaced, respectively, the displacement modes of the first connecting member 760 and the second connecting member 11770 and the first displacement member 730 are the same as the first embodiment described above. As it is the same as the case of the embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 123 to FIG. 126, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position will be described.

  123 and 124 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the forward path from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are directed from the retracted position to the extended position It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state at the time of operating a forward path.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 125 (a), at the retracted position, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) is an intersection angle It is assumed that γ1. In this case, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed up to the top (the upper side in FIG. 125A).

  From this state, when the transmission member 754 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 125 (a)), the connecting first member 760 extends around the rotation shaft 761 as a rotation center (FIG. 125 (a) counterclockwise). By being rotated, the first displacement member 730 is rotated about the rotation shaft 731 in the overhang direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 110 (a)). Thus, the first displacement member 730 is tilted in the overhanging direction as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a) through the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b).

  Also, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the extension direction, the second connecting member 11770 is drawn downward (the lower side in FIG. 125A), whereby the rack gear 11774 of the second connecting member 11770 is a pinion gear. 11747 (outer ring) is rotated clockwise in FIG. 125 (a). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is a rotation in the direction of transmitting the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a), after the states shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b), the second displacement member 740 is a biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122). Of the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) are rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 while elastically deforming The crossing angle γ1 is changed (increased) to the crossing angle γ3 via the crossing angle γ2 (γ1 <γ2 <γ3).

  Thereafter, when the transmission member 754 reaches the end of its movable range, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), the first displacement member 730 is maximally projected, and the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are disposed at the extended position.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 124 (b) and 126 (b), when the connecting second member 11770 is drawn to the lowermost position, the meshing of the rack gear 11774 and the pinion gear 11747 is released. Thereby, the second displacement member 740 is returned to the initial position under the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP (see FIG. 122). That is, the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is restored (decreased) from the intersection angle γ3 to the intersection angle γ1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127 to FIG. 130, the operation of the left rotation unit 11700 when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracted position will be described.

  FIGS. 127 and 128 are front views of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state when operating the return path from the overhanging position to the retracted position, and FIGS. 129 and 130 are directed from the overhanging position to the retracted position. It is a back side schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 11700 in each state at the time of operating a return path. Note that FIG. 127 (a) is the same as FIG. 124 (b) and FIG. 128 (b) is the same as FIG. 123 (a).

  Here, the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 126 (a). The rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a) is the same as the rotational position of the first displacement member 730 shown in FIGS. 123 (b) and 125 (b). .

  On the contrary to the case described above (forward path shown in FIG. 123 to FIG. 126), the transmitting member 754 is in the reverse direction (FIG. 129 (a) counterclockwise) from the overhanging position shown in FIG. When the first connection member 760 is rotated about the rotation shaft 761 in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)), the first displacement member 730 rotates the rotation shaft 731. It is rotated in the retraction direction (clockwise in FIG. 129 (a)) as the rotation center. As a result, the first displacement member 730 passes the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 128 (a) and FIGS. 129 (b) and 130 (a), as shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b). As shown in), it is arranged (stand up) at the retracted position.

  In addition, when the first connecting member 760 is rotated in the retraction direction, the second connecting member 11770 is pushed upward (upper left side in FIG. 129 (a)), as shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b). As shown, the rack gear 11774 is meshed with the pinion gear 11747, and the connecting second member 11770 is further pushed upward, whereby the rack gear 11774 rotates the pinion gear 11747 (outer ring) counterclockwise in FIG. 129 (b). The rotation of the outer ring in such a direction is a rotation in a direction that cuts off the transmission of the rotation to the inner ring (second displacement member 740).

  Therefore, from the states shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 129 (b), the retracted positions shown in FIGS. 128 (b) and 130 (b) are transmitted through the states shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 130 (a). The second displacement member 740 is not rotated relative to the first displacement member 730 in the section until it is placed in the first displacement member 730, and the first displacement member 730 (virtual line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) Is maintained at the crossing angle γ1.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, in the forward pass, as the first displacement member 730 rotates (tilts) in the extension direction of the first displacement member 730 with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface base 720, The two displacement members 740 are gradually displaced relatively, and the angle between the first displacement member 730 (the imaginary line M1) and the second displacement member 740 (the imaginary line M2) is increased from the intersection angle γ1 to the intersection angle γ3. In the overhanging position, a displacement mode to be changed to the crossing angle γ1 is formed, while in the return path, no relative displacement of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is formed (ie, the first displacement member 730 (virtual line The first displacement member 730 is rotated in the retraction direction with respect to the back surface base 710 and the front surface 720 while maintaining the angle between M1) and the second displacement member 740 (virtual line M2) at the crossing angle γ1) It can form a stand) displaced manner.

Twelfth Embodiment
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engagement member 726 is fixed in a state of being protruded from the front of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engagement member 12726 in the twelfth embodiment is the front base 12720 It is arranged to be able to appear in front of the house. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment. 132 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 12720, and FIG. 132 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 12720 taken along line CXXXIIb-CXXXIIb in FIG. 132 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, in the left rotation unit 12700 in the twelfth embodiment, the base side engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728 are accommodated in the internal space of the front base 12720, and the second displacement member An insert 12745 is disposed on the back of the 12740.

  The base side engagement member 12726 is a slide portion which is slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 132 (a), the vertical direction in FIG. 132 (b)) along the guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720 A base portion 726a and a bending portion 726b are formed on the front surface (the front side of the drawing of FIG. 132 (a) and the lower side of FIG. 132 (b)) of the slide portion 12726c.

  The base-side engagement member 12726 is slide-displaced toward the front along the guide groove (not shown) by the slide portion 12726c, so that the base 726a and the bent portion 726b can be seen from the receiving recess 727 on the front side The slide part 12726c slides along the guide groove (not shown) toward the back side (the back side of the drawing of FIG. 132 (a) and the upper side of FIG. 132 (b)) By being displaced, the base 726a and the bending portion 726b can be inserted into the receiving recess 727.

  In this case, between the front of the slide portion 12726c and the back of the front base 12720, a biasing spring SP1 formed of a coil spring is disposed in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP1. By force, the base side engagement member 12726 is maintained in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 132 (b)). In this immersed state, the front of the bent portion 726b and the front of the front base 12720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base engagement member 12726.

  The side surface of slide portion 12726c (left side in FIG. 132 (b)) is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined in the direction of separating from transmission member 12728 as it goes to the back side, and the inclined surface of transmission member 12728 is formed on the inclined surface. It is abutted.

  The transmission member 12728 is slidably displaceable in the left-right direction (Fig. 132 (a) left-right direction, Fig. 132 (b) left-right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 12720. b) The right side is exposed from the insertion port 12720a formed in the side surface of the front base 12720. Further, on the other end side (left side in FIG. 132 (b)) of the transmission member 12728, an inclined surface is formed which is inclined in the direction of separating from the base side engagement member 12726 as it goes to the front side. The inclined surface of the base side engagement member 12726 is abutted.

  Therefore, by sliding the transmission member 12728 in the direction approaching the base engagement member 12726 by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base engagement member 12726 and the transmission member 12728, the base engagement member 12726 is front side. The base-side engagement member 12726 is slid to the back side (in the receiving recess 727) by slidingly displacing the transmission member 12728 in a direction away from the base-side engagement member 12726. It can be displaced (immersed).

  In addition, between the transmission member 12728 and the front base 12720, an urging spring SP2 formed of a coil spring is disposed in a state of being elastically deformed in tension, and the transmission member is transmitted by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP2. 12728 is maintained at a position spaced from the base engagement member 12726 (the position shown in FIG. 132 (b), that is, the position where the base engagement member 12726 is retracted).

  The pressing member 12745 includes a base 12745a erected from the rear surface of the second displacement member 12740 and an insertion portion 12745b formed by bending the tip of the base 12745a. In the pressing member 12745, the standing height of the base 12745a is made higher than the standing height of the base of the displacement side engagement member 742 so that the insertion portion 12745b can be inserted into the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720 At the same time, the extending direction of the insertion portion 12745 b is the same as (the parallel direction) with the extending direction of the bending portion 742 b of the displacement side engaging member 742.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the engagement action of the base side engagement member 12726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 133 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 12700 for illustrating the engagement action of the base side engagement member 12726 and the displacement side engagement member 742, and the second displacement member 12740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the time of being carried out is illustrated typically. As the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) moves from the state shown in FIG. 133 (c), the second displacement member 12740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 133 (d) is the second displacement member 12740. It corresponds to the state of being placed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the second displacement member 12740 is displaced with respect to the front base 12720 in the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)), first, the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is The tip end is in contact with one end side of the transmission member 12728 via the insertion opening 12720a of the front base 12720.

  When the second displacement member 12740 is further displaced from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) with respect to the front base 12720 in the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 133 (a)), the insertion portion 12745b of the pressing member 12745 is By being inserted into the inside of the front base 12720 from the insertion port 12720a against the biasing force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2, the transmission member 12728 is pushed in the direction approaching the base side engagement member 12726 (slide displacement Will be

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the base side engagement member 12726 is gradually projected to the front of the front base 12720 and displaced toward the base side engagement member 12726. The side engagement members 742 approach each other, and the bent portions 726b and 742b enter into the inner surface side of the other bent portions 726b and 742b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 133 (d), when the second displacement member 12740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 12720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 12740 are extended to the extended position, the base side engagement member 12726 is received by the elastic recovery force of the biasing springs SP1 and SP2. You can immerse yourself inside. That is, in the retracted state, the front of the bent portion 726b of the base side engagement member 12726 can be flush with the front of the front base 12720. As a result, even when the front of the front base 12720 is exposed, the base engagement member 12726 can be made less visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

13th Embodiment
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 protruding from the front of the front base 720, but the thirteenth embodiment can be applied. The displacement side engagement member 13742 of the second displacement member 13740 in the embodiment is engaged with the front wall of the front base 13720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 134 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 135 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 13720, and FIG. 135 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 13720 taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left rotation unit 13700 in the thirteenth embodiment has the front base 13720 on the front side (the front side in FIG. 135 (a), the lower side in FIG. 135 (b)) and the side An opening 13720a communicating with (the right side of FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b)) is formed, and a pivoting member 13726 is rotatably disposed in a space formed by the opening 13720a.

  The pivoting member 13726 is formed in a V shape in cross section from the side surface portion 13726a that closes the side surface side of the front surface base 13720 in the opening 13720a and the front surface portion 13726b that closes the front surface side of the front surface base 13720 One side (the opposite side of the front portion 13726b) is rotatably supported.

  That is, the pivoting member 13726 is disposed at the initial position (the position shown in FIGS. 134 and 135) closing the opening 13720a by being pivoted to one side centering on the pivotally supported portion of the side surface portion 13726a. By being pivoted to the other side centering on the pivotally supported portion of the side surface portion 13726a, it is sunk into the front base 13720.

  In this case, an urging spring SP3 formed of a torsion spring is disposed between the front base 13720 and the pivoting member 13726 in a state of being elastically and torsionally deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP3 The pivoting member 13726 is maintained at the initial position. In this initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a and the front surface and the side surface of the front surface base 13720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the rotation member 13726.

  The displacement side engagement member 13742 includes a base 13742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 13740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base 13742a and having an inner surface as an engagement surface. The standing height of the base 13742 a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742 b can abut on the side surface 13726 a of the rotation member 13726. Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced in the retraction direction, the bending portion 742b can pivot the rotation member 13726 in the retraction direction in accordance with the displacement (see FIG. 136).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the engagement action of the front base 13720 and the displacement side engagement member 13742 will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 13700 for illustrating the engagement action of the front base 13720 and the displacement side engagement member 13742, when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state of is schematically illustrated. From the state shown in FIG. 136 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 136 (b), the second displacement member 13740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 136 (c) is the second displacement member 13740. It corresponds to the state of being placed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the second displacement member 13740 is displaced toward the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 136 (a)) with respect to the front base 13720, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 13742 The tip end of the second member abuts on the side surface 13726 a of the pivoting member 13726.

  When the second displacement member 13740 is further displaced from the state shown in FIG. 136A with respect to the front base 13720 in the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 136A), the bent portion of the displacement side engagement member 13742 742b pushes (rotates) the pivoting member 13726 in the retraction direction against the biasing force of the biasing spring SP3.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 13742 is gradually advanced into the internal space of the front base 13720 via the opening 13720a, as shown in FIG. 136 (c). Thus, when the second displacement member 13740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 13742 can be engaged with the back surface of the front base 13720 so as to be engageable. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 can be prevented from tilting in the direction away from the front base 13720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 13740 are extended to the extended position, the rotation member 13726 is disposed (returned) to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP3. It can be done. That is, in the initial position, the front surface of the front surface portion 13726b and the side surface of the side surface portion 13726a can be disposed flush with the front surface and the side surface of the front surface base 13720, respectively. As a result, even when the front surface and the side surface of the front surface base 13720 are exposed, the opening 13720a and the rotation member 13726 can be hardly recognized by the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Fourteenth Embodiment
A fourteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engagement member 726 is fixed in a state where it is protruded from the front of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engagement member 14726 in the fourteenth embodiment is the front base 14720 It is arranged to be able to appear in front of the house. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 137 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 14700 in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 138 (b) is a CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 138 (a). FIG. 18 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 14700 in FIG. Further, FIG. 139 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the left rotation unit 14700 in a state where the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the overhang position, and FIG. 139 (b) is a CXXXIXb of FIG. 139 (a). It is a partial expanded cross-section schematic diagram of the left rotation unit 14700 in -CXXXIXb line | wire.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 to 139, in the left rotation unit 14700 of the fourteenth embodiment, the base side engaging member 14726 is accommodated in the internal space of the front base 14720, and one end side of the rack member 14752 The transmission portion 14752b is formed on the front surface of FIG.

  The base side engaging member 14726 is provided with a slide portion 14726c which can be slidably displaced in the longitudinal direction (FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b) left and right direction) along a guide groove (not shown) of the front base 14720. A base 726a and a bending portion 726b are formed on the front surface (the surface on the left side of FIGS. 138B and 139B) of the slide portion 14726c.

  The base-side engagement member 14726 is slide-displaced toward the front along the guide groove (not shown) by the slide portion 14726c, so that the base 726a and the bending portion 726b are received from the receiving recess 727 on the front side (FIG. (See FIG. 138), and the slide portion 14726c is slidingly displaced along the guide groove (not shown) toward the back side (right side in FIG. 139 (b)) to receive the base 726a and the bending portion 726b. It can be immersed in the recess 727 (see FIG. 139).

  In this case, between the back surface of the slide portion 14726c and the front surface of the back surface base 710, a biasing spring SP4 formed of a coil spring is disposed in a state of being elastically deformed in tension, and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP4. The force maintains the base side engagement member 14726 in the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 139 (b)). In this immersed state, the front of the bent portion 726b and the front of the front base 14720 are disposed flush with each other, making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the base side engaging member 14726.

  The back surface (the right side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)) of the slide portion 14726c is inclined in a direction away from the rack member 14752 as it goes upward (the upper side in FIGS. 138 (b) and 139 (b)). It forms as an inclined surface, and the inclined surface (front) in transmission part 14752b of rack member 14752 is contact | abutted to the inclined surface.

  On the front side (Fig. 138 (b) and Fig. 139 (b) left side) of the transmission portion 14752b, the base side engagement member 14726 (slide portion) is directed downward (Fig. 138 (b) and Fig. 139 (b) lower side). An inclined surface inclined in a direction away from 14726c) is formed, and the inclined surface of the slide portion 14726c abuts on the inclined surface.

  Therefore, as the rack member 14752 is displaced downward by the action of the inclined surfaces of the base side engaging member 14726 and the transmitting portion 14752b, the base side engaging member 14726 is slid to the front side (the direction of projecting from the receiving recess 727). While being displaceable, as the rack member 14752 is displaced upward, the base side engagement member 14726 can be slidably displaced to the back side (in the direction in which it is inserted into the receiving recess 727).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 138, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the lowermost position and the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surfaces (engaging surfaces) of the bent portions 726b and 742b It can be engaged and it can suppress that the 1st displacement member 730 and the 2nd displacement member 740 incline in the direction estranged from front base 14720.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139, when the rack member 14752 is displaced to the top and the second displacement member 740 is arranged at the extended position, the base side engagement is achieved by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP4. The member 14726 can be recessed into the receiving recess 727. That is, in the retracted state, the front of the bent portion 726b of the base side engaging member 14726 can be flush with the front of the front base 14720. As a result, even when the front of the front base 14720 is exposed, the base engagement member 14726 can be made less visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

The fifteenth embodiment
Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. In the first embodiment, the case where the base side engagement member 726 is fixed in a state of being protruded from the front of the front base 720 has been described, but the base side engagement member 15726 in the fifteenth embodiment is the front base 15720 The slide is disposed in front of the slide so as to be displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 140 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment. Fig. 141 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 15720, and Fig. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 15720 taken along line CXLIb-CXLIb in Fig. 141 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the left rotation unit 15700 in the fifteenth embodiment has the front base 15720, the front side (the front side in FIG. 141 (a), the lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) and the side An opening 15720a connected to (the right side of FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b)) is formed, and the front side (the lower side of FIG. 141 (b)) of the front base 15720 in the space formed by the opening 15720a. The base side engagement member 15726 is slidably disposed at a portion.

  The base side engagement member 15726 is formed in a flat plate shape substantially the same as the front side of the front base 15720 among the openings 15720a (that is, a shape closing the opening 15720a in a front view). The first guide groove 15720b1 and the second guide groove 15720b2 are disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b) left-right direction).

  The first guide groove 15720b1 is formed with a first inclination angle with respect to the left and right direction of the front base 15720 (the left and right direction in FIG. 141 (b)) in the top view shown in FIG. 141 (b). The guide groove 15720b2 is formed to have an inclination angle (second inclination angle) smaller than the inclination angle of the first guide groove 15720b1 with respect to the left-right direction of the front base 15720 (the left-right direction in FIG. 141 (b)). Ru. In the present embodiment, the second inclination angle is 0 °. That is, the second guide groove 15720b2 is formed in parallel to the left and right direction of the front base 15720.

  Therefore, the base side engagement member 15726 is guided along the first guide groove 15720b1 from the initial position shown in FIG. 141 (b), so that the rear side on the diagonally rear side of the front base 15720 (FIG. 141 (b)) By sliding along the second guide groove 15720b2 and sliding along the second guide groove 15720b2, it is slidingly displaced toward the side of the front base 15720 (left side in FIG. 141 (b)). Immersed inside the base 15720.

  In this case, a biasing spring (not shown) formed of a coil spring is disposed between the front base 15720 and the base side engaging member 15726 in a state of being elastically and elastically deformed. The elastic recovery force maintains the base engagement member 15726 in the initial position. In this initial position, the front of the base-side engaging member 15726 (the front side in FIG. 141 (a) and the lower side in FIG. 141 (b)) is flush with the front of the front base 15720. This can make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the side engagement member 15726.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the engagement action of the base side engagement member 15726 and the displacement side engagement member 742 will be described.

  FIG. 142 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 15700 for illustrating the engagement action of the base side engagement member 15726 and the displacement side engagement member 742. The second displacement member 740 is displaced toward the retracted position. The transition state at the time of being carried out is illustrated typically. The second displacement member 740 approaches the retracted position from the state shown in FIG. 142 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), and the state shown in FIG. 142 (d) corresponds to the second displacement member 740. It corresponds to the state of being placed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), when the second displacement member 740 is displaced with respect to the front base 15720 in the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 142 (a)), the displacement side engagement is achieved. The tip end of the bent portion 742b of the member 742 is inserted from the opening 15720a into the inside of the front base 15720, and the base 742a of the displacement side engagement member 742 is in contact with the side surface of the base side engagement member 15726.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), when the second displacement member 740 is further displaced from the state shown in FIG. 142 (b) with respect to the front base 15720 in the retraction direction (left side in FIG. 142 (b)). The base 742a of the displacing engagement member 742 pushes (slides and displaces) the base engagement member 15726 along the first guide groove 15720b1 against the biasing force of the biasing spring. When the second displacement member 740 is further displaced in the retraction direction from the state shown in FIG. 142 (c), the base side engagement member 15726 is pushed in the retraction direction along the second guide groove 15720b2 (slide displacement Will be

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), when the second displacement member 740 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 742 is the back surface of the base side engagement member 15726. , Can be engaged face to face. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 from being inclined in the direction of separating from the front base 15720 (downward in FIG. 142C).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 740 are extended to the extended position, the base side engagement member 15726 is disposed at the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring (return ) Can be. That is, in the initial position, the front of the base side engagement member 15726 can be arranged flush with the front of the front base 15720. As a result, even when the front of the front base 15720 is exposed, the opening 15720a and the base side engaging member 15726 can be made less visible to the player, and the appearance can be improved.

Sixteenth Embodiment
Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the first embodiment, the displacement side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base side engagement member 726 protruding from the front of the front base 720, but the sixteenth embodiment The displacement side engagement member 16742 of the second displacement member 16740 in form is engaged with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 143 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 144 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the front base 16720, and FIG. 144 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front base 16720 taken along line CXLIVb-CXLIVb in FIG. 144 (a).

  Further, FIG. 145 is a partial cross-sectional schematic view of the left rotation unit 16700 for illustrating the engagement action of the front base 16720 (opening 16720a) and the displacement side engagement member 16742, and the second displacement member 16740 is in the retracted position. The transition state when being displaced toward the direction is schematically illustrated. As the state shown in FIG. 145 (a) is advanced to the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), the second displacement member 16740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 145 (c) is the second displacement member 16740. It corresponds to the state of being placed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the left rotation unit 16700 in the sixteenth embodiment has an opening 16720a formed in the side surface of the front base 16720 (the surface on the right side in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b)). .

  The displacement side engagement member 16742 includes a base portion 16742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 16740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip end of the base portion 16742a and having an inner surface as an engagement surface. The standing height of the base portion 16742a is set to a height at which the bent portion 742b can be inserted into the opening 16720a of the front base 16720.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the retraction direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 16742 is moved through the opening 16720a along with the displacement. When the second displacement member 16740 is disposed at the retracted position by gradually entering the internal space of 16720, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engaging member 16742 engages with the inner edge of the opening 16720a of the front base 16720 It can be made to face as possible. As a result, the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 16740 can be prevented from tilting in the direction away from the front base 16720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, it is sufficient to open the opening 16720a in the front base 16720, and there is no need to provide a base side engaging member, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the opening 16720a is disposed on the side surface of the front base 16720, when the second displacement member 16740 is displaced in the projecting direction and the front of the front base 16720 is exposed, the opening 16720a is viewed from the player. This makes it difficult to improve the appearance.

Seventeenth Embodiment
A seventeenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. In the first embodiment, the displacement-side engagement member 742 of the second displacement member 740 is engaged with the base-side engagement member 726 protruding from the front of the front base 720. The displacement side engagement member 17742 of the second displacement member 17740 in form is engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 146 is a partial exploded perspective view of the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a schematic top view of the left rotation unit 17700 for illustrating the engagement action of the back surface base 710 and the displacement side engagement member 17742, in which the second displacement member 17740 is displaced toward the retracted position. Transition states are schematically illustrated.

  As the state shown in FIG. 147 (a) is advanced to the state shown in FIG. 147 (b), the second displacement member 17740 approaches the retracted position, and the state shown in FIG. 147 (c) is the second displacement member 17740. It corresponds to the state of being placed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the left rotation unit 17700 in the seventeenth embodiment has the entire front and side surfaces at one longitudinal end side (upper side in FIG. 146) of the front base 17720 formed as a decorative surface. That is, the front base 17720 is formed in a shape in which the base side engaging member 726 and the receiving recess 727 are omitted with respect to the front base 720 in the first embodiment.

  The displacement side engagement member 17742 includes a base 17742a erected from the back surface of the second displacement member 17740, and a bent portion 742b formed by bending the tip of the base 17742a and the inner surface is an engagement surface. The erected height of the base 17742a is set to a height at which the inner surface of the bent portion 742b can face the back surface of the back surface base 710 at a predetermined distance.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the second displacement member 17740 is displaced in the retraction direction, the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 17742 is gradually moved to the back surface side of the back surface base 710 along with the displacement. When the second displacement member 17740 is placed in the retracted position, the inner surface of the bent portion 742b of the displacement side engagement member 17742 can be engaged with the back surface of the back surface base 710 so as to be engageable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement member 730 and the second displacement member 17740 from tilting in the direction away from the front base 17720.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to provide the base side engaging member on the front base 17720, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to form an opening in the side surface of the front base 17720, the appearance of the front base 17720 can be improved by avoiding the player from visually recognizing a functional part unrelated to the decoration. Can. In other words, since it is not necessary to make the side of the front base 17720 inconspicuous to the player by the second displacement member 17740 disposed at the overhang position, the projection amount of the second displacement member 17740 is increased to enhance the rendering effect. be able to.

Eighteenth Embodiment
An eighteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. In the right rotation unit 600 according to the first embodiment, the operation (raising operation of the first displacement member 630) of displacing (raising) the first displacement member 630 tilted in the projecting direction toward the retracted position is the operation of the drive motor 650. Although the case where it is performed only by the rotational driving force has been described, the rising operation of the first displacement member 630 in the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment utilizes the action of the inertial force in addition to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 650. Be done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a front view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the front half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 150 is a view when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position 18 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the first half of the section.

  FIGS. 149 (a) and 150 (a) show the state in which the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are arranged at the extended position (that is, FIGS. 34 (c) and 36 (c)). Corresponds to Also, FIGS. 149 (b) and 150 (b) correspond to FIGS. 34 (b) and 36 (b), and FIGS. 149 (c) and 150 (c) correspond to FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. It corresponds to 36 (a).

  Further, FIG. 151 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 18600 in each state in the front half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 151 (a), FIG. 151 (b) and FIG. 151 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 150 (a), 150 (b) and 150 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in the right rotation unit 18600 in the eighteenth embodiment, the substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 18629 from the front of the front base 18620 is the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 18642 of the second displacement member 18640. A substantially cylindrical contact portion 18644 is provided so as to protrude from the rear surface. The contact portion 18644 is disposed at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) in the longitudinal direction of the connection displacement member 18642.

  As shown in FIGS. 149 to 151, the abutted portion 18629 and the abutting portion 18644 are on the way when the first displacement member 630 and the second displacement member 18640 are displaced from the extended position toward the retracted position. In a predetermined section, the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 18644 is formed to be able to contact the upper surface (the upper surface in FIG. 148) of the abutted portion 18629.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149 (b), FIG. 150 (b) and FIG. 151 (b), from the overhanging position shown in FIG. 149 (a), FIG. 150 (a) and FIG. The connection displacement member 18642 is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) in the direction of being retracted to the back of the first displacement member 630, as shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c) and 151 (c). When the connection displacement member 18642 is maximally rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the rotation center, the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutted portion 18629, as shown in FIG.

  From the states shown in FIGS. 149 (c), 150 (c) and 151 (c), the rotation (raising) of the first displacement member 630 toward the retracted position about the rotation shaft 631 is started. (See FIGS. 33B, 35B and 37B), the contact portion 18644 is separated from the upper surface of the contact portion 18629, and the contact portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644 The contact is released.

  In this case, in the section until the abutting portion 18644 abuts on the abutted portion 18629 (that is, the sections shown in FIG. 149, FIG. 150 and FIG. 151), the drive motor 650 only includes the second displacement member 18640. It suffices to rotate and drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 is rotationally driven. The load of Further, since the displacement direction of the connection displacement member 18642 is a direction in which the gravity direction is lowered, the load on the drive motor 650 is also reduced from that point.

  On the other hand, in a state where the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the contact portion 18629, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 is added as a load of rotational drive of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, since the first displacement member 630 is an operation to stand up against gravity, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased also from that point.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 18644 is provided at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 18642, and the connection displacement member 18642 rotates the support shaft 633. When being rotated about the center, the contact portion 18644 is in contact with the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620 (see FIG. 151 (c)).

  That is, the rotation around the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 18642 can be restricted by the contact of the abutted portion 18629 and the contact portion 18644, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 18642 can be rapidly stopped. The force of the direction in which the inertial force of the connecting displacement member 18642 generated by the sudden stop is displaced in the retracting direction (that is, erected) with the first displacement member 630 about the rotation shaft 631 as a rotation center (FIG. 151 (c) As F), it can act on the first displacement member 630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 18640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 630 Also, when added as a load of rotational drive of the drive motor 650, the above-described inertial force can be used as a force for assisting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load (drive force) of the drive motor 650 from being rapidly changed (large), and it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 630 and 18640 from the overhang position to the retraction position. It is possible to improve the quality.

Nineteenth Embodiment
Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. In the right rotation unit 18600 of the eighteenth embodiment, the contact portion 18644 of the connection displacement member 18642 is in contact with the abutted portion 18629 of the front base 18620. However, the connection displacement member 19642 in the nineteenth embodiment The contact portion 19644 is abutted on an abutted portion 19639 provided on the first displacement member 19630. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 152 is an exploded front perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 153 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right rotation unit 19600.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment, the connection portions (the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643) of the driven member 19441 and the connection displacement member 19642 of the second displacement member 19640 It is set at a position different from that in the case of one embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30).

  In detail, one end side in the longitudinal direction of the driven member 19641 (the opposite side of the second groove 641b with respect to the shaft support hole 641a, the upper side in FIG. 152 and FIG. 153) is curved and extended in an arc shape The connection groove 641c is disposed on the extending tip end side of the connector. The curved portion avoids interference between the driven member 19641 and the shaft support hole 642a of the connection displacement member 19642. The connection displacement member 19642 is formed by projecting a plate-like overhanging portion 19642c outward from the shaft support hole 642a, and the connection pin 643 is provided on the front side of the overhanging portion 19642c.

  In this case, in the first embodiment described above, the axial center of the shaft support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 641 is centered, and the shaft of the shaft support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 19642. The connection portion (the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643) of the driven member 641 and the connection displacement member 642 is located inside (the center side) of the virtual circle passing the heart.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a virtual centering on the axial center of the axial support hole 641a (support shaft 632) of the driven member 19641 and passing the axial center of the axial support hole 642a (support shaft 633) of the connection displacement member 19642 The connection portions (the connection groove 641 c and the connection pin 643) of the driven member 19441 and the connection displacement member 19642 are located outside the circle.

  Therefore, the direction of relative rotation of the coupling displacement member 19642 with respect to the first displacement member 19630 is opposite to that in the first embodiment. Here, such relative rotation in the reverse direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

  FIGS. 154 and 155 are front views of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state when operating between the retracted position and the extended position, and FIGS. 156 and 157 operate between the retracted position and the extended position. It is a back side schematic diagram of right rotation unit 19600 in each state at the time of doing.

  FIGS. 154 (a), 154 (b) and 154 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 156 (a), 156 (b) and 156 (c), respectively. FIGS. 155 (b) and 155 (c) are in the same state as in FIGS. 157 (a), 157 (b) and 157 (c), respectively. Also, FIG. 154 (c) is the same as FIG. 155 (a), and FIG. 156 (c) is the same as FIG. 157 (a).

  Here, the right rotation unit 19600 in the nineteenth embodiment is a relative rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 relative to the first displacement member 19630 due to the difference in the position of the connection portion (the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643) described above. Since the other operation modes are formed substantially the same except that the direction of is reverse to that of the first embodiment, the description of the same portion is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 156, in the retracted position, the transmission member 654 is rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 156 (a)), and the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 has the first groove 635 (function By depressing the inner wall surface of the section 635a) and the second groove 641b in the overhanging direction, the first displacement member 19630 is rotated (tilted) in the overhanging direction in a state integral with the second displacement member 19640.

  When the transmission member 654 is further rotationally driven in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the state shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 157 (a), the drive pin 654b is moved by the first displacement member 19630. The inner wall surface of the second groove 641b of the driven member 19641 is pushed downward (the lower side in FIG. 157 (a)) while passing through the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of FIG.

  Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), the driven member 1964 is rotated about the support shaft 632 in the direction of raising the connecting groove 641c (counterclockwise in FIG. 157). The rotation of the driven member 19641 is transmitted to the connection displacement member 19642 via the connection of the connection groove 641c and the connection pin 643. The connection displacement member 19642 lowers the decorative portion 642b about the support shaft 633 as a rotation center. It is rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 108 (b)).

  That is, while the first displacement member 19630 is stopped, relative displacement (rotation) of the connection displacement portion 19642 is performed relative to the first displacement member 19630 in the opposite direction to the case of the first embodiment. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c), the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 is the non-interference section 635b of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640. By reaching the end of the double groove 641b, the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are arranged in the overhanging position.

  Referring back to FIGS. 152 and 153, description will be made. In the present embodiment, the substantially rectangular parallelepiped abutted portion 19639 projects from the back surface of the first displacement member 19630 and the substantially cylindrical abutment portion 19644 projects from the front of the decorative portion 642 b of the connection displacement member 19642. . The abutted portion 19639 is disposed between the rotation shaft 631 and the support shaft 632 in the longitudinal direction of the first displacement member 19630.

  The abutted portions 19639 and the abutment portions 19644 are abutted portions 19639 in a predetermined section in the middle of the displacement of the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 from the overhanging position to the retracted position. The outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 19644 is formed to be able to contact the side surface (the surface on the right side in FIG. 153). Here, the action of the abutment of the abutted portion 19639 and the abutment portion 19644 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the front half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position, and FIG. 159 is a view when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position 18 is a rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the first half of the section.

  FIGS. 158 (a) and 159 (a) show the state in which the first displacement member 19630 and the second displacement member 19640 are disposed at the extended position (that is, FIGS. 155 (c) and 157 (c)). Corresponds to Also, FIGS. 158 (b) and 159 (b) correspond to FIGS. 155 (b) and 157 (b), and FIGS. 158 (c) and 159 (c) correspond to FIGS. It corresponds to 157 (a).

  Also, FIG. 160 is a schematic rear view of the right rotation unit 19600 in each state in the front half section when operating from the overhanging position toward the retracted position, and FIGS. 160 (a), 160 (b) and 160 are illustrated. 160 (c) corresponds to FIGS. 159 (a), 159 (b) and 159 (c), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), FIG. 159 (b) and FIG. 160 (b), the connection displacement member 19642 is taken from the extended position shown in FIGS. 158 (a), 159 (a) and 160 (a). Is rotated about the support shaft 633 (the pivot support hole 642a) in the direction of being retracted to the back of the first displacement member 19630, as shown in FIGS. 158 (c), 159 (c) and 160 (c). When the connection displacement member 19642 is maximally rotated about the support shaft 633 (the shaft support hole 642a) as the rotation center, the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639.

  In this case, in a section until the abutting portion 19644 abuts on the abutted portion 19639 (that is, a section shown in FIG. 158, FIG. 159 and FIG. 160), the drive motor 650 only includes the second displacement member 19640. It suffices to rotate and drive load is relatively small. That is, since this section is a section through which the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 passes the non-interference section 635b in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 is rotationally driven. The load of

  On the other hand, in a state in which the contact portion 19644 is in contact with the contact portion 19639, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a in the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630. Therefore, from such a state, not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 is added as a load of rotational drive of the drive motor 650. In particular, from such a state, the load of the drive motor 650 is rapidly increased because the first displacement member 19630 is an operation to stand up against gravity.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the contact portion 19644 is provided on the decorative portion 642b of the connection displacement member 19642, and the connection displacement member 19642 is rotated about the support shaft 633, and the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 is performed. The contact portion 19644 lifted upward along with the movement of the first displacement member 19630 abuts on the lower surface of the abutted portion 19639 of the first displacement member 19630 (see FIG. 160C).

  That is, the rotation around the support shaft 633 of the connection displacement member 19642 can be restricted by the contact of the abutted portion 19639 and the contact portion 19644 so that the rotation of the connection displacement member 19642 can be rapidly stopped. The force of inertia of the connection displacement member 19642 generated by the sudden stop is a force in a direction of displacing (that is, raising) the first displacement member 19630 about the rotation shaft 631 as a rotation center (see FIG. 160C). As F), it can act on the first displacement member 19630.

  As a result, the drive pin 654b of the transmission member 654 reaches the action section 635a of the first groove 635 of the first displacement member 19630, and not only the weight of the second displacement member 19640 but also the weight of the first displacement member 19630 Also, when added as a load of rotational drive of the drive motor 650, the above-described inertial force can be used as a force for assisting the rotational drive force of the drive motor 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load (drive force) of the drive motor 650 from being rapidly changed (large), and it is possible to stabilize the displacement of the displacement members 19630 and 19640 from the extended position to the retracted position. It is possible to improve the quality.

The Twentieth Embodiment
A twentieth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game balls are sent out from the delivery port 821c to the seesaw member 840 (the receiving surface 844) regardless of the state of the seesaw member 840 (ie, either the first state or the second state). In the state of being permitted), the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment restricts the game ball sending from the sending port 821c to the seesaw member 20840 (the receiving surface 844) at least in the second state. Be done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 20065 in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, and FIG. 162 (b) shows the winning when the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the device 20065. FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in the winning device 20065 in the twentieth embodiment, a restricting portion 20848 is formed in the seesaw member 20840. The restricting portion 20848 is formed as a substantially triangular portion in a front view standing upward from the edge of the receiving surface 844 opposite to the inclined surface 845 (upper side in FIG. 161).

  As shown in FIG. 162A, in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the first state, the restricting portion 20848 is positioned outward of the opening area of the delivery port 821c, whereby the opening width of the delivery port 821c (FIG. 162 (a) horizontal dimension) is maintained at dimension W1 larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, the game balls can be sent out from the sending port 821 c to the receiving surface 844.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), in the state where the seesaw member 20840 forms the second state, the restricting portion 20848 is approached to the delivery port 821c side as the seesaw member 20840 rotates, and the restricting portion 20848 A portion is located inside the opening area of the delivery port 821c (ie, a part of the restricting portion 20848 overlaps the opening area of the delivery port 821c). As a result, the opening width of the delivery port 821c is reduced to a dimension W2 which is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball (W2 <W1). Therefore, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is restricted (prohibited).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the delivery of the gaming balls from the guide passage (delivery port 821 c) of the intermediate base 820 to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 20840 is controlled (permitted according to the state of the seesaw member 20840 Or regulation).

  That is, in the first state, the game ball is sent out from the delivery port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and is rolled from the receiving surface 844 to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to rotate the seesaw member 20840 , The second state can be quickly formed.

  Here, even after the seesaw member 20840 starts rotating toward the second state, the game balls are continuously sent out from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and are sent out earlier (the receiving surface 844 received A state in which the gaming ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 is formed, and the seesaw member 20840 is easily maintained in the second state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 20840 is started to rotate to the second state, the restricting portion 20848 narrows the opening width of the delivery port 821c to the dimension W2, and the receiving surface from the delivery port 821c It is possible to restrict (prohibit) the sending of the game balls to 844 and secure time for discharging the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821 d.

  That is, the game balls are discharged from the transmission port 821c to the receiving surface 844 until the game balls on the seesaw member 20840 disappear, after the game balls are completely discharged from the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821d. It can be done. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  The dimension W2 may be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball as long as the dimension W2 is smaller than the dimension W1. That is, the dimension W2 may be a dimension that allows the game ball to be sent out from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844. Even in this case, by narrowing the opening width of the sending port 821c by the restricting portion 20848, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass, and the time required for sending the gaming ball from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 is increased accordingly Can be made to delay the passage of gaming balls. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

Twenty-First Embodiment
Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning device 65 of the first embodiment, the game ball is discharged to the discharge port 821d by rolling along the downward slope of the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840. The winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment includes a rotating member 21870 for pushing out the gaming ball and discharging it to the discharge port 821 d. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment, corresponding to FIG. 54.

  As shown in FIG. 163, the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment is provided with a rotating member 21870 above the seesaw member 840. The rotating member 21870 does not interfere with the seesaw member 840 regardless of whether the seesaw member 840 forms the first state or the second state, and contacts the gaming ball on the seesaw member 840. Positioned at possible height positions.

  The rotation member 21870 is provided with a shaft support portion 21871 through which a shaft support pin (not shown) is inserted and which is rotatably supported on the back surface of the front base 810, and extends out to one side from the shaft support portion 21871 and the delivery port 821c. And a plate-like receiving plate 21872 projecting from the shaft support portion 21871 to the other side opposite to the receiving plate 21872 and facing the discharge port 821 d and an extrusion plate 21873 and

  The bearing portion 21871 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction is along the gravity direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 163A) (that is, orthogonal to the rotation axis (support shaft 821e) of the seesaw member 840). The receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 are connected with a predetermined crossing angle with the shaft support portion 21871 as the center of crossing. Therefore, the rotation member 21870 is formed to be bent in a substantially V-shape in the direction of the shaft support 21871 (gravity) direction.

  In this case, at the rotational position where the pushing plate 21873 is along the longitudinal direction (left and right direction of FIG. 163A) of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. At a rotational position along the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the receiving plate 21872 is in a posture projecting above the receiving surface 844 (the front side in FIG. 163 (a)). The push plate 21873 is in a posture of being projected above the inclined surface 845 and / or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  That is, in the rotational position where the pushing plate 21873 is retracted to the side opposite to the discharge port 821d (the lower side in FIG. 163A), as shown in FIG. In the rotational position where the receiving plate 21872 is retracted to the side opposite to the delivery port 821c (the lower side in FIG. 163 (b)), as shown in FIG. 163 (b). The pushing plate 21873 is advanced to the side close to the discharge port 821d.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the gaming ball is still rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840, from the outlet 821c. When the game ball is sent out to the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840, the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870 receives the game ball sent out from the sending port 821c to the receiving surface 844 and the rotating member 21870 is the pushing plate 21873 thereof. In a direction to project the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 upward. By this rotation, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be pushed out by the push plate 21873 and discharged to the discharge port 821d.

  As a result, gaming balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time for which the gaming ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the time for which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

  Note that the game board sent out from the delivery port 821c is received by the receiving plate 21872 of the rotating member 21870, and the rotating member 21870 is in a posture in which the pushing plate 21873 protrudes above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (ie Even if the game ball is placed in the posture shown in FIG. 163 (b), the gaming ball (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 163 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is inclined with the inclined surface 845. Since it rolls along the discharge surface 846, the rotation member 21870 can be returned to the posture (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 163A) in which the receiving plate 21872 protrudes above the reception surface 844.

  In this manner, the rotation member 21870 can use the rolling of the gaming ball to receive the game ball at the initial position (the receiving plate of the game ball 21872 and push the gaming ball by the pushing plate 21873, ie, a position shown in FIG. 163). It is possible to return to the position shown in (a). Therefore, since the drive by the drive means and the detection by the sensor device can be omitted, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Twenty-Second Embodiment
A twenty-second embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment, corresponding to FIG. FIGS. 165 (a) and 165 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 22065, corresponding to FIG.

  Here, the winning device 22065 in the twenty-second embodiment differs from the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment in an opening 22849 formed in the seesaw member 22840 and a projection 22874 projecting from the rotating member 22870. Further, only the provision point is different, and the other configuration is the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) projecting pieces 22874 project from the side surface of the lower side (seesaw member 22840 side, lower side of FIG. 165) of the pushing plate 21873. It will be set up. On the other hand, a plurality of (in this embodiment, three locations) openings 22849 are formed in the plate-like portion where the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 are formed.

  The projecting piece 22874 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 in a front view (a direction of the rotation axis of the seesaw member 22840 (support shaft 821 e), ie, a state shown in FIG. 165). Ru. On the other hand, the opening 22849 is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation member 22870 in front view (view in the direction of the rotation shaft of the rotation member 22870 (axial support portion 21871), ie, the state shown in FIG. It is formed.

  Therefore, the seesaw member 22840 is rotated between the first state and the second state with the support shaft 821e (bearing 841) as the rotation center, and the rotation member 22870 is rotated in the movable range about the pivot portion 21871 as the rotation center. In this case, interference with the inner edge of the opening 22849 can be suppressed in any state. As a result, it is possible to smoothly rotate the seesaw member 22840 and the rotation member 22870 independently of each other.

  Here, as in the case of the above-described twenty-first embodiment, when the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 21870 does not have a projecting piece, the seesaw member 840 forms a second state (or a state close thereto). When the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is to be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the push plate 21873, the distance between the push plate 21873 and the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 The lower part of the pushing plate 21873 is in contact with the upper part of the gaming ball (the front side in FIG. 163A). Therefore, it takes a long time for the pushing plate 21873 to abut on the upper portion of the gaming ball, and it becomes difficult to promptly discharge the gaming ball to the discharge port 821d. In addition, it becomes difficult to sufficiently supply the gaming ball with the energy of rotation of the rotary member 21870 formed by receiving the gaming ball by the receiving plate 21872 via the pushing plate 21873.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the projecting pieces 22874 project downward (seesaw member 22840) from the pushing plate 21873 of the rotating member 22870, as shown in FIG. 165 (b), for example. In the state where the seesaw member 22840 forms the second state, the gaming ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 22840 can be pushed out to the discharge port 821d by the projection 22874.

  Therefore, in this case, the projecting piece 22874 can be brought into contact with the side portion (the lower portion in FIG. 164A) of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the projecting piece 22874 abuts on the side portion of the gaming ball and promptly discharge (push out) the gaming ball to the discharge port 821d. Further, the energy of the rotation of the rotary member 22870, which is formed by receiving the gaming balls by the receiving plate 21872, can be sufficiently given to the gaming balls through the projecting pieces 22874.

  As a result, gaming balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time for which the gaming ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the time for which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Twenty-Third Embodiment
A twenty-third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the rotation member 21870 is provided (rotatably supported) on the front base 810 has been described. However, the rotation member 23870 of the twenty-third embodiment is provided on the seesaw member 840 Supported by In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded back perspective view of the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIGS. 167 (a) and 167 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, and correspond to FIG. Also, FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning device 23065, and correspond to FIG.

  Here, the winning device 23065 in the twenty-third embodiment differs from the winning device 21065 in the twenty-first embodiment in the position where the rotating member 23870 is disposed and in the presence or absence of the stopper portion 23875, and the other configuration is the same. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, the rotary member 23870 in the twenty-third embodiment is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the seesaw member 840 by a pivot pin 23876 inserted into the pivot portion 21871. In this case, in the present embodiment, the rotation member 23870 is disposed in a posture in which the axial center direction of the shaft support portion 21871 is orthogonal to the rotation shaft (support shaft 821 e) of the seesaw member 840. The side faces are opposed substantially parallel to the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the rotation member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), the seesaw member 840 is in the first state or the first state. Even in the case of forming any of the two states, the pushing plate 21873 can face the gaming ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840.

  Therefore, unlike the case of the above-described twenty-first embodiment (that is, the configuration in which the lower portion of the pushing plate 21873 is in contact with the upper portion of the gaming ball (the front side of FIG. 163A)), Can be brought into contact with the side portion (the lower portion in FIG. 167 (a)) of the gaming ball. Therefore, the time until the pushing plate 21873 abuts on the side portion of the gaming ball can be shortened, and the gaming ball can be promptly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d. Further, the rotational energy of the rotary member 23870 formed by receiving the gaming balls by the receiving plate 21872 can be sufficiently given to the gaming balls through the pushing plate 21873.

  As a result, gaming balls rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d. Therefore, the time for which the gaming ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (ie, the time for which the second state is formed) is shortened, and the first state and the second state are Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

  Here, in the rotating member 23870 of the present embodiment, the stopper portion 23875 is provided protruding on the back surface (surface opposite to the side for pushing out the game ball) of the pushing plate 21873, and the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the back surface of the front base 810. It is possible to connect. In the state where the stopper portion 23875 is in contact with the rear surface of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)), the push plate 21873 of the rotary member 23870 is in the longitudinal direction of the seesaw member 840 (horizontal direction in FIG. 167 (a)). It is placed at the rotational position along.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the push-out plate 21873 is retracted to a position where the stopper portion 23875 is omitted and abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the push-out plate near the gaming ball rolling on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846. 21873 can be made to stand by, and time until this extrusion board 21873 abuts on a game ball can be shortened. As a result, the game balls can be quickly discharged (pushed out) to the discharge port 821d.

  Here, as described above, even if the rotation member 23870 is disposed in a posture in which the pushing plate 21873 is protruded above the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (b)), The gaming ball received by the receiving plate 21872 (the gaming ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167 (b)) is rolled along the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 while retracting the pushing plate 21873, the receiving plate 21872 The rotating member 23870 can be returned to the posture (that is, the posture shown in FIG. 167 (a)) which protrudes above the receiving surface 844.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, a predetermined gap is formed between the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810. Therefore, when the pushing plate 21873 is retracted to a position where it abuts against the back surface of the front base 810, the gaming ball rolls in a direction away from the discharge port 821d, and the rolling locus of the gaming ball is increased. Therefore, the discharge to the discharge port 821d is delayed.

  On the other hand, the game ball (the game ball shown on the left side in FIG. 167 (b)) received by the receiving plate 21872 is formed on the inclined surface 845 and the discharge surface 846 by projecting the stopper portion 23875 from the back surface of the pushing plate 21873. When rolling along, the pushout plate 21873 can be prevented from being excessively retracted to the back side of the front base 810 (see FIG. 167 (a)). That is, it is possible to easily discharge the game ball to the discharge port 821 d quickly by suppressing the game balls from rolling in a direction away from the discharge port 821 d.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the stopper portion is not formed on the back surface of the receiving plate 21872, the receiving plate 21872 can be retracted to a position abutted against the back surface of the front base 810 (FIG. 167 (b )reference). That is, the receiving plate 21872 receives the game ball using the gap between the rotating member 23870 and the front base 810 formed because the rotating member 23870 is disposed on the seesaw member 840, and rotates when the rotating member 23870 is rotated. The rotation angle of the member 23870 (the rotation angle from the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (a) to the rotation position shown in FIG. 167 (b)) can be increased.

  As a result, the time during which the gaming ball sent out from the delivery port 821c is in contact with the receiving plate 21872 can be extended (that is, the force received by the rotating member 23870 from the gaming ball can be increased). Therefore, the energy of rotation of the rotating member 23870 formed by receiving the game balls by the receiving plate 21872 can be increased, and even if a plurality of game balls roll on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846, A plurality of game balls can be easily discharged to the discharge port 821d by pushing out the pushing plate 21873. Therefore, the time during which the gaming ball is placed on the inclined surface 845 or the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 (that is, the time during which the second state is formed) is shortened to set the first state and the second state. Alternate switching can be performed smoothly.

Twenty-Fourth Embodiment
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining the rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described. However, the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fourth embodiment tilts the attitude of the rotation axis with its rotation. Be done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 169 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 24065.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, in the winning device 24065 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, bearing portions 24816 and 24626 project from the back of the front base 24810 and the front of the middle base 24820, respectively. The bearing portions 24816 and 24826 are portions for rotatably supporting both ends of the rotary shaft 24877 on the inner circumferential surface thereof, and the upper side (the upper side in FIGS. 169 and 170) is a U-shaped protrusion in a front view It is formed as a part.

  In the present embodiment, the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 is larger than that of the bearing portion 24626 of the middle base 24820. Thereby, as will be described later, rotation of one axial end (the end on which the cam portion 24877 b is formed) of the rotation shaft 24877 is permitted.

  The rotation shaft 24877 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 with respect to the front base 24810 and the middle base 24820. Here, the rotating shaft 24877 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Fig. 171 (a) is a front view of the rotation shaft 24877, and Fig. 171 (b) is a side view of the rotation shaft 24877 in the arrow CLXXIb direction view of Fig. 171 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 171, the rotation shaft 24877 includes a main body portion 2487 7 a formed as a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section, and a cam portion 2 487 b formed at an axial end portion of the main body portion 2 487 7a. The cam portion 24877 b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 24877 a (that is, the distance from the axial center of the main body portion 24877 a to the outer peripheral surface of the cam portion 24877 b is changed according to the rotation angle ) It is formed as a so-called disc cam.

  Referring back to FIGS. 170 and 171, description will be made. The axial length of the main body portion 24877 a of the rotary shaft 24877 is set to be larger than the axial length of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. Therefore, the main body portion 24877a of the rotating shaft 24877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the cam portion 24877b and the main body portion 24877a protruding from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are the bearing portion 24816 of the front base 24810 and the intermediate base They are respectively supported by bearings 24826 of 24820 (see FIG. 173). The rotating shaft 24877 is fixed to the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840 after being positioned at a predetermined phase (rotational position).

  Next, the operation of the cam portion 24877 b on the rotation shaft 24877 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 172 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 in a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a first state, and FIG. 172 (b) is a winning device 24065 in a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a second state. FIG. FIG. 173 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 24065 taken along line CLXXIIIa-CLXXIIIa in FIG. 172 (a), and FIG. 173 (b) is a winning device 24065 taken along line CLXXIIIb-CLXXIIIb in FIG. 172 (b). FIG. FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a), in the first state, the axis of the rotation shaft 24877 is parallel to the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 173 (a)). Both axial ends are axially supported by the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810 and the bearing portion 24626 of the intermediate cover 24820, respectively. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward to the discharge port 821 d of the intermediate base 24820 at a first inclination angle.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) to the second state, the cam portion 24877b at one axial end of the rotating shaft 24877 as the rotation angle increases. By gradually acting on the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 24816 of the front cover 24810, the height position of the axial direction one end side (the formation side of the cam portion 24877 b) of the rotation shaft 24877 is gradually raised.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, the height position of the axial direction one end side (the side on which the cam portion 24877b is formed) of the rotating shaft 24877 is maximized. Thus, the axis of the rotating shaft 24877 is inclined downward from the front base 24810 to the middle base 24820. As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820, and the inclination angle is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, as the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be increased.

  Here, as in the first embodiment described above, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated with its rotation axis maintained in the horizontal posture (that is, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is maintained at a predetermined angle) In the case where the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the ejection surface 846 is strong (large), the game balls are discharged early from the ejection surface 846, and while the second state can not be formed reliably, the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the ejection surface 846 If the value is loose (small), the game balls are slowly discharged from the discharge surface 846 and the residence time thereof becomes long, so that the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can not be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the descent inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively loose (small) at its initial stage. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged early from the discharge surface 846 (that is, to hold the game ball on the discharge surface 846) to facilitate the formation of the second state. it can.

  On the other hand, in the final stage, since the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is relatively strong (large) and the game balls can be discharged quickly from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821 d, The time in which the ball is placed (that is, the time in which the second state is formed) can be shortened to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state.

The Twenty Fifth Embodiment
A twenty-fifth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. In the first embodiment, the case where the seesaw member 840 is rotated while maintaining its rotation axis in the horizontal posture has been described, but the seesaw member 840 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is such that the posture of the rotation axis tilts along with the rotation. Be done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 174 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 175 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning device 25065.

  As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, in the winning device 25065 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, bearing portions 25816 and 24626 project from the back of the front base 25810 and the front of the middle base 24820, respectively. These bearing portions 25816 and 24826 are portions that rotatably support both ends of the rotating shaft 25877 on the inner peripheral surface thereof, and are formed in the same shape as each other.

  The rotating shaft 25877 is a shaft-like body of circular cross section for rotatably supporting the seesaw member 840 rotatably with respect to the front base 25810 and the middle base 24820, and the axial length of the shaft is the same as that of the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840. The dimension is set to be larger than the axial length. Therefore, the rotating shaft 25877 is fitted in the bearing 841 of the seesaw member 840, and the portions projecting from both axial ends of the bearing 841 are respectively supported by the bearing 25816 of the front base 25810 and the bearing 24526 of the middle base 25820. (See Figure 177).

  Further, on the back surface of the front base 25810, a push-up portion 25817 is provided protruding to the side of the bearing portion 25816. The push-up portion 25817 is positioned on the movement trajectory of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, and is discharged when the seesaw member 840 approaches the second state. It abuts on the lower surface of the surface 846 forming portion. By this contact, as described later, one side of the seesaw member 840 is pushed up by the push-up portion 25817, and the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 is increased.

  Next, the operation of the push-up portion 25817 when the seesaw member 840 is rotated will be described.

  FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 in a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a first state, and FIG. 176 (b) is a winning device 25065 in a state in which the seesaw member 840 forms a second state. FIG.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIa-CLXXVIIa in FIG. 176 (a), and FIG. 177 (b) is a winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 176 (a). 177 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the winning device 25065 taken along line CLXXVIIc-CLXXVIIc in FIG. 176 (b), and FIG. 177 (d) is a line CLXXVIId-CLXXVIId in FIG. 176 (b). It is sectional drawing of the prize-winning device 25065 in. FIGS. 176 (a) and 176 (b) correspond to FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b), in the first state, since the space is separated between the seesaw member 840 and the push-up portion 25817, the rotation shaft 25877 The axial ends of the rotary shaft 25877 are respectively supported by the bearing 25816 of the front cover 25810 and the bearing 24826 of the intermediate cover 24820 in a posture in which the axis of the shaft is parallel to the horizontal direction (FIG. 177 (a) left and right direction). Ru. In this case, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward to the discharge port 821 d of the intermediate base 24820 at a first inclination angle.

  When the seesaw member 840 is rotated toward the second state from the first state shown in FIGS. 176 (a), 177 (a) and 177 (b) and the discharge surface 846 forming portion of the seesaw member 840 is lowered. The lower surface of the discharge surface 846 forming portion is abutted on the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (not shown).

  From this state, when the seesaw member 840 is further rotated to the second state, the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817. A side which is rotated while lifting up one axial end side (the left side in FIG. 174 and the left side in FIG. 177) of the axial direction of the shaft and the discharge surface 846 forming portion is not in contact with the upper surface of the push-up portion 25817 (FIG. 177 (b) (right side) is lowered.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b), 27 (c) and 177 (d), when the seesaw member 840 reaches the second state, one axial end of the rotating shaft 25877 is the inner periphery of the bearing 25816. It is lifted from the bottom, and the axis of the rotating shaft 25877 is inclined downward from the front base 25810 to the middle base 24820. As a result, the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 is inclined downward to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820, and the inclination angle is increased to a second inclination angle larger than the first inclination angle described above.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the seesaw member 840 is rotated from the first state to the second state, the initial stage (until the lower surface of the portion forming the discharge surface 846 is abutted against the push-up portion 25817 Section), while maintaining the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846 at the first inclination angle (that is, without changing the inclination angle of the downward inclination of the discharge surface 846), In the section after the lower surface is in contact with the push-up portion 25817), the inclination angle of the descending inclination of the discharge surface 846 can be rapidly increased to the second inclination angle.

  Thus, in the initial stage, it can be easily suppressed that the game balls are discharged early from the discharge surface 846 (that is, the game balls can be easily held on the discharge surface 846), so that the second state can be formed more reliably. . On the other hand, in the final stage, since the game balls can be easily discharged from the discharge surface 846 to the discharge port 821 d quickly, the time during which the game balls are placed on the discharge surface 846 (that is, the second state is formed) Time) can be made shorter, and the alternate switching between the first state and the second state can be performed more smoothly.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the above-described embodiments, the case where the recessed groove 971 is formed in the front surface of the frame plate substrate 910 in the third path M3 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is possible to provide a convex strip which is provided and extended in a substantially sawtooth shape in a front view. In this case, as in the case of the concave groove 971, the gaming ball flowing down the third path M3 can be guided along the outer surface of the ridge to meander to the left and right. Therefore, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball can be reduced, and the movement of the gaming ball can be changed. In addition, a convex stripe can also be used as a lens for diffusing or collecting light.

  In the above-described embodiments, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 has been described to be located above the downward inclined end of the guiding bottom surface 824a of the middle bottom wall 824, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, in the second state, the receiving surface 844 of the seesaw member 840 coincides with the descending inclined end of the guiding bottom surface 824a of the middle bottom wall 824 or is positioned lower than the descending inclined end of the guiding bottom surface 824a. It may be formed to

  In the third embodiment described above, the third displacement member 3660 is slid relative to the first displacement member 3630 using the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 3662. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of providing a groove on one of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660 and a pin sliding along the groove on the other of the first displacement member 3630 or the third displacement member 3660, The third displacement member 3660 may be made to slide relative to the first displacement member 3630 by utilizing the sliding of the above.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed by the own weight (action of gravity) of the second displacement member 740 has been described. Instead of using the elastic force of an elastic spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring or an elastic body such as rubber or urethane, the second displacement member 740 can be moved in one direction or the other direction with respect to the first displacement member 730. You may be urged to Thereby, relative rotation of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 can be stabilized.

  Although the case where the liquid LQ is used as the predetermined heavy load has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Other heavy materials may be those which can displace (for example, roll or slide) the internal space of the cage 10746 along the longitudinal direction in accordance with the change in posture of the cage 10746, for example, iron or lead Examples are spheres and cylindrical bodies made of aluminum. In that case, the internal space of the holder 10746 does not have to be sealed.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where a predetermined weight is held in the inner space of the holder 10746 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the predetermined weight may be held at the center of gravity via a string or a link. The second displacement member 740 may be suspended from any position on the vertical line Z passing G. Also in this case, when the second displacement member 740 is rotated to one side or the other side with the rotation shaft 741 as the rotation center, the predetermined heavy load can be displaced to the same side as the moving direction of the center of gravity G.

  Although the case where the retainer 10746 is disposed at a position where the longitudinal center coincides with the center of gravity G of the second displacement member 740 has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it is preferable to position the longitudinal center of the holder 10746 on the vertical line Z passing the center of gravity G.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the return operation to the crossing angle γ1 of the second displacement member 740 with respect to the first displacement member 730 is performed using the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP has been described. The biasing spring SP may be omitted, and the second displacement member 740 may be driven by its own weight (action of gravity).

  In the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth embodiments, in the first state, the case has been described in which the rotation axis 24877 is pivotally supported in a posture parallel to the horizontal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 173A). However, the height position is not necessarily limited to this, and in the first state, the height position of one axial end (the side on which the cam portion 24877 b is formed) of the rotary shaft 24877 is higher (or lower) than the other axial end. It may be set to the position. That is, the first inclination angle described above (the inclination angle at which the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the first state is inclined downward to the discharge port 821d of the intermediate base 24820) It is sufficient if the discharge surface 846 of the seesaw member 840 in the two state can be increased to an inclination angle larger than the inclination angle inclining downward toward the discharge port 821 d of the intermediate base 24820.

  Although the case where a sufficient gap is not formed between the rotary members 21870 and 22870 and the front base 810 has been described in the above twenty-first and twenty-second embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A predetermined gap may be provided between the receiving plate 21872 and the pushing plate 21873 and the front base 810. In this case, it is preferable to provide a predetermined gap only on the receiving plate 21872 side. Thereby, the same effect as that of the twenty-third embodiment can be obtained.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the positive change state (the high probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol), and the latent state ( Three game states are provided: high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player. More specifically, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the variable display executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is made shorter than the other gaming states (600 seconds → 0.5 seconds) In addition, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol and the time reduction state (high probability state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is approximately equal (231/240 → 232/240), The opening period of the motorized steering part 1640a in the case of the normal symbol winning is common (one second × two times). Thus, in the latent state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the ball is aimed at the second ball entrance 1640 rather than the ball hitting the first ball entrance 64 (so-called, the left is hit). By striking out (so-called, right strike), it becomes possible to execute the lottery of the special symbol more efficiently. Thereafter, the drawing of the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol drawing, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 1640. The lottery of the special symbol executed based on the ball is referred to as the lottery of the second special symbol.

  In the first control example, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the specific winning opening 65a is a predetermined period (1.648 seconds × 1 time, 0.06 seconds × 6 times, or 0.06 seconds × 8 times) at a part of the gap ) Is released. For this reason, even if it does not become a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, there are many opportunities to get the ball to enter the specified winning hole 65a and obtain the winning balls, so it is advantageous over the first special symbol lottery It becomes. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the result of the loose lottery where the specific winning hole 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

  In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and also configured to open the specific winning a prize opening 65a even when it becomes a small hit, increase the number of winning balls in the latent state with a short variation time of the second special symbol You can keep it going. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of being in the latent state. In addition, although the details will be described later, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long in the normal state or the definite change state, the frequency with which the specific winning opening 65a is opened by being a big hit or a small hit is a latent state It drops significantly compared to. Therefore, in the normal state or the definite change state, even if the player strikes the right, the number of balls used for the game is greater than that of the winning balls. Therefore, in the normal state or the positive change state, it is more advantageous to hit the left. In a general game machine, the probability change state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present control example, the latent state is more advantageous than the probability change state, so that novel game characteristics can be provided.

  In the first control example, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous) Adopts a fluctuation method). As a result, even while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variation display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing at the same time, if one of them stops changing with a stop symbol of big hit or small hit, the other change display shows the remaining change time or lottery Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with the stop stop pattern. In this way, it is possible to prevent the other variable display from being determined and displayed as a win or small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the jackpot or the small hit may be repeatedly started.

  First, the details of the variable winning device 65 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. FIG. 178 is a front view of the center frame 86 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 178, the second through gate 67 is disposed on the right side of the center frame 86, and the variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower left side of the second through gate 67. A ball may reach the second through gate 67 and the variable winning device 65 when the player strikes a right. In FIG. 178, in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the variable winning device 65, the cover body provided on the front view front side with respect to the variable winning device 65 is shown excluding the outer peripheral portion. (CLXXIX part in FIG. 178).

  Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b). FIG. 179 is an enlarged view of a portion CLXXIX in FIG. 178. As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which game balls can enter. Below the specific winning opening 65a, there is disposed a detection opening 65a1 constituted by a magnetic sensor for detecting a winning of the gaming ball. The gaming balls having passed through the detection port 65a1 are distributed to either the normal discharge flow path 65e1 or the special discharge flow path 65e2 provided on the downstream side.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and (b), the opening of the specific winning hole 65a is in the open state where the game ball can enter the ball by the opening and closing plate 65f1 and the closed state where the ball can not enter (hard to enter). And variable. In the closed state, the opening is covered by the opening and closing plate 65f1, and a ball can flow downward on the right side of the opening and closing plate 65f1. Further, in the open state, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is configured to be opened toward the right side in a front view by tilting the opening and closing plate 65f1.

  By configuring in this manner, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the gaming ball flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable winning device 65 in the front view, and to the second ball entrance 1640 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, in the most advantageous latent state, the game ball is made to enter the second entrance 1640 and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, and when the small hit or the big hit, the specified winning opening 65a Allowing the ball to enter and get a winning ball can be realized simply by continuing to hit the right. Therefore, in the latent state, the player can play the game more easily.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and (b), the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the game balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a are distributed to the normal discharge flow channel 65e1 and the special discharge flow channel 65e2 described later. Will be described.

  First, referring to FIG. 179 (a), the case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. In FIG. 179 (a), the flow channel solenoid 65k is inoperative, and the switching member 65h protrudes to the left in the front view (the flow channel side where the ball flows down), so that the inlet of the special discharge flow channel 65e2 It is a figure which shows the state which has blocked the opening surface.

  When the open / close plate 65f1 is opened, the gaming ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the detection opening 65a1. Then, the gaming balls guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 are guided to the upper surface of the switching member 65h, and as a result of the switching member 65h being inhibited from flowing down the special discharge channel 65e2, the normal discharge channel It is induced to 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 formed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of gaming balls is provided. By the discharge confirmation switch 65 e 4, it is possible to accurately detect the number of out balls discharged from the normal discharge flow path 65 e 1 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as the out balls.

  Next, referring to FIG. 179 (b), the case where the gaming ball is guided to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 will be described. FIG. 179 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is opened by the flow channel solenoid 65k operating and the switching member 65h being immersed rightward in a front view .

  As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the gaming ball having passed the detection port 65a1 flows down along the outer peripheral wall and is guided to the special discharge flow channel 65e2. The game ball guided to the special discharge flow channel 65e2 is detected by the V passage switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge flow channel 65e2 and configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and as an outer ball The pachinko machine 10 is discharged to the outside. Thus, it can be determined whether all the gaming balls entered into the variable winning device 65 have been discharged, from the total of the out ball detected by the V passage switch 65e3 and the out ball detected by the discharge confirmation switch 65e4. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball jam occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be found early.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the gaming ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is a special variation of the special symbol ( It is set to a definite change state or a latent state). That is, the V-passing switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a definite variation state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the gaming state after the big hit to the low probability state or the positive variation state of the special symbol.

  As described above, since the gaming state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the switching member 65h) is at most 1 second. The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 180, in this control example, the switching member 65h is activated for 4 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continuing to the V passage switch 65e3. The game ball can pass through the path 65e2.

  Thus, based on the fact that the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection opening 65a1, the player receives a bonus ball (one ball winning in this control example). 15 prize balls can be paid out. Also, by using the game ball after being detected by the detection port 65a1, it is possible to assign whether or not to pass through the V passage switch 65e3, whether or not to give a definite variation state of the special symbol A lottery can also be executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving a definite variation state of a special symbol separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the case of one jackpot will be described. In this control example, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot is varied according to the jackpot type to vary the flowability of the ball with respect to the special discharge flow passage 65e2. In this control example, two types of patterns (a pattern in which it is difficult to enter the specific winning hole 65a and a pattern in which the ball is easy to enter) are provided as the opening and closing patterns of the opening and closing plate 65f1.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram schematically showing the time change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the time change of the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing plate 65f1 for each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 180 (a), the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before one round of the jackpot is started. That is, before the start of one round, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow channel 65e1 (see FIG. 179 (a)). This off state continues until one round starts. Then, when the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state only for 4 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 179 (a)). When the 4 seconds on state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is again set to the off state (a state in which the ball can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1), and thereafter the off state until the jackpot ends Be kept

  Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the jackpot C is reached, when one round is started, the closed switching plate 65f1 is opened. By opening and closing the open / close plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. This open state lasts for only 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening and closing plate 65f1 was opened, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until the elapsed time from the start of one round becomes 2.9 seconds. Then, when 2.9 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is set to the open state again. This open state lasts only for 0.1 seconds, and one round is ended thereafter, and the opening and closing plate 65f1 is kept closed until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. Note that one round in this control example ends when ten balls enter the specified winning opening 65a, or three seconds have elapsed since one round was started. Since it is very difficult for the ball to enter the specified winning opening 65a during the opening period of 0.2 seconds and the opening period of 0.1 seconds, basically it is when you hit the jackpot C The jackpot ends without the ball being able to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. That is, since the ball can not be passed through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability variation state of the special symbol is not given after the big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot becomes C, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes disadvantageous to the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball enters the specified winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds or 0.1 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3. Can be transferred to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, it is possible to play the game expecting that the probability variation state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), in the case of one of the jackpots A, B, D to G, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started. That is, in the first round, an open / close pattern that makes it easy to cause the ball to enter the specified winning hole 65a is set. Therefore, the V passage switch 65e3 can be easily passed by causing the ball to enter the specified winning opening 65a during a long open period of 3 seconds as compared to the jackpot C. Therefore, when the jackpot becomes A, B, E to G, the ball can easily pass through the V passage switch 65e 3 during the jackpot, so the ball is directed toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. If it does, it can be made to shift to the definite variation state of a special symbol after a jackpot.

  The ON period of the passage solenoid 65k is longer than the open period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 by 1 second, after the ball enters the specified winning opening 65a and then the ball reaches the special discharge passage 65e2 It takes up to 1 second at most. That is, even if the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the first round of the jackpot flows down at the maximum flow-down time, the ball can pass the V passage switch 65e3. As a result, when the ball enters the specified winning opening 65a in the first round of the big hit, it is possible to give a definite variation state of the special symbol after the big hit regardless of the entering timing.

  Thus, in the present control example, the ease of transition to the positive change state is made different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of setting an open / close pattern that is easy to shift to the positive change state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic view schematically showing a method of transitioning from one gaming state to another gaming state for the three types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

  First, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the left because the player who played the game with the left hit tends to have a higher lottery frequency of the special symbol than playing the game with the right. This is because it is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 when hitting the left. In addition, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, as described above, the small hit is not drawn, so the ball is endless unless it is a big hit. It is in a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when the jackpot occurs. In addition, four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. The details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 192 (a).

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 181, in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state), if the jackpot A determined in the proportion of 32% when the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol is a jackpot A, after the jackpot end, FIG. It shifts to the probability variation gaming state ST2 (certain variation state) shown in the middle of the. Also, when the jackpot B or D determined by the ratio of 58% in total when the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) becomes a jackpot, after the jackpot end, Figure 181 of FIG. It shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state ST3 (latency state) shown on the right side. On the other hand, when it becomes the jackpot C determined at a rate of 10% when it becomes the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot end (normal state is looped To do).

  As described above, in the latent state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes short, and the gaming efficiency in the case of hitting the right becomes high, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, in the normal state or the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes long, so the gaming efficiency when right-handed is extremely reduced, and the gaming state becomes disadvantageous compared to the latent state . Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of becoming jackpots B and D which become triggers for transition to the advantageous latent state.

  In the normal state, it is usual to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting left, but the player intentionally strikes right and the ball enters the second entrance 1640. Or, as a result of a part of the ball hit to the left entering the second entrance 1640, there is also a possibility that a jackpot will occur in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, all jackpot types (jackpots E to G) are in common, and after jackpot completion, transition to the probability game state ST2 (provisional change state) is made. If it becomes a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, while there is a possibility that it will shift to an advantageous latent state at a rate of 58% (big hit B, D), the second in the normal state In the case of a big hit in the special symbol lottery, there is no possibility of transition to an advantageous latent state. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the unusual game method which performs the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be enlarged by performing the right strike in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Also, as described above, even if the jackpot A, B, D to G, if it is not possible to pass the ball to the V-pass switch 65e3 during the jackpot due to not hitting the ball in the jackpot etc. The gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the most disadvantageous normal state (looping the normal state). On the other hand, even in the most disadvantageous jackpot C, if the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the most advantageous latent state.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the definite change state will be described. As described above, in the definite change state, it is easier for the player to hit the left because it is easier for the player to play the game with the left hit than to play the game with the right hit as in the normal state. It becomes. In the positive change state, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state, it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but is disadvantageous compared to the latent state. In the probability variation gaming state ST2 (certain variation state), if it becomes a big hit or if it is continuously missed over the specified number (120 times) of special symbol lottery after becoming a probability variation state, to another gaming state Transition.

  Specifically, as shown in the central part of FIG. 181, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot C determined at a rate of 10%, after the jackpot is completed, the left side of FIG. The state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state) shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it becomes either of jackpot B, D determined at a rate of 58% in total when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot end, the latent probability variation gaming state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. Move to (latency state). On the other hand, if it becomes a jackpot A determined at a rate of 32% when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, a positive change state is set again after the end of the jackpot (loop the positive change state) . In addition, when it is continuously removed over the specified number (120 times) of the special symbol lottery in the definite change state, after the specified number of times elapses, it shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 (normal state).

  In the definite change state, it is normal to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting left as in the normal state, but the ball enters the second entrance 1640 and the second special There is also a possibility of becoming a big hit by lottery of the symbol. In this case, in all jackpot types (jackpots E to G), the probability variation gaming state ST2 (certainty variation state) is looped after the end of the jackpot. If it becomes a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol in the definite change state, while there is a possibility that it shifts to an advantageous latent state at a ratio of 58% (big hit B, D) as in the normal state, When the jackpot of the second special symbol in the definite change state is a big hit, the possibility of shifting to an advantageous latent state becomes zero. Therefore, since the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method for executing the lottery of the second special symbol can be increased by performing the right strike in the definite change state, it is possible to suppress the irregular game.

  Next, the transition method of the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent definite change state, unlike the normal state or the definite change state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed by playing the game with the right hand . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right than to hit the left. In the latent probability change gaming state ST3 (latency state), transition to another gaming state when it is continuously out over a specified number (120 times) of special symbol lottery after becoming a latent state Do.

  Specifically, as shown on the right side of FIG. 181, when the latent condition is set, if it is continuously missed over the specified number (120 times) of special symbol lottery, it is usually determined after the specified number of times has elapsed. The game state ST1 (normal state) is entered. On the other hand, when you play a game with a right-handed (the second special symbol lottery is easy to be executed) and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state and becomes a big hit, after the big hit basically it will If the ball is hit by hitting the winning opening 65a), the latent probability changing gaming state ST3 (latency state) is set again after the end of the big hit. For this reason, in the latent state, by continuing to win the jackpot before becoming out of 120 consecutive times, the advantageous latent state and the jackpot capable of acquiring a large number of winning balls are repeated. The gaming state is extremely advantageous for the player. In addition, although the details will be described later, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/80 when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol). The probability of being 120 out of 120 consecutive wins at 1/80 jackpot is about 22% (79/80 to the 120th power), so the percentage of jackpots within 120 times in the latent state is about 78%. Thus, once in the latent state, the jackpot and the latent state loop at about 78%, which is a very advantageous state.

  In addition, since it is normal to play a game by hitting the right in the latent state, basically the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed. If the player misplaces the launch direction or if the player moves to the latent state with the holding ball of the first special symbol remaining in the normal state, etc., even if the latent state is the first special symbol A lottery may be run. In this case, if it becomes a jackpot, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot C (10% distribution) is reached in the first special symbol lottery in the latent state, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when it becomes jackpot A, B, D in the lottery of the first special symbol, the latent state is set again after the jackpot.

  It should be noted that, unlike the normal state or the probability change state, that the latent state is set even after the end of the jackpot A is by the holding ball of the first special symbol stored before shifting to the latent state, the latent state When the lottery of the first special symbol is executed after state transition and the jackpot is achieved, it is to reduce the possibility of transition to an adverse probability change state. Immediately after the transition to the latent state, if the lottery of the first special symbol held is made and it becomes a jackpot and shifts to the positive change state, it will be in the disadvantageous state without receiving the benefit of the latent state Since the player falls down, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the first control example, if the win in the lottery of the first special symbol in the advantageous latent state becomes a big hit, the percentage of looping the latent state after the big hit will be higher than the normal state or probability change state It is set up as follows. As a result, even when a jackpot occurs in the first special symbol lottery immediately after shifting to the advantageous latent state, the latent state is set again at a high rate (90%). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 182 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine main symbols attached with the numbers “1” to “9”. Each of the main symbols is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” on the rear symbols that simulate various animals. Specifically, for example, the number “1” is attached to the rear symbol imitating an elephant, and the number “2” is attached to the rear symbol imitating a lion.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variation display is finished. It is configured to generate a big hit later. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the upper and lower, and a main display area Dm in which about 3/4 of the upper side variably displays the third symbol, and others About 1⁄4 of the lower side is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, upper, middle and lower three symbol rows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling in the horizontal direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower pattern row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, the downward sloping diagonal lines and the upward sloping diagonal lines in the main display area Dm are set as the effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. At each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1 → the lower symbol row L3 → the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether the player is the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot) It can be suppressed that it is overlooked). In addition, if the combination of big hit symbols (in this control example, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, or a new ball enters the ball into either of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that a game is not being executed is displayed (see FIG. 186). ). It is rare that the player does not enter the ball into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 even though the player continuously launches the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Yes, in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 1640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is corresponded to the new entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. In the present control example, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is performing variable display based on the drawing of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. By the number of the holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of holding balls on which the variable display is currently held. In addition, in this control example, only the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol is constituted so that reservation is possible, and it is considered as composition which does not store the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol reservation. For this reason, in the sub display area Ds, only the number of holding symbols corresponding to the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (b), an example of display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state and the definite variation state. Furthermore, in the upper center portion of the main display area Dm, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. In this small area Dm1, the variable display of the three third symbols of the simple aspect composed only of the numerals “1” to “9” is executed. In the small area Dm1, the jackpot is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols configured by the same number. It should be noted that the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simple manner as compared to the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state and the probability variation state. The first special symbol lottery is executed, and the second special symbol lottery has almost no opportunity to be executed. Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by setting it as the structure which displays the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol mainly performed in a bigger display area. In the following description, the variable display of the special symbol mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or probability change state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds) is referred to as the main fluctuation, in each gaming state The variation display of the special symbol that is hardly executed when the regular game method is performed (the variation display of the second special symbol corresponds to the normal condition or the probability change condition) is referred to as a secondary variation.

  In the small area Ds1 in the sub display area Ds, the holding symbols imitating the face of a bird are displayed in the same number as the number of holding balls in the first symbol. At this time, at the start of the variable display based on the holding ball corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering into the interior of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the holding ball has been started. Also, in the small area Ds1, a notice effect is performed by the holding symbol sometimes performing a special operation, another character appearing, or the like.

  In this control example, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be held up to four times at the maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is not limited to four times, and three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the ball entering to the 2nd ball entrance 1640 can be hold | maintained. In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four is different by the number of number-hold balls. (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 (a) and 183 (b), the variable display effect (fluctuation pattern effect) of the third symbol in this control example will be described. FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the case where all symbol rows on the upper, middle and lower sides are fluctuating in the variable display effect. When each symbol row is changing, each symbol row is scrolled (variable display) from the right side to the left side of the screen. By the variable display being executed, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the drawing of the special symbol is newly executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in expectation of becoming a stop symbol of the big hit after the end of the variable display effect (the main symbol with the same number being aligned with any of the valid lines V1 to V5).

  FIG. 183 (b) shows an example of the display content in the case where the reach effect which suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the stop symbol of the big hit is stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of the third symbol is generated. FIG.

  Here, in the reach, the upper symbol row L1 and the lower symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed in the variable display, and only the middle symbol row L2 is in a variable display, and on any of the effective lines V1 to V5. The main symbol to which the same number was attached shows the state where stop display was carried out, and it is an aspect which suggests that it is a chance to align the main symbol attached to the same number on effective line L1. In the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), two main symbols with the number “1” are stopped and displayed on the effective line V4, and the number “2” is attached on the effective line V5. It shows a state in which two main symbols are displayed stopped. In this case, the main symbol with the number “1” or “2” attached to the middle row of the middle symbol row L2 is stopped to be displayed as a stop symbol of the big hit, so the player sees a big hit against the player Can be expected to be

  The upper symbol L1 and the lower row symbol row L3 are stopped and displayed, and when the reach occurs, the character "reach!" Is displayed above the middle symbol row L2 during variation as shown in FIG. 183 (b). . By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize the occurrence of the reach. Therefore, it can be expected that the stop symbol of the big hit will be stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation effect where the reach occurs.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, special reach effect which is a kind of reach effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. In this special reach effect, after the effect (provisional stop effect) is executed as if all the symbol rows L1 to L3 have been stopped and displayed by the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the removal, the symbol rows L1 to L3 are A different form of reach in which a reach is generated between a newly displayed symbol row and a part (two) of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed stopped and different symbol rows are newly displayed. It is an effect. This special reach effect is selected as part of the reach effect, and is set to be more likely to be a big hit than normal reach effect (it becomes difficult to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out) There is.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), when the special reach effect is executed, first, each symbol row is stop-displayed (provisional stop) with a stop symbol of detachment without being accompanied by a reach. In this case, when another symbol row is present on the upper side of the upper symbol row L1, the stop symbol of the combination that is reach by the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed. Ru. In the example of FIG. 184 (a), the main symbol with the number “1” is displayed on the middle row of the upper symbol row L1 and the left side of the middle symbol row L2. That is, if there is a symbol row above the upper symbol row L1 and the main symbol with the symbol "1" is stopped on the right of the symbol row, the same number "1" is displayed. The main symbols with "" are displayed stop in the order in which they are aligned on a straight line. In addition, as a mode of temporary stop in special reach production, a plurality of modes other than a mode in which the main symbols with the same numbers given to the upper right are lined up on the left side of upper symbol row L1 and the middle row of middle symbol row L2. Is provided. For example, in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, the main symbols with the same number on either the left, middle or right side are vertically aligned, or the middle row of the upper symbol row L1, and the middle symbol There is also provided an aspect in which main symbols given the same numeral on the right side of the row L2 are arranged in an upward direction to the right.

  In the special reach effect, after the third symbol of each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), each of the third symbols displayed in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 Among the symbols, the main symbol changes to a mode looking up. By changing the mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the current variable display effect is not finished.

  After each main symbol is changed to look up, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the effect is to shift the angle (camera angle) of the screen toward the upward direction of each main symbol (upward) Is executed. When the effect of shifting the angle of the screen is performed, a new symbol row L4 in change is displayed at the shifted position (a new symbol row L4 is framed in). Along with this, the pattern row L4 shown below is framed out from the screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 185 (b), when a new symbol row L4 appears (frames in), the new symbol row L4 and “1” displayed in the middle of the upper symbol row L1 are displayed. A reach state is configured by the main symbol with a number and the main symbol with a number of "1" displayed on the left side of the middle symbol row L2. Along with this, the main symbol on which the reach is applied (the main symbol with the number “1” attached) is changed to a mode in which the aura is worn, and the character “reach!” Is displayed on the upper side of the new symbol row L4. Is displayed. Thereby, if the main symbol with the number of "1" is stopped and displayed temporarily at the time of the change stop of the new symbol row L4, the main symbol with the same number on the new effective line V6 Since the three are aligned (a jackpot stop symbol), it can be clearly suggested to the player that it is a chance to become a jackpot.

  As described above, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed and reach is generated after the third symbol is once stopped and displayed in combination. ing. As a result, even in the case where the stop display is performed in the combination of the outs, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols in anticipation of developing into special reach effect. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols paying attention to the combination of the stop symbols that can be developed into the special reach effect (the combination that becomes reach when the new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, each time the variable display is stopped and displayed as a combination of deviations, it is possible to expect the development to the special reach effect, so it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In the first control example, the new symbol row L4 is displayed above the upper symbol row L1 when the special reach effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed below the lower row symbol row L3, and a reach may be formed by the middle symbol row L2, the lower symbol row L3, and the new symbol row L4. Further, for example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed between each symbol row. That is, a new symbol row L4 appears between the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2, and a reach is formed by the upper symbol row L1, the middle symbol row L2, and the new symbol row L4. Also good. Moreover, in the first control example, when the new symbol row L4 is displayed, the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not changed by deleting the lower figure symbol row L3. Since the type of symbol row to be displayed is changed, it is possible to unify the size of each symbol displayed during the special reach effect and the size of each symbol displayed before the special reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a new symbol row L4 may be displayed such that the number of symbol rows displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) in the first control example will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is deviated in the normal state or the definite change state. If the first special symbol is not reserved (if the number of balls is 0), then the combination of the third symbol at the time of the variation stop is for 30 seconds unless the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Continue to be displayed across. Then, when 30 seconds have elapsed, the screen is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen shown in FIG. 186 (b). In the example of FIG. 186 (b), a movie in which the sun is sunk with respect to the mountain is displayed as the customer waiting demonstration screen. In this movie, the display content changes with the passage of time, and for example, according to the elapsed time, as shown in FIG. 186C, the display content is such that three birds pass in front of the mountain. By switching to the customer waiting demo screen, a player who is not playing a game can easily determine whether or not it is a vacant platform. In addition, when it switches to a customer waiting demonstration screen, the stop symbol of a 1st special symbol is simplified and displayed on the upper left of the display screen of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 (only with a number).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 186 (c), in the normal state or the probability change state, the variation display (secondary variation) of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the state where the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed When the 3rd symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the 1st special symbol is stopped and stopped and 30 seconds pass in the state where only the sub fluctuation is executed, the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed Are configured to be As described above, in the normal state or the probability change state, the game efficiency is improved by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol extremely long (600 seconds) and performing left hitting rather than right hitting . For this reason, when the player erroneously strikes the right in the normal state or the definite change state and immediately after the variation display (secondary change) of the second special symbol is started, the player quits playing the game. The subvariation will continue to be performed for about 600 seconds. Under this circumstance, if it is not specified that the customer waiting demo screen is displayed during execution of the sub-variation, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed even though no one has played for about 600 seconds at most. There is a possibility that the displayed content may be as if it were in the game. Therefore, another player may hesitate to start playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 until the sub-variation ends, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, after 30 seconds have passed since the end of the main fluctuation, the display is switched to the customer waiting demonstration screen regardless of whether or not the sub fluctuation is being executed. Then, this customer waiting demonstration screen is configured to continue to be displayed until the next drawing of the first special symbol is executed (until the main variation is started) regardless of whether or not the sub variation is being executed. There is. By configuring in this way, the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640, and even if he / she quits playing immediately after the variable display for 600 seconds is started, it takes about 30 seconds. Later on, you can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, since it can be easily understood that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform to other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen, the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. In the first control example, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), on the demonstration display screen when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped and displayed, a stop symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and The stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in substantially the same size, but for example, the size of the special symbol on the side of the main variation is larger than the size of the special symbol on the side of the secondary variation It may be displayed. Also, on the display screen shown in FIG. 186 (b), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper left and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the center, but for example, the side that becomes the main variation in the gaming state The special symbol of the symbol may be stopped and displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and the special symbol on the side of the sub fluctuation may be stopped and displayed on the center of the display screen. Thereby, regardless of the gaming state, the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation can be easily grasped only by confirming the specific part of the display screen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the display mode in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the first control example, the latent state is the most advantageous state. In this latent state, in the main display area Dm1, an effect (an effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is performed in a mode different from the normal variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the latent state, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. And while the fluctuation display (sub fluctuation in the latent state) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed in the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol The display (main fluctuation in the latent state) is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In addition, as described above, in the latent state, it is a legitimate game method to play a game by aiming at the second entrance 1640 by right-handling, so fluctuation display (main fluctuation) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol Is displayed in a larger display area than the variable display (sub-variation) corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol. That is, the special symbol that is the main variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol based on the gaming state transitioning from the normal state to the latent state, and the special symbol that is the secondary variation is the second special Even if the symbol is changed to the first special symbol, the area in which the sub fluctuation is displayed is configured not to be changed from the upper center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, at least a part of the data for performing the display (the variable display or the demonstration display) regarding the sub fluctuation can be shared and used.

  Further, below the area for displaying the variable display (main change) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol, the character "right-handed" is displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the right hitting is a legitimate game method.

  Further, in the remaining number display area D1 displayed at the upper left of the main display area Dm, a standard of the remaining number of the latent state (standard of the number of times of drawing to shift to the normal state) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the player is notified that “the remaining 40 times” is displayed, and the player may shift to the normal state if the drawing of the special symbol is disconnected 40 times consecutively. To suggest. The remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is 120, which is the number of continuations of the latent state, when the game state (normal state or definite change state) is first shifted to the latent state. The value is displayed by being subtracted by one in conjunction with the start of the variable display indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this control example, even if the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the number of times before the big hit continues to be displayed even after the big hit, without resetting the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 ( That is, when the jackpot is reached, the number of times displayed and the actual number of remaining times deviate). If the player continues to hit the right according to the displayed instruction (the character of “right strike”), the ball is allowed to pass through the V passage switch 65e3 when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery Since it can do, 120 latencies are newly set after the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the latent state, the number of times the latent state continues actually increases more than the number of remaining times displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Although the details will be described later, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the number of remaining actual latent states is the number of remaining on the display when the number of remaining on the display is zero. Is added (superposed) to (see FIG. 189). As a result, even if the remaining number on the display approaches 0, it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the number is added when the remaining number on the display is 0 times.

  In addition, as it mentioned above, it becomes easy to win in the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, so even if the opening and closing plate 65f1 is movable (variable) in the open state, it may be moved by winning the big hit, small hit It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won and moved. In addition, in the present control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be the same in both the large hit and the small hit. Specifically, even if the jackpot or the small hit, while the display mode in which the character 811 is running during the big hit or the small hit, it became the jackpot from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether it has become a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not there is a difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number in the latent state, so that the remaining number on the display is zero. It can be made difficult to predict whether or not the remaining number will be displayed in addition if it has become. Therefore, when the number of remaining times on the display is 0, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the remaining number of times is added and displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game be able to.

  As described above, since both the variable winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 1640 are disposed at a position where the ball can easily enter the ball by performing a right strike, the display during the large hit and the small hit Even if the mode is changed to the display mode similar to that during the change of the third symbol and the stop display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from winning and winning the winning ball of the big hit or the small hit. Therefore, when the number of remaining times on the display is zero without causing the player to lose money, it is possible to more strongly expect the number of times to be displayed.

  FIG. 187 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the case of 30 seconds or less after the variable display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is finished. In this case, the same display mode (display mode in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit runs) is displayed, except that the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first control example, the second special symbol does not have a function to suspend the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the latent state, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (0.5 seconds Therefore, the frequency at which the fluctuation stop state occurs is extremely high. Under this circumstance, if the display mode is made different (switched) between the variation of the symbol and the variation stop, the display mode is frequently switched, which may confuse the player. In addition, if the frequency of switching the display mode is high, there is a possibility that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 also increases.

  Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the main display area Dm is made common between the variable display of symbols and the stop display. As a result, frequent switching of the display mode can be suppressed, so that confusion of the player can be prevented (suppressed). Moreover, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, when 30 seconds pass with the fluctuation stop state in the latent state, the display mode is switched to the display mode (latency demonstration display) in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit stops. By switching the display mode, it can be easily recognized that the fluctuation stop state continues for a long time (30 seconds or more). Also, when 30 seconds have passed since the variable stop state in the latent state, a screen (latency demonstration display) different from the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 186 (b)) is displayed, It can be easily recognized that the current gaming state is in the latent state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that another player starts playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 when the player playing the game in the latent state temporarily leaves the pachinko machine 10 due to a break or the like. can do. Since the latent state is the most advantageous state in the pachinko machine 10 and it is difficult to think of quitting the game while in the latent state, the player who is playing the game is only temporarily left. This is because it is possible to make other players recognize.

  Furthermore, in the latent state in the first control example, since the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short, if the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) is displayed, the second entry is subsequently made. When the ball enters the ball opening 1640, if it takes time to switch the screen, there is a possibility that the fluctuation time ends before displaying the effect accompanying the ball entry. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust that the effect is not executed even though the ball enters the second entrance 1640. On the other hand, in the present control example, in place of the customer waiting demo screen (see FIG. 187 (b)) in the latent state, a latency demonstration display in which the same character 811 as during the variation is continuously displayed (FIG. 187 (c) Since it is set as the structure which performs reference), when the ball-in to the 2nd ball entrance 1640 is detected, a display mode (representation mode) can be switched smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being distrusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (a), the latent state end screen displayed when the latent state is ended will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing this latent state end screen. This latent state end screen is displayed when the number of remaining lottery numbers in the latent state is zero.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the screen for completion of the latent condition end screen is displayed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is switched to fall to the ground, and the character 811 is displayed above the character 811. The display area 812 in which the character "!" Is displayed is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the advantageous latent state has ended. Further, on the right side of the character 811, the characters “return to left” are displayed. This display allows the player to more reliably return to the left. In addition, this latent state end screen detects entering the ball to the first entrance 64, and the variable display is started, or the first special symbol fluctuates and stops after the latent state ends. Continue to be displayed until 30 seconds have passed. Then, when one of these two conditions is met, a result screen indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the latent state and the total number of times the latent state continued is displayed. The details of the result screen will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b).

  FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a result screen displayed after the latent state is over. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64 is first detected after the latent state is over, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation thereof A results screen is displayed showing the results of the latent state using time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the word "456 GAME" is displayed as the number of times the latent state continues (number of times the special symbol has been drawn during the latent state), and the number of continuations Below the letter representing the letter, a letter “10030 points earned!” Indicating the total number of prize balls paid out during the latent state is displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player clearly understand how many times the latent state has continued and how many prize balls have been won. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the normal state without questioning the finished latent state. Also, by displaying the result screen after the end of each latent state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming to achieve a better result in the next latent state. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, it does not display the result (result) of the latent state in the latent state, but after the latent state is over, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed first. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display finally executed in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the first control example, since the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol executed first after the latent state ends, the latent state is determined. The result of the status can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the first control example, in order to make the result of the latent state more surely confirmed to the player, the drawing of the special symbol twice after the latent state ends. Over the period, a fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. By this configuration, since each result display can be performed within the fixed variation time, it is possible to more surely confirm the result display to the player.

  It should be noted that, even if 30 seconds have passed since the completion of the latent state, no entry into the first entrance 64 was detected (the variation display of the first special symbol was not started) , Instead of the customer waiting demo screen, a result display is performed. Subsequently, the result display in this case continues to be displayed until the variation display of the first special symbol, in which the first ball entry to the first entrance 64 is detected and executed, is finished. As a result, immediately after the completion of the latent state, it is possible to reliably confirm the result of the latent state also to the player who has left the pachinko machine 10 by a break or the like.

  In the first control example, the result is not displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the result of the latent state may be displayed immediately after the latent state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable symbol display of the first special symbol is ended. By displaying the result immediately after the latent state ends, the player can immediately know the result of the ended latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In addition, in the case of displaying a result in the latent state immediately after the latent state ends, a measuring means for measuring a period after the latent state ends is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, 12) is provided by the measuring means. The result may be displayed until the second) elapses. In this case, if the variation of the first special symbol is started before the predetermined period elapses, the result is continuously displayed until the variation ends, and the variation of the first special symbol is started after the predetermined period elapses In that case, it may be configured to execute a normal display that is not a result display in the variation.

  Furthermore, when the variation of the first special symbol for displaying the result in the latent state is won, it is preferable to change the display mode of the result. For example, it is preferable to display “earning of 1,030 points or more !!” as a suggestion indicating that the player has won a win on the normal result display screen displayed in FIG. 188 (b). In this manner, by displaying the result of the determination of the special symbol using the result contents of the latent state, it is possible to notify the player of the result display of the latent state and the result of the determination of the special symbol without discomfort. . In addition, when winning a jackpot during the period in which the result display of the latent state is being executed and transitioning to the latent state again, the contents of the result in the previous latent state are taken over and updated. Good. As a result, the player can play the game with enthusiasm during the period in which the result display in the latent state is being executed.

  In addition, as an effect during the latent state, using a period of one special symbol fluctuation or a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, the same display as the latent state result display screen displayed after the latent state ends An effect (a pseudo end effect) in which a screen is displayed may be used. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect, and the latent state continues to the player even when the latent state is actually ended and the result display of the latent state is executed. You will be able to make that happen.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a resurrection effect which is a kind of the effect performed during the latent state will be described. The resurrection effect is an effect that may be displayed when the number of remaining lottery numbers in the latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is zero. More specifically, if the number of remaining lottery numbers on the display becomes 0 while the number of remaining latent condition states is 1 or more, the actual remaining number is added to the number on the display It is an effect to be displayed.

  When this resurrection effect is executed, the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 first becomes zero, as in the case where the latent state end screen (see FIG. 188 (a)) is displayed. , An effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the character 811 that has fallen to the ground once stands up, and the character “resurrection” is displayed around the character 811. By performing the effect of this aspect, the player can be made to recognize that the advantageous latent state continues, and the player can be pleased. Further, as the effect that the character 811 stands up is performed, the number of actual remaining latent state is displayed on the remaining number display area D1. FIG. 189 exemplifies a case where the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to “the remaining 10 times” because the number of actual remaining latent states is 10 times.

  As described above, in the first control example, the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state becomes a jackpot, and the remaining number of the latent state (actual number of remaining times) is updated to 120 times. The display content before the big hit is taken over without resetting the remaining number (remaining number on the display) displayed in the number display area D1. Then, when the number of remaining times on the display becomes 0 with a difference between the actual number of remaining times and the number of remaining times on the display, a resurrection in which the difference from the actual number of remaining times is added and notified It is set as the structure which performs presentation. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game expecting the resurrection effect to be performed even when the remaining number on the display approaches 0 times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the latent state.

  In this control example, the difference between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display in the resurrection effect is added and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the resurrection production performed first, a value smaller than the difference may be added and displayed, and the resurrection production may be performed a plurality of times whenever the resurrection production is performed. As a result, when the resurrection production is first executed in the latent state of 1, it is determined that the resurrection production will be further executed even if the remaining number of times added in the resurrection production is completed, The game can be played with confidence until the effect is performed. In addition, it is possible to play the game looking forward to how many times the resurrection production is performed. Further, when the resurrection effect is executed, it is preferable to execute a result display that is displayed when the latent state ends, and then execute the resurrection effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 207, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 190) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 190, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In addition, the small hitting type counter C5 is used for the selection of the small hitting type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 227) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value for the winning for the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203 a and the second entering ball opening 1640 is stored in the RAM 203 for each winning value for the first entering ball slot 64. A second special symbol execution area 203b to be stored is provided. In the present control example, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls. For this reason, each counter value will be 1st when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or the special symbol is not being played. 1) When the game ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second ball entry port 1640 has a winning game ball, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, during a period when the first special symbol can not be drawn, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entry slot 64, And when the number of holding balls of the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Be done. In addition, when the number of reserved items for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit value (four in this control example) or more, acquisition of each counter value and the like is not performed, and the winning balls (five in the present embodiment) Only the winning balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. Also, when the ball wins the second entrance 1640 during a period in which the second special symbol can not be drawn, such as during the second special symbol variation display or during the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot game etc. In this case, only the winning balls (five winning balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls which are paid out to the player without acquiring the counter values and the like.

  In the present control example, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for the first entrance 64, it is not limited thereto, and may be less than four (for example, three). There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided. In addition, in this control example, the ball entering to the second ball entrance 1640 (variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but it is possible to hold and store as well as the first ball entrance 64 It may be configured.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203. And, the value of the random number which is the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 192 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and When the value matches with the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the value of the random number to be the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 192 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state, the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is determined to be any of “7, 8”, and if it is any of “7, 8”, it is determined to be a jackpot. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of “0 to 5”. If it is determined that the value is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that the jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the small hitting random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), a random number to be a small winning is not defined in the first special symbol lottery. That is, it does not become a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", the range of "212 to 432" If it is inside, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first per one as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random number "0 to 5" is the first random number table as described above It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is six while the total number of random number values is 480, the probability to be a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/80".

  Furthermore, as described above, there are 221 values of the first random number counter C1 that will be small per win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the random value "212-432" is stored in the small per random number table 202b ing. As described above, since the total number of random numbers to be small hits is 221 while the total number of random numbers is 480, the probability to become a small symbol of a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

  Referring back to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. The value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)). It becomes. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 (a).

  The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the small hitting, small hitting classification (small hitting A) on the basis of the value of this small hitting classification counter and the small hitting classification selection table 202e (figure 193 (b) reference) ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 (b).

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 227) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 194 to 196). In the variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set, and for each, variation pattern selection tables are set for each of the pass / fail determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and the ball passes either the left or right normal starting port (through gate) 67 When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 192 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (c).

  FIG. 192 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second hit random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 231 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 230” . Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 231 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “231/240”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time reduction state of the normal symbol), there are 232 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 231”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 232 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “232/240”. As described above, in this control example, since the random number value corresponding to the normal symbol is different only in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability becomes almost equal. There is. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the open time of the motorized accessory 1640a accompanying the second ball entrance 1640 when the normal symbol is hit are also equal. For this reason, the ease of entering the second entrance 1640 is equal between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state and the positive variation state becomes extremely long (to 600 seconds) with respect to the variation time in the latent state. This makes it more difficult for the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed than in the latent state in the normal state or the positive change state, so in the normal state or the positive change state, the player aims at the first ball entry 64 for the player. Can be done.

  When the ball passes the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device 83. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second collision random number counter C4 is within the range of “0 to 230”, it is determined to be a hit, and the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Then, the symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second ball inlet 1640 is opened for “one second × two times”. On the other hand, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "0 to 231" in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined to be hit, and the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished. After that, a symbol “o” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) and the second entrance 1640 is opened for “one second × two times”. In this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  The common variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter which is incremented by one in order in the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). When the game ball passes the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol based on the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 (See FIG. 197) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. The details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 227).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 191 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in this control example. In addition to the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c described above, the ROM 202 further includes a large hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202f and a common drawing variation pattern selection table 202g are provided.

  First, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (a). The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is , It has been defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a), for the first special symbol, “big hit A” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 31” in the first hit type counter C2 value. . The "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)) Is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 32 counter values to be "big hit A", "big hit A" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery The ratio is 32% (32/100).

  In addition, when it becomes "big hit A", whether or not the time reduction state of the normal symbol is given, whether the game state at the time of winning the "big hit A", and passed the V passage switch 65e3 in the big hit It depends on whether or not. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), if the ball is in the "big hit A" in the normal state and the positive change state, and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 in the big hit, the big hit end time 120 times are set. On the other hand, in other cases (when it does not pass the V passage switch e3 during the big hit, or when it becomes the big hit in the latent state and passes the V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit), the number of time saving is not set (Set to 0 times). Therefore, when it becomes "big hit A" in the normal state or the positive change state, in many cases, the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the number of 120 times of positive variation and 120 short times are set. The game state after the jackpot is a definite change state. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A" in the latent state, the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, and the number of 120 times of probability variation (and the number of time reductions of 0 times) is set. Becomes a latent condition. On the other hand, when the ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 because the player does not hit the ball during the big hit etc., the normal state most disadvantageous to the player is set as the gaming state after the big hit. Ru.

  "Big win A" is one of the big hit types that has the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but in normal conditions or definite changes, basically it is definite change as the gaming state after the end Is set (no advantageous latency is given), which is a disadvantage to the player in terms of gaming state after the jackpot. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A" in the latent state, it basically loops the latent state even after the big hit ends, so it is a kind of jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player in the latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “32 to 80”, “big hit B” is defined in association with it. This "big hit B" has 7 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)) Is set. Also, after the end of the "big hit B", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit B", basically the latent state (120 times of probability variation, 0 times of time saving) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit B" is 48, so "big hit B" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 48% (48/100).

  "Big win B" is one of the types of jackpots with the smallest number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but if you hit a ball towards the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot (right (If it is done), it shifts to a latent state advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state, which is advantageous in terms of the gaming state. If the ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit because the ball is not hit during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal state regardless of the playing state at the time of winning. .

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “81 to 90”, “big hit C” is defined in association with it. In this "big hit C", the round number is 7 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, an open / close pattern (refer to FIG. 180 (b)) which is difficult to pass the V passage switch 65e3 is set Ru. Also, after the end of the "big hit C", the time saving state is not given (the number of time saving is set to 0). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit C", basically the normal state (both the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of 0) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is the "big hit C" is 10, so the "big hit C" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100).

  The "big hit C" has the smallest number of rounds, and regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, basically the most disadvantageous normal state is set after the big hit, so the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player is there. Although the possibility is low, the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 if the ball can be made to win the specific winning hole 65a during a short time when the specific winning hole 65a is opened. In this case, the most advantageous latent state is set after the jackpot.

  In the range of "80 to 99", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with "big hit D". This "big hit D" has 15 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c) Is set. Also, after the end of the "big hit D", the time saving state is not given (the time saving number is set to 0 times). Therefore, after the end of the "big hit D", basically the latent state (120 times of probability variation, 0 times of time saving) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value which is the "big hit D" is 10, so the "big hit D" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 10% (10/100).

  The "big hit D" has the largest number of rounds and, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, basically the most advantageous latent state is set after the big hit, so the jackpot type most advantageous for the player one of. If the ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit because the ball is not hit during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal state regardless of the playing state at the time of winning. .

  On the other hand, as the type of jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 79". This "big hit E" has 7 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)) Is set. In addition, the number of time savings is set under the same conditions as "big hit A". That is, in the normal state or a definite change state, when it becomes "big hit E" and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set and the gaming state after the big hit becomes a definite change state . Also, if the ball wins the "big hit E" in the latent state and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, the number of time saving is set to 0, so the gaming state after the big hit is the latent state Becomes (loop the latent condition). Further, when the ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, since the time saving number is set to 0 regardless of the playing state at the time of winning, the playing state after the big hit becomes the normal state. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit E" is 80, so "big hit E" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 80% (80/100).

  Since this "big hit E" has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hit types, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls. On the other hand, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit E" in the latent state, basically the latent state is looped even after the big hit, so as the gaming state after the big hit Is advantageous to the player.

  It should be noted that in the normal state or the positive change state, it becomes "big hit E", and the configuration to shift to the positive change state when the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 is anomalous that always strikes right even in the normal state or positive change state. It is for suppressing the various game methods. That is, even in the case of a "big hit E" in the normal state or the positive change state, if the latent state is set after the big hit, it is expected that the latent state will shift to an advantageous latent state. There is a possibility that the player may carry out an irregular game method of performing the lottery of the second special symbol (performing a right strike) even in the definite variation state. Therefore, in this control example, when the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it becomes the gaming state after the jackpot in the normal condition or the definite variation state and becomes the big hit (big hit EG) of the second special symbol. Is configured to be set. As a result, the merit of performing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state or the probability variation state can be eliminated, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the irregular game method in which the right strike is always performed.

  In the range of “80 to 95”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F”. The "big hit F" has 15 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)) Is set. In addition, the number of time savings is set under the same conditions as “big hit A” and “big hit E”. That is, when the ball is won in the "big hit F" in the normal state or the positive change state and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in the other cases, the time saving number is not set (set to 0). Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit F" is 15, so "big hit F" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery The ratio is 15% (15/100).

  In this "big hit F", although the number of rounds is large, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in each round other than the first round is different from other big hit types. More specifically, in 2 to 15 rounds of "big hit F", an open / close pattern (special open / close pattern) is set in which the open / close plate 65f1 is opened only for a maximum of 0.06 seconds. It is difficult to win a ball to the specific winning opening 65a in 0.06 seconds, so it is difficult to obtain a winning ball in 2 to 15 rounds of "big hit F". As described above, the special opening and closing pattern is set when the "big hit F" is the small hit or the "big hit F" when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened in the latent state. It is to make it vague. Although the details will be described later, the small hit of this control example is a small hit A in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened for a relatively long time (1.648 seconds) and a short hit (0.06 seconds) which is opened only once. Small hits B and C which repeat the opening operation a plurality of times are provided. Therefore, setting the special opening / closing pattern in the case of "big hit F" makes the operation of the open / close plate 65f1 similar to the case of the small hit B or the small hit C after becoming the small hit A. it can. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether 120 latent conditions have been reset, or small wins have been won consecutively, and the number has been decremented, as a "big hit F" occurs during the latent condition. You can Therefore, whether the number of remaining latent states on the display matches the actual number of remainings (whether the latent state ends when the number of remaining on the display reaches 0) Since it can be difficult to distinguish from the appearance, when the number of remaining times on the display approaches 0, it is expected that the resurrection effect (see FIG. 189) will be performed and the number of remaining times on the display will be additionally displayed. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest to the game while the player is in the latent state.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99”, “big hit G” is defined in association with it. The "big hit G" has 15 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1, the open / close pattern (easier) which can pass the V passage switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit (see FIG. 180 (c)) Is set. In addition, the number of time savings is set under the same conditions as "big hit A", "big hit E", and "big hit F". That is, when the ball is won in the "big hit G" in the normal state or the positive change state and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 times of time reduction are set. On the other hand, in the other cases, the time saving number is not set (set to 0). Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value for "big hit G" is 5, so "big hit G" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery Rate is 5% (5/100).

  This "big hit G" is advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls because the number of rounds is the largest among the six types of big hit types. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed in the latent state, and when it becomes "big hit G" in the latent state, basically the latent state loops after the big hit, so the gaming state after the big hit Is also advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the present control example, when left hitting is performed in the normal state or in the definite variation state, and the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, an advantageous latent state with a ratio of 58% (jackpot B, D) It is configured to migrate to Then, the player performs right hitting in the latent state, and when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured to loop an advantageous latent state at a ratio of 100% (big hit EG). Therefore, once the latent condition (special symbol oddity and normal symbol normal condition) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 1640 by right-handed It is easy to be executed, and the state of high jackpot probability and the jackpot of the second special symbol are easily repeated. For this reason, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game for the purpose of shifting to the latent state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the details of the small hitting type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (b). The small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to determine the type of the small hit when the small win occurs in the first special symbol drawing. In the small hitting type selection table 202e, the corresponding small hitting type is defined for each range of the value of the small hitting type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), “small hit A” is defined in association with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C 5 of “0 to 93”. The "small hit A" is a small hit type in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state only once for 1.648 seconds in the small hit game. Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, 94 small random numbers are "small hit A", so "small hit A" if it becomes a small hit in the second special symbol lottery The rate at which is determined is 94% (94/100).

  Moreover, "small hit B" is matched and prescribed | regulated to the range whose value of small hit classification counter C5 is "94-98". The "small hit B" is a small hit type in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set to open for 0.06 seconds x 6 times during the small hit game. Among the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 5 random values that will be "small hit B", so "small hit B" if it becomes a small hit in the second special symbol lottery The rate at which is determined is 5% (5/100).

  Furthermore, "small hit C" is specified in association with the value "99" of the small hit type counter C5. The "small hit C" is a small hit type in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 is set to an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during a small hit game. Among the 100 random numbers that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there is only one random value that will be "small hit C", so it will be "small hit C" if it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery The proportion is 1% (1/100).

  As described above, in the present control example, a small hit game in which the opening and closing plate 65f1 performs the opening and closing operation one or more times is executed when the small symbol is selected in the drawing of the special symbol. In this manner, when the open / close plate 65f1 performs the opening / closing operation in the latent state, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing operation is due to winning the large hit or the small hit. Can. Therefore, the resurrection effect is performed when the remaining number of the latent state on the display approaches 0, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol executed in the latent state is not a jackpot even once. Can be expected. In addition, in this control example, when the lottery of a 2nd special symbol is performed, the ratio used as a small hit is about 46%. For this reason, in the drawing of the 120 special symbols set as the latent state, the player wins about 55 small wins. Therefore, since the opening and closing plate 65f1 is frequently opened and closed during the latent state, it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot is a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the variation pattern selection table 202f includes a table A202f1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in a normal state, and a table B202f2 for a general, and a variation pattern in a positive change state. At least the probability variation table 202f3 and the latency probability table 202f4 for determining variation patterns in the latency status are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196. In the tables shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds in order to facilitate understanding.

  First, the normal table A 202 f 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The regular table A is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state and the drawing of the special symbol other than twice immediately after the termination of the latent probability change state is executed. FIG. 195 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ordinary table A 202 f 1. As shown in FIG. 195, the table A202f1 for normal use is a random number value (variation type counter value CS1 counter) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each type of special symbol and each type of stop of special symbol. Value) is specified.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “51 to 100”, super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “101 to 150”, and super reach for the range of “151 to 198” C (30 seconds) is associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is drawn out and the table for general use A 202 f 1 is referred to, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS 1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is variable according to the number of holding balls Do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195, when the number of holding balls is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 70” (10 seconds) The fluctuation pattern of is associated, and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 198”. It is done.

  On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is 2 or 3, the fluctuation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation type As the value of the counter CS1, a long-term (10 seconds) fluctuation pattern is associated with the range of “71 to 150”, and a normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “151 to 170”. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 185”, and the super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “185 to 198”. It is done. In addition, processing (refer to S307 of S210) which selects the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special symbol with reference to this table A202f1 for general is more than processing (refer to S303 of FIG. 210) which subtracts the holding ball of the 1st special symbol It will be executed later. Therefore, the normal table A 202 f is not referred to in the state where the number of holding balls is four.

  As described above, when the number of holding balls is small (0 or 1), a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is easily selected as compared with the case where the number of holding balls is large (2 or 3). By configuring in this manner, when the number of holding balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for storing the holding balls and make it difficult for the fluctuation display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is large, it becomes difficult to store the holding by shortening the fluctuation time, so the ball number is further increased to the first ball entrance 64 when the number of holding balls becomes the upper limit (4). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost.

  On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table A 202 f 1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) are set as the fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the whole range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, out-of-long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the right hitting is performed in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely deteriorated compared to the left hitting. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress anomalous gaming methods in which a right strike is performed at the normal time.

  Next, the details of the ordinary table B 202 f 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). The table for ordinary use B 202 f 2 is a table which is referred to only when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of drawing times of the special symbol is two or less after the completion of the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the table for ordinary use B 202f2 is referred to, the same fluctuation time is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol and the number of holding balls. Specifically, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the post-ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is out, the after-out ST variation (12 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the first or second lottery of the special symbol after the completion of the latent state is the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation time of 12 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. In this 12-second period, the above-described result display in the latent state (see FIG. 188 (b)) is performed. By selecting the fixed variation time, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for performing the result display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player sufficiently confirm the result of the latent state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), for the lottery of the second special symbol, a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the case of the table A 202f for a regular table. The content is the same as that of the ordinary table A 202 f 1 described above with reference to FIG. 195, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  It should be noted that after the completion of the latent confirmation, the variation time of 12 seconds is set not only for the first special symbol lottery but also when the second special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery. This is because there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 1640 before returning to the left after the completion of the latent condition, and the drawing of the second special symbol may be executed first. . As in this control example, if the variation time of 12 seconds is set in the second drawing of the special symbol after the completion of the latent confirmation, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started first, Since the variation time of 12 seconds can be set by executing the lottery of the first special symbol after that, regardless of whether the lottery of the first special symbol is executed first or not, The result display can be performed for the same time after the completion of the latent state of. In the latent state, the second special symbol lottery may be performed twice in a row without performing the first special symbol lottery. However, as described above, the result display is performed when the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more (that is, when the main fluctuation is not started for 30 seconds) after the latent condition ends. It has composition. Therefore, also in this case, the result display can be performed for a sufficiently long time.

  In addition, it does not display the result (result) of the latent state in the latent state, but after the latent state is over, it is configured to be displayed during the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed first. This is because the variation time of the second special symbol in the latent state is extremely short. Therefore, if the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variable display finally executed in the latent state, the result can be displayed only for a very short time. On the other hand, in the first control example, since the result (result) of the latent state is displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol executed first after the latent state ends, the latent state is determined. The result of the status can be displayed for a sufficiently long time. Although details will be described later, in the first control example, in order to make the result of the latent state more surely confirmed to the player, the drawing of the special symbol twice after the latent state ends. Over the period, a fixed variation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol. By this configuration, since each result display can be performed within the fixed variation time, it is possible to more surely confirm the result display to the player.

  In this control example, the fixed fluctuation time (12 seconds) is set regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the display contents of the result display to be executed are the first For example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, a display indicating a hit may be performed in addition to the display content of the result display. In addition, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol where the change is executed at the same time (in parallel) with the change of the first special symbol where the result display is executed based on the change of the first special symbol is also a hit, In addition to the display content of the result display performed based on the variation of the first special symbol, a display indicating a hit may be performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display the gaming result of the latent state and the lottery result of the special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  In addition, in the present control example, when the variation of the first special symbol is executed twice consecutively after the latent condition ends, only the first variation is configured to execute the result display, In the second variation, the variation display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation where the game result in the latent state is displayed excessively and the variable display based on the lottery result of the special symbol is not executed.

  In addition, since the table 202f3 for probability variation has almost the same configuration as the table 202f1 for normal use, it will be briefly described, but if it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is the same as the table 202f1 for normal Each variation pattern (per normal reach, per super reach AC) is selected by the selection ratio. Also, even when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, as in the normal state. On the other hand, when it comes out of the first special symbol lottery, it is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time shorter than the normal state can be easily selected. This is because the jackpot probability is increased in the definite change state, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable if the fluctuation pattern of long fluctuation time frequently occurs despite the detachment. Therefore, in the first control example, the variation pattern of the short variation time is configured to be easily selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is lost during the definite variation state, and the variation pattern of the long variation time is When selected, the player is more strongly expected to become a jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), the details of the latency determination table 202f4 will be described. The latency confirmation table 202f4 is a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latency state.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the middle fluctuation (60 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0-198) of the values that can be taken by the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is done. In addition, in the deviation of the first special symbol, the deviation super short fluctuation A (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the jackpot of the second special symbol corresponds to the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the super short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) Is defined in association with the small hitting of the second special symbol, small hitting super short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is matched against the whole range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 In the second special symbol out of the range, the super short variation (0.5 seconds) is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. . That is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the latent state, the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result.

  In the latent state, since the lottery of the second special symbol is basically performed, the fluctuation time is approximately 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently (rapidly) by right hitting in an advantageous latent state. In addition, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is missed in the latent state, 0.5 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time, so, for example, with one or more of the first special symbol being held. When entering into the latent state, it is possible to quickly digest the first special symbol holding ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game concentrating on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is the main fluctuation in the latent state.

  In addition, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol in the latent state, to set a relatively long fluctuation time (60 seconds), if it becomes the big hit of the first special symbol in the latent state, This is because the latent state may end. Specifically, when a big hit C occurs in the latent state, an open / close pattern (see FIG. 180 (b)) in which the ball hardly passes the V passage switch 65e3 is set to the open / close plate 65f1. The game state after the end is normal. If such a situation occurs, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the present control example, by setting a relatively long fluctuation time when the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is made, the second special can be performed by performing right hitting during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is constituted so that the lottery of the symbol can be executed plural times. As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it wins a small hit about once in about two (about 46%), so before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol It is possible to end small hit fluctuation of with high probability. As described above, in this control example, the simultaneous variation method capable of executing the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol simultaneously in parallel is adopted. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols is confirmed with the stop symbol of the big hit or the small hit during the simultaneous fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is the remaining fluctuation time or the lottery at the start of fluctuation Regardless of the result, it is forcibly stopped by the stop stop pattern. Therefore, even during the jackpot change of the first special symbol, the stop symbol of the small hitting is displayed in a definite manner by the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, thereby discarding the jackpot of the first special symbol. it can. Since this can prevent (suppress) the jackpot of the first special symbol, which may end the latent state, from being started with high probability, the player can enjoy the latent state more reliably. Can not.

  In this control example, 0.5 second is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol set corresponding to the latent state, but there is a small probability (for example, “1/199”. ) May be configured to select a long fluctuation time (eg, 12 seconds). Furthermore, when the long fluctuation time is selected, the result display showing the gaming result of the latent state (actually, the gaming result during the latent state game) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it possible for the latent state to end during the latent state, and it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect. There is.

  Next, the details of the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table to be referred to in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 197, in the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g, the value range of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. And are defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds with respect to the entire range (0 to 198) of values that can be taken by the spread pattern type counter CS2. Variation patterns are associated. Further, also in the case where the gaming state is the definite change state, the change pattern of the change time of 3 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the common drawing change type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated with the range of “0 to 190” in the value of the common drawing fluctuation type counter CS2, and the common drawing fluctuation type counter A fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 1 second is associated with the range of “191 to 198” of the value of CS2. When the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, by fluctuating the variation time of the normal symbol, the time from when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed to when the electric character 1640a is released is predicted It can be difficult. Therefore, when the ball is shot one ball at a time to the first through gate 66 or the second first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 and the ball passes through any of the through gates, the symbol hit and the normal pattern In this case, it is possible to predict the timing at which the motorized character 1640a is released to suppress the irregular game method of striking the ball and to continuously perform the right strike during the latent state.

  In the first control example, although a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the definite change state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol may have a variation.

  Moreover, in this control example, when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed in the latent state, one of two types of 1 second or 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time is 2 types. Not limited to the above, more variable time may be configured to be selectable. As the variation time is varied, it is more difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to make the right strike continuously more reliably during the latent state.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the common drawing variation type counter CS2 acquired, but in addition to that, it is based on the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. The variation time may be changed, the variation time may be changed based on the number of lottery times of the special symbol, or the variation time of the normal symbol may be set by a method combining the various configurations described above. Specifically, one second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol from the transition of the gaming state to the latent state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). The times of up to 120 times may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. In addition, while the lottery of the even numbered special symbols is executed after the gaming state shifts to the latent state, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (odd number of times), It may be configured to set 3 seconds as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. As described above, by configuring the variation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the lottery of the special symbol is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so that it is possible to more surely in the latent state. It is possible to make a right strike continuously. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the variation time of the normal symbol is longer (compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol It is good to constitute so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol may become long, so that the number which carries out the reservation memory of the lottery is small.

  Moreover, when setting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol based on the holding ball number of a normal symbol, it is good to comprise so that long fluctuation time may be easy to be selected, so that the number of holding balls of a normal symbol is large. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is hard to be stored is adjusted, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of holding balls in the normal pattern is easily stored is per unit time The number of regular symbol lottery can be made uniform.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 198, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol holding ball Number counter 203e, V prize flag 203f, short time counter 203g, prize counter 203h, special figure 1 waiting flag 203i, special figure 2 waiting flag 203j, probability variation counter 203k, big hit flag 203m, winning state storage area 203n, small hit It has at least a flag 203o, a special view 2 change stop flag 203p, a prefetch pending storage area 203r, a special view 1 change timer 203s, a special view 2 change timer 203t, a large hit middle flag 203u, a small hit middle flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), each of which In the area, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is the execution area After being shifted (moved), determinations such as drawing of special symbols are performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the determination value (counter value) for executing the lottery of the special symbol is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning at the second entrance 1640 is detected is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) And. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes either the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is four. Among the vacant areas of the holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserve first area to the execution area, the reserve first area becomes empty, so it is stored in another reserve area as in the case of the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack winning data into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) (the first symbol display device 37, It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and a maximum value of 4 each time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S1504 in FIG. 222). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 210).

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S304 in FIG. 210, FIG. 222) See S1505). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, the variable display being held by the main control unit 110 It is possible to obtain the value of the holding ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is the holding of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a holding ball of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67 It is a counter that counts the number (waiting count) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to zero, and the ball passes through the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67. Each time the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S1605 in FIG. 223).

  When the ball passes the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second The value of the hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1705 in FIG. 224). On the other hand, when the ball passes the first through gate 66 or the second through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly added to the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. It is not memorized (see S1703: No in FIG. 224).

  The V prize flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to a definite change state. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the definite changing state is determined depending on whether or not the ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179 (b)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the ball passes the V passage switch 65 e 3, the V prize flag 203 f is set to ON (see S 2410 in FIG. 231). On the other hand, the V prize flag 203f is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230). The V prize flag 203f is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off at the time of recovery (when the power is turned on). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the V prize flag 203f is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V passage switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it is passing, V prize winning is achieved. The flag 203f may be formally set on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether the vehicle passes through the V passage switch 65e3 before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i described later is greater than zero. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the V prize flag 203f is rewritten on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The time saving counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the short counter 203g is set to 120 if the jackpot A, E to G is won in the normal state or the definite change state and the V prize flag 203f is on at the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the hour reduction counter 203g is decremented by one in the gaming state update process which is executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S607 in FIG. 213). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the short time counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time symbol of the normal symbol is short, and the determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the high probability table. (See S1610 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, if the value of the hour reduction counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol rejection determination is performed with reference to the low probability table (see S1611 in FIG. 223).

  The winning counter 203 h is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (entered) the special winning opening 65 a in each round of the big hit. If the value of the winning counter 203h is 5 which is the upper limit value, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2406 in FIG. 231). In each round of the jackpot, even when the value of the winning counter 203h is less than 5, the round is ended when the round period set for each round is reached. The winning counter 203h is incremented by one each time a winning entry to the specific winning opening 65a is detected during the jackpot round effective period. Also, the value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

  The special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state. If this special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is on, it indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, and if it is off, the first special symbol is in change or the first special symbol is suspended. It means that it is the state just before starting the variable display based on a sphere. This special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is set to ON when the first special symbol is not changing and the number of holding balls is 0 (see S311 in FIG. 210). On the other hand, when the variation start of the first special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S309 in FIG. 210).

  Special figure 2 waiting flag 203j is a flag which shows whether the 2nd special symbol is a change stop state. If this special figure 1 waiting flag 203j is on, it indicates that the second special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, and if it is off, it means that the second special symbol is in the process of being changed. This special view 2 waiting flag 203j is set to ON when the second special symbol is not changing and the start winning for the second entrance 1640 is not detected (see S809 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when the change start of the second special symbol is set, it is set to off (see S807 in FIG. 215).

  The probability variation counter 203k is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state (a high probability status of a special symbol) of the special symbol. If the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the definite variation state of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal condition of the special symbol (special Indicates that the symbol is a low probability state).

  When the probability change counter 203k has an initial value set to 0 and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, 120 is set at the end of the big hit (see S2304 in FIG. 230). Also, in the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol, the value is decremented by 1 (see FIG. 213). See S602). The probability change counter 203k is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). This probability variation counter 203k is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is a probability variation state of the special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 211) and the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 216). (See S402 in FIG. 211 and S902 in FIG. 216).

  In the jackpot flag 203m, it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation In this case, the flag is set to ON (see S406 in FIG. 211 and S906 in FIG. 216). The jackpot flag 203m is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see S708 in FIG. 214 and S1309 in FIG. 220). In addition, a storage area of 2 bits is allocated to the jackpot flag 203m, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bit and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bit. More specifically, if the jackpot flag 203m is "10B", it will be a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and indicates that the variable display indicating the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203m is "01 B", it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery, indicating that the variable display showing the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203m is "00B", it indicates that the jackpot variation is not executed.

  When the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to ON ends with the jackpot flag 203m ON, processing for forcibly stopping the other special symbol with a symbol is executed (S705 in FIG. 214, FIG. 220) See S1306)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a defect that the other becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of one big hit with the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The winning state storage area 203 n is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the probability change counter 203k are both 0), this winning state storage area 203n indicates the normal state. "00H" is stored as information. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a definite change state (if the values of the time reduction counter 203g and the positive change counter 203k are both 1 or more), information indicating the positive change state is stored in the winning state storage area 203n. "01H" is stored. Further, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (if the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203k is 1 or more), a latent state is stored in this winning state storage area 203n. “02H” is stored as information indicating the positive state.

  The information stored in the winning state storage area 203n is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the time saving game after the jackpot is ended (see S2301 in FIG. 230). As described above, if the jackpot A, E ~ G becomes and the ball passes the V passage switch 65e 3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot will differ depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state or not I'm sorry. In this control example, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of big hit is stored in the winning state storage area 203n, and by referring to the time of the big end, it corresponds to the big hit type and the playing state at the big hit. An appropriate gaming state can be set.

  The small hitting flag 203o is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 1640 matches the small hitting determination value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set (see S1002 in FIG. 217). The small hit flag 203o is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1405 in FIG. 220). When the variation time of the second special symbol variation display ends with the small hitting flag 203o turned on, the other special symbol is removed and processing for forcibly stopping with the symbol is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 221). Thereby, during execution of the small hit of the second special symbol, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the problem that the big hit is started during the small hit will occur it can.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (finalized display) with the stop symbol of the big hit to the start of the big hit. When this special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON, the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided even when there is a new ball entry to the second ball entrance 1640 (See S801 in FIG. 215: Yes). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set on when forcedly stopping with the second special symbol out of the second special symbol (see S703 in FIG. 214), and avoids the processing for executing the second special symbol fluctuation display If it is set, it is set to off (S811 in FIG. 215).

  The prefetch storage area 203r is a storage area for storing the prediction result when the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted before the timing at which the lottery of the original special symbol is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, immediately after the ball has won the first entry ball slot 64 (start winning) and each counter value has been acquired, each of the acquired respective special symbols is obtained separately from the lottery of the original special symbol. From the counter value, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated). As described above, to predict various information obtained when the original lottery is performed before the original special symbol lottery is performed is hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading”. In the prefetch storage area 203r, at the timing when each counter value is acquired based on the start winning for the first entrance 64, the prefetch result based on the counter value (in the case of the jackpot determination result of the special symbol lottery, Jackpot types and fluctuation patterns) are stored. Further, the prefetching storage area 203r can store prefetching results as many as the number of balls to be reserved (ie, up to four).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t are timers for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol When a variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the counting result of the special figure 1 fluctuation timer 203s and the special figure 2 fluctuation timer 203t (see S701 in FIG. 214 and S1301 in FIG. 220).

  The jackpot middle flag 203 u is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not in a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON when the start of jackpot is set (see S709 in FIG. 214 and S1310 in FIG. 220). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end processing executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2307 in FIG. 230).

  The small hit middle flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit middle flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if off, it indicates that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit middle flag 203v is set to ON when the start of the small hit is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small hit (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, and the like provided in the RAM 203, basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 181 can be realized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 199 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a screen display selection table 222b.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ), And is used to determine the contents of the detailed variation display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery. In addition, the aspect (refer to FIG. 184, FIG. 185) of the special reach effect mentioned above is also prescribed in this fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, and the fluctuation content which the fluctuation pattern command shows is a hit super reach A or out of reach super reach A. Selected in some cases.

  The screen display selection table 222b is a table that defines the display content when 30 seconds have elapsed since the first special symbol or the second special symbol has stopped changing. As described above, in the present control example, the simultaneous variation method is adopted, and even if one special symbol is in the variation stop state, a situation in which the other special symbol is in the variation state frequently occurs. In addition, according to the game state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes the main fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes the main fluctuation, and the special symbol to be noticed by the player is switched. The screen display selection table 222b is referred to set the demonstration display corresponding to the gaming state in a state where the main fluctuation is stopped while appropriately displaying the fluctuation display of the main symbol in each gaming state. The details of the screen display selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing defined contents of the screen display selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 200, the screen display selection table 222b corresponds to the combination of the gaming state, the state of the special view 1 standby flag 223s, and the state of the special view 2 standby flag 223t. The display content (screen display type) to be displayed on 81 is defined. In addition, the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t respectively indicate whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the stop state, respectively. It is a flag to indicate. Each flag indicates that a predetermined time has elapsed if it is on, and if it is off, the variable display is based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, or the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop state ( Indicates that it is within 30 seconds).

  As shown in FIG. 200, when the gaming state is the normal state or the definite change state, the display contents (screen display type for the combination of the special view 1 standby flag 223s off and the special view 2 standby flag 223t on) The normal display is prescribed as). In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal mode (see FIG. 182 (b)) in the normal state. Display content. In the normal state, since the variable display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main change, the main change can be reliably displayed by setting it to the normal display.

  A demo display is associated with a combination in which the special view 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special view 2 standby flag 223t is off in the normal state or the positive change state. When this demonstration display is determined, a customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the end of the first special symbol variation, which is the main variation, the display is switched to the demonstration display (customer waiting demo screen) regardless of whether or not the sub variation is being executed. Therefore, even after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the variable display for 600 seconds is started, the game is immediately terminated after the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demonstration screen. Therefore, since it can be easily understood that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform to other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen, the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

  In the normal state or the definite change state, the demonstration display is also associated with the combination in which both the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t are off. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration screen (see FIGS. 186 (b) and (c)) is set also in this case. This makes it possible to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the latent state, the special display is associated with the combination of the special view 1 standby flag 223s off and the special view 2 standby flag 223t on. This special display means the above-mentioned demonstration display for latent confirmation (see FIG. 187 (c)), and a demonstration display of a special mode in which the same character 811 as during the fluctuation continues to be displayed is set. Thereby, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 is detected thereafter, it is possible to smoothly switch the display mode (render mode). The special display is set also in the case of a combination in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are both on. That is, regardless of the condition of the first special symbol corresponding to the sub-variation in the latent state, if 30 seconds or more have passed since the second special symbol corresponding to the main variation has been in the fluctuation stop state, the special display It is set.

  In the latent state, the normal display is associated with the combination in which the special view 1 standby flag 223s is on and the special view 2 standby flag 223t is off. Therefore, in the latent state, the variable display or the stop display corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol continues to be displayed normally even if 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the first special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, status setting area 223i, sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j, special figure 1 waiting counter 223k, sub special figure 2 Waiting flag 223m, Special figure 2 waiting counter 223n, Remaining probability variation area 223o, Reward probability variation number area 223p, Remaining short time area 223q, Special figure 1 waiting flag 223s, Special figure 2 waiting flag 223t And at least another memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , And the command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first ball entry port 64 is detected in the main control unit 110, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are obtained according to the start winning combination. From the values of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (hit or miss, big hit type in the case of a big hit, change pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed Various information predicted (estimated) in main controller 110 and the predicted various information is notified from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, Are stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a fluctuation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main control device 110 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waits) of the change production of the 1st special symbol being done up to 4 times for every classification of a special symbol.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is special symbol by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. It is managed by each type of.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the holding ball number is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. , And stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4310 in FIG. 238). As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 c, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value for the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled to display the ball number pattern in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 may also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 and the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol, respectively. It is turned on (see S4304 and S4307 in FIG. 238) and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S4702 and S4706 in FIG. 243). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  When special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 f and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223 g receive stop type command of the first special symbol and stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from main controller 110 Is turned on (see S4401 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S4710 in FIG. 243). When the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223 f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223 g is turned on, the stop type is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

  The effect counter 223 h is a counter used for selection of a fluctuation pattern, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 236) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Be done.

  The state setting area 223i is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. The status setting area 223i is updated with information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command every time the status command output from the main control device 110 is received (S4011 in FIG. 235, FIG. See 240 S4506). More specifically, a storage area of 2 bits is allocated to the status setting area 223i, and whether or not it is a definite variation of a special symbol or a short symbol of a normal symbol in order from the upper bit The indicated value is stored. For example, if the value of the status setting area 223i is "11B", it means that it is a definite variation state of a special symbol and a time shortening state (that is, a definite variation state) of a normal symbol, It means that it is a definite variation state of the design and a normal state (that is, a latent state) of the design. On the other hand, "00H" means that it is in the normal state.

  By updating the state setting area 223i in accordance with the state command output from the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223 j and the sub special figure 2 waiting flag 223 m are flags indicating whether the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the fluctuation stop state, respectively. If these flags are on, it means that the corresponding special symbol is in the fluctuation stop state, and if it is off, it means that it is in fluctuation. These are updated in synchronization with the states of the special view 1 standby flag 203i and the special view 2 standby flag 203j of the main control unit 110.

  The special figure 1 waiting counter 223k and the special figure 2 waiting counter 223n are counters for counting an elapsed time after the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the stop state. Of the special figure 1 waiting counter 223k and the special figure 2 waiting counter 223n, when the count value corresponding to the special symbol which becomes the main fluctuation in the current gaming state becomes a value corresponding to 30 seconds, the game A demonstration effect corresponding to the state is set (see S4211 in FIG. 237).

  The remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining time short number area 223q are storage areas for storing the remaining number of time variation states of the special symbol and the normal symbol, respectively. The remaining certainty number change area 223o and the short remaining time number area 223q are notified by the remaining certainty number change command and the remaining short time number command which are output each time the values of the probability change counter 203k and the time shortening counter 203g are updated in the main control unit 110. The number of times is updated (see S4652 and S4662 in FIG. 242). As a result, the values stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o and the remaining number of short counts area 223q can be updated in synchronization with the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the time reduction counter 203g of the main control unit 110. The remaining number of definite variations to be grasped 113 and the number of time reductions can be made to coincide with the actual number of definite variations updated by the main control unit 110 and the number of reductions.

  The effect probability variation number area 223p is a storage area for storing a standard of the remaining number of latent state displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 in the latent state. In the effect probability variation number area 223p, 120 is set when the game state is shifted from the other gaming state to the latent state (see S4505 in FIG. 240). In addition, each time a special symbol variation is executed in the latent state, the value is decremented by one (see S4657 in FIG. 242).

  The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are flags indicating whether or not the fluctuation stop state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more, respectively, and if they are on Indicates that the variation stop state of the corresponding special symbol continues for 30 seconds or more. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the corresponding special symbol is in motion or within 3 seconds after the motion is stopped. The special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the special figure 2 standby flag 223t are turned on when the count values of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k and the special figure 2 standby counter 223n respectively correspond to 30 seconds. It is set (see S4204 and S4208 in FIG. 237).

  The standby setting completion flag 223u is a demonstration effect with reference to the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) with the elapse of 30 seconds after the variation stop state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a flag indicating whether or not the screen display such as (see FIGS. 186 (b), (c) and 187 (c)) is set. The standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON when the screen display is newly set with reference to the screen display selection table 223b in the customer service effect processing (see FIG. 237) (see S4212 in FIG. 237). ). In addition, when special figure 1 waiting flag 223s or special figure 2 waiting flag 223t is set to ON (refer to S4204 and S4208 in Figure 237), special figure 1 waiting flag 223s or special figure 2 When the standby flag 223t is newly set to off, the standby setting flag 223u is set to off.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S4115 in FIG. 236). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1508 in FIG. 42: Yes) in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 235), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then constant. This is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information of the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 235). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 244) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 207) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image of the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance is started. When the ball entering the mouth 1640 is detected, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 244).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the main power-on time shown in FIG. 202 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. 202 (b). As shown in Fig. 202 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in Fig. 202 (c) The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 202 (b) is displayed for a fixed period after the stop of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of the special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 202 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  Also, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 202 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed as the third symbol display It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Referring back to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 203, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c among the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 203 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage” for the back surface A corresponding to the “mid-town stage”. . Moreover, FIG. 204 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to an "island stage."

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, as shown in FIG. 203, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the respective back faces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scroll images") are configured such that the back face images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table 222b, and the stage is changed to the "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 selects the corresponding back surface. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the initial position of the display area from the position a to the position a ′ of the image. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the back surface image on the back surface E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back E, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are the third pattern in a state where the displayed position is fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 204 (a) is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 204 (a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black as time passes, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 204C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 204 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.204 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.204 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "town stage", so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" is displayed. By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 203 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In addition, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 204 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back surface image between FIG. 204 (a) and FIG. 204 (b) excluding FIG. 204 (b) Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range of FIG. 204 (a) to (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 204 (a) and (b)) including its initial position, and the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Bets can be, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to an image in a partial range is stored for the back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surfaces B to D face the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the back surface E displays the images of FIGS. 204 (a) and (b) using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 204 (a) so that the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 204 (b)-(c) and 204 (c)-(a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 in the meantime. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while the images in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 204 (b) to 204 (c) and 204 (c) to 204 (a) can be Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 204 (a) and (b) are displayed using image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images in FIGS. 204 (b) to (c) and 204 (c) to 204 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes, using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back face image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 201) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back faces B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b 'and the position b. Image data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 201, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. Since the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 by being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, and is used for residence. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out image data previously resident in the character pattern area 235 e of the video RAM 235. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town center stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "empty stage" and "island stage"). Information for specifying whether to display one or displaying a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 205) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 206 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 206).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 207) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 206, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information specified at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 202 (a) to 202 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 244). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 255 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 246 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 246 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 255A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 255 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 207), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 207) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d according to the command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command etc. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 207) described later (see FIG. 207) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 246 (b In S6303), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 252) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 207), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 207, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 246 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 252). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 256). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 256). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 257).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This process is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 246B) is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The rear surface image change flag 233 w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233 w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233 w is set to ON when the rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 7001 in FIG. 251A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 256), and is set to off when the rear image change process is performed (see S7710 in FIG. 256). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The rear image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. The flag is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear surface image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear surface image notified by the command is set to on (see FIG. 251 (a). See S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear face type currently set can be easily specified by the rear face image determination flag 233x.

  The demonstration display flag 233 y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that demonstration is in progress, and if it is off, it means that demonstration is not in progress. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (see S7221 in FIG. 252), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. Other display data tables are set to OFF when they are set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S 6705 in FIG. 249 (a), and S 6805 in FIG. 249 (b) , S250 in FIG. 250). This demonstration display flag 233y makes it possible to easily determine whether a demonstration effect is currently being performed.

  The finalized display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the finalized display effect is being executed. Here, the finalized display effect refers to an effect of stopping and displaying (finalized display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the finalized display flag 233z is on, it means that a static display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the static display effect is not on. The finalized display flag 233z is set to ON when the finalized display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 252) (S7214 in FIG. 252), and the other than the finalized display data table When another display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 248 (a), S6705 in FIG. 249 (a), S6805 in FIG. 249 (b), See 250 S6905). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the current display effect is being performed by the finalized display flag 233z.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 208 to 234. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the second collision random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5 by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this control example When reaching 479, 99, 232, 99, respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed, as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display device 37 (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 209 to 222.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process is executed to perform the processing for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the passing of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 ( S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation processing is executed, the launch control processing is executed (S108), and the other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 209, the special symbol variation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) performs various determinations and determinations based on the respective counter values acquired based on the first ball entry 64 and the second ball entry 1640 and determines the predetermined Control for simultaneously controlling variable display with the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 at the same time in the variable display mode determined by the control of the first embodiment, or for stopping display in the display mode indicating the determination result Is executed. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described below.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is on) (S201), the jackpot is in progress (big hit medium flag When it is determined that 203u is on (S201: Yes), there is no need to set a lottery of special symbols, stop of variable display, and the like, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot middle flag 203u is off) (S201: No), whether or not the small hit game is in progress (whether the small hit middle flag 203v is on) Is determined (S202). When it is determined in the process of S202 that the small hit is in progress (the small hit middle flag 203v is on) (S202: Yes), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not in progress (the small hit middle flag 203v is off) (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress (S203). If it is determined that the first special symbol variation display is in progress (S203: Yes), in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205), the variation time of the first special symbol in the variation display has elapsed The first special symbol variation stop process for stopping and displaying the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed (S205), and the process proceeds to S206. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S205), when the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit of the first special symbol is to be stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is compulsorily forcedly with the stop symbol corresponding to being removed. Processing to stop and display is executed. The details of the first special symbol variation stop process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in a variable display (S203: No), at least one hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The first special symbol variation start process for executing the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the pending data is executed (S204), and the process proceeds to S206, on the condition that the condition is satisfied. The details of the first special symbol variation start process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S206 executed after the first special symbol variation start process (S204) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S205) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S206) If the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S206: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S208), and this process is ended. This second special symbol variation stop process (S208) is the second special symbol when the prescribed variation time of the second special symbol in the variation display has elapsed, as in the first special symbol variation stop process (S205). It is a process for setting the stop display of the stop symbol which shows the lottery result of. The details of the second special symbol variation stop process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

  On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in a variable display (S206: No), on the condition that a new start winning to the second entrance 1640 is detected, the second The second special symbol variation start process for executing the lottery of the special symbol and setting the start of the new variation display is executed (S207), and the present process is ended. The details of the second special symbol variation start process (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, a first special symbol variation start process (S204) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S204).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter It is determined whether (N1) is a value larger than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S303), the ball holding ball number command for notifying the voice ball control device 113 of the ball holding number command showing the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after subtraction is set (S304) .

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice is output in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value as the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223c. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is finished, next, the data of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  When the process of S305 is finished, next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306) will be described in detail later, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, It is a process for executing a jackpot determination of whether or not a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

  When the process of S306 ends, next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (FIG. 212, S307). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a as a result of the determination of the first special symbol This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

  When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is ended, next, the game state update process is executed (S308). Although this gaming state update process (FIG. 213, S308) will be described later in detail, the values of various counters (probability change counter 203k, time reduction counter 203g) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 can It is a process for updating the status. When the process of S308 ends, the special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is set to off, and the special figure 1 waiting command indicating off is set (S309), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), whether the special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is on or not It discriminate | determines (S310), and when it discriminate | determines that it is ON (S310: Yes), this processing is complete | finished. If it is determined in the process of S310 that it is off (that is, it is not on) (S310: No), the special figure 1 waiting flag 203i is set on (S311), and the special figure 1 waiting command showing on is set. After setting (S312), the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 210, S204) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability state (a special symbol of a definite variation state). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, it is a probability variation state of a special symbol) (S402: Yes), the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a for high probability It is determined whether the random number value and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match or not, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S402 that the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the specified jackpot random number value matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in S403 or S404 is a jackpot (S405), and if the lottery result is a jackpot (S405: Yes), a jackpot flag 203m is set on for the first special symbol. (S406), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407). Then, based on the acquired value of the hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408), and the value according to the current gaming state is the winning state storage area It stores in 203n (S409), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the lottery result is out (S405: No), the out-of-pattern of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410) , End this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307), which is one of the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 210, S204), will be described. FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211, S306), was the lottery result of the first special symbol determined to be a big hit, ie, 1 Determine whether the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S501). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on with respect to the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S406 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above.

  In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), it is acquired in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above Based on the value of the first collision type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the big hit flag 203m for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and shift to the processing of S503.

  In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 194 to 196) corresponding to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the value of the probability variation counter 203k and the value of the time saving counter 203g. In the process of S505, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

  When the process of S506 ends, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507). Next, the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 213, a game state update process (S308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308).

  When the gaming state update process (see FIG. 213) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter 203k is larger than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S601: No), the processing of S602 to S605 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining probability variation number command indicating the value of the probability variation counter is set S603).

  The remaining certainty variation number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining certainty number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the probability variation counter 203 k from the remaining certain number command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining number time area 223 o of the RAM 223. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223 o according to the number-of-held balls count command transmitted from the main control device 110, it synchronizes with the value of the probability change counter 203 k of the main control device 110. While the value can be updated. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp whether or not the state is the latent state, and the corresponding effect can be performed.

  When the process of S603 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203k after subtraction is 0 (S604), and if it is determined that the value after subtraction is not 0 (S604: No), S605 The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S606. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S604: Yes), a state command indicating a normal state is set (S605), and the process proceeds to S606.

  In the process of S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203g is larger than 0 (S606), and when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 (S606: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S606 that the time reduction counter 203g is larger than 0 (S606: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S607), and the remaining time shortness command indicating the value of the time reduction counter is set. After (S608), the present process ends.

  The remaining-time short-time number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (S2001) of a main process (see FIG. 227) described later executed by the MPU 201 It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining short time number command, it extracts the value of the short time counter 203 g from the remaining short time number command, and stores the extracted value in the remaining short time period area 223 q of the RAM 223. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the remaining short time count area 223 q according to the pending ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, and therefore, synchronizes with the value of the time reduction counter 203 g of the main control device 110. While the value can be updated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the first special symbol variation stop processing (S205) which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 209, S104) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop process (S205).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 214, S205), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation display of the first special symbol (S701), and when it is determined that it is the end timing ( S701: Yes) It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S702). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the first special symbol (S702: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S703), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the flag 203p is turned on is set (S704). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S705).

  After the process of S705, the jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S706), and the jackpot flag 203m, the probability variation counter 203k, and the short time counter 203g are reset (S707). Next, the jackpot flag 203 u is set to ON (S 708), and the process proceeds to S 709.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203m is set to OFF for the first special symbol in the process of S702 (S702: No), the process of S703 to S708 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S709.

  In the process of S709, a special view 1 determination command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is to be determined and stopped is set (S709). Thereafter, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S710), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol under execution (S701: No), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S711), the process ends.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop process (S205), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol in the variation display has elapsed (S701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game The process (S703-S710) which stops a fluctuation | variation display is performed. Also, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S702: Yes), processing (S703, S704) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the variable display is executed.

  In this first control example, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second special symbol in the variation display is removed and forced to be displayed stopped by the symbol, but this is the case. It is not limited to For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. And after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more natural aspect as compared to the case where the forced stop is caused by disengaging. In this control example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). For example, the jackpot scenario is set in the process of S706 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203n in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) using the opening period of the jackpot game You may do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 215, a second special symbol variation start process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S207).

  In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207), first, it is determined whether the special view 2 variation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to ON (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to OFF, and the present process is ended. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON while displaying stop with the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol being detached when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, as described above . That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on, it means that the jackpot will be started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is on in the process of S801, this process is directly ended without executing each process of S802 to S810 which sets the fluctuation start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S801 that the special view 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S801: No), the second entrance 1640 is checked. It is determined whether a winning is detected (S802). If a winning in the second entrance 1640 is detected (S802: Yes), then the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small collision type counter C5 The second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired and stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S803), and the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed to execute the second special symbol jackpot determination based on the stored counter values. (S804). The details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S804 ends, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S803, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern Execute (S805). The details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S805 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 213) is executed (S806), the special view 2 wait flag 203j is set to off, and the special view 2 wait command indicating off is displayed. The setting is made (S807), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S801 that a winning on the second entrance 1640 is not detected (S801: No), it is determined whether the special view 2 waiting flag 203j is on (S808) ), If it is on (S808: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S 808 that the special figure 2 waiting flag 203 j is off, the special figure 2 waiting flag 203 j is set to on (S 809), and the second special symbol changes to a stop state A special command 2 standby command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the event is set (S810), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 215, S207) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), the same processing as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211) described above is performed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 211) The main differences between

  When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S804) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is acquired (S901). And the process of S902-S904 for acquiring the lottery result of whether it is a big hit based on each acquired counter value and the value of the probability variation counter 203k is performed. In each of these processes, the point that the counter value used for lottery (determination) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b is different, and the other is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 211). Control is performed.

  When the processing of S 903 or S 904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S 905), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (S 905: Yes), the second special symbol lottery result The processing of S906 to S909 for setting the jackpot is executed, and this processing ends. In each of the processes of S906 to S909, the same processes as the respective processes of S406 to S409 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a big hit in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 211) are executed. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S 905, when it is determined that the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a big hit (S 905: No), for setting a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a second special symbol. The special view 2 out-of-variation process is executed (S 910), and this process is ended. The details of the special view 2 out-of-variation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing this special view 2 deviation fluctuation process (S909).

  In special figure 2 deviation fluctuation processing (S909), first, it decides whether or not the lottery result which is acquired with the processing of S903 or S904 in Figure 216 is the small hitting of the 2nd special symbol (S1001), the drawing result is the small hitting If it is (S1001: Yes), the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1002), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1003). Then, a small hit symbol indicating a small hit type corresponding to the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1004), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is out in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the out-of-design of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1005). This process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S805), which is one of the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 215, S805), will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S805).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 212, S307), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1101). Next, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 216, S804), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1102). Here, it is judged whether or not the jackpot flag 203m is on with respect to the second special symbol. The jackpot flag 203m is set to ON in the process of S906 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 216) described above.

  If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1102: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1103). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S901 in the second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 216) described above, the big hit from the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) The type is determined (S1105).

  When the process of S1105 is completed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1105), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. (S1106). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S1108.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set in the process of S1102 (S1102: No), the special figure 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (S1107) is executed, and the process goes to S1108. Transition.

  In the process of S1108, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1108). Next, the variation start of the second special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S1109), and then the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the special view out-of-two variation pattern selection process (S1107) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special view 2 deviation variation pattern selection process (S1107).

  In the special figure 2 out-of-variation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 219, S1107), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1201). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1201). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is on (S1201: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1202). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 192 (b)) (S1203).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 195 and 1196) corresponding to the current gaming state is read (S1204), and the fluctuation pattern of the small hitting corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1205). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S1206), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1201: No), a variation pattern selection table (FIG. 195 and FIG. 1196) are read out (S1207), and out of the fluctuation pattern selection table read out, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected (S1208). Thereafter, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected outlier fluctuation pattern (S1209), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 220, a second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S208) which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process (FIG. 209, S104) will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stop process (S208).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S208), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the second special symbol in execution (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol being executed (S1301: Yes), the jackpot flag 203m is turned on for the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is determined whether it is set to (S1303). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is set to ON for the second special symbol (S1303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1305), Transfer to the process of S1306.

  Next, the processing after S1306 differs from the processing after S705 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214, S205) described above in the following points. In the processing of S1306 and S1312 corresponding to the processing of S705 and S711, the special figure 1 finalizing command is a special figure in the point that the first special symbol is changed to the second special symbol and the processing of S1311 corresponding to the processing of S710. 2) They are different from each other in that they are changed to fixed commands. The other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the end timing of the change based on the second special symbol being executed is not the end timing (S1301: No), the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated ( S1302), this processing ends. Further, in the process of S1303, if the big hit flag 203m is set to OFF for the second special symbol (S1303: No), the special figure 2 off stop process is executed (S1304), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the special figure 2 off stop process (S1304) which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220, S208) will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing this special view 2 off stop processing (S1304).

  In the special view 2 off stop processing (FIG. 221, S1304), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203o is set to ON (S1401: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating fluctuation stop of the special figure 1 is set (S1402). Then, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and stopped and displayed with the symbol (S1403).

  After the process of S1403, the small hitting scenario based on the selected small hitting type is set (S1404). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203o is set to off (S140, and the small hit middle flag 203v is set to on (S1406).

  When the process of S1406 is completed, a special figure 2 determination command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to set and stop the second special symbol is set (S1407). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is stopped fluctuating with a small hitting symbol (S1408), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the small hitting flag 203o is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1401: No), the second special symbol is decidedly stopped. The special figure 2 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1409). Thereafter, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 37 is removed, and the variation is stopped with the symbol (S1410), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is independently and parallelly executable, it is possible to simultaneously change the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to execute more special symbol lottery games within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that a jackpot is given to the player within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In the present control example, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used as a stop indicator for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state in which the temporary stop or measurement of fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in the display mode or the notification mode that shows the player that the temporary stop is in progress, the player loses the lottery game which was in the process of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and can play the jackpot game with ease.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interruption process (FIG. 208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105), it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first start opening (first entry opening) 64, and if the winning is achieved, the hold upper limit number (in the first start opening 64). It is processing to store each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to four). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the holding ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a A process is performed to predict in advance the result of the pass / fail determination, the variation pattern to be selected, and the like. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105) will be described.

  In the start winning process (FIG. 222, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start hole 64 (first start hole) (start winning) (S1101). Here, the winning of the first ball entrance 64 is detected. If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64 (there is a starting winning) (S1501: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1502). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit value of the number of reservations for the first starting port 64 (that is, is the number of reservations being stored to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (1504). A holding ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the holding number is set (S1505). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 Each is put on hold (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding hold number of balls (S1506).

  Next, based on each stored counter value, the hit / not determined result of the first special symbol, the hit type determined, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1507). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success / failure determination result of the first special symbol, the hit type, and the variation pattern is set (S1508), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening (first ball entrance) 64 and is newly stored on hold, the result of the pass / fail determination based on the information stored on hold. Is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the audio lamp control device 113. In this way, based on the result of the determination of whether the holding ball is stored, the display mode of the holding ball can be changed (for example, the color of the holding ball can be changed in a different color from normal) and displayed It is possible to execute an effect which indicates the notice symbol etc. and suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the normal symbol variation process (S106) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the open time of the motorized accessory 1640a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 223, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of the normal symbol (second symbol). (S1601). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) indicating the hit and the middle of the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 1640a. If it is determined that a normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1601: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not in contact (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device is being variably displayed (S1602). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S1618) ). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of S1617 described later before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit (not shown).

  In the process of S1011, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1618: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1618 that the variation time of the normal symbol being variably displayed has elapsed (S1618: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1619). In the process of S1619, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S1613, the "o" symbol stops at the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the process of S1615, the "x" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) as the second symbol, It is set to display stop (light on). When the stop display is set by the process of S1619, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1613 and the process of S1615. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display device.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1620). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S1620: Yes), the start of the open / close control of the motorized steering wheel 1640a is set (S1621). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out (S1620: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of suspension displays of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1604), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (S1604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S1604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S1605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1606). In the process of S1606, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, the normal symbol hold fourth area → Shift the data in each area in such a way as normal symbol hold third area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1607).

  Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the time saving state (S1608). More specifically, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state is established. In the process of S1608, when it is determined that the time saving state is not in progress (S1608: No), based on the hit determination value of the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability (see FIG. 192 (c)) The result is acquired (S1611). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1608 that a short time game is in progress (S1608: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1609). If it is determined in the process of S1609 that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (S1609: Yes), the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1609: No), the hit judgment value of the random symbol per random symbol table (see FIG. 192 (c)) for high probability. Based on the result of the judgment, the result of the judgment is acquired (S1610).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (S1612), and it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is out of place) (S1612: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1615), and the process proceeds to the process of S1616. On the other hand, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a hit (ie, it is a hit) (S1612: Yes), the display mode at the hit is "○" The display mode of is set (S1613).

  Next, the opening period of the motorized accessory 1640a is set to one second, and the opening number is set to two (S1614). Then, in the processing of S1616 executed after the processing of S1614 or S1615, the common drawing fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 197) is read (S1616), and the common drawing fluctuation type table 202g read out is read Is set (S1617), and the process ends.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208), and it is determined whether the game ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball passes. This process is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is any.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 224, S107), first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S1701). Here, the passage of the gaming ball at the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S1703).

  If the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: No), or if the game ball is passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1704).

  When the process of S1704 is finished, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 208) is displayed as the empty reservation area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This area is stored in the first area of the area to the reserved fourth area (S1705), and this processing ends. In the process of S1705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second entrance 1640, which is provided by the lottery result of the normal symbol (the second symbol), becomes an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state.

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the predetermination result of the common drawing, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a predetermination result of a common drawing, not only the effect based on the success or failure judgment result of the common drawing, but the electric combination 1640a is opened when it is determined that the common drawing is a hit. It is good to do the production which suggests the timing of By doing this, the normal gaming state plays a game aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball entrance 1640 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric character 1640a) is the game board 13's Even if disposed on the right side, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called, right-handed) before the electric role product 1640a performs an opening operation, which is a normal gaming state There is an effect that the possibility of the ball entering the second entrance 1640 can be increased.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 226, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 226), first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in this control example) is performed. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1904), and if it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not generation information of power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905), and if not stored (S1905) No: Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1910 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1910 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) in the case of initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of the hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  In addition, the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S1911, S1912) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1913.

  On the other hand, since the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3132) is not turned on (S1904: No), power supply interruption occurrence information is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If there is (S1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1909), and the process shifts to the processing of S1910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913). Thereafter, the values of the probability variation counter 203k and the short time counter 203g are read (S1914), and a status command is set based on the read counter value (S1915). When the process of S1915 ends, the interruption is permitted (S1916), and the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the main process (S2000) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing this main processing (S2000). In the main process (S2000), the process of updating the counter and the process upon power-off are roughly divided.

  In the main processing (FIG. 227, S2000), first, in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 208), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). The jackpot control process is executed (S2004). The jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 228. However, a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot gaming process (S2004) is executed, the small hitting control process (S2005) is executed. This small hitting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the motorized part opening / closing process is executed (S2006). In the motorized product opening / closing process (S2006), an opening / closing process of the motorized boat 1640a is performed. Thereafter, display control processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2007).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the passing timing, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is implemented. Then, a second lottery (normal symbol) is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) is hit, the motorized jack 1640a is released for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2010) If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes from S2001 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S2010: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S2011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001 to S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S2009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 225 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S2013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And send (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2009 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2001 to S2008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed in the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S2001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S2001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, in the process of initialization (FIG. 226, S1901) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2004). This jackpot control process (S2004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 227), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winnings It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2101). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S2101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the big hit scenario is set (S2101: Yes), the big hit scenario is updated (S2102), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the big hit scenario (S2103) ). More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2102, and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2103 starts the opening of the jackpot scenario. It is determined whether it is a value corresponding to

  If it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2103: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2104), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario is not determined (S2103: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105).

  If it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2106), and this process is ended. The details of the jackpot operation setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2105: No), it is next determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is met ( S2107). Here, in the present control example, when the specified number of balls (for example, five) in total are won while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S2107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2108 (the opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a The solenoid is set to OFF so that the 65f1 is closed), and the process ends. The above-described determination processing of S2105 to S2107 is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2107, when it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of ending effect (S2109), ending effect If it is the start timing of (S2109: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S2110), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2109 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S2111). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. If it is determined in the process of S2111 that the end timing of the jackpot is determined (S2111: Yes), the jackpot end processing for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2112), and the present processing is ended. Details of the jackpot end process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2111: No), the first winning process is executed (S2113), and the present process is ended. The details of the first winning process (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the jackpot operation setting process (S2106) which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 228, S2004) will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2106). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 229, S2106), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S2201). The opening operation of the passage solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 179) is set based on the data read in S2201 (S2202), and thereafter, the specific winning opening 65a (the opening and closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179) attached thereto) The release operation is set by the data read in the process of S2201 (S2203), and the process ends.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  In the present control example, in the case of a small hit game, the operation of the probability changing solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening and closing plate 65f1 is set. In the small hit, it consists of two rounds, and in each round, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened for one second.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the jackpot end processing (S2112) which is one of the jackpot control processing (FIG. 228, S2004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. The jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2112).

  In the jackpot end processing (FIG. 230, S2112), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203n (S2301). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (S2302). If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state (S2302: No), it is determined whether the V prize flag 203f is on (S2303). If it is determined in the process of S2303 that the V prize flag 203f is on (S2303: Yes), this means that the ball has passed the V passage switch 65e3 during the current jackpot, so the value of the probability variation counter 203k Is set to 120 (S2304).

  Next, it is determined whether the present jackpot type is a jackpot B to D (S2305). If it is not the jackpot B to D (S2305: No), 120 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203g (S2306), and the process proceeds to S2307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S2302: Yes), or the V prize flag 203f is off (ie, not on) in the process of S2303. When it discriminate | determines (S2303: No), or it is not jackpot B-D in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), it transfers to the process of S307. Thereby, when the gaming state at the time of winning is not the latent state, and when the gaming ball does not pass the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal state. When the gaming ball passes the V passage switch 65 e 3 and the hit type is big hit B to D, a probability change state of 120 times is set after the big hit. On the other hand, when the gaming ball passes the V passage switch 65 e 3 and the hit type is the big hit A, 120 probability change states and 100 short time states are set after the big hit.

  In the process of S2307, both the large hit medium flag 203u and the V prize flag 203f are set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203n is cleared (S2207). Thereafter, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2308), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot game, and if the probability change setting flag 203h is on, the probability change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the gaming ball passes the V passage switch 65e3 and set the high probability gaming state. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the high probability gaming state (latency probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) until the big hit game is over. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass during the big hit game to V pass switch 65e3, high probability game state (latency probability change game state ST2 or positive change game state ST3) is granted after the big hit game, so during the big hit game The game can be played with an interest in whether the game ball passes through the V passage switch 65e3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the details of the first winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first winning process (S2113). The first winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 228), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. is there.

  In this first winning process (FIG. 231, S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a round effective period (S2401). Here, a round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state, to the end of the interval period (5 seconds). It is. In the process of S2401, if it is not a round effective period (S2401: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2402), and this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the present is a round effective period (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether a prize winning opening (large opening) 65a has been detected (S2403), If it is not detected that a prize winning opening (large opening) 65a has been won (S2403: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S 2403, if the winning on the specific winning opening (large opening) 65 a is detected (S 2403: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203 h to update (S 2404). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203h is the upper limit (5 in the present control example) or more (S2405), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is less than the upper limit (5 in the present control example) S2405: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2405: Yes), closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached to it) is set. (S2406). Next, the jackpot scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2407), and it is determined whether the V prize flag 203f is on (S2408). If the V winning flag 203f is on (S2408: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the V prize flag 203f is off (ie, not on) (S2408: No), it is determined whether the V passage switch 65e3 is on (S2409). In the process of S2409, when the V passage switch 65e3 is off (that is, not on) (S2409: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S2409, when the V passage switch 65e3 is on (S2409: Yes), the V prize flag is set to on. Then, the V winning command is set, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the small hitting control process (S2005) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting control process (S2005).

  In the small hitting control process (FIG. 232, S2005), first, it is judged whether a small hitting scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1404 of the special view 2 off stop process (see FIG. 221) is executed to determine whether a small hit scenario is set. If the small hitting scenario is not set in the process of S2501 (S2501: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hitting scenario is set in the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes), the small hitting scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503). More specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2502, and the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter (not shown) in the process of S2503 is the small hitting scenario. Determine whether it is a value corresponding to the opening start of.

  If it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: Yes), the small hitting opening command is set (S2504), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the opening start timing of the small hitting scenario (S2503: No), it is then determined whether it is the round starting timing of the small hitting scenario (S2505).

  If it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hitting scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hitting operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process is ended. The details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the round start of the small hitting scenario (S2505: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present control example, when the specified number of balls (for example, five) in total are won while the specific winning opening 65a is open, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S2507, when it is determined that the round end condition of the round currently being executed is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2108 (first process) The solenoid is set to OFF so that the open / close plate 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the small hitting ending command is set (S2510), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2509 that it is not the start timing of ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hitting (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2511 that the end timing of the small hit is reached (S2511: Yes), the small hit middle flag 203v is set to OFF (S2512), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and the present process is ended. The details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (FIG. 232, S2005) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506). In the small hit operation setting process (FIG. 233, S2506), first, an open scenario in which an open operation corresponding to the number of rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a (the opening and closing plate 65f1 (see FIG. 179) attached thereto) is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and the process is ended.

  As described above, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during a big hit game, the big hit game is ended halfway Problems can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 234, details of the second winning process (S2513) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing this second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 232), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  In this second winning process (FIG. 234, S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a round effective period (S2701). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state to when the interval period (five seconds) ends. In the process of S2401, if it is not a round effective period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203h is reset (S2702), and the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the present is a round effective period (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specified winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the specific winning opening 65a If no winning is not detected (S2703: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203h for updating (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or less than the upper limit (5 in this control example) S2705: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203h is equal to or more than the upper limit (5 in this control example) (S2705: Yes), closing of the specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing plate 65f1 attached thereto) is set (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 243. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 235, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S4116 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure") in the current startup process (see FIG. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S4002). As described later with reference to FIG. 236, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S4116 when the power-off occurrence information is received from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 236, S4113). The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S4116 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S4116 after a momentary power failure occurs, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is performed (see FIG. 236, S4115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4116 is performed, the process of S4008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, that the start processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  When the process of S4009 skips the process of S4009 when the process of S4008 is performed via the processes of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S4101 was performed last time (S4101), and one millisecond If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the processing proceeds to S4111 without performing the processing of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, the process of determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is a process relating to display (rendering) in S4102 to S4110, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. Since the process of S4111 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S4104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed, and the process shifts to the process of S4112. The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect in the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed control device 114 The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set to transmit the image data, is executed. The details of the variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the customer waiting effect processing (S4105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the customer service effect processing (S4105). The customer waiting effect processing (S4105) is performed by the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j set to ON when the special figure 1 standby command or the special figure 2 standby command output from the main control device 110 is received, the sub special A process of setting the standby display screen is executed based on the setting status of the standby flag 223m in FIG. The details of the customer service effect processing (S4105) will be described below.

  In the guest waiting effect rendering process (FIG. 237, S4105), first, it is determined whether the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j is set to ON (S4201). If it is determined that the sub special figure 1 waiting flag 223j is set to ON (S4201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 waiting counter 223k is updated (S4202). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit value (S4203). Here, in the present control example, a value (30000) corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the special view 1 standby counter 223k. That is, the configuration is such that the special figure 1 standby flag is set to ON (when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223 k reaches the upper limit value) when 30 seconds have passed after the fluctuation of the special figure 1 stops. It is done.

  When the value of the special view 1 standby counter 223k is less than the upper limit value (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when the value of the special figure 1 standby counter 223k is the upper limit (S4203: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, and the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j, Then, the standby setting completion flag 223 u is set to off (S 4204), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 4205. By setting the stand-by setting flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4204, for example, in a state in which the display standby display command is set based on the setting of the special view 2 stand-by flag 223t described later to ON. When the special view 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special view (special view 1, special view 2).

  When it is determined in the process of S4201 that the sub special figure 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4201: No), the process of S4202 to S4204 is performed. Skip and shift to the processing of S4205.

  In the process of S4205, it is determined whether the sub special figure 2 waiting flag 223m is set to ON (S4205). If it is determined that the sub special figure 2 waiting flag 223m is set to ON (S4205: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 waiting counter 223n is updated (S4206). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (30000) (S4207). If the value of the special view 2 standby counter 223n is less than the upper limit value (S4207: No), the process proceeds to S4209.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4207, when the value of the special figure 2 standby counter 223n is the upper limit value (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set on, and the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m, Then, the standby setting completion flag 223 u is set to off (S 4208), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 4209. By setting the stand-by setting flag 223u to OFF in the process of S4208, for example, in a state where the display standby display command is set based on the setting of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s, When the standby flag 223t in FIG. 2 is set to ON, the standby display type can be determined again. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the standby display according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of each special view (special view 1, special view 2).

  If it is determined in the process of S4205 that the sub special figure 2 waiting flag 223m is set to off (ie, not set to on) (S4205: No), S4206 and S4207 The processing is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4209.

  In the process of S4209, it is determined whether the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209). If it is determined that the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON (S4209: Yes), the processing of S4211 to S4214 for setting the standby display type is skipped and this processing is ended. That is, the state in which the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to ON is a state in which the change status (the setting status of the standby flag) of each special map has not been changed from the state in which the standby display type is already set. Therefore, the load of the process for setting the standby display type can be reduced by not executing the process for setting the standby display type when it is determined that such a state is present.

  In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, in the present control example, a new special figure fluctuation is caused in a state where the waiting flag (special figure 1 waiting flag 223s or special figure 2 waiting flag 223t) is set on. Also when a command indicating that it has been started (special drawing standby command indicating OFF) is received, processing for setting the standby setting completion flag 223 u to OFF is executed. Therefore, the standby display type can be reset without fail each time the change status (setting status of the standby flag) of the special view 1 or the special view 2 is changed. Therefore, each special view (the special view 1, the special view 2) The standby display can be more appropriately performed according to the fluctuation state (standby state) of

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the standby setting completion flag 223u is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4209: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s or the special figure 2 standby flag 223t. It is judged whether or not is set to on (S4210).

  In the process of S4210, when it is determined that the special view 1 standby flag 223s or the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4210: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 standby flag 223s or the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4210: Yes), the gaming state set in the state setting area 223i is read (S4211) . Then, the standby display type is determined from the screen display selection table 222b (see FIG. 200) based on the read gaming state and the setting status of the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t (S4212).

  Next, based on the determined standby display type, a display standby display command for notifying the display control device 114 of the standby display type is set (S4213). After that, the standby setting completion flag 223 u is set to ON (S 4214), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . The details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (S2111), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the special view from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4301). If it is determined that either the special view 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4302), and this process ends. The details of the stop type command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that neither the special view 1 stop type command nor the special view 2 stop type command has been received (S4301: No), whether the special view 1 change pattern command is received or not It discriminates (S4303). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S4303 that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4303: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4304), and the reception is performed. The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4305), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can identify that it is the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process described later (see FIG. 243) , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol In the case of

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special view 1 change pattern command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether the special view 2 change pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4306). In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4307). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S4308), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) described later When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol In the case of

  If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4306: No), it is determined whether the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S4309: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command (that is, the first The number of balls held for variation display of special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( S4310), this processing ends. In this control example, since the configuration for holding the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored, the value of the first special symbol (special figure 1) holding ball number counter 223c is processed in S4310. Only the process to update is executed.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S4310 is performed each time there is a start winning. The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. If the ball holding number command is notified based on winning, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the first special symbol holding ball number of the main control unit 110 It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203 d.

  If it is determined in the process of S4309 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S4309: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4311). In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the information of the received winning information command (the special symbol lottery success or failure, the hit type, and the variation pattern) It sets to the storage area 223b (S4312), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that no winning information command has been received (S4311: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that the status command is received (S4313: Yes), status command processing (S4314) is executed. The details of the state command processing (S4314) will be described with reference to FIG. 240. However, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the gaming state (normal state, positive change state, latency) of the pachinko machine 10 A process of setting the state) in the state setting area 223i is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4313 that the status command has not been received (S4313: No), it is determined whether the special view 1 standby command or the special view 2 standby command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4315) . When it is determined in the process of S4315 that either the special view 1 standby command or the special view 2 standby command has been received (S4315: Yes), a customer waiting command process (S4316) is executed. The details of the customer waiting command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. 241. However, based on the special view 1 standby command or the special view 2 standby command output from the main control device 110, the special view 1 A process for setting the standby flag 223s or the special view 2 standby flag 223t is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4315 that neither the special view 1 standby command nor the special view 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), the remaining certainty number change command or the remaining short time number command is received from the main control device 110 It is determined whether it has been done (S4317). When it is determined in the process of S4315 that either the remaining certainty number command or the remaining short time number command is received (S4317: Yes), the remaining number updating process (S4318) is executed. The details of the remaining number updating process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. 242, but the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining certainty changing number command or the remaining short number time command output from the main control device 110. A process of setting the contents of the effect display for displaying on the screen is executed.

  In the process of S4317, when it is determined that neither the remaining certainty number change command nor the remaining short time number command has been received (S4317: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S4319), and this process is ended. Do. In the processing of S4319, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command To send the display control device 114 to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239, stop type command reception processing (S4302) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this termination type command reception processing (S4302). The stop type command reception process (S4302) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4302) will be described below.

  In the stop type command reception process (FIG. 239, S4302), when the special view 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, When the special view 2 stop type command is received, the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223 g is set to ON. (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out of reach, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or special view 2 stop type command (S4402). End the process.

  The type of stop extracted in S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can distinguish that it is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type extracted from the special view 2 stop type command is the second special symbol The types of stop are stored so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change simultaneously, it becomes possible to manage the stop type respectively, and execute appropriate change display Can.

  Next, state command processing (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the state command processing (S4314). This state command process (S4314) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the state command processing (S4314) will be described below.

  In the state command processing (FIG. 240, S4314), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (S4501). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command has been received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4502: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4503). In the process of S4503, when the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4503: Yes), a latent notification annotating effect for notifying entry of the latent state is set (S4504). Then, 120 is set in the effect probability variation number area 223p (S4505), and the process shifts to the processing of S4506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 4502 that the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4502: Yes), or in the process of 4503, the received command shifts to the latent state If it is not the state command to be shown (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4506.

  In the process of S4506, a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4506), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, the state command processing (S4314) in this control example is based on the gaming state set in the state setting area 223i and the gaming state indicated by the state command output from the main control device 110. If it is determined that the gaming state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state, and if the gaming state other than the latent state has shifted to the latent state, the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81 A process of controlling "120" as an initial value in D1 (see FIG. 187 (a)) is performed. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won during the latent state and the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined in the process of S4502 that the latent state is set in the state setting area 223i (S4502 : Yes), in order to skip the processing of S4504 and S4505, the number of effect definite variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 187A) of the third symbol display device 81 is added (re-set) I have not. As a result, even if the jackpot is won during the latent state and the actual number of probability variations is reset (set to 120), the display of the number of presentation probability variations continues to be the value displayed before the jackpot was won. It will be displayed. Therefore, the rest of the actual number of probable variations (the number of remaining residual variations) and the remaining number of the probability of occurrences of variation displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 187 (a)) And the player can make it difficult to understand the timing at which the latent state ends.

  In the state command processing described above (S 4314 in FIG. 240), when entering into the latent state anew, the same number (120 times) as the actual number of times of probability variation (120 times) corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 Although it is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1, it may be configured otherwise, for example, may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 less than the actual number of probability variations.

  Next, the standby command process (S4316) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this standby command processing (S4316). This status command processing (S4314) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and each standby command output from the main control device 110 A process of setting the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t on or off is executed based on (the special view 1 standby command, the special view 2 standby command). The setting status of the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t is referred to in the above-described customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237).

  When the standby command process (S4316) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view 1 standby command has been received (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the special view 1 standby command has been received (S4601: Yes), the sub special view 1 standby flag 223j is set to ON (S4602), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the special view 1 standby command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the special view 1 standby command indicating that the special view 1 standby flag 203i is off has been received. (S4603). If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the special view 1 standby command indicating that the special view 1 standby flag 203i is off is received (S4603: Yes), the sub special view 1 standby flag 223j is set to off (S4604) And the special figure 1 waiting counter 223k are reset (S4605). Thereafter, it is determined whether the special view 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606).

  If it is determined in the process of S4606 that the special view 1 standby flag 223s is set to off (that is, it is not set to on) (S4606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4606 that the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to ON (S4606: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set completion flag 223u are set to OFF. (S4607), this processing ends.

  That is, in a state in which the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to on (a state in which 30 seconds or more have elapsed without fluctuation in the special figure 1), the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is set to be off. In order to set the special figure 1 waiting flag 223s to off and the waiting setting completion flag 223u to be off when the special figure 1 waiting command indicating that the variation of the special figure 1 has been executed is received. In the customer service effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special view 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state (the setting state of the standby flag) of each special map.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the special figure 1 standby command indicating that the special figure 1 standby flag 203i is off is not received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 standby command is received. (S4608). If it is determined in the process of S4608 that the special view 2 standby command has been received (S4608: Yes), the sub special figure 2 standby flag 223m is set to ON (S4609), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4608 that the special view 2 standby command has not been received (S4608: No), it is determined whether the special view 2 standby command indicating that the special view 2 standby flag 203j is off has been received. (S4610). If it is determined in the process of S4610 that the special view 2 standby command indicating that the special view 2 standby flag 203j is off is received (S4610: Yes), the sub special view 2 standby flag 223m is set to be off (S4611). And the special figure 2 waiting counter 223n are reset (S4612). Thereafter, it is determined whether the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613).

  When it is determined in the process of S4613 that the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S4613: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4613 that the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (S4613: Yes), the special figure 1 standby flag 223s and the standby set completion flag 223u are set to OFF. (S4614), this processing ends.

  That is, in the state in which the special figure 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON (the state in which 30 seconds or more have elapsed without fluctuation in the special figure 2), the special figure 2 standby flag 203j is set to OFF. In order to set the special figure 2 standby flag 223t to off and to set the standby setting completion flag 223u to off when the special figure 2 standby command indicating that the variation of the special figure 2 has been executed is received. In the customer waiting effect processing (see S4105 in FIG. 237), the standby display type corresponding to the case where the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to OFF is set. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the standby display type according to the fluctuation state (the setting state of the standby flag) of each special map.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4610 that the special view 2 standby command indicating that the special view 2 standby flag 203j is off is not received (S4610: No), this process is ended.

  Next, the remaining number updating process (S4318) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining number updating process (S4318). The remaining number updating process (S4318) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the remaining probability number change command from the main control device 110 Or based on the remaining time short command received. A process of updating the contents set in the remaining probability variation number area 223o, the production probability variation floor area 223p, and the remaining time short floor area 223q is executed.

  In the remaining number updating process (S4318), first, it is determined whether or not the remaining certainty variation number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4651). If it is determined in the process of S4651 that the remaining certainty number command has been received (S4651: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is stored in the remaining certain number area 223o (S4652). Next, it is determined whether data indicating a latent state is stored in the state setting area 223i (S4653).

  In other words, in the process of S4653, it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the latent state or the probability changing state, and when it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state, the effect display dedicated to the latent state described later The process for executing the will be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is in the definite variation state, the same effect display is executed in the positive variation state and the normal state, so this process ends without executing the special effect display. Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S4653 that data indicating a latent state is stored (set) in the state setting area 223i (S4653: Yes), the remaining number of probability variations notified (received) from the main control device 110 Is determined to be 0 times (S4654). In the process of S4654, when it is determined that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) from the main control unit 110 is 0 (S4654: Yes), the effect of the termination of the latent state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The setting is made (S4657). Then, data indicating the normal state is overwritten in the state setting area 223i, and the process proceeds to the process of S4661.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4654 that the number of remaining probability variations notified (received) from the main control device 110 is one or more (that is, not 0) (S4654: No), the effect probability variation number area The number of displays stored in 223p is decremented by 1 (S4657). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect probability number of variations after subtraction is zero (S4658). If it is determined in the process of S4658 that the number of effect variation after subtraction is 0 (S4658: Yes), the number of remaining probability variation number area 223o is set in the effect probability number variation area 223p (S4659). Thereafter, a resurrection effect for notifying the number of times set in the effect probability variation number area 223p is set (S4660), and the process shifts to the processing of S4661.

  That is, when the actual number of remaining probability changes (the number of actual remaining probability changes) stored (set) in the remaining number of probability changes area is 1 or more, the number of production probability changes (the number of residual effect changes) becomes zero. In order to inform the player that the latent state continues, the value of the effect remaining probability change number is updated to the value of the actual remaining probability change number, and the value is the remaining number display area of the third symbol display device 81. The effect (resurrection effect) displayed on D1 is executed.

  By performing such an effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the latent state ends, and to increase the number of effect residual probability variations again after making the latent state have ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect.

  In this control example, the timing at which the resurrection effect is executed is assumed to be the case where the effect probability number of occurrences (remaining effect variation number of effects) becomes 0, but other configurations may be used, for example, the effect probability number of occurrences On the condition that (the effect remaining number of confirmed variations) is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, 5), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the resurrection effect, and the resurrection effect is executed based on the lottery result You may As a result, since it is possible to cause the player to play the game while predicting at which timing (special figure fluctuation) the resurrection effect is generated, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, instead of executing the resurrection effect based on the special figure fluctuation, for example, the ending period of the small hitting game may be used. In this case, on the condition that the number of effect occurrence variation (the number of effect remaining occurrence variation) is 0 (or a display mode indicating that the continuation of the latent state is not determined is displayed), It is desirable to carry out resurrection production. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time in which the resurrection effect can be executed as the special drawing fluctuation time in the latent state, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  In addition, a long fluctuation time in which the resurrection effect can be executed may be set as the special figure fluctuation time only in the final stage (for example, the number of actual residual fluctuation is 10 times or less) in the latent state. Thereby, a display state indicating that the display state in which the resurrection effect can be executed (the effect probability variation number (effect residual probability variation number) is 0 (or the latent condition is not determined to be continued) is displayed. In the early stage of the latent state, it is difficult to execute)), it is not necessary to set a long fluctuation time in which the resurrection effect can be executed, and the game in the latent state can be provided smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 236) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112) is the first or special view 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the fluctuation display effect in the third symbol display device 81. Based on the display, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and processing for transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), processing is performed to set a special display 1 for display or a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 243, S4112), first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4701). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S4701: No), since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4705. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to be off (S4702).

  Next, in the process of S4703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4303 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111) The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated by acquiring from 223z (S 4703). In addition, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable whether it is a variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command of 2 bytes configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01" the second special symbol It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

  The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S4703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) It transmits to the control device 114 of FIG. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding sphere of the first special symbol In accordance with the setting of display), the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4704).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4705). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Since there is, the processing of S4709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S4705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to be off (S4706). In the process of S4306 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, 2) Set a variation pattern command for display of special symbols (S4707).

  The variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S4707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 236) It transmits to the control device 114 of FIG. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed. Then, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4708).

  Next, it is determined whether the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are not set on (that is, off) (S4709: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special view 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S2709: Yes), the special view 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to OFF (S4710).

  In the process of S4301 of the command determination process (FIG. 238, S4111), the stop type extracted from the received special view 1 stop type command or the special view 2 stop type command is set (S4711), and the process ends. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. Moreover, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. . In addition, the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot is reached, and the notification is made even if the determination result is out. Be done. If the determination result is out, the out type is not referred to and the out pattern is set.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 257. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 244). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 244) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S6001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 245, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 255A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 255A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246B) and the simplified display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 246B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is If there is a display fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110 via the audio lamp control unit 113, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, a simple fluctuation It is possible to make a presentation. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 246 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 246 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 207 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 247, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing (S6405). The variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S650. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S6406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 246 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. The opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 6704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a command for the number of rounds (S6410: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (b). FIG. 249 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

  Referring back to FIG. 247, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), a rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a flowchart of the rear image change command process. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear surface image determination flag 233x provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is set on The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is displayed by the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, RAM type that specifies the back image type to be displayed at that time, and further specifies the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image Specify the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). For example (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). FIG. 251 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command The variation pattern command process (see FIG. 248 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 248 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are extracted and the other commands are Perform processing to discard without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 248 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 252, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7201: No ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S7301).

  In task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S7203, the process proceeds to S7205.

  At S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, then in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 252, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and for each sprite It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S7209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed and the finalized display is performed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the fixed display effect Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7217), and the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S7221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S6309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of the above image in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 255 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255 (b).

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 255 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7602 (S7602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S7603, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 246B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 246B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 246B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 247 to 251) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 252 to 254) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256) (see S7501: No in FIG. 255A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 256, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S7705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S7706 (S7706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No), the process moves to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710) and then provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state among the back image discrimination flag 233x is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer object image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 257, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list (FIG. 207) is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 7802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 246 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the three gaming states of the normal state, the probability change state, and the latent state are used to make a come and go as a trigger. And, the latent state is set to the most advantageous gaming state. Specifically, after increasing the percentage of small wins in the second special symbol lottery compared to the first special symbol lottery (0% → about 46%), in the latent state, other games The lottery of the second special symbol is easier to be executed than the state. As a result, in the latent state, if the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, it will be a small hit with high probability, and the probability of becoming a big hit will also increase, so the ball is won to the specific winning opening 65a You have more chances to win than other gaming states. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of shifting to the latent state.

  Further, in the first control example, the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is easily performed is switched (the main change and the sub change are switched) according to the game state. Specifically, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main fluctuation in the normal state or the probability change state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is the main fluctuation in the latent state. Then, in each gaming state, when the elapsed time after the main fluctuation is stopped becomes equal to or more than a predetermined time (30 seconds), the demonstration display according to the gaming state even while the sub fluctuation is being executed. It is configured to display (waiting demonstration screen for customer, demonstration display for latency confirmation). Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, there is one that performs a demonstration display by determining that the player is not playing a game when a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stop state. In such a conventional game machine, whether or not a game is being played can be easily recognized depending on the presence or absence of the demonstration display, so the game in which the demonstration display is performed for the player searching for a vacant platform is performed. The game can be started on the machine. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, when applied to a game machine of a specification in which a plurality of symbols simultaneously change, even if some symbols are in the change stop state, as long as the other symbols change. , Could not run demo display. Therefore, it may be difficult to determine whether the player who searches for the vacant platform is the vacant platform or not from the display content.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, it is configured to determine whether or not to display the customer waiting demo screen only in the normal state or the probability variation state (regardless of the status of the minor variation) according to only the main variation status. . As a result, after the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640 and the variable display for 600 seconds is started, even if the game is immediately terminated, the predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed. Can display a customer waiting demonstration screen. Therefore, since it can be easily understood that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform to other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen, the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

  Also, in this control example, a demonstration display (special display) of a special mode in which the same character 811 as during fluctuation continues to be displayed when 30 seconds or more have passed since the main fluctuation stopped in the latent state. It is assumed that the configuration is set. That is, the display contents of the same system are used during normal display and during demo display. Thereby, when the ball entering the second entrance 1640 is detected after that, the display mode (render mode) can be switched smoothly, so that the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of reach effect, a special reach is provided in which a new symbol row is displayed and reach is generated after the third symbol is once stopped and displayed in combination. . Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, there is a case where a winning condition advantageous to the player is given. In such a gaming machine, in a state in which one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the symbols displayed being stopped form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and becomes a win. We are aiming to improve interest by making players expect them.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, even if all symbols are not displayed in a stopped state when the reach state is not generated, there is no possibility of being hit at that time, and the player's game is not performed. There was a risk of losing interest. On the other hand, in the present control example, after the third symbol is once stopped and displayed in a combination of removal, a special reach effect in which a new symbol row is framed in and develops into reach effect is provided. As a result, even if the third symbol is stopped and displayed once in a combination of off-set, it can be expected to develop into special reach effect. That is, it is possible to confirm the combination of the stop symbols paying attention to the combination of the stop symbols that can be developed into the special reach effect (the combination that becomes reach when the new symbol row L4 is displayed). Therefore, each time the variable display is stopped and displayed as a combination of deviations, it is possible to expect development to special reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously performed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where one variable display is being executed, another variable display may be configured to be infeasible. And when a holding ball exists, it is good also as composition which carries out change display in order from a holding ball with which a starting winning combination is temporally old. By configuring in this way, control can be simplified, and processing load can be reduced.

  In the first control example, the latent state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability change state may be set to the most advantageous state. That is, in the definite change state, the ball is configured to be easily inserted into the second entrance 1640, and in the normal state or the latent state, the ball is moved to the first entrance 64 rather than the second entrance 1640. May be configured to facilitate ball entry. Specifically, for example, in the normal state or the latent state, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and in the probability change state The variation pattern may be configured to select a variation pattern having a very short variation time (0.5 seconds). That is, the prescribed contents of the probability variation table 202f3 and the latency probability table 202f4 in the first control example may be interchanged. In addition, in the definite change state the big hit (big hit E ~ F) of the second special symbol, when the ball passes V pass switch 65e3 during the big hit, set the time-shortening number of times 120 times, in the normal state or latent state, The configuration may be such that the time-saving number is set to zero. Thereby, when it becomes a big hit of the second special symbol in the definite change state, the gaming state after the big hit becomes easy to be set again to the positive change state (it becomes easy to loop the positive change state), thereby enhancing the superiority of the positive change state be able to.

  Also, the normal state may be set to the most advantageous state, not the latent state or the probability changing state. Specifically, for example, while replacing the prescribed contents of the normal table A 202 f 1 in the first control example and the latency table 202 f 4, it is easy to loop the normal state at the jackpot in the normal state (V pass switch 65 e 3 Is configured so that it is easy to win the jackpot type), and in the latent state or the probability change state, the V passage switch 65e3 is configured to be easily elected to the jackpot type of the opening and closing pattern in which the ball easily passes. It is also good.

  In the first control example, of the opening and closing patterns set for the opening and closing plate 65f1, the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened for 0.2 seconds after the start of one round, with the V passage switch 65e3 being a pattern in which the ball hardly passes Although the open / close pattern to be set is provided, the open period may be further shortened to ensure that the ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65.

  In the first control example, when the special reach effect is executed and each symbol row L1 to L3 is temporarily stopped, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in upper symbol row L1 and middle symbol row L2 are new symbols Although the configuration is such that it faces in the direction of the row L4, it is not limited to this. For example, only the main symbol to which reach is applied by appearance (frame-in) of a new symbol row L4 (in the example of FIG. 185 (a), the main symbol with the numeral "1") is a new symbol row L4 It may be configured to look up in the direction of. Further, for example, among the main symbols other than the main symbols on which the reach is applied, the number of main symbols in the aspect of looking up the new symbol row L4 may be configured to indicate the expectation of becoming a big hit. That is, the larger the number of main symbols looking up in the direction of the new symbol row L4, the higher the expectation for becoming a big hit in the special reach effect may be configured. In this case, if all the main symbols look up on the new symbol row L4, the jackpot may be determined (for example, selected only in the case of a hit super reach). By configuring in this manner, when the symbol that has been changed can be stopped and displayed in a combination of disengaging, attention can be given to the aspect of each main symbol, so the interest for the player's game can be improved. .

  In this first control example, when the special reach effect is executed, all the main symbols temporarily stopped in the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured to face the direction of the new symbol row L4, It is not limited to this. Not only the main symbol but also the reserved symbol may be configured to face in the direction of the new symbol row L4. In this case, depending on the number of reserved symbols facing in the direction of the new symbol row L4, it may be configured to suggest an expectation of becoming a big hit in special reach effect. That is, as the number of reserved symbols facing the direction of the new symbol row L4 increases, the probability of becoming a big hit may increase. Also, instead of suggesting the expectation of the jackpot in the special reach effect by the number of the held symbols, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the held balls corresponding to the held symbols become the jackpot. For example, from the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the fluctuation pattern of each holding ball is read ahead, and the fluctuation pattern (outlier super reach or hit super reach) is developed into a super reach effect in the holding ball If it is determined that the ball is included, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball developed to the super reach effect performs the effect that the direction of the new symbol row L4 is directed at the temporary stop in the special reach effect It is good also as composition. As a result, at the time of temporary stop in the special super reach effect, it is possible to play a game paying attention also to the holding symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, the new symbol row L4 displayed when the special reach effect is executed is scrolled in parallel with each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, but the new symbol row L4 is , It is not always necessary to scroll and display in parallel with each symbol row L1 to L3. For example, a new symbol row L4 may be displayed on the right or left side of each symbol row L1 to L3 and may be scrolled in the vertical direction (vertical direction with respect to each symbol row L1 to L3). Thereby, the degree of freedom of presentation when special reach presentation is selected can be further enhanced. Further, the number of new symbol rows is not limited to one, and when special reach effect is performed, a plurality of symbol rows may be newly displayed. By displaying a plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to increase the combinations of main symbols at the time of temporary stop that can develop into a special reach. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a stop symbol that may develop into a special reach when stopping with a stop symbol corresponding to disengaging, the player can further develop the special reach effect. It can be expected with high frequency. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, result display (see FIG. 188 (b)) is performed showing the result of the latent state basically until the variable display of the first special symbol is started after the latent state is over. Although it was configured not to be, it is not limited to this. For example, the result display of the latent state may be performed immediately after the latent state ends. Then, the display may be continued until the first variable symbol display of the first special symbol is ended. By displaying the result immediately after the latent state ends, the player can immediately know the result of the ended latent state. Therefore, even if it takes time until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 after the player returns to the left, the result of the latent state is not displayed and the player is stressed. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In this first control example, after the completion of the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is fixed to 12 seconds, but is not limited to 12 seconds. It may be set arbitrarily (for example, 10 seconds or 20 seconds) within a range where the display can be sufficiently confirmed by the player.

  In this first control example, when the stop display of the big hit or the small hit is performed by either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed in a state in which the temporary stop or measurement of fluctuation time is interrupted. In addition, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit until the stop display of the big hit or the small hit is displayed. For example, the forced lottery without winning will be executed, and it may be configured so that the lottery result is always lost. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are won in a big hit or a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the number of remaining certainty changes and the number of remaining short times are not subtracted based on the number of times the forced lottery is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a fair game.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example described above, the first ball entry port 64 in which the ball easily enters the ball by the left strike and the second ball entry port 1640 in which the ball easily strikes the ball by the right strike are provided. In a normal state and a definite change state to be executed, a game in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a special view 1) based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 is mainly executed (special view 1) In the latent state in which the game of substantial fluctuation is executed, the right-handed game is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 2) mainly based on the ball entering the second entrance 1640 The game to be executed (special figure 2 substantial fluctuation game) was configured to be executed. And, in the latent state where the right-handed game is executed, the variable winning device 65 takes a predetermined period (for example, the lottery for the special figure 2 executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640). A small hit that is open (about 1.65 seconds) is set (lottery probability is about 1/2), and it is configured to be able to expect to get out balls by the small hit.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, both the drawing of the special figure 1 and the drawing of the special figure 2 can be executed by right-handling, and variation of each special figure in the latent state By setting the variation time of the special figure 2 to be shorter than the variation time of the special figure 1, the lottery of the special figure 2 is more easily executed than the special figure 1 in the latent state. In addition, the number of time reductions given in a definite variation state (special symbol high probability state and ordinary symbol short time state) is less than the number of times the special symbol high probability state is set (for example, 120 times) (For example, set to 100 times), and it is configured to shift from the definite change state to the latent state when the number of drawing times of the special drawing (number of times of change of the special drawing) exceeds 100 times in the definite change state. .

  In addition, long fluctuation (180 seconds) and short fluctuation (3 seconds) are set in the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the definite change state, and the second special symbol changes in the timing of transition from the positive change state to the latent state The degree of occurrence of small hits in the latent state is configured to be different depending on the situation. Specifically, when the second special symbol shifts to the latent state at the timing immediately after the start of the long variation (180 seconds), the variation due to the first special symbol until the second special symbol starts its variation next Is performed, the number of drawing times of the second special symbol in the latent state decreases, and as a result, the degree of occurrence of small hits can be reduced. On the other hand, if the second special symbol shifts to the latent state during the short fluctuation (3 seconds) or near the end timing of the long fluctuation (180 seconds), the second special symbol is immediately after the transition to the latent state. Since the variation of the symbol is started, the degree of occurrence of the small hit can be increased as a result. In addition, although the details will be described later, a mechanism for causing the ball to alternately enter the first right ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b in the area where the ball is fired by right hitting (right hitting area) And is configured such that the ball can not enter the ball only at one of the ball entrances (for example, the second ball entrance 1640a) (as it becomes difficult).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to increase the transition opportunity to the latent state, which is the gaming state most advantageous to the player as in the first control example described above, and to improve the player's motivation for the game. it can. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage (small hit occurrence degree) when transitioning from the probability change state to the latent state can be made to differ depending on the timing of state transition, the player can provide more complicated game characteristics, It is possible to suppress getting bored early. In addition, the right first ball entrance 64b for executing the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the ball, and the second ball entrance 1640b for executing the lottery of the second special symbol by entering the ball are alternately balls. Since the right hitting area is provided with a configuration in which the ball enters the ball, it is possible to suppress that only the drawing of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player is executed, and an excessively advantageous state to the player is obtained. It can suppress that it gives.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to simultaneously execute the lottery (execute the variation), and the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) Becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), and at the timing when the symbol indicating the lottery result of that hit is stopped and displayed (at the timing when the hit is determined), the variation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is out It was configured to be forcibly stopped by the symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the lottery result of one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) wins (big hit or small hit), and the symbol showing the lottery result of that hit At the timing when the stop is displayed (at the timing when the hit is determined), the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is interrupted, and the lottery result of one special symbol It is configured to resume the measurement (counting) of the fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation of the other special symbol that has been interrupted at the timing when the base game is finished (the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol becomes possible).

  Thereby, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously execute the lottery (execution of the variation), the lottery result of each special symbol can be surely provided to the player, and the player can play the game It can be made not to be dissatisfied with it.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration in that the game board 13 has a ball at the position where the variable winning device 65 is placed from the right hitting area. And that the right-handed ball has moved to the central lower area where the ball can enter the ball, a point that a distribution unit 660 is provided instead of the second entrance 1640, a ball to the second entrance 1640 Instead of the motorized product 1640a for restricting ball entry, the motorized product 660f for restricting ball entry to the distribution unit 660 is provided, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed And the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is performed in the first control example. The content of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. And the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. About other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 258, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 258 is a front view of the board 13 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 258, in the second control example, the sorting unit 660 is located at the position where the variable winning device 65 was disposed in the first control example (the right side (right-handed area) of the variable display unit 80). In the first control example, the motorized part 660f is disposed above the distribution unit 660, and in the first control example, the second entry is disposed on the downstream side (right lower side of the panel 13) of the right hitting area. It differs in that the ball exit 1640 is deleted and the variable winning device 65 is disposed below the central region of the board (below the first ball entry port 64). Although details will be described later, the distribution unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter the ball through a passage port provided in the upper part thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, the right first ball entrance 64b where the drawing of the first special symbol is executed by the ball entering the ball, and the drawing of the second special symbol by the ball entering the ball is executed A second entrance 1640 b is provided, and the ball entering the inside of the distribution unit 660 through the passage is distributed to any of these entrances. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol by striking the distribution unit 660 with a right strike and striking out the ball.

  Further, above the distribution unit 660, there is disposed an electric utility product 660f which can be varied between a permitted position where the ball is allowed to flow into the passage opening provided at the upper part of the distributed unit 660 and a restricted position where it is restricted. There is. This motorized jackpot 660f is the same as the motorized jackpot 640a in the first control example described above, and the predetermined symbol is selected when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is hit. It is controlled to change to the allowable position (one second × two times). In this way, a game in which aiming at the first entrance 64 by a game (hereinafter referred to as a left strike game) executing a left strike in the normal state executes a right strike game (hereinafter referred to as a right strike game). Rather than aiming at the entrance 64b, it is configured to be able to change the first special symbol more efficiently.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 259 (a) and 259 (b) show the internal structure of the distribution unit 660. FIG. In practice, a cover body is disposed on the front side, and the cover body is formed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored in the surface so that the inside can not be seen or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult for the inside to be visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 259 (a) and (b), a passing port through which a ball can enter is provided at the top of the sorting unit 660, and it is possible to detect that the ball has passed through the passing port. A mold entry sensor 660a is disposed. Below the passage, a distributing member 900 is provided for distributing the ball to the right first ball entrance 64b or the second ball entrance 1640b. The first right ball entry port 64b is disposed in the lower left direction in a front view of the distributing member 900, and the second incoming ball port 1640b is disposed in the lower right direction in a front view of the distributing member 900. The balls having passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distributing member 900 into the first right ball inlet 64b and the second ball inlet 1640b.

  The distributing member 900 is configured to be able to receive the ball entering the distributing unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900 a or 900 c. When the ball is received by the housing portion 900a, the entire distributing member 900 rotates counterclockwise in a front view by the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodation portion 900a is inclined downward to the lower left (see FIG. 89 (b)), and the first right ball-in, which is disposed in the lower left direction in front view with respect to the distributing member 900 The ball falls toward the mouth 64b (the ball is guided to the first right ball entrance 64b).

  Here, the distributing member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 15 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b. ing. On the other hand, the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 660 has a state in which the distributing member 900 is not rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (the bottom of the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c is horizontal In the state (1), the base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the back side (the center line of the passage) of the position at which the magnet 900b is disposed.

  The magnet 900 b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to be mutually repelled in polarity. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is formed of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at its tip. The base side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end thereof faces the distributing member 900 side. The magnet 900 b is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet as the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the distributing member 900 so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet 901. The base side magnet is located at a position where the distributing member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall of the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is right above (the center line of the interval at which the game ball in the passage opening can enter approximately 1 ball). A position 901 is closest to the magnet 900b of the distributing member 900 (the tips thereof face each other). Here, the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), so they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distributing member 900 is directed straight up. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is at the position (upper position) where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage opening, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that either By rotating in a downward direction, either the housing portion 900 a or the housing portion 900 c is directed to the side receiving the ball entering the distribution unit 660 (the passage side of the distribution unit 660). Therefore, the ball entering the sorting unit 660 can be distributed to the first right ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b with certainty.

  In addition, repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 causes, for example, the housing portion 900a to receive the ball and rotate about 30 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the first right ball entrance 64b, and then shake. It can prevent that the dividing member 900 rotates to the right (the accommodating portion 900 a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the ball to the first right ball entry port 64b, the housing portion 900c is directed upward, and then the housing portion 900c receives and receives the ball that has entered the sorting unit 660. Because the weight 900 causes the distributing member 900 to rotate clockwise by about 30 degrees, and the accommodation portion 900c is inclined in the direction of inclination toward the lower right of the front view, the ball drops from the accommodation portion 900c. , And enters the second entrance 1640b (the ball is guided to the second entrance 1640b). As described above, since the distributing member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the distributing unit 660 to the first right ball inlet 64b and the second ball inlet 1640b, the first right ball inlet can be obtained. The balls can be equally distributed to 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b for winning. Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed concurrently and in parallel.

  A guiding plate 900z1 is provided between the distributing member 900 and the first right ball entrance 64b for guiding the ball contained in the housing portion 900a to the first right ball inlet 64b. A guiding plate 900Z2 is provided between the member 900 and the second entrance 1640b for guiding the ball contained in the accommodation portion 900a to the second entrance 1640b. Thereby, the ball distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to each ball entry port.

  Further, on the upper end side (the distributing member 900 side) of each of the induction plates 900z1 and 900z2, a restricting member (not shown) for restricting the pivoting range of the distributing member 900 is provided. The rotation range is restricted by the contact with the member. This can suppress excessive rotation of the distributing member 900 (rotation in the counterclockwise direction more than the state shown in FIG. 259 (b)) due to the weight of the ball contained in the containing portion 900a. The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can be smoothly guided to the ball entrances.

<Game Description of Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 260 to 268, the contents of the game in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the transition ratio to each gaming state (normal state, positive change state, latent state) is changed from the first control example described above, and the number of time reductions granted in the positive change state is changed In the case where the point and the variation time of each special symbol in the definite variation state and the latent condition are changed, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, one special symbol is hit and stopped by the symbol The measurement of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the displayed timing (the timing when the win is determined), and the fluctuation time interrupted after the end of the game based on the lottery result of one special symbol It differs in the point which used the composition which restarts measurement of.

  First, with reference to FIG. 260, the flow of the game state transition in the second control example will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of transition of gaming state in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 260, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example shifts three gaming states (normal state, positive change state, latent state) in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is configured.

  Of the three gaming states described above, in the normal state (normal gaming state), the variation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is set as in the first control example described above It is done. Therefore, the normal state is a gaming state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed (substantial special figure 1 fluctuation). Further, in the present control example, a small hit is not set in the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1), so the small hit game is not executed.

  Next, in the positive variation state (positive variation gaming state), the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the first control example described above, and the right area of the board 13 (the right area of the variable display unit 80) A game (hereinafter referred to as "right-handed game") for aiming at the game is executed, and a game in which balls are made to flow into the distribution unit 660 to simultaneously change both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed. The details of the variation time of the second special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 (b), but in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol (special figure 2) as the variation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the definite variation state A short time fluctuation (3 seconds) shorter than the fluctuation time in Fig. 1) and a long time fluctuation (180 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time in special figure 1 are set, and the probability change state is selected according to the selected fluctuation time. The ratio of the lottery (fluctuation) to be executed in is set to be different.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the number of time reductions during the definite change state is set to be set to a number (100 times) smaller than the number of times (120 times) at which the positive change state is set. Therefore, in the definite change state, when the variation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state is configured to shift from the positive change state to the latent state (20 times) There is. Thereby, for example, after the end of the jackpot game won in the normal state, even if it is not a latent state that is most advantageous to the player but transition to a definite change state, without passing through the jackpot of the special symbol Since it is possible to shift to the latent state, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation.

  As described above, in this control example, a short time fluctuation (3 seconds) and a long time fluctuation (180 seconds) are set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the probability variation state, and therefore special during the probability variation state Due to the changing situation of the second special symbol when the number of times of fluctuation of the symbol exceeds 100 times and the gaming state shifts from the probability change state to the latent state (20 times), the small hit during the latent state (20 times) A difference can be given to the number of times of winning. Specifically, for example, when the long time fluctuation (180 seconds) of the second special symbol starts, the time saving state ends, and the gaming state transitions from the probability change state to the latent state, the second special symbol The timing at which the next fluctuation is performed is after 180 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to 10 seconds in the definite variation state (see FIG. 270 (b)) and 5 seconds in the latent condition (see FIG. 271), so the next variation of the second special symbol The first special symbol is set to be variable 20 times until 180 seconds have elapsed before is executed.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the ball flows into the distribution unit 660 when the right-handed game is executed, and is configured to alternately enter the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. Therefore, it is impossible (difficult) to keep changing only the second special symbol. Therefore, the difference can be easily provided by the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) executed during the latent state (20 times).

  In the latent state (latency state), the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the first control example described above, and the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the second special symbol The lottery (variation) is configured to be executed together (Special figure 1 special figure 2 substantial variation). The other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

  As described above, in the second control example, since the opportunity to shift to the latent state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, without winning the jackpot of the special symbol is provided, the player's willingness to play the game Have the effect of being able to continuously Furthermore, when transitioning to the latent state without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, it is possible to make the degree of advantage in the latent state different depending on the transition timing and the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, It is possible to provide the player with various game characteristics, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early in the game.

  Also, in the latent state, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol in which the small win is set in the lottery result and the change (lottery) of the first special symbol in which the small win is not set in the lottery result are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which a small hitting game occurs excessively.

  In addition, the fluctuation ratio of the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing) and the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing) in the gaming state (positive change state, latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed is of each special symbol It is set to be different depending on the fluctuation time set to fluctuation. Therefore, even in the same gaming state, the degree of advantage varies depending on the variation time of each special symbol set, so it is possible to expect the player to be executed many variations of the second special symbol advantageous to the player while playing the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In this control example, a small hit is not set to the lottery result of the first special symbol, but the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. What is necessary is just to set, for example, the lottery result of the first special symbol may be set so that the small winning will be won with a winning probability lower than the second winning probability of the second special symbol. Also, the small winning probability is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the small winning game to be executed when the small winning is won is smaller than the case where the small winning for the first special symbol is won. If the player wins a small hit with the second special symbol, a small hit game may be provided which is easy to enter the ball into the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. In this case, a plurality of small winning games having different opening periods and opening patterns of the variable winning device 65 are set, and the second special symbol is smaller than the case where the first special symbol is small. It is preferable to configure such that the opening period of the variable winning device 65 is longer, or an opening pattern in which the ball is likely to enter is selected.

  Next, referring to FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, in a state in which the special view 1 and the special view 2 are simultaneously changing, either one (special view 2) hits (big hit or A flow of each special figure fluctuation and effect display (effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81) in the case of becoming a small hit) will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure variation, in which the third symbol display device 81 executes effect display (effect display using the third symbol) based on the variation of the special figure 1 In the definite change state, the change (10 seconds) of the special figure 1 and the change (3 seconds) of the special figure 2 are simultaneously executed, and among them, the flow when the special figure 2 is won for the small hit is shown.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 can be simultaneously changed (lottery) like the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the third symbol display device 81 copes with the fluctuation of each special drawing. There are some that effect presentation is performed. In this control example, of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2), the variation display (main variation) corresponding to one of the special figure variations, and the variation display (second variation) corresponding to the other special figure variation Fluctuation) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 182).

  The main variation and the sub variation are configured such that the corresponding special figure variation is switched depending on the game state, and for example, the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 which is a substantial variation in the normal state becomes the main variation, The variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 is set to be the sub-variation. In this manner, the player can display the third symbol by causing the special figure fluctuation that is substantially executed in the set gaming state to be changed as the main fluctuation among the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation. The game result can be displayed on the device 81 in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the second control example, an example is shown in which the variable display of each special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is switched and set to main variation and sub variation according to the game state, but it is limited to this Alternatively, the variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation and the variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation may be randomly switched to the main fluctuation and the sub fluctuation, or a predetermined rule (for example, alternating It may be configured to switch to). Also, it may be configured to be selectable by the player. Even with such a configuration, the same problem occurs when winning is made on the side of the special figure variation that does not correspond to the main variation performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Referring back to FIG. 261, the description will be continued. First, the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is simultaneously started, and the special drawing 1 effect display (10 seconds) is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation start timing of the special drawing 1. And 3 seconds after the change of each special figure is started (after the change time lapse of the special figure 2), it is stopped and displayed with the symbol which shows that the special figure 2 is elected in the small hitting, the change of the special figure 1 Measurement of fluctuation time to is interrupted. In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted during a period in which the measurement of fluctuation time to fluctuation of the special drawing 1 is interrupted (discontinuance period of FIG. 261). In the one symbol display device 37, the variation of the special view 1 is continuously executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player that the fluctuation of the special view 1 is not forcibly stopped when the small hitting game is executed.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the same processing as the variable display setting processing (see S4112 in FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed. The fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol to be executed corresponds to the predetermined time period (the special figure fluctuation fluctuation time) even if the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the special figure fluctuation time measurement is interrupted) Configured to run continuously for 8 seconds). Thereby, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the interruption of the special figure fluctuation ( Or, it is possible to suppress a situation where the effect display is interrupted and the player is given a sense of discomfort.

  Here, as described above, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 In the case of continuing execution, the suspended special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the fluctuation display (or effect) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the timing when the restarted special figure fluctuation ends There is a problem that an error for a predetermined period (an interruption period of the special figure fluctuation) is generated between the end of the display).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern (the third symbol fluctuation display or the fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation display setting process (see S412 in FIG. 243) Between the end of the effect display) and the reception of the symbol determination command output from the main control unit 110, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not completely stopped and displayed. A swing effect for slightly swinging each symbol is configured to be executed. Therefore, a predetermined period (interruption period of the special figure fluctuation) which occurs between the timing when the special figure fluctuation mentioned above ends and the timing when the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. The third symbol display device 81 continues to shake the third symbol during the error period, and the player's willingness to play is lowered by making the pachinko machine 10 think that a problem has occurred. There was a problem that I let it go.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the above-described problem is solved by configuring the additional effect so as to be executable using the above-described error period. That is, as shown in FIG. 261, the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example performs a small hit at the timing when the normal effect of 8 seconds is finished as the special view 1 effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81. When the gaming state has not ended, a shaking effect that causes the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 to rock on the third symbol display device 81 during a period (one second) until the small hitting gaming state ends. After the small hitting gaming state ends and special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, an additional effect corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation period after resumption is executed. By comprising in this way, the suspended special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the timing when the resumed special drawing fluctuation ends During the error period (6 seconds in FIG. 261) which occurs with the end of the), it is possible to suppress the situation where the third symbol is continuously displayed in a rocking manner, so the player's willingness to play is lowered. It is possible to suppress the situation that

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the second control example, the length of the error period described above is calculated, and the content of the additional effect to be executed is made different according to the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute more suitable effect display for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 262 to FIG. 264, the contents of the additional effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in this control example, the type of the additional effect to be executed is made different based on the length of the period during which the additional effect is executed. As a result, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the effect display (additional effect display) executed in the remaining period that occurs when the effect display corresponding to the main change is continuously executed regardless of the lottery result of the sub change Can be suppressed.

  FIG. 262 (a) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect is not performed in the remaining period. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), but in this control example, the additional effect is configured not to be performed in some cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds). . This is because, if the additional effect is executed when the remaining period is short enough that the player has difficulty grasping the content of the additional effect, the player may feel discomfort, conversely. The additional effect is not to be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 262 (a), until the stop command from the main control device 110 is received (refer to the point D to the point E in FIG. 261), the swing corresponding to the main variation ends. Stop display.

  Next, FIG. 262B is a schematic view showing a display screen in the case where the additional effect A is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in the present control example, the additional effect A is executed in a part of cases where the remaining period is less than a predetermined period (less than 2 seconds) There is. As shown in FIG. 262 (b), in this additional effect A, in the state where the effect corresponding to the main change is finished, the number (identification information) displayed with each symbol is changed to "?" The shaking stop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the result of the main change until the remaining period has elapsed.

  In addition, in this control example, although the display mode which hides only the number attached | subjected to each symbol is used, you may use the display aspect which also hides the character ("animal" etc.) of each symbol, for example. By doing this, it is possible to further suppress the player from being aware of the result of the main fluctuation until the remaining period has elapsed. Moreover, since this additional effect A is an effect only by changing the display mode (display mode of a symbol) of a part of the effect corresponding to the executed main change, even if the remaining period is short, even if it is performed It is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  FIG. 263 (a) is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect B is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in this control example, the additional effect B is executed in the case where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds). ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), in the additional display B, the same display as in FIG. 262 (a) is executed in the main display area Dm, and the variation is executed for the player in the sub display area Ds. A telop for informing of the presence is displayed in the small area Ds5. As a result, even if the state in which the main fluctuation is stopped and displayed is continuing, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the fluctuation is in progress.

  In this control example, as the additional effect B, the display of the main display area Dm is the same as that shown in FIG. 262 (a), that is, the effect is not added to the display of the main display area Dm. Although the control load at the time of executing is reduced, the display of the main display area Dm may be the same as that shown in FIG. 262 (b) as the additional effect B, for example. . This makes it possible to execute the additional effect using the entire area of the third symbol display device 81, and has an effect of making it possible for the player to easily grasp that the additional effect is being performed.

  Next, FIG. 263 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen in the case where additional effect C is executed as a type of additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in the present control example, the additional effect C is executed in some cases where the remaining period is a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) ing. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), in the additional effect C, the main variation display is reduced and displayed in a small area Dm5 in the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view, and in the central part of the main display area Dm, the pachinko machine 10 is used. A game description is displayed. As described above, the player is made to feel uncomfortable by providing information different from the information suggesting the lottery result of the main variation to the player during the remaining period after the main variation effect is finished. It is possible to digest the remaining period of the main fluctuation without. Further, in the sub display area Ds, as in the case of FIG. 26A, a telop for notifying the player that the change is being performed in the small area Ds5 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the player is moving.

  FIG. 264 is a schematic view showing a display screen when the additional effect D is executed as the type of the additional effect during the remaining period. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 273 (b), in the present control example, the additional effect D is executed when the remaining period is equal to or more than a predetermined period (6 seconds or more). As shown in FIG. 264, in the additional effect D, as in the additional effect C shown in FIG. 263 (b), the main variation display is reduced and displayed in the small area Dm5 in the upper right portion of the front view of the main display area Dm. In the central portion of the area Dm, the main fluctuation effect is displayed again (replay display). As described above, when there is a period (remaining period) in which the additional effect is executed (remaining period) or more (six seconds or more), the effect dedicated to the additional effect (replay display effect) is executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Since it can do, the presentation effect using the remaining period can be heightened.

  As described above, in the second control example, in the configuration in which the variation of each special figure (special figure 1, special figure 2) is simultaneously executed, one of the special figures stops at the symbol showing a hit. When it is displayed, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is stopped, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure is resumed after the winning game is over, so the first control example described above As described above, it is possible to execute the game without forcibly stopping the change of the special view, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game content.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation display (for example, the main fluctuation) corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation executed by the third symbol display device 81 is set in advance even when the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special drawing is stopped. To be executed continuously for a certain period (period corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure), therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation is interrupted by the drawing result of one special figure. it can. Thereby, for example, when an effect having a story property is being executed as a variable display corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation, it is a case where the winning is made and the winning game is started in one special figure fluctuation. Even if it is, it becomes possible to carry out without having a break in the effect with the story nature corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the measurement of the variation time of the other special figure is stopped, in the period until the variation of the other special figure is completed, and in the other special figure variation executed by the third symbol display device 81 Although the period during which the corresponding variable display is completed is different, since the additional effect is performed using the different period (remaining period), the variation of the special figure with respect to the player It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort due to the difference between the period and the period of the variable display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation.

  Further, in the second control example, the additional effect to be executed when the fluctuation period of the special drawing and the fluctuation display period corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation are different is the length of the different period (remaining period). Since the change is made accordingly, it is possible to further suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  Specifically, if the excess period is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 2 seconds), the additional effect is intentionally not performed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the additional effect to be performed. An additional effect (short-term additional effect) in which only a part of the display content indicating that the variable display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation has ended is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort even when a period of time in which it is difficult to provide an additional effect to the player occurs. In the second control example, as an additional effect in which only a part of the display content indicating that the fluctuation display corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation has ended is added to the special drawing of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation. An additional effect is performed in which the display mode indicating the lottery result is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation by the fluctuation display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation before the fluctuation period of the special figure ends.

  In addition, when the remaining period is a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds to 6 seconds), the period during which the additional effect is being performed (the variation display of the special figure variation is ended but the variation of the special figure is not completed In period (d), the player may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 has a failure because a new feature map change is not executed. Therefore, in the present control example, when the remainder period is the predetermined period, a display for notifying the player that the special figure is changing in the third symbol display device 81 ("display during change") is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the state in which the new special feature fluctuation is not executed is the normal state.In the example of the main subject 2 control, the remaining period is the predetermined period. Although the above-mentioned "display during change" is displayed at the same time when the additional effect to be executed is started, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the additional effect is performed. It may be configured that “display during change” is performed later. By configuring in this way, immediately after the additional effect is executed (for example, 2 seconds from the start), the same effect as the short-term additional effect described above is executed, so the additional effect execution period is played It can be suppressed that the person is aware of.

  In addition, in the second control example, when a remainder period of a predetermined period (2 seconds to 6 seconds) is set, information (for example, information for explaining the game content) which is not related to the drawing result of the special drawing is displayed. An additional effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of information related to the game by effectively using a period in which a new special figure fluctuation is not started by the display on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, by displaying information that is not related to the drawing result of the special drawing, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the occurrence of the surplus period. In the second control example, the information for explaining the game content is displayed as the information having nothing to do with the drawing result of the special drawing, but other information may be displayed. For example, the game history of the past may be displayed, or information (fortune-telling, a game, etc.) unrelated to the game itself may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second control example, among the special drawing 1 fluctuation and the special drawing 2 fluctuation in which the fluctuation is simultaneously executed, the special drawing fluctuation in which the player expects the lottery result more is the main fluctuation, and the other is the auxiliary fluctuation. In order to allow the player to easily grasp the contents of the main fluctuation, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to have a larger area in which the main fluctuation is executed than the area in which the sub fluctuation is executed. There is. As a result, the player can easily grasp the contents of the main fluctuation.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, a special figure (special figure to be subject to substantial fluctuation) that the player expects from the lottery result is switched according to the gaming state. Is executed as the main change, it is possible to display (notify) the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the flow of fluctuation of each special view (special view 1 or special view 2) when the gaming state in the second control example shifts from the latent state to the normal state will be described. Do. FIG. 265 (a) is a timing chart showing a flow in the case where the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation (121 turn after the previous big hit end) after completion of the latent state is the special figure 2, and FIG. 265 (b) Is a timing chart showing a flow in the case where the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation (121 times after the previous big hit end) after the completion of the latent state is the special figure 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 265 (a) and (b), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can simultaneously change, the advantageous state (latency state) in which the player is advantageous is a predetermined number of times (for example, When limited to 120 times), the number of times the advantageous state is set when the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation or special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed during the advantageous state (ie, the number of definite variations) ) Is being subtracted. In this case, when the special figure fluctuation performed in the first rotation after the end of the advantageous state (the number of fluctuations “121” in FIG. 265) becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 265 (b)), And (see FIG. 265 (a)) occurs.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, a short time fluctuation time is set as the special figure fluctuation time in the latent state in order to efficiently digest (execute) the game in the latent state. (See FIG. 270 (b)), configured to display the game result (see FIG. 188 (b)) displayed when the latent state is over, during the special figure fluctuation that is executed after the latent state is over doing. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation (main fluctuation in the normal state) executed first after transitioning from the latent state to the normal state causes the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b) Time (12 seconds in this control example).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation that is first executed after transitioning from the latent state to the normal state is the special drawing for the first rotation after the latent state ends. Since whether it becomes fluctuation or special figure fluctuation of the second turn varies depending on the gaming situation in the latent state, the latent figure can be determined only by setting the special drawing fluctuation time of the first turn after the termination of the latent state to 12 seconds. There is a problem that it is not possible for the player to grasp the game result of the state.

  Therefore, in the second control example, the fluctuation time for two rotations after the completion of the latent state is set to a time (12 seconds in this control example) sufficient to allow the player to grasp the game result (FIG. 188 (b)). When the variation of the special figure 1 is executed in any special figure variation, it is configured to notify the game result using the variation time. It is possible to notify the game result of the state.

  That is, in the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the special figure fluctuation of the second rotation (number of times of fluctuation "122") after the completion of the latent state becomes special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time In the case shown in FIG. 265 (b), the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation (number of times of fluctuation "121") after the completion of the latent state is the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the game result is notified using the fluctuation time .

  In the case shown in FIG. 265 (a), the game result is calculated using the period from the transition from the latent state to the normal state to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation that becomes the main fluctuation in the normal state. It may be configured to notify.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 266 and 267, screen display contents set based on the setting status of the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t will be described. FIG. 266 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the demonstration display A, FIG. 266 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the demonstration display B, and FIG. 267 (a) is a schematic view FIG. 267 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special display B. FIG.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 271. In the ROM 202 of the second control example, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d are partially changed compared to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first control example described above, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. They differ in that they

  First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (a). FIG. 268 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the second control example is a first hit type counter in which each jackpot type is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 193) used in the first control example described above. If you changed the value of C2, and you specified jackpot H instead of jackpot G that is the jackpot type selected when the symbol type is special figure 2, and when you got V prize in some jackpot types There is a difference in that the number of times to be granted is set to 100 times instead of 120 times. Other than that is the same as the first control example described above, and the detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 268 (a), when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29", the big hit A is selected as the big hit type, and the first hit If the value of the type counter C2 is "30 to 79", the big hit B is selected as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 89", the big hit C as the big hit type When it is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", the big hit D is selected as the big hit type.

  Further, when the symbol type is the special figure 2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 44", the big hit E is selected as the big hit type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is " In the case of “45 to 49”, the big hit F is selected as the big hit type, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit H is selected as the big hit type.

  Here, the jackpot H which is the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the second control example will be described. The jackpot H is a jackpot in which a jackpot game of two rounds (R) is executed, and the same opening pattern as that for the small hitting game is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 executed during the jackpot game . Thereby, the open pattern of the variable winning device 65 can execute the same big hit game and the small hit game, and the type of the hit game (big hit game or small hit by grasping the open pattern of the variable winning device 65 It can be difficult to identify the game).

  Therefore, for example, if the hit game is executed during the latent state, is it a hit game (ie, a big hit game H) in which the value of the actual remaining probability change count is reset to the initial value (120 times) Because it is difficult to identify to the player whether it is a hit game (i.e., a small hit game) without changing the value of the actual remaining probability change number, it is an advantageous game state for the player It is difficult to grasp the period in which a certain latent state continues, and it is possible to play a game while predicting the period in which the latent state continues.

  Further, in the second control example, since the number of time reductions set when transitioning to the probability change state (high probability and time reduction state) is made 100 times, which is smaller than the number of times the probability change state continues (120 times), If the special figure fluctuation exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot in the definite change state, the gaming state is shifted from the positive change state to the latent state. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set an opportunity other than an opportunity to win a jackpot in the special view as a transition opportunity for transitioning to a latent state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player, thereby making the interest of the game It can be improved.

  Next, contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202f of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). FIG. 268 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), in the second control example, a period during which the normal table A 202 f 1 is referred to with respect to the fluctuation pattern table 202 f (see FIG. 194) of the first control example described above is a latent state The third rotation after the end and the ninth rotation after the latent condition end, the regular table Bb 202 fb is provided instead of the regular table B 202 f 2, and the false table 202 f 3 is replaced with the odd table A normal table Cb 202 fb 5 to be referred to in the period between the third rotation and the eighth rotation after the completion of the latency state is provided, in that the b 202 fb 3 is provided, the latency table 202 f 4 is replaced with the latency table b 202 f b 4 They are different.

  Here, the characteristic variation pattern set for the characteristic game property (the game property different from the first control example described above) of the second control example will be described. As described above, the second control example is configured to be able to reserve and store the lottery of the special figure 2 up to four. Therefore, for example, when the game state is shifted from the latent state to the normal state in the state where the right-handed game is executed in the latent state and the four drawings of the special drawing 2 are held and stored, the reserved memory It will be executed in the state where the normal state is set with the lottery of the special figure 2 being made as the gaming state.

  Further, also in the second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, the fluctuation pattern (for example, Since the fluctuation time is set to select the fluctuation pattern of 10 minutes, there is a problem that the lottery of the special figure 2 which is stored on hold in the latent state is executed in the normal state .

  Therefore, in the second control example, in order to suppress that the special figure fluctuation of a long fluctuation time is executed even if the lottery of the special figure 2 which is reserved and stored during the latent state is executed during the normal state, A predetermined period (period until special drawing lottery is executed 8 times) after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state is set so that the fluctuation time with respect to the drawing of special drawing 2 becomes short There is. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the special figure 2 fluctuates for a long time despite the fact that the player is playing a proper game.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, as described above, when one special drawing is stopped with a symbol indicating a hit (large hit or small hit), the period until the hit game ends based on the hit (the hit game ends) And until the special figure fluctuation becomes executable) and the other special figure fluctuation is temporarily stopped (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is temporarily stopped), so the long time fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed. If it is done, even if the gaming state is shifted from the normal state to the latent state in the lottery of special figure 1 and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state, the lottery for special figure 2 takes a period until the long time fluctuation ends. There is a risk that the game can not be provided and the player can not be provided with an advantageous gaming state.

  Even for such a problem, a predetermined period (period until special drawing lottery is executed 8 times) after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state is a period after that in the normal state The above-described problem can be solved by configuring such that a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time is selected with respect to (a period after the special drawing lottery has been performed eight times).

  Here, the ordinary table Bb 202 fb 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 269 (a). FIG. 269 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the normal table Bb 202 fb 2. The normal table Bb 202 fb 2 is different from the above-described normal table B 202 f 2 of the first control example in that the fluctuation time defined in a part of the fluctuation patterns is changed, and the other is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

  The differences with the first control example described above will be specifically described. In the table for ordinary use Bb 202 fb 2, “1 2000 milliseconds (12 seconds)” in any variation pattern selected when the symbol type is special figure 2 The fluctuation time is specified. That is, the variation of "12000 milliseconds (12 seconds)" from the transition from the latent state to the normal state until the special figure lottery is executed twice regardless of the symbol type and the result of the pass / fail determination. The time will be set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set one of the two variations after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state as the variation of the special figure 1. Therefore, for example, when notifying the game result in the latent state according to the change of the special view 1, there is an effect that the period for notifying the game result can be surely ensured.

  In the second control example, the table for normal use Bb 202 fb 2 is referred to only during a predetermined period (period until special figure fluctuation is executed twice) after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state. The same fluctuation time (12 seconds) is specified to be set regardless of the symbol type or the result of judgment, but it is not necessary to set all fluctuation time the same, and other fluctuation time It may be configured to set. In this case, the variation time of the special figure 2 may be set longer than the variation time of the special figure 1 (for example, 15 seconds). As a result, during the fluctuation of the special view 1 executed after the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the fluctuation of the special view 2 winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed and the big hit game is started. This can be suppressed, and the effect display to be executed corresponding to the fluctuation of the special view 1 can be easily displayed for a predetermined period (12 seconds).

  In the second control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can simultaneously change, the effect display executed corresponding to the change in the special figure 1 (for example, the game in the latent state) Each special figure (special figure 1) during a period of two special figure fluctuations after the game state shifts from the latent state to the normal state in order to execute the result display indicating the result for a predetermined period (for example 12 seconds) Or, by configuring the variation time of the special figure 2) to be a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds), the special figure 1 is varied for 12 seconds regardless of the timing when the variation between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It is possible to make it possible to execute predetermined effect display for 12 seconds (for example, result display indicating the game result in the latent state) corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure 1, for example, After the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, When Special Figure 1 fluctuates, a predetermined effect display (for example, result display indicating the game result in the latent state) is executed corresponding to the first Special Figure 1 fluctuation, and the second Special figure 1 fluctuation It is preferable that a normal effect display indicating the corresponding lottery result is executed.

  The normal table Cb 202 fb 5 will be described next with reference to FIG. 269 (b). This FIG. 269 (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of table Cb202fb5 for normal. The normal table Cb 202 fb 5 is a table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern from the third rotation to the eighth rotation after the completion of the latent state.

  The table for ordinary use Cb 202 fb 5 is set so as to shorten the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the special figure 2 with respect to the table for ordinary use B b 202 fb 2 described above. Specifically, the variation time selected when the symbol type is the special figure 2 is set to be 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds) regardless of the result of the determination. By configuring in this manner, the drawing of the special figure 2 which is reserved and stored in the latent state is completely digested within a predetermined period (within 8 special-character fluctuations) after the gaming state shifts to the normal state. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the variation is executed for a long time and the player's motivation is lowered when the gaming state shifts despite the execution of the proper game.

  In this control example, in order to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 which is reserved and stored during the latent state being executed for a long time fluctuation (about 10 minutes), the maximum number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 The special variation pattern is configured to be selected during the period in which the 8 special pattern lotterys, which are the sum of (4 pieces) and the maximum number of reserved memories (4 pieces) of special figure 2, are executed. It is only necessary to prevent the lottery of the special figure 2 stored on hold during the latent state from being executed for a long period of time (about 10 minutes), for example, corresponding to the special figure 1 specified in the normal table Bb 202fb 2 By configuring the shortest fluctuation time to be four or more times longer than the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 specified in the normal table Bb202fb2, the fluctuation pattern is set with reference to the normal table Bb202fb2. Change (lottery) of special figure 1 To finish, lottery special symbol 2 being held memories may be executed all. By doing this, it is possible to digest the drawing of the special figure 2 stored for a short time in a shorter time.

  In addition, a special effect period that displays the result of the latent state until the gaming state changes from the latent state to the normal state until all the lottery stored in the special view 2 is saved (lottery is executed) In the third symbol display device 81, a dedicated effect may be executed. As a result, for example, the drawing of the special figure 2 in which the drawing result is a big hit in the latent state is held and stored, and even if the drawing is executed in the normal state, the big hit is stopped and displayed during the special effect period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, the effect display in the normal state is executed by configuring the effect display in the normal state to be executed after the end of the special effect period (after all the reserve storage in the special view 2 has been digested). It is good to prevent the drawing of the special figure 2 from being executed (fluctuating). Thus, the state in which the special figure 2 is variably displayed while the effect display in the normal state is being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a state where the appropriate game is not performed and the hall clerk is easy Can be determined. Thus, the hall clerk can appropriately handle the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270 (a), the content of the probability variation table b202fb3 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 270 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table b202fb3. The probability variation table b202fb3 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is the probability variation state.

  As shown in FIG. 270 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the same variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 in the definite variation state regardless of the number of holding balls and the result of the determination. doing. Specifically, in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 is a hit (large hit), the probability change variation (variation time 10 seconds) is defined, and when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 is out. , Outlier certainty variation (variation time 10 seconds) is specified.

  Further, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, a long fluctuation longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a short fluctuation shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 are configured to be set for each success / failure determination result ing. Specifically, if the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 is a hit (large hit), it falls within the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the change type counter CS1 and the long change (change time 180 seconds (3 minutes)) Are associated with each other, and the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”.

  When the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, a small hit probability long change (a change time of 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the change type counter CS1. The small hit probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated with the range of “160 to 198”. Furthermore, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 is out, the out-of-range certainty long change (the change time of 180 seconds (3 minutes)) is associated with the range of “0 to 159” as the value of the change type counter CS1. Out of the range of “160 to 198”, the probability variation short variation (variation time 3 seconds) is associated.

  Here, the relationship between the game content in the positive variation state in the second control example and the fluctuation time set in each of the above-described special views (special views 1 or 2) will be described. In the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 260, in the high probability state (120 times), the probability variation state in which the time reduction is given to the first 100 times is set, and in the high probability state When the number of special drawing lottery times exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot, a latency state in which time saving is not given is set.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, the sorting unit 660 is provided in the right hitting area, and by executing the right hitting game, balls alternate between the first right entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b. It is configured to enter the ball (see FIG. 258). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, as described above, the fluctuation time is set such that the lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can both be executed during the definite change state. Unlike the control example, a right-handed game can be performed while in a definite change state.

  That is, in the second control example, a game is executed in which a right-handed game is executed during a definite change state, and a ball is alternately entered into the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b. In order to be executed based on the fluctuation time in which the lottery of 1 and the special figure 2 is set, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is continuously set as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, It becomes possible to execute a lot of lottery (variation) based on the special figure 2 more than FIG. 1, and on the other hand, by setting the variation pattern of three minutes as the variation pattern of the special figure 2, Many lottery (variation) based on the special figure 1 will be performed.

  As described above, the game in which the player has a sense of tension is made different by changing the ratio in which the special figure fluctuation advantageous to the player (the special figure 2 fluctuation) is executed depending on the set fluctuation time. It becomes possible to carry out. In this control example, the variation time of the special figure 1 is configured with one type (10 seconds) and the variation time of the special figure 2 is configured with two types (3 seconds, 3 minutes), which is advantageous for the player The shortest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 2) is shorter than the shortest variation time of the special figure variation (variation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous for the player, and is advantageous for the player. The longest variation time of the figure variation (variation of the special figure 2) may be longer than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (the variation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous for the player. A plurality of types of fluctuation times may be set for the diagrams (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2).

  Furthermore, as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation of the special figure 1) which is disadvantageous to the player, with low probability (for example, only in the range of “1” as the value of fluctuation type counter CS1) A variation time (e.g., 5 minutes) longer than the longest variation time of the special figure variation (the variation of the special figure 2) on the advantageous side may be set. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a probability change state in which special figure fluctuations (variations in special figure 2) that are advantageous to the player are executed frequently, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, in the second control example, the fluctuation time of each special figure in the positive change state is set regardless of the number of balls held, but the fluctuation time is changed according to the number of balls held For example, the variation time of the special figure 2 that is advantageous to the player may be made longer as the number of holding balls decreases. As a result, in order to execute a lot of lottery of the special figure 2, it becomes possible to continue to execute the game (right-handed game) so that the number of holding balls always becomes the upper limit.

  In addition, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the drawing of the special drawing that is reserved and stored is determined, and in the state of being suspended and stored, the notification that suggests the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 It may be configured to execute the fluctuation time notification). In this case, for example, as the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the specific fluctuation type counter CS1 (for example, "10 to 30"), when the number of holding balls is small (for example, when the number of holding balls is 0 or 1) A long fluctuation time (for example, 3 minutes) is selected, and a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set when the number of holding balls is large (for example, when the number of holding balls is 2 or more) As described above, the player may be notified of the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “0 to 30” is held and stored as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 by notification of the prefetch fluctuation time. Thereby, the player can execute the game (right-handed game) more positively in order to prevent the special view 2 from fluctuating for a long time.

  Although the contents described above are executed for the special figure change (special figure 2 change) advantageous to the player, the special figure change (special figure 1) in which the same technical idea becomes disadvantageous to the player. (A) may be configured to execute. In addition, the number of pending storages referred to when changing the fluctuation time according to the number of pending storages may refer to a value obtained by adding the number of pending storages of Toku 1 and To 2 and the change is executed. You may make it refer only to the number of pending storages corresponding to the symbol classification (special figure 1 or special figure 2).

  In a definite change state, the special drawing lottery number (special figure fluctuation number) obtained by adding the drawing number of the special drawing 1 (variation number) and the drawing number of the special drawing 2 (variation number) is 100 without winning the jackpot. By exceeding the number of times, the gaming state is shifted from the definite change state to the latent state. The advantage in the latent state can be made different according to the fluctuation state of the special view 2 at the timing when the gaming state shifts to the latent state.

  Next, the contents of the latency confirmation table b202fb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 270 (b). FIG. 270 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the latent determination table b202fb4. The latency table b202fb4 has a variation time of the special figure 1 set shorter than the latency table 202f4 of the first control example described above, and the variation time of the special figure 2 is determined by the number of holding balls. It differs in the point to change and the point to which the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 was changed.

  Specifically, in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 is a hit (large hit), the short circuit fluctuation (fluctuation time 5 seconds) is specified, and when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 is out. , Out-of-short variation (variation time 5 seconds) is specified.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 is hit (big hit), the number of holding balls is 1, and the range of "0-198" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is associated with the short fluctuation A (variation time 1 second), and the number of holding balls is 0, 2 and 3 and the short fluctuation B (variation time 5 seconds) is correlated within the range of "0-198". . In addition, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 is a small hit, the number of holding balls is 1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0-198". ) Are associated, and the number of holding balls is 0, 2, 3 and the small hitting short fluctuation B (the fluctuation time of 5 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 198”. Furthermore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 is out, the short fluctuation A (1 second of fluctuation time) corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 out of the range of "0-198" regardless of the number of holding balls. It is attached.

  As described above, in the latency confirmation table b202fb4 referred to during the latency state, the timing at which the small hit is executed by setting a plurality of types of variation time of the special view 2 when the success / failure determination result is a small hit. It is possible to suppress the game (so-called, stop strike) of shooting a ball by aiming at the target.

  Furthermore, when the number of holding balls is large (the number of holding balls is 2 and 3), the set fluctuation time is longer than in the case where the number of holding balls is small (the number of holding balls is 1). This is because a large number of balls are entering the right first ball entrance 64b and the second ball entrance 1640b when the number of holding balls is large. The player is in a state of paying out enough prize balls. On the other hand, the state in which the number of balls held is small (the number of balls held 1) is a state in which the number of balls entering the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 1640b is small. Is not paid out.

  Therefore, when the number of holding balls is large (the number of holding balls is 2 and 3), each ball entry can be made by configuring the fluctuation time to be set longer than in the case where the number of holding balls is small (the number of holding balls is 1). It is possible to make the total number of winning balls equal to the sum of the number of winning balls paid out by the ball entering the ball and the number of winning balls paid out by the small hitting game. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to adjustment which is disadvantageous to the player (adjustment that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry hole), it is easy to obtain a winning ball by a small hit. Since it can, it can control that a player's motivation falls.

  Moreover, in this control example, when the number of holding balls in the special view 2 is 0, the same fluctuation time as in the case where the number of holding balls is large (number of holding balls 2, 3) is set. . This is for the player to shoot a ball at intervals and to suppress the game aiming at a short fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which it is difficult for a player to execute a malicious game to obtain a winning ball by a small hit.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery of the special slot 1 that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the lottery of the special symbol 1 that is disadvantageous is executed. Since the ball is configured to alternately enter the ball into the ball entrance 64b, it is further suppressed that the game intentionally aimed at the lottery of the special figure 2 in which the short fluctuation time is set is intentionally executed can do.

  In the second control example, two types of fluctuation time can be set according to the number of holding balls as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, but there is no limitation to this and a plurality of types of fluctuation time are variously set. It may be configured to be set under the following conditions. For example, different fluctuation times may be set for each holding ball number, or even if the same holding ball number is set, the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is divided to change You may set the time. In addition, a variation time may be set that differs only in a predetermined number of special drawing lotterys executed after the small hitting game is over. For example, after the small hitting game is over, until the drawing of the special drawing is performed three times, it is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation time set when winning in the small hitting is long. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an excessive number of prize balls being paid out when the lottery for winning the small hit is biased.

  Alternatively, a short change occurs when the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more) only during a predetermined period after the small hitting game is over (for example, a period until the drawing of special drawing is performed 3 times) A time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set. By this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to continuously execute the game. Furthermore, the variation time set in this case may be the same as the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game. As a result, when the player wins a small hit continuously, it is possible to vary the variable winning device 65 as if the player wins a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the second control example, the latency state can be set by configuring the frequency at which the small hitting game in the latent state is executed based on the number of balls held in the special figure 2 Although we are trying to equalize the number of award balls to be paid out during (the number of award balls based on entering the ball into each ball entry and the number of award balls based on the small hitting game), as other configurations, You may be comprised so that the fluctuation time of a common drawing lottery may be set based on the number of pending | holding memory. For example, when there are a large number of reserved memory of popular drawing lottery, it is easy for the ball to enter the sorting unit 660 (because it is easy for the ball to enter each ball entry), so that the fluctuation time of the common drawing lottery is lengthened In the case where the number of reserved memories of the common drawing lottery is small, it is preferable to set so that the fluctuation time of the common drawing lottery is short as compared to the case where there are many. This makes it possible to equalize the degree to which the balls enter the sorting unit 660, and as a result, the number of winning balls to be paid out during the latent state (the number of winning balls based on entering the ball into each ball entry) It is possible to make uniform the number of winning balls based on small hit games.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 271, the RAM 203 in the second control example deletes the second special symbol execution area 203b and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203p from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example (see FIG. 198). In addition, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd are added.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 ba is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1640 b (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 ba is set to zero, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added. On the other hand, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 ba is decremented by one every time when the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed. Similarly to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command.

  Similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball number storage area 203bb has one execution area and four holding areas. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203bb, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering to the second ball entrance 1640b (start winning) is stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of the 1st special symbol holding ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 1, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a big hit (S1332 in FIG. 281), and the special symbol variation process 2 (figure 2) 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). As a result of the reference, when it is set to ON, processing is performed to update the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special view 1 in the same manner as during fluctuation (S233 in FIG. 275). That is, while the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc to ON. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 277) is set to ON (S2801 in FIG. 277: Yes), it is set to OFF (S2803 in FIG. 277). In addition, although detailed explanation and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is the same process as the case of being a big hit even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit Is executed and set on.

  Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is the flag which shows the period which stops renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time of special figure 2, when it is set to on, renewal (subtraction) of fluctuation time is stopped, When it is set to off from the state set to on, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) whose lottery result is a big hit (S732 in FIG. 278), and the special symbol variation process 2 (figure 2) 275) (S232 in FIG. 275). The contents to be referred to in this processing are the same as those of the special view temporary stop flag 203 bc described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Then, if it is determined that the second special symbol variation in progress processing (see FIG. 280) is set to on (S2901 in FIG. 280: Yes), it is set to off (S2903 in FIG. 280).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272 (a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 272 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (a), the ROM 222 in the second control example partially compares the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b with the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (a)). It differs in the point which changed and the point which added the additional presentation selection table 222ba.

  Here, the screen display selection 2 table 222b in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 272 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the screen display selection 2 table 222b. The screen display selection 2 table 222b is configured to select different screen display types in the normal state and the probability change state with respect to the screen display selection table 222b in the first control example described above; The difference is that the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 272 (b), when the gaming state is the normal state, the display contents (screen display type) with respect to the combination in which the special view 1 standby flag 223s is off and the special view 2 standby flag 223t is on. As normal display is prescribed. In this normal display, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol are displayed in the normal mode (see FIG. 182 (b)) in the normal state. Display content. In the normal state, since the variable display based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is the main change, the main change can be reliably displayed by setting it to the normal display.

  A demonstration display A is associated with a combination in which the special view 1 wait flag 223s is on and the special view 2 wait flag 223t is off in the normal state. When this demonstration display A is determined, a demonstration display A screen (see FIG. 266 (a)) is set. After 30 seconds have passed since the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 which is the main fluctuation, the configuration is such that the display is switched to the demonstration display A screen (the customer waiting demonstration screen) regardless of whether or not the sub fluctuation is being executed. If the player enters the ball into the second entrance 1640b and the variable display for a long time is started, the predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses even if the player immediately quits playing the game. Later on, you can display the customer waiting demo screen. Therefore, since it can be easily understood that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform to other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen, the pachinko machine 10 can start the game. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Furthermore, in the demonstration display A screen, in particular, the special view 2 is variably displayed, so that in the small area Ds5 of the sub display area Ds, in order to make the player easily understand that it is a vacant platform. The word "playable" is displayed. Thus, the player can start playing the game more safely.

  In the normal state, a demonstration display B (see FIG. 266 (b)) is associated with a combination in which both the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t are off. This makes it possible to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 is a vacant platform for other players who have confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  Next, in a definite variation state, a combination of the special view 1 standby flag 223s on and the special view 2 standby flag 223t off, or a special view 1 standby flag 223s off and the special view 2 standby flag 223t on combination In each case, normal display is associated with each other. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example, a game in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed is executed in the definite variation state, the special figure standby flag (special figure 1 standby flag 223s) There is no case where the customer waiting demo screen is displayed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting flag 223t) is set to off. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In this way, it is determined whether each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is in the special figure fluctuation (whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the fluctuation of the special figure is stopped), and the respective judgment results, And by setting the screen display type on the basis of the currently set gaming state, a symbol type in which the player expects the lottery result according to the gaming state as in this second control example (special figure 1, special figure 2) to the pachinko machine 10 having a gaming property (the gaming property for changing the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) which substantially changes according to the gaming state) to change the game in the current gaming state It can be easily informed whether or not the variation (main variation) of the symbol type (special figure 1, special figure 2) expected by the person is being executed.

  A special display A (see FIG. 267 (a)) is associated with a combination in which both the special view 1 standby flag 223s and the special view 2 standby flag 223t are off in the positive change state. This makes it possible to suggest the current game situation to the player who has confirmed the customer waiting demonstration screen.

  In the latent state, the display contents (for the combination of the special view 1 wait flag 223s off and the special view 2 wait flag 223t on or the special view 1 wait flag 223s and the special view 2 wait flag 223t on) The special display B (FIG. 267 (b)) is defined as the screen display type). The special display B is displayed in a state in which the special figure 2 which is substantially changed in the latent state is not changing (the special figure 2 standby flag is set to ON).

  Next, the additional effect selection table 222ba in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222ba. In this additional effect selection table 222ba, an additional effect period (when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON and the update (subtraction) of the variation time of the special figure is stopped ( It is a table that is referred to when selecting the type (additional effect type) of the additional effect to be executed in FIG. 261), and the length of the period (the remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be performed and the acquired effect The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the counter 223h.

  Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time (period in which additional effect can be performed) is less than 2 seconds (period A) and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, the additional effect “None” is selected as the type (see FIG. 262A), and “additional effect A” is selected as the additional effect type in the case of “100 to 198” (see FIG. 262B).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which additional effect can be executed) is 2 seconds to 15 seconds (period B) and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", "as additional effect type" The additional effect B is selected (see FIG. 263 (a)), and in the case of "100 to 198", the "additional effect C" is selected as the additional effect type (see FIG. 263 (b)).

  When the remaining fluctuation time (period in which the additional effect can be executed) is 15 seconds or more (period C) and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, “additional effect type” as the additional effect type C "is selected (refer to FIG. 263 (b)), and in the case of" 100 to 198 "," additional effect D "is selected as an additional effect type (refer to FIG. 264).

  As described above, in this control example, since the additional effect to be executed is selected based on the length of the period (the remaining fluctuation time) in which the additional effect can be executed, for example, When the fluctuation time is short (when it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents of the effect to be executed by the additional effect), the additional effect (for example, the additional effect A) in which a part of the normal effect is changed is executed. In the case where the player does not give a sense of discomfort to the effect executed during the fluctuation time, and the remaining fluctuation time is long (when the content of the effect executed by the additional effect can be sufficiently grasped by the player) In addition, the additional effect (for example, the additional effect D) different from the normal effect can be executed to enhance the effect.

  Next, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example.

  As shown in FIG. 274, the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 199 (b)) in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ba and remaining fluctuation time information A storage area 223bb and an additional effect information storage area 223bc are added.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 223 ba is a counter updated based on the holding ball number command related to the second special symbol output from the main control unit 110, and the first special mentioned above in the first control example The only difference is that the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba is replaced with the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d instead of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d with respect to the symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and the other elements are the same Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb has information on the remaining period (remaining fluctuation time) of the currently set fluctuation pattern calculated when receiving the special view 1 or special view 2 temporary stop command from the main control device 110. An area for storing, and the stored information is referred to when selecting an additional effect to be executed after resumption of fluctuation.

  When the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb receives the special view temporary stop command or the special view 2 temporary stop command in the temporary stop related process (see FIG. 286) (S4901 in FIG. 286: Yes), the change pattern is The remaining fluctuation period is calculated (S4903 in FIG. 286), and the remaining fluctuation period information is set based on the length of the remaining fluctuation period (see S4907 to S4908 in FIG. 286). Then, in the fluctuation resumption processing (see FIG. 287), the special figure 1 fluctuation resumption command or the special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command is received (S5001 in FIG. 287: Yes), and it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not under execution. (S5002 in FIG. 287: No) is used to determine the additional effect type (S5003 in FIG. 287), and thereafter, the set remaining fluctuation period information is cleared (S5009 in FIG. 287).

  The additional effect information storage area 223 bc is an area for storing the determined additional effect type, and the additional effect is executed based on the stored additional effect type. In the additional effect information storage area 223bc, the determined additional effect type is set in the fluctuation restart process (see FIG. 287) (S5005, S5006 in FIG. 287), and is read out when setting the additional effect command for display. (S5007 in FIG. 287) is cleared thereafter (S5009 in FIG. 287).

<About control processing of main controller in second control example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 283. The control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 209) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above. (See FIG. 275), gaming state update processing (see FIG. 213) instead of gaming state update processing 2 (see FIG. 276), start winning processing (see FIG. 222) start winning processing 2 (see FIG. 282) The process is the same as the other processes except that the big hit end process 2 (FIG. 283) is executed instead of the big hit end process (see FIG. 230). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the second control example, in addition to the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 1) that is the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special figure) with respect to the first control example described above, One of the points that the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special figure 2) is also configured to be able to be stored on hold, and when the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are simultaneously changing, When the special drawing is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the other special drawing is interrupted, and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is resumed again after the end of the hit game based on the hitting of one special drawing. There is a major difference in the way they are configured.

  In addition, about the point which comprised the lottery of the special figure 2 on hold storage possible, and the control processing based on it, it is the same as the composition and control process which carries out the lottery storage of the special figure 1 described in the first control example mentioned above. Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S104). When the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit, and then (S231). If it is determined that the jackpot is medium or small (S231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203bc or the special view 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232) . In the process of S232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is being interrupted by the stop display of one special figure with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S232, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure temporarily stopped. The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (S233), that is, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed on the special figure in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted, and the main process Finish. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S231 that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined that the value of the special view 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S234: No), the first control example described above is selected. The same processing as the first special symbol variation start processing (S204) is executed, and thereafter, the processing proceeds to S238 where the variation processing relating to the special figure 2 is executed.

  In the process of S234, when it is determined that the value of the special view 1 fluctuation time timer 203s is larger than 0 (S234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S235) is executed. The first special symbol variation in-execution process (S235) is to execute the process in special figure 1 variation, and the detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the first special symbol variation in progress processing (S235) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (special figure 1 variation time timer 203s is 0) (S236), the variation time of If it is determined that it is the end timing (S236: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S238. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S236 that the end time of the fluctuation time is not reached (S236: No), the process of S237 is skipped and the process proceeds to S238.

  In the processes of S238 to S242, the same processes as S234 to S237 executed for the special figure 1 are executed. When the process of S238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 2 is in fluctuation) (S238), the special figure 2 fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203t is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is executed, and then this process is ended. This second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) is the addition of the subtraction process of the number of reserved memories with respect to the second special symbol variation start process 2 (see S217 in FIG. 215) described above, and the details Will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S238 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203t is larger than 0 (S238: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation in progress processing (S240) is executed. The second special symbol variation in-execution process (S240) is to execute the process in special figure 2 variation, and the detailed description thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the second special symbol variation under execution processing (S240) is finished, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of variation time (special figure 2 variation time timer 203t is 0) (S241), the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S241: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S241, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation time (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 276, contents of the game state update process 2 (S307) will be described. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 2 (S307). In this game state update process 2 (S307), when the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 0 and the value of the probability change counter 203k is 0, as opposed to the game state update process (see FIG. 213) of the first control example described above. The difference is that a configuration for setting a state command indicating a latent state when there is not is added. This is configured in the second control example so that the number of shorting times (100 times) set in the definite variation state is smaller than the number of times the definite variation state is set (120 times), and the special drawing in the definite variation state This is because the game state can be shifted from the probability change state to the latent state without winning the jackpot if the number of times of the lottery (variation) exceeds 100 times.

  When the game state update process 2 (S307) is executed, the same process as S601 to S608 of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) described above is first executed, and when the process of S608 is finished, the second It is determined whether the value of the counter 203g is 0 (S631), and if it is determined to be 0 (S631: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203k is 0 (S632). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203 k is not 0 (1 or more) (S 632: No), since it is a probability change state (that is, a latent state) in which the time saving game is not provided, the latent state Is set (S633), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S631, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203g is not 0 (S631: No), or when it is determined in the process of S632 that the value of the probability variation counter 203k is 0 (S632: Yes). ) Skips the process of S633 and ends the process as it is.

  Next, the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S235) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S235). In the first special symbol variation in-execution processing (S235), processing for resuming the subtraction when the subtraction of the variation time in Special Figure 1 is interrupted, and processing for subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation under-execution process (S235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state in which the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to on will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203 bc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is in a fluctuating state and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit (large hit or small hit). is there. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON, the large hit middle flag 203u is set to ON within the processing, so that the timer interrupt executed by the main control unit 110 every 2 milliseconds. When processing is looped and special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 275) is executed next time (after 2 milliseconds when special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set on), a big hit in the process of S231 Since it is determined that there is a first special symbol variation in progress processing (S235) is not executed. And a big hit game (or small hit game) is over, and it is determined that it is not a big hit (or a small hit) in the process of S231, and the first special symbol variation execution process (S235) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation in-progress processing (S235) is executed with the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc set to ON is a big hit (or small hit) game. It is configured to end at the timing to resume the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, which has been interrupted the subtraction of the fluctuation time.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set to ON (S2801: Yes), next, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S2802), the special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203bc is set to off (S2803), and the process shifts to S2804. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is not set on (is set off) in the process of S2801 (S2801: No), the process of S2802 and S2803 is skipped and S2804 is performed. Move to the process of

  In the process of S2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer (special figure 1 fluctuation timer) 203s is decremented by 1 and updated (S2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S237) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 in FIG. 275) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S237). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S 237) is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process of the first control example (FIG. 214) ), When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, instead of the constitution of forcibly stopping the variation of the special figure 2, the variation of the special figure 2 is interrupted (the subtraction of the variation time is interrupted) The difference is that they are provided.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 237) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit (S 731) and it is not a big hit (S731: No), the same processing as S709 and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S731, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S731: Yes), next, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set on (S732), and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is on. The special figure 2 temporary stop command which shows having set is set (S733). Then, the same processing as S706 and S708 of the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 214) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is ended.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239). In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), a process for starting the variation of the special view 2 is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation start process 2 (S239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on (S831), and when it is determined that it is set to on (S831) : Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation start process 2 (figure in the same process as the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON in the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 237 in FIG. 278) When S239) of 279 is performed, all the various processes performed in the 2nd special symbol variation start process 2 (S239 of FIG. 279) are skipped, and this process is complete | finished. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the variation of the special figure 2 is started at the same time (within the same process) as the timing when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the hit.

  In the process of S831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S831: No), next, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba Value (N2) is acquired (S832), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is a value larger than 0 (S833). In the processing of S833, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba is larger than 0 (S833: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba We subtract 1 (S 834) and set pending ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of pending ball number command which shows value (N2) of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203 ba after subtraction (S835).

  The holding ball number command set here is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 227) as in the first control example described above. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203 ba is extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is used as the second special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 223 Store in 223 ba. As described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223 ba according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the second special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203ba.

  When the process of S 835 ends, next, the data of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203 bb is shifted to the previous data (S 836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on.

  When the process of S836 ends, next, the same process as S804 to S807 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S207 of FIG. 215) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is ended. Also, in the process of S833, even when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203ba is 0 (S833: No), the second special symbol variation start of the first control example described above is started The same processing as S808 to S810 in the processing (see S207 in FIG. 215) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) executed in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 of FIG. 275) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240). In the second special symbol variation in-progress process (S240), when the subtraction of the variation time in the special figure 2 is interrupted, the process of resuming the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation under-execution process (S240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special view 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to on will be briefly described. As described above, the special view 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON when the special view 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the hit (large hit) while the special view 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the large hit middle flag 203u is set to ON within the processing, so the timer interrupt executed by the main control unit 110 every 2 ms. When processing is looped and special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 275) is executed next time (after 2 milliseconds when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set on), a big hit in the process of S231 Since it is determined that there is a second special symbol variation in progress processing (S240) is not performed. Then, the jackpot game is over, and it is determined that the jackpot is not in the process of S231, whereby the second special symbol variation in-execution processing (S240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-progress processing (S240) is executed while the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON, the jackpot game is over, and the variation time is It is configured to be the timing to resume the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which had been interrupted for the subtraction of.

  Referring back to FIG. 280, the description will be continued. In the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set to ON (S2901: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is set (S2902), the special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203bd is set to off (S2903), and the process shifts to S2904. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is not set to on (is set to off) in the process of S2901 (S2901: No), the process of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904. Move to the process of

  In the process of S2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer (special figure 2 fluctuation timer) 203t is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2805), and this process is ended.

  Next, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 242) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S242). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S 242) is to execute the process when stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and the second special symbol variation stop process of the first control example described above (FIG. 220) For the reference), when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is interrupted instead of the constitution for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (the subtraction of the fluctuation time is interrupted) It differs in the point which provided the composition, and the point which added the processing performed when the lottery result of special figure 2 is a small hit.

  When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S242) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (S1331), not a big hit (it is a loss) When it is determined that (S1331: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (S1334). In the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (S1334: No), the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1334, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S1334: Yes), a small hit stop process is next executed (S1335). In this small hitting stop process, the same process as S1402 to S1406 in the special figure 2 off stop process (see S1304 in FIG. 221) of the first control example described above is executed. When this small hitting stop process (S1335) is finished, the same process as S1310 and S1311 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 220) of the first control example described above is executed, and this process is ended.

  In the process of S1331, when it is determined that it is a big hit (S1331: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set on (S1332) and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set on The special figure 1 temporary stop command shown is set (S1333). And the same processing as S1307-1311 of the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing (Drawing 220) of the 1st control example mentioned above is performed, and this processing is ended.

  Next, the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 (S105). The start winning process 2 (S105) is different from the process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 222) in the case where the ball enters the second entrance 1640b (enters the ball). There is a difference in points. Specifically, since the second control example is configured to be able to reserve and store the drawing of the special figure 2, the second special symbol holding ball when the ball is won (entered) at the second entrance 1640b. A process of adding the value (N2) of the number counter 203ba is executed.

  In the processing when the ball enters the second entrance 1640b, the ball wins (enters) the first entrance in the start winning process (see FIG. 222) of the first control example described above. The process to be executed in this case is different only in that the target of the process is changed from the special view 1 to the special view 2, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2112) will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 2 (S2112). This jackpot end process 2 (S2112) is different from the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) of the first control example described above only in that the value set in the time saving counter 203g is changed from 120 to 100, and others Since the process of is the same, the detailed description is omitted. As a result, in the second control example, since the number of time reductions (100 times) set when the gaming state is the definite change state is smaller than the number of times the definite change state is set (120 times), in the positive change state When the drawing (variation) of the special drawing exceeds 100 times, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to the latent state.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 287. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is a command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The processing is different in that (S4111 in FIG. 284) is executed, and the other processing is executed. Specifically, a process to be performed when various commands output by changing the control content to be executed by the main control device 110 from the first control example is received is added.

  Here, contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4111). This command determination process 2 (S4111) is a process that is executed when the remaining certainty number change command or the remaining short time number command is received with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above, and temporary stop A process to be executed when an associated command is received is added.

  When command determination process 2 (S4111) is executed, first, the same process as S4301 to S4317 in the command determination process (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is executed. When it is determined in the process of S4317 that the remaining certainty number change command or the remaining short time number command has been received (S4317: Yes), next, the remaining number updating process 2 (S4318) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 285, the contents of the remaining number updating process 2 (S4318) will be described. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing the contents of the remaining number updating process 2 (S4318). When the remaining number updating process 2 (S4318) is executed, the same process as S4651 and S4652 in the remaining number updating process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above is performed, and the process of S4652 is completed. The same processes as S4661 and S4662 in the remaining number updating process (see FIG. 242) of the first control example described above are executed. That is, only the process of updating the information of the remaining probability variation area 223o and the effect probability variation area 223q to information corresponding to the value of the remaining certainty number change command or the remaining short time number command output from the main control device 110 is executed. Also in the second control example, the remaining number of times updating process (see FIG. 242) similar to the first control example described above may be executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 284, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4317 that the remaining certainty number command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (S4317: No), it is next determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received (S4331). Here, as the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set ON and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set ON The special figure 2 temporary stop command output to the special figure 1, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command output when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203bc is set off, and the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203bd is set off There is a special figure 2 fluctuation resumption command that is output in the case of

  In the process of S4331, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received (S4331: Yes), next, the temporary stop related process is executed (S4332), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4331 that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4331: No), the same process as S4319 in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above is executed. And the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332) will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4332). In this temporary stop related process (S4332), a process for determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received, When the second variation restart command is received, a process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  If temporary stop related processing (S4332) is executed, it is first determined whether a special view temporary stop command or a special view temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is not received (S4901) (No), shift to S4902 and execute fluctuation restart processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4901 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation period of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903 ). Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation period calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904). If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb A period A indicating that the period is short is set (S4905), and the process shifts to the processing of S4902.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), it is then determined whether the remaining fluctuation period is less than 15 seconds ( S4906), when it is determined that it is less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating a normal remaining fluctuation period is set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb (S4907), and the processing of S4902 is performed. Transition.

  In the process of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period is not less than 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S4906: No), a period C indicating the remaining fluctuation period is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb The setting is made (S4908), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4902. As described above, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special drawing fluctuation is resumed is calculated at the timing when the special drawing fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special drawing fluctuation time is interrupted) By setting the information to be performed, it is possible to execute an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation period without delay at the timing of resuming the special figure fluctuation.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation resumption process (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation resumption processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received.

  When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, first, it is judged whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), and when it is judged that it is not received (S5001: No ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5001 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001), next, it is judged whether the fluctuation effect is currently being executed (S5002) . In the process of S5002, the fluctuation effect performed for the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation (for example, 30 seconds) according to the execution of the special drawing fluctuation suspends the special drawing fluctuation (suspends the subtraction of the special drawing fluctuation time). When the special figure fluctuation is resumed after the end of the winning game, it is determined whether or not the state is not completed.

  If it is determined in the process of S5002 that a variable effect is being executed (S5002: Yes), an additional effect A is set in the additional effect information storage area (S5006), and the process proceeds to S5007. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5002 that the fluctuation effect is not being executed (S5002: No), the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb is read out next (S5003) The additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222ba based on the read remaining fluctuation time information and the effect counter 223h (S5004), and the determined additional effect type is set (stored) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc (S5005).

  Then, when the process of S5005 or S5006 is finished, the additional effect type stored (set) in the additional effect information storage area 223bc is read (S5007), and the additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect week is set Then (S5008), the information set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223bb and the additional effect information storage area 223bc is cleared (S5009), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the second control example, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is performed after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is ended. In the period until the resumption of the second symbol is performed, the swing effect for displaying the third symbol is displayed, and when the special figure change is resumed, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after the restart is Although it is configured to execute, other configurations may be used.

  For example, there is provided an effect period determination means for determining a normal effect period in which a normal effect is executed, and when the effect period determination means determines that the normal effect period is over, the additional effect is executed. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously performed, so it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. Moreover, in this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after resumption, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Or, a swing effect may be performed to swing and display the third symbol. Furthermore, an error period determination means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determination means determines that the error period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the second control example described above, one special figure fluctuation (for example, special figure 2) stops and is displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, and the other special figure fluctuation (for example, special figure 1) is interrupted (special In the case where the subtraction of the figure fluctuation time is interrupted), the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation has already been completed when the other special figure fluctuation is resumed (figure 261), for example, the case where the normal effect corresponding to the other special figure fluctuation is not finished when the other special figure fluctuation is resumed will be described with reference to FIG. 288.

  FIG. 288 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of each special figure fluctuation, and the third symbol display device 81 executes effect display (effect display using the third symbol) based on the fluctuation of the special figure 1 In the definite change state, the change (10 seconds) of the special figure 1 and the change (3 seconds) of the special figure 2 are simultaneously executed, and among them, the flow when the special figure 2 is won for the small hit is shown.

  The example shown in FIG. 288 shows the case where the normal effect (normal effect period of 10 seconds) performed by the third symbol display device 81 is not completed at the time when the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed. In such a case, if the additional effect is executed at the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed, the additional effect will be executed before the normal effect is completed, and the effect of giving the player an uncomfortable feeling is The problem of being executed occurs. In order to solve such a problem, in the example shown in FIG. 288, the additional effect is performed after the normal effect is completed, instead of executing the additional effect at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed. It is composed of Thus, by setting the timing at which the additional effect is executed not to the special view 1 fluctuation restart timing but to the normal effect end timing, the normal effect and the additional effect can be performed without discomfort, and the player's willingness to play the game Can be controlled.

  In this case, remaining period determining means for determining the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) after resumption when special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted, and interruption period judging means for determining a period during which special figure 1 fluctuation is interrupted If it is determined that it is the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed by the restart judgment means for judging that the special drawing 1 fluctuation has been resumed and the restart judgment means, it is determined whether the normal effect is being executed or not If it is determined that the normal effect is not executed (already ended) by the presentation status determination means, the remaining period determined by the remaining period determination means If it is determined that the additional effect execution means corresponding to the additional effect is executed and the normal effect is being executed, the additional effect execution is made to wait until it is determined that the normal effect is ended by the effect status determination means Waiting for additional effects And means, may the provision. By configuring in this way, based on the timing at which the special figure 1 fluctuation is resumed and the end timing of the normal effect on the special figure 1 fluctuation, the timing at which the additional effect is executed ( The appropriate timing can be set as time), and an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort can be provided.

  In the second control example, the distribution unit 660 is provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 so that the special-figure 1 fluctuation and the special-figure 2 fluctuation are executed at the time of right-handling game, Similarly, other configurations may be used as the board configuration of the game board 13 on which special figure 1 variation and special figure 2 variation are executed at the time of right-handed game, for example, even using a configuration as shown in FIG. good.

  Here, referring to FIG. 289, another example of the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic view schematically showing a board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to another example of the second control example. In another example of the second control example, a second entrance 1640 and a second entrance are substituted for the distribution unit 660 with respect to the board configuration (see FIG. 258) of the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example described above. The difference is that the electric prize 1640a attached to the mouth is provided, and the variable winning device 65 is moved from the area at the lower center of the game board to the lower area of the right-handed area, and the other configuration is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configuration, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 289, in the pachinko machine 10 of this another example, the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 is provided so that the ball launched by the right-handed game can enter the ball. There is. By configuring in this manner, the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed in the gaming state (probable change state or latent state) in which the right-handed game is executed. Also, as with the sorting unit 660 of the second control example described above, the ball entry (right first ball entry 64b) where the drawing (variation) of the special drawing 1 is executed and the drawing (variation) of the special drawing 2 are performed. The ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640 because there is no mechanism for distributing the balls so that the balls alternately enter the ball entrance (second ball entrance 1640b) to be The proportion of balls can be random. As described above, in the second control example, the degree of advantage with respect to the player is made different between the drawing of the special drawing 1 and the drawing of the special drawing 2; The player can be made to pay attention to whether the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced. Further, for example, a nail implanted in the game board 13 is used for the proportion of the balls shot in the right-handed game to flow down (roll) toward the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1640. Since the change can be made by adjusting, it is possible to easily adjust the ratio of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation to be executed during the right-handed game.

  As described above, in the second control example, the number (100) of setting the time saving state is smaller than the number of times (120) in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the probability variation state As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for transition to the latent state that is advantageous to the player, and to increase the player's willingness to play. Further, since the lottery based on the special view 1 and the lottery based on the special view 2 can be executed in the latent state, it is possible to suppress a state in which the player is excessively advantageous in the latent state.

  In this second control example, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) is hit (big hit or small hit), and the symbol indicating the lottery result of that hit is stopped and displayed (( Stop the measurement (count) of the fluctuation time for the fluctuation of the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) at the timing when the hit is decided, and the timing when the hit game is ended based on the lottery result of one special symbol ( At the timing when the variation of the special symbol becomes possible, it is configured to restart the measurement (count) of the variation time for the variation of the other special symbol being interrupted.

  Here, when special figure fluctuation is interrupted (measurement of special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), fluctuation indication (or effect indication) of the 3rd design which is executed with 3rd symbol display device 81 is executed continuously In the case, the suspended special figure fluctuation is resumed, and the timing at which the restarted special figure fluctuation ends and the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is ended. There is a problem that an error for a predetermined period (a suspension period of the special figure fluctuation) is generated between the timing of

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the timing when the resumed special figure fluctuation ends and the timing when the fluctuation display (or effect display) of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 ends. When an error corresponding to a predetermined period (interruption period of the special figure fluctuation) occurs in と, an additional effect (specific effect) is configured to be executable using the error period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

<Third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 290 to 303, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the contents of the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81 are made different during the latent state. Specifically, the player is awarded a point that changed the display control of the remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the main area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and winning (big hit or small hit) in the latent condition It differs in the point which added the production display performed at the time of having performed, and the point which changed the other production display so that it might correspond to the contents of two points mentioned above.

  In the first control example described above, when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set), the same number as the internally-set number of probability variations (120 times) is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 The number of times of probability variation which is internally set each time special figure variation is executed (hereinafter referred to as the number of substantial variation of remaining probability) and the number of remaining times for effect display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 Hereinafter, it is configured to update (subtract) the effect residual variation number). In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping whether the real remaining probability change number has been set again during the latent state, the player has won the jackpot which has been set again or the small hit whose actual remaining probability change number has not been set. If the player wins the jackpot (small win or small win) during the definite state, it is configured to be able to execute the effect of returning the number of effect residual variations to the initial value (120 times) and the effect of not returning it. The number of times is different, and the player is expected to have a sense of expectation until the end. Then, when the number of residual effects is "0" while the number of residual residuals is different from the number of residual effects (for example, the number of residual residuals is "0" and the number of actual residual deviations is "10"). In the case of “1”, the resurrection effect (see FIG. 189) is executed, and the number of times (“10 times”) corresponding to the actual remaining certainty change number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. As a result, even when the number display displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is "0", it is possible to expect the player to continue the latent state.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the number of times is smaller than the internally set number of times of probability variation (120 times) when the latent state is entered (the latent state is set). (For example, "100 times") is configured to be displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to differentiate between the actual remaining probability change number and the rendering residual probability change number when the latent state is set (it is possible to display the rendering residual probability change number less than the actual residual probability change number). In the state, it is possible to easily perform the effect of adding the number of remaining effects of the effect. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, the remaining number of times is performed each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the number of actual residual variation is subtracted). Although the number of effect remaining confirmed variations displayed in the display area D1 is reduced, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) which is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed In this case, the number of remaining effects may not be subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, the number of effect remaining certainty variations displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is displayed smaller than the number of substantial remaining certainty variations at the timing of starting the latent condition (the timing when the latent condition is set). As a result, even if the number of effect remaining definite variations is not subtracted from the fluctuation of the special figure (special image 1) which is not advantageous to the player, a situation may occur where the number of effect remaining probability variations is greater than the actual number of remaining probability variations. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the third control example, the jackpot game when the real remaining probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special drawing and the jackpot result of the jackpot game and special drawing as the lottery result of the special drawing Perform an additional effect to add the predetermined number (for example, 5 times to 40 times) of the effect remaining certainty variation number during the small hitting game when the small hitting is not set to the initial value (120 times). It is composed of Thereby, when the hit game (game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) is executed during the latent state, whether or not the actual number of probability variations is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent state) It is possible to further suppress the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won).

  Further, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of substantial probability variations and the number of residual production variations that occur when the special figure big win is won during the latent status. In order to make up for the difference between the above and the other, it is configured to execute an additional effect that adds the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as a special figure variation effect during the latent state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of residual production variations at various timings during the latent status, whether or not the actual number of probable variations has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent status (latency status) It is possible to further suppress the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won).

  Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of addition displayed in the additional effect performed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during winning game execution) (the remaining number of effect variation numbers displayed in the remaining number display area D1) Is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual number of positive variations and the number of residual production variations (see FIG. 290). In this way, when the number of remaining effect variation is added greatly by the additional effect, it is considered that the player is elected to the special figure jackpot whose actual number of probability variations is initial (120 times) during the latent condition. While being able to become, it is possible to suppress the fact that the effect remaining certainty variation number becomes “0 times” in a state where the actual certain variation number and the effect remaining certain variation number largely deviate.

  Further, in the first control example described above, a hit game (for example, a jackpot game out of a big hit game) is made during the latent state so that the player is not made to know that he or she won the big hit or the small hit in the latent state. Even if a big hit game or a small hit game) is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to execute an effect display indicating a hit game, and the actual number of probable variations is initially set at any timing during the latent state. It was configured to make it difficult to identify whether a jackpot set to the value (120 times) was won.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a hit game (big hit game or small) to be executed when winning in a latent state (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game with a small number of payouts among big hit games) The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute display based on the fact that the ball has won the variable winning device 65 as a hit effect to be executed during the hit game) (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the hit game will be executed during the latent state. And, although this will be described in detail as a hit effect to be executed during the hit game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, it is paid out when a ball enters the variable winning device 65) In the display mode for displaying the number of winning balls, the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different between when the big hit game is being performed and when the small hit game is being performed. . As a result, even if the player wins a jackpot having a large number of balls to be awarded to the variable winning device 65 in one winning game rather than a small hitting game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is small hitting It becomes possible to do in the same way as the hit effect corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing the player that the hit game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner (indication), it is notable to inform the player whether the game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectation until the end.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration in that the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The content of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example It is a point that About other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 290, in the third control example, the actual remaining probability change number set in the latent state of pachinko machine 10 and the remaining effect number displayed in remaining number display area D1 of third symbol display device 81 Explain the transition of the number of definite variations. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the flow in the latent state in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 290, when the jackpot game in which the jackpot B or jackpot D is won is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, "120 times" in the actual remaining probability variation number at the end timing of the jackpot game (during the ending). Is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays “100 times” as the effect remaining probability change number in the remaining number display area D1 and a display indicating transition to the latent state (FIG. 291 (see)). .

  Then, when the game in the latent state is started, the number of actual remaining certainty variations and the number of effect remaining certainty variations are decremented "one time" every time the special figure variation is executed. In the present control example, the number of actual remaining probability changes and the number of residual effect changes are subtracted at the timing when special drawing fluctuation is started as in the first control example, so the first special drawing fluctuation in the latent state is executed. In the meantime, “99 times” is displayed as the effect remaining probability change number in the remaining number display area D1.

  After that, the special figure fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed, and when it wins the small hit in the 14th special figure fluctuation in the latent state (the special figure fluctuation in which “86th time” is displayed as the production residual certain number of changes) The small hit game is started while maintaining the number of definite variations “106 times”. If extra effect A (effect of adding “five times” to the value of the effect remaining probability variation number (addition)) is executed as effect display on the third symbol display device 81 during this small hit game, the remaining number of times The value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the display area D1 is added and displayed from the "86th" to the "91st" (see FIG. 291 (b)). In this way, during the winning game (small hitting game) which is executed when winning (per small winning) when the actual remaining certain number of changes is not changed (not reset), the value of the number of remaining effects of positive effect By executing the effect to be added (superimposed effect), it is possible to make the player expect that the actual remaining probability variation number has been reset by the current hit game.

  Then, when the small hitting game is over, special figure fluctuation in the latent state (special figure fluctuation in which the number of substantial remaining definite variations "105 times" and the number of effect residual certainty variations "90" correspond to each other continues to be started. Next, the timing when the jackpot game is started when the jackpot is won by the special figure fluctuation in which the actual residual certainty change number is "30 times" (the special figure fluctuation in which the effect residual certainty change number is "15 times") Is set to "0 times". In addition, it is comprised so that the content which shows "15 times" may be displayed continuously, without being set to "0 times", for the effect remaining probability change number displayed on the remaining frequency display area D1. When shifting to the latent state again after the end of the big hit game, "120 times" is reset as the actual remaining probability change number at the timing when the big hit game is ended. In addition, during the big hit game, as in the small hit game, the additional effect is executed as the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the additional effect C (the number of remaining effects of the effect is “20 When the effect of adding “over” is executed, the value of the effect remaining certainty change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from “15 times” to “35 times”.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, regardless of the type (large hit or small hit) of the win, the addition is performed based on the difference value between the actual remaining probability change number and the presentation residual probability change number and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. The number of additions (the number of additions) displayed in the effect is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether the current hit game was a small hit game or a big hit game by the contents of the additional effect executed during the hit game.

  Next, when the jackpot game is over, the special feature variation (substantial remaining probability variation number “119”) in the latent condition is started. The additional effect D is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and the value of the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is added and displayed from "34 times" to "74 times". As described above, in the third control example, the effect is executed to add (add) the value of the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 even during the special figure variation in the latent state. It is difficult for the player to predict the number of actual residual probability changes, and it is possible to play the game while expecting how long the latent state will continue.

  In addition, by making it possible to execute additional effects even during the special figure fluctuation, the value of the effect remaining probability number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the winning state, during the winning game or during the special figure fluctuation Can be added (added). Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of times of performing the additional effect, so even if the value between the actual residual certainty variation number and the effect residual certainty variation number largely deviates (when the difference value is large), the player feels discomfort. The value can be made easy to converge without giving it. Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of additions (the number of additions) to be displayed in the addition effect is determined based on the difference value between the values of the actual remaining probability variation number and the presentation residual probability variation number. As the difference between the values of the actual residual certainty change number and the effect residual definite change number is larger, the effect residual number is more (additional). Therefore, the value is calculated without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. It can be made easier to converge.

  Then, the additional effect (the additional effect B) is executed again at the next change when the additional effect D is executed and the value of the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining frequency display area D1 becomes "74 times", and the substance is substantially The number of remaining certainty variations is "118 times" and the number of remaining certainty variations is "83 times". After that, when the variation in which the effect residual probability change number is "one" is finished without winning in the winning, the effect residual probability change number "???" in the remaining number display area D1 as the final effect display, the actual residual probability change number It is displayed continuously until it reaches "0 times". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute the game in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player even when the actual residual certainty change number and the effect residual certainty change number do not finally coincide with each other.

  Although the third control example uses a configuration in which “???” is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the final effect display, as in the first control example described above, the value of the effect remaining number of times of variation The value of the actual remaining certainty number may be displayed in the remaining number display area D1 when “0” is displayed (“35 times” is displayed in the example of FIG. 290). Further, the additional effect may be forcedly executed based on the value of the number of actual remaining probability variations when the value of the effect residual certain number of variations is “0 times”. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play the latent state with confidence to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291 and FIG. 292, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regarding the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is in the latent state will be described. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 291 (a), the jackpot end screen when the gaming state shifts to the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the big hit end screen. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit ends (when the V wins in the big hit transitioning to the latent state by winning V during the big hit game) The remaining number display area D1 is provided in the upper left area of the big hit end screen, and “100 times” is displayed as the effect remaining number of confirmed variations (see point A in FIG. 290). Then, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, the characters “RUSH rush” notifying that transition to the latent state is made, and the character 811 imitating a rabbit used for display in the latent state transition to the latent state It is displayed in the display mode to congratulate you. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit game is over.

  In the third control example, the display described above is executed on the big hit end screen, but the above display is performed when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the latent state after the big hit ends. You may configure it. In addition, the jackpot game is not a configuration in which a probability change state is given after the jackpot game is finished by winning V during the jackpot game like the pachinko machine 10 used in the third control example, but the jackpot game is ended by jackpot type You may use the structure to which a positive change state is provided later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 291 (b), the display screen during the hit game (in the small hit game) in the latent state will be described. FIG. 291 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen during a hit game. As shown in FIG. 291 (b), during the latent state, even when a small hit game or a big hit game is executed, the effect that the character 811 moves from the screen left direction to the right direction continues similarly to the special figure change. To be executed. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs across the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time the "treasure box" is opened, the value of the effect remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from inside is added (added) The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed ("5 times" in FIG. 291 (b)), and the value of the effect remaining number of variations is added "5 times" and "95 times" is displayed (FIG. 290) Point B). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value ("5 times") of the effect remaining probability variation number added by the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

  As described above, in the third control example, the additional effect performed during the latent state is performed using a part of the effect (effect for moving the character 811) constantly performed during the latent state. This is effective in that it is possible to add (add) the value ("5 times") of the effect remaining probability variation number without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  FIG. 292 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the content displayed when the additional effect D (see the point D in FIG. 290) is executed during the special figure fluctuation in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 292 (a), during the special figure change, an effect is performed in which the character 811 moves from the left direction of the screen to the right direction. Then, when the additional effect is executed, the character 811 runs across the side of the "treasure box" and at the same time the "treasure box" is opened, the value of the effect remaining number of effects displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from inside is added (added) The display mode corresponding to the value to be displayed is displayed ("40 times" in FIG. 292 (a)), and the value of the number of remaining performance confirmation variations is "40 times" and "74 times" is displayed (FIG. 290). Point D)). In addition, in the display area D4 provided below the main display area, the value (“40 times”) of the effect remaining probability variation number added by the current additional effect is displayed in characters.

  As described above, as described in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a), the value of the effect remaining certainty change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 during the hit game and the special figure change during the latent state. An additional effect to be added (added) is executed. Then, since the additional effect to be executed during the winning game and the additional effect to be executed during the special figure change are executed in the same effect mode, it is currently in the process of being hit by the additional effect being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether it is changing.

  In addition, since the display form of the value is made to differ according to the value of the effect remaining probability variation number to be added (added) by the addition effect (“+5” display form of FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 292 (a ) And the player can visually notify the player of the effect of the additional effect. In addition, you may perform the production | presentation display which suggests the value of the effect residual number of times of effect variation added by addition effect (addition), for example, the value of the effect residual number of times of effect variation added by addition effect (addition) is stored The display form of the "treasure box" may be changed according to the added value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292 (b), the final effect performed during the latent state will be described. FIG. 292 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the final effect in the latent state. This final effect is performed when the value of the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 becomes "0 times" while the value of the actual remaining certainty variation number is larger than "0 times" That is, it is an effect that “???” is displayed as the value of the number of remaining effect probability variations until the remaining number of remaining residual coefficient variations is digested. As a result, even if the values of the actual residual certainty change number and the effect residual certainty change number are different, it is possible to execute the effect in the latent state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Further, while the final effect is being performed, an effect that the character 811 is chased by the rock 813 is performed as an effect that suggests that the latent state is finished in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to visually indicate to the player the possibility that the latent state will end, and to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player. Furthermore, "Pinch" is displayed in the display area D4 as a character indicating that the latent state is over.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the display content during the latency state per game in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 293 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the hit effect in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 293, when the hit game is executed during the latent state and the ball is won in the variable winning device 65, the ball is displayed on the variable winning device 65 in the prize display mode 815 indicating that the ball is won. Ru. This winning display mode 815 moves from the lower right side (see 815 c in FIG. 293) of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to the left through the upper center (see 815 b in FIG. 293) In this state, the display is stopped (see 815a in FIG. 293). A value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 receives a ball is displayed in the winning display mode 815, and the variable winning device 65 is displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the ball has won a prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the prize.

  In addition, when a plurality of balls win a prize in the variable winning device 65 in one winning game and the prize display mode 815 is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of winning displays until one winning game is completed. A mode 815 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, you may use the structure of that other than that as a display method of the prize display aspect 815, for example, you may display, without making the prize display aspect 815 stop display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the display of the winning display mode 815 is not executed corresponding to all the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the winning game, but the type of the winning game (big hit game or small hit game And to determine whether to display the winning display mode 815 based on the winning number information in the winning game, and to display the winning display mode 815 when it is determined to display the winning display mode 815 Configured. By configuring in this way, even when the ease of winning a ball to the variable winning device 65 is different depending on the type of winning game (when the variable winning device 65 is open for different periods of time) Even in the game, it is possible to adjust the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the game is performed according to the number of winning display modes 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the person from grasping the type of the hit game (big hit game or small hit game).

  In this control example, a value ("15" in this control example) corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 wins a ball is displayed as a winning display mode. For example, a value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out when the variable winning device 65 has won a ball may be divided into a plurality of parts (for example, “10” and “5”) and displayed. As a result, it is possible to set the number of times the winning display mode 815 is displayed in a plurality of patterns with respect to the number of winning balls on the variable winning device 65. In addition, even in the case of having a variable winning device in which the number of winning balls to be paid out when winning a prize is different, the player separately hits the type of the game by separately displaying a value corresponding to the number of winning balls to be paid out. It is possible to suppress grasping (big hit game or small hit game). Further, the period until the winning display mode 815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be varied depending on the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a hit type (for example, 15R) in which many winnings can be expected, the winning display mode 815 is the third symbol than the hit type (for example, 7R) in which the winning is smaller than that. It is preferable to set so that the period until it is displayed on the display device 81 becomes long. Thereby, even if the winning type display mode 815 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a case where the hit type is determined, it is possible to extend the time period until the determination is made. Even in this case, it is preferable to display the winning display mode 815 at the same timing for the gaming ball that has won first.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 294 (a), the ROM 222 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an additional effect table 222ca and a prize effect table 222cb are added. Do.

  First, the details of the additional effect table 222ca in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (a). FIG. 295 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the additional effect table 222ca in the present control example. The additional effect table 222 ca is a table to be referred to when determining the type of additional effect to be executed during the latent state, and is obtained as a difference value indicating the difference between the actual residual probability change and the residual effect probability number The type of additional effect is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. This additional effect is an effect of adding (adding) the value of the effect remaining probability variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display area during the latent state, and the value differs for each type of additional effect (The value to be added (added)) is set.

  When it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability change number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability change number in the special effect 2 variation setting process (see FIG. 299) during the latent state (FIG. 299) S5103: Yes), and when the normal ending command is received during the latent state (see S5218 in FIG. 300), reference is made.

  As shown in FIG. 295 (a), the additional effect table 222ca in the present control example is set so that the additional effect type selected in accordance with the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is different. It is done. Specifically, when the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability number of changes and the value of the remaining effect number of effects is "1 to 40" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional effect is executed. If the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 179", the additional effect A (the number of additions + 5) is set as the additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "180 to 198", an additional effect B (the number of additions + 5 times) is set as the additional effect.

  When the difference value between the value of the actual residual certainty variation number and the value of the residual effect variation number is "41 to 80" and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 49", the additional effect is not executed, and the effect is When the value of the counter 223f is "50 to 149", an additional effect A (the number of additions + 5) is set as an additional effect. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", an additional effect B (the number of additions + 5 times) is set as an additional effect.

  Furthermore, when the difference value between the value of the actual residual certainty variation number and the value of the residual effect variation number is "81 or more", and the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 99", the additional effect C is added as an additional effect. The number of times +20) is set. When the value of the effect counter 223f is "100 to 198", an additional effect D (the number of additions + 40) is set as an additional effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the presentation residual probability variation number is calculated, and the type of additional effect is selected based on the calculated difference value. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the additional effect suitable for the display condition of the effect remaining number of variations of the latent state. In addition, since the additional effect is more easily set as the difference value between the value of the actual residual certainty change number and the value of the effect residual definite change number is larger, the value of the actual residual certainty change frequency and the value of the effect residual definite change number are large. If there is a divergence (if the difference value becomes large), the difference can be made easy to converge. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the effect display of the latent state by the fact that the value of the number of actual remaining probability variations remains even though the value of the residual effect variation number is "0". it can.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the larger the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number, the larger the value to be added (added) in one additional effect is set. As a result, when the value of the actual residual certainty variation frequency and the value of the effect residual certainty variation frequency largely deviate (when the difference value becomes large), the difference can be easily converged. Therefore, the fact that the value of the actual remaining probability number of times remains is large despite the value of the effect residual number of times being “0”, thereby suppressing the player from having a sense of discomfort with respect to the effect display of the latent state. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 295 (b), the winning effect table 222cb will be described. FIG. 295 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the winning effect table 222cb. This winning effect table 222cb is referred to when deciding whether or not to display the winning display mode (winning effect) when the ball is won in the variable winning device 65 in a hit game executed during the latent state The presence or absence of a winning effect is determined based on the success / failure determination result (per type) of the special drawing, the number of balls winning in the winning game, and the value of the effect counter 223f. The prize effect is an effect of displaying the prize display mode 815 shown in FIG. 293 on the third symbol display device 81.

  Specifically, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot A to E and a jackpot G (that is, a jackpot for which expected balls can be expected), and if the number of winning balls is the first or second winning, it depends on the value of the effect counter 223f. Yes (if the value of the effect counter 223f acquired is “0 to 198”), the winning effect “Available” is selected and the winning effect is executed (display of the winning display mode 815 is executed). That is, for the first and second winning balls after the winning game is executed, the winning display mode 815 is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game is being executed.

  When the number of winning balls is the third winning, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198. In the case of “”, the winning effect “A” is selected. That is, the winning effect is performed with a probability of about 97.5%, and the winning effect is set not to be performed with a probability of 2.5%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fourth prize, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 119", the winning effect "none" is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "120 to 198. In the case of “”, the winning effect “A” is selected. That is, the winning effect is performed with a probability of about 40%, and the winning effect is set not to be performed with a probability of about 60%.

  If the number of winning balls is the fifth winning, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 189", the winning effect "none" is selected and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "5 to 198" In the case of “”, the winning effect “A” is selected. That is, the winning effect is performed with a probability of about 5%, and the winning effect is set not to be performed with a probability of about 95%. If the number of winning balls is six or more, if the value of the obtained effect counter 223 f is “0 to 193”, the winning effect “none” is selected, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223 f is “194 to In the case of 198 ", the winning effect" Available "is selected. That is, the winning effect is performed with a probability of about 2.5%, and the winning effect is set not to be performed with a probability of about 97.5%.

  Next, if the result of the judgment is a big hit F (i.e., a big hit for which you can not expect a ball), regardless of the number of winning balls (1 or more winning balls), regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f. (When the value of the effect counter 223f acquired is “0 to 198”), a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the ball winning in the variable winning device 65. In the same manner as for the big hit F described above, even when the result of the pass / fail determination is a small hit, regardless of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls is 1 or more), and regardless of the value of the effect counter 223f (acquired effect counter When the value of 223 f is “0-198”, a winning effect is executed. That is, the display of the winning display mode 815 is always executed based on the ball winning in the variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in this control example, it is the player according to the winning effect based on the ball winning on the variable winning device 65 that the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) has been executed in the latent state It is possible to notify to This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the hit game has occurred during the latent state.

  Furthermore, since the generation degree of the winning effect based on the ball winning on the variable winning device 65 is made different depending on the type of the winning game, it is possible to execute the winning effect suitable for each winning game.

  Moreover, in this control example, the hit game to be executed during latency is a jackpot game in which the value of the actual remaining probability change number can be set to the initial value (120 times) after the end of the game, or the value of the actual remaining probability change number A big hit game (big hit A to E, where balls are more likely to be won by the variable winning device 65 than a small hit game, in order to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the small hit game is not changed. In and G), it is set so that it is more difficult to execute a winning effect as the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 increases. In this way, even if many balls have actually won the variable winning device 65 (even if more balls have won than in the small hit game), the number of times the winning effect is executed is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the hit game by the number of winning effects performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the cumulative value of the number of balls acquired during the latent condition (the cumulative value of the number of award balls paid out by each game executed while the latent condition is continuing) to the third symbol display device A configuration for displaying at 81 may be used. When such a configuration is used, the number of winning balls may be cumulatively displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the winning effect, and the cumulative value of the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of times the winning effect has been executed. You may comprise so that it may add. In this case, the actual cumulative value and the cumulative value on the display will differ by the number of winning balls for which the prize effect has not been executed. Therefore, a means for storing the difference in the cumulative value is provided. When the winning game is executed, it is preferable to execute the winning effect without being based on the ball winning on the variable winning device 65, and to make it possible to execute the temporary winning effect for converging the difference of the accumulated value. Thereby, the display mode of the winning effect and the cumulative display mode of the number of winning balls can be displayed without a sense of discomfort. In addition, by executing the temporary winning effect, it is possible to display the winning display mode 815 more than the number of balls actually won in the variable winning device 65 during the small hitting game, the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to further suppress the player from identifying the type of the hit game by the number of winning effects to be executed (the number of displays of the winning display mode 815).

  Referring back to FIG. 294 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 294 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example.

  As shown in FIG. 294 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, with the flag 223ca during displaying the remaining probability variation number, the additional effect flag 223cb, the additional effect type storage area 223cc. Has been added.

  The remaining certainty variation number display flag 223ca is a flag for indicating a period during which the remaining number of effect variation number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. When it is set, the number of remaining effects of the effect is displayed. This remaining certainty variation number displaying flag 223ca determines that the winning ending command has been received in the winning related command processing 2 (see FIG. 301) (S5207 in FIG. 301: Yes), and then the current hitting is a winning game If it is determined that it is a hit to shift the gaming state to the latent state after completion (S5209 in FIG. 301: Yes), and it is further determined that the flag 223ca under display of remaining certainty number is not set to ON (FIG. In S5210 of S301 in S301 of FIG. 301, it is set to ON (S5213 in FIG. 301), and similarly, in the win related command processing (see FIG. 301), it is determined whether or not the current hit game is a hit game capable of executing additional effects. (S5210 in FIG. 301). Then, in state command processing 2 (see FIG. 300), the game state is set to off (FIG. 300: Yes) if a state command indicating transition from the latent state to the normal state is received (S3001 in FIG. 300). 300 S4532).

  The extra effect flag 223cb is a flag for indicating that the extra effect based on the special figure variation is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display setting process is performed in the state set to ON. When 2 (refer to FIG. 303) is executed, an additional effect is set in the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4736 in FIG. 304) executed in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (refer to FIG. 303) (FIG. S4813 of 304). The additional effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S5108 in FIG. 299) when the additional effect is selected in the special image 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) (S5106 in FIG. 299: Yes). Reference is made in the 2 fluctuation start process (refer to FIG. 304) (S4809 in FIG. 304), and when it is judged to be on (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set off , Addition production is set.

  The additional effect type storage area 223cc is an area for setting the additional type selected with reference to the additional effect table 222ca, and the additional effect corresponding to the set additional type is a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 304) Is configured to be executed in In the additional effect type storage area 223cc, the type of additional effect selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 299) is set (S5107 in FIG. 299), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 304) If it is determined that the additional effect flag 223cb is set to ON (S4809 in FIG. 304: Yes), an additional effect based on the type of the additional effect set is set (S4812 in FIG. 304).

<About control processing of main controller in third control example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297. The control process of the main controller 110 in the third control example is the first winning process (see FIG. 228) executed with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 228). Instead of the second winning process (see FIG. 234) executed in the first winning process 2 (see FIG. 296) and the small hitting control process (see FIG. 232) instead of the second winning process 2 (see FIG. 231). 2), and otherwise the same processing is performed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 296, the first winning process 2 (S2113) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the first winning process 2 (S2113). Similar to the first winning process (see FIG. 231) in the first control example described above, the first winning process 2 (S2113 in FIG. 296) is a variable winning device 65 (specific winning hole) during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine The processing based on the ball awarded to 65a) is executed.

  When the first winning process 2 (S2113) is executed, the same processes as S2401 to S2404 of the first winning process (see FIG. 231) of the above-described first control example are executed. Then, when the processing of S2404 is finished, a winning winning command is set (S2431), and then the same processing as S2405 to S2411 of the above-described first winning processing (see FIG. 231) is executed, and this processing is ended. In the first winning process 2 (S2113), by setting a winning command, the main winning a prize from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the big hit game is a variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) Can output information about

  The information regarding the number of balls won during one round in the jackpot game is attached to the winning prize command, and the voice lamp control device 113 processes a winning prize command to be described later when the winning prize command is received. (See FIG. 302) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a winning effect (see FIG. 293) in the winning game is to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 297, the second winning process 2 (S2513) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 2 (S2513). The second winning process 2 (S2513) is the same as the second winning process (see FIG. 234) in the first control example described above, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning hole 65a) during the small hitting game in the pachinko machine 10 Processing based on the ball that has won the prize is executed.

  When the second winning process (S2513) is executed, the same process as S2701 to S2704 of the above-described second winning process (see FIG. 234) is executed. Then, when the processing of S2704 is finished, a winning winning command is set (S2731), and then the same processing as S2705 to S2711 of the second winning processing (see FIG. 234) described above is executed, and this processing is ended. In the second winning process 2 (S2513), by setting the winning command, the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) is won during the small hitting game from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It can output information about the sphere.

  Information on the number of balls won during the small hitting game is attached to the winning command, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, which will be described later (see FIG. 302) ) Is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a winning effect (see FIG. 293) in the winning game.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Third Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 304. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example is a command determination process 3 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) with respect to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. The process is the same as that of the variation display setting process 2 (S4112 in FIG. 303) instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) (S4111 in FIG. 298).

  First, with reference to FIG. 298, the command determination processing 3 (S4111) will be described. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4111). Similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example described above, the command determination process 3 is a process in which various processes are executed when various commands output from the main control device 110 are received.

  Command determination processing 3 (S4111) is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 238) of the first control example described above when special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4306 in FIG. 298: Yes). State setting process 2 (FIG. 300) is performed instead of state command processing (see FIG. 240) in that variation setting processing (S4351 in FIG. 299) is executed and state command is received (FIG. 298: Yes). Refer to the process of determining that a point related command is executed, and the point related command received (S4352 in FIG. 298), and the point related command when the point related command is received (S4352 in FIG. 298: Yes) The difference is that the process (see FIG. 301) is performed, and the other processes are the same. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same process and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the command determination process 3 (S4111) is executed, first, the processes of S4301 to S4306 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. When it is determined in the process of S4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process is executed (S4351).

  Here, the special figure fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351). In the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351), a process (S5101) for setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e to ON similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example described above While the process (S5102) which extracts a fluctuation | variation pattern command from the command mentioned above is performed, the process (S5103-S5108) which discriminate | determines whether an additional effect (refer FIG. 292 (a)) is performed is performed.

  First, when the special figure 2 fluctuation setting process 2 (S4351) is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set ON (S5101), next, the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S5102) . The process of S5101 described above is the same as the process of S4307 of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above, and the process of S5102 is the command determination process of the first control example described above (FIG. Since the process is the same as the process of S4308 (see 238), the detailed description of the process is omitted.

  Then, the remaining certainty variation number (hereinafter referred to as the actual remaining certainty variation number) set in the remaining certainty variation number area 223o and the remaining certainty variation number (hereinafter referred to as the presentation remaining certain variation number) set in the production certainty variation number area A comparison determination is made (S5103). In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining probability change number is smaller than the value of the actual remaining probability change number, that is, the effect remaining probability change number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81. It is determined that the value is less than the number of remaining probability variations actually set (the number of residual probability variations updated in the gaming state update process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 213)), and the additional effect can be performed. If it is (S5103: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (S5104), and then the additional effect table 222cb is referred to, and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability number and the value of the residual effect number The additional effect type is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of S5104 (S5105).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is not less than (the same or greater than) the actual remaining probability variation number, that is, the value of the presentation residual probability variation number is added by the additional effect. If it is determined that this can not be done (S5103: No), this processing is set as it is.

  When the process of S5105 is completed, it is next determined whether an additional effect has been selected (S5106). When no additional effect is selected in the process of S5106, that is, in the process of S5105, the difference value between the value of the number of actual remaining probability changes and the value of the number of residual effects of actual effects is "1 to 40" and acquired When the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 99”, and the difference value between the value of the actual remaining probability variation number and the value of the effect residual probability variation number is “41 to 80”, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h In the case of “0 to 49” (S5106: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the additional effect is selected (S5106: Yes), the selected additional effect type is set in the additional effect type storage area 223cc (S5107), and the additional effect flag 223cb It is set to ON (S5108), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 298, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4306), the same as S4309 to S4318 in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the first control example described above. Execute the process of When it is determined in the process of S4317 that the remaining certainty number change command or the remaining short time number command has not been received (S4317: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S4352).

  If it is determined in the process of S4352 that a hit-related command has not been received (S4352: No), the command corresponding to the other commands is processed similarly to the command determination process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 238). Various processing is executed (S4319), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4352: Yes), a hit-related command process is executed (S4353). The hit related command processing (S4353) is a process executed when each command related to the hit output from the main control device 110 is output, specifically, a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) An opening command output when a game is started, a round start command output when a new round game is started in a big hit game, a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is being executed A winning command that is output based on the ball winning on the specific winning opening 65a, an ending command that is output when an ending period is started in a winning game (big hit game or small hit game), and a command related to other hits (V winning command etc.) is output from main controller 110 It is executed if the discriminated) and.

  When the hit related command process (S4353) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S5201), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S5201: Yes), then, An opening command for display is set (S5202). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that the opening command has not been received (S5201: No), it is then determined whether a round start command has been received (S5203).

  If it is determined in the process of S5203 that a round start command has been received (S5203), a display round command is set (S5204), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the round start command has not been received (S5203: No), it is then determined whether a winning prize command has been received (S5205). The win winning command is a command set in the first win process 2 (see S2113 in FIG. 296) and the second win process 2 (see S2513 in FIG. 297) executed by the main control unit 110. It is a command that is output based on the ball entering the variable winning device 65 (specific winning opening 65a) during the game or small hit game. The hit winning command includes information on the number of balls that have won, and information that can be identified as the type of the game being played (big hit type or small hit type).

  Here, the hit winning command process (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit winning command process (S5206).

  When the processing of the hit winning command processing (S5206) is executed, first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state setting area (S5301), and then the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state (S5302). When it is determined that the game is not in the latent state (S5302: No), a winning effect is selected (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5302 that the game is in the latent state (S5302: Yes), when selecting a winning effect to be executed in the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) in the latent state The value of the effect counter 223h to be used is acquired (S5303), and the winning effect is selected based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223h and the winning effect table 222cb (S5304).

  When the process of S5304 or the process of S5305 is finished, it is next determined whether a winning effect is selected (S5306), and when it is determined that a winning effect is selected (S5306: Yes), the selected winning effect is indicated. A display prize effect command is set (S5307), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning effect is not selected in the process of S5306 (S5306: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (S4112) will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4112). The variation display setting process 2 (S4112) is a process of updating the display contents of the effect remaining probability variation number with respect to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above, and the addition effect flag 223cb is on. In the case where it is set to, processing for executing an additional effect is added. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same element other than that, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, in the variable display setting process 2 (S4112), the same process as S4701 to S4704 in the variable display setting process (FIG. 243) of the first control example is executed, and when the process of S4704 is finished, the state setting area 223i is set. Based on the information being done. It is determined whether the current state is in the latent state (S4731).

  If it is determined in the process of S4731 that the current state is not the latent state (S4731: No), the process of updating the number of effect residual probability variations displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state (S4732-2) S4736) is skipped and the process moves to S4705. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4731: Yes), then the number of effect remaining probability variations set in the effect probability variation number area 223p is decremented by 1 (S4732), It is determined whether the value of the remaining effect probability variation count is greater than 0 (S4733). In the process of S4733, when it is determined that the value of the effect remaining number of variations is greater than 0, that is, "one" or more in the remaining number display area D1 (see FIG. 291 (a)) of the third symbol display device 81. If the effect residual number of occurrences variation is displayed (S4733: Yes), a residual probability change number command for display is set based on the value of the effect residual number of occurrences variation number set in the effect occurrence number of variations area 223p (S4734).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4733 that the value of the effect residual number of times of variation is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4733: No), then the substance of the residual number of times of change area 223o is set next It is determined whether the value of the remaining certainty number is greater than 0 (S4735). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect remaining probability variation number is 0, but the value of the actual remaining probability variation number is not 0 (1 or more).

  If it is determined in the process of S4735 that the value of the actual remaining probability number of changes is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4735: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4734, and the value of the effect residual number of occurrences changes Based on the display remaining certainty variation number command (that is, a command for indicating "0 times" in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81) is set (S4734). Then, the process proceeds to step S4705.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4735 that the value of the actual residual certainty number is greater than 0 (S4735: Yes), the display residual certainty number command indicating the residual effect certainty number "???" The process shifts to the processing of S4736) and S4705. By doing this, in a situation where the value of the number of actual remaining proof variations is not 0, when the number of effect remaining definite variations displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 is "0 times" Instead of the "0 times" display, "???" can be displayed (see FIG. 292 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the latent state continues even after “0 times” is displayed as the effect remaining number of confirmed variations. Further, by setting the number of effects remaining in the effect to “???”, it is possible to make the player play the game while predicting how long the latent state will continue, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the process of S4701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4701: No), it is determined in the process of S4731 that it is not in the latent state In the case (S4731: No), and after the process of S4734 or the process of S4736, the same process as S4705 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to ON (S4705: Yes), next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (S4737). The details of the special view 2 variation start process (S4737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4737) is skipped and The process shifts to the process of S4709, the same process as S4709 to S4711 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 243) of the first control example described above is performed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, in the third control example, the number of times is smaller than the internally set number of times of probability variation (120 times) when the latent state has entered (the latent state has been set) (the third control example) For example, "100 times" is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. This makes it possible to differentiate between the actual remaining probability change number and the rendering residual probability change number when the latent state is set (it is possible to display the rendering residual probability change number less than the actual residual probability change number). In the state, it is possible to easily perform the effect of adding the number of remaining effects of the effect. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, the remaining number of times is performed each time the variation of each special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is executed (every time the number of actual residual variation is subtracted). Although the number of effect remaining confirmed variations displayed in the display area D1 is reduced, for example, when the variation of the special figure (special figure 1) which is not advantageous to the player in the latent state is executed In this case, the number of remaining effects may not be subtracted. In this case, as in this control example, the number of effect remaining certainty variations displayed in the remaining number of times display area D1 is displayed smaller than the number of substantial remaining certainty variations at the timing of starting the latent condition (the timing when the latent condition is set). As a result, even if the number of effect remaining definite variations is not subtracted from the fluctuation of the special figure (special image 1) which is not advantageous to the player, a situation may occur where the number of effect remaining probability variations is greater than the actual number of remaining probability variations. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the third control example, the jackpot game when the real remaining probability variation number is set to the initial value (120 times) as the lottery result of the special drawing and the jackpot result of the jackpot game and special drawing as the lottery result of the special drawing Perform an additional effect to add the predetermined number (for example, 5 times to 40 times) of the effect remaining certainty variation number during the small hitting game when the small hitting is not set to the initial value (120 times). It is composed of Thereby, when the hit game (game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) is executed during the latent state, whether or not the actual number of probability variations is reset to the initial value (120 times) (during the latent state) It is possible to further suppress the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot is won).

  Further, in the third control example, the timing of starting the latent state (timing at which the latent state is set) and the number of substantial probability variations and the number of residual production variations that occur when the special figure big win is won during the latent status. In order to make up for the difference between the above and the other, it is configured to execute an additional effect that adds the effect remaining certainty variation number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 as a special figure variation effect during the latent state. As a result, since it is possible to add the number of residual production variations at various timings during the latent status, whether or not the actual number of probable variations has been reset to the initial value (120 times) during the latent status (latency status) It is possible to further suppress the player from easily grasping whether or not the special figure jackpot has been won).

  Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of addition displayed in the additional effect performed at each timing (special figure fluctuation timing, timing during winning game execution) (the remaining number of effect variation numbers displayed in the remaining number display area D1) Is configured to be changed based on the difference between the actual number of positive variations and the number of residual production variations (see FIG. 290). In this way, when the number of remaining effect variation is added greatly by the additional effect, it is considered that the player is elected to the special figure jackpot whose actual number of probability variations is initial (120 times) during the latent condition. While being able to become, it is possible to suppress the fact that the effect remaining certainty variation number becomes “0 times” in a state where the actual certain variation number and the effect remaining certain variation number largely deviate.

  In the third control example, the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) to be executed when winning in the latent state (for example, the big hit game or small hit game with a small payout among the big hit games) is executed. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a display based on the winning of the ball to the variable winning device 65 as a hit effect to be executed (see FIG. 293). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the hit game will be executed during the latent state. Then, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device 65 is displayed as a hit effect to be executed during the hit game. The display mode is configured to make the ratio displayed on the third symbol display device 81 different between when the big hit game is being performed and when the small hit game is being performed. As a result, even if the player wins a jackpot having a large number of balls to be awarded to the variable winning device 65 in one winning game rather than a small hitting game, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is small hitting It becomes possible to do in the same way as the hit effect corresponding to the game. Therefore, while informing the player that the hit game will be executed during the latent state in an easy-to-understand manner (indication), it is notable to inform the player whether the game is a big hit game or a small hit game. The player can play the latent state while having expectation until the end.

Fourth control example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 325, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described. In the first control example described above, when the big hit occurs in the latent state and 120 new latent states are set (the value of the probability change counter 203 k is overwritten to 120), the latent on the display is confirmed. The remaining number of states is configured to continue to display the number before the jackpot. When the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is generated, if the remaining number on the display is 0, the actual remaining number is It was configured to execute a resurrection effect to be displayed on top. That is, the timing at which the remaining number on the display is additionally displayed is limited to the timing at which the remaining number is zero.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there is a difference between the actual number of remaining latent states and the remaining number on the display, a plurality of triggers for displaying in addition to the remaining number on the display are provided. And More specifically, in a state where a difference is occurring, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect at the start of the change, and if the lottery is won, the remaining number on the display may be added It was configured to perform an additional effect that suggests that there is. In this additional effect, the number of times the additional display is performed is varied according to the operation timing of the frame button 22. This is intended to improve the willingness to participate in the extra presentation of the player. Hereinafter, the addition effect of adding the remaining number of times on the display by the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 is referred to as a depression addition effect.

  Further, in the fourth control example, when the remaining number on the display is 0 and the actual remaining number is not 0 (is 1 or more), the indication of the remaining number is not displayed (not displayed) ) The non-display mode is set. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the latent state ends, so it is possible to provide a playability with a sense of tension in the latent state. Furthermore, in the case where the non-display mode is set, if the actual number of remaining latent states (the value of the probability change counter 203k) is within the predetermined number of times (five times), the jackpot of the second special symbol (the state of That is, when the number of remaining latent confirmation states is updated to 120 immediately before the final latent state ends), a special additional effect (special additional effect) is executed in a mode different from the normal additional effect. And As a result, the player who confirms the special addition effect can be made to win a big hit immediately before the actual number of remaining times becomes 0, and it can be recognized that the latent state is newly set. Can give greater pleasure to

  Further, in the fourth control example, in addition to the additional effect, an effect in which the effect mode is changed by the operation of the frame button 22 is provided. Specifically, in the normal state or the definite variation state, a suspension notice effect is provided in which the mode of the suspension symbol is changed according to the operation content of the frame button 22. In this reserve announcement effect, the range of the reserve symbol for executing the announcement effect is determined based on the player's operation on the frame button 22 (player's choice), and based on the result of prefetching the reserve ball of the range selected by the player , And is configured to execute a notice effect using a reserved symbol. As a result, when a high expectation effect is executed as the advance notice effect for the selected range, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced. In addition, even if the effect with low expectation is executed as the advance effect for the selected range, if the holding ball different from the selection range is selected, the advance effect with high expectation may have been executed. It can make the player think that he does not know. Therefore, with respect to the holding ball corresponding to the holding symbol outside the selection range, it is possible to provide a novel effect that the jackpot can be expected.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed The point is that the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 305-310, the display mode of the characteristic various effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 in a 4th control example is demonstrated. FIG. 304 and FIG. 306 are diagrams showing the display mode when the hold notification effect is executed in the fourth control example, and FIG. 307 and FIG. 308 are the press-over effect in the fourth control example. FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing display modes when executed, and FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing display modes when the non-display mode in which the remaining number is not displayed in the latent state is set. .

  FIG. 304 (a) is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the on-hold notice effect in the present control example is started. As shown in FIG. 305 (a), when the reserved announcement effect is started, a display area Ds1a in which the characters "Who should feed on PUSH please decide on PUSH" is displayed on the upper left side of the sub display area Ds1. Is formed. This character can prompt the player to press the frame button 22. Further, below the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4, a tray Ds1b on which a number of boned meats smaller than the number of reserved symbols is placed is displayed. In the example of FIG. 305 (a), the case where there are three boned meats with respect to four holding balls is illustrated. The tray Ds1b is displayed in a manner of reciprocating in the left and right direction.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 in accordance with the characters displayed in the display area Ds1a, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped at the timing when the player presses the frame button 22. FIG. 305 (b) exemplifies the case where the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the tray Ds1b is arranged below the reserved symbols Dh2 to Dh4. In this case, the tray Ds1b is stopped below the holding symbols Dh2 to Dh4, and the holding symbols Dh2 to Dh4 displayed above the stopped trays Ds1 b are changed to a smiling and happy manner. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the holding symbols Dh2 to Dh4 whose mode has been changed have become the target of the current holding advance notice.

  When the player does not press the frame button 22 while the display area Ds1a is formed, the reciprocating operation of the tray Ds1b is stopped when the display time (for example, 2 seconds) of the display area Ds1a elapses. Ru.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 305 (c), according to the holding symbol of the range selected by the operation of the player (the tray is stopped downward), the effect of eating the boned meat placed on the tray is executed. After each holding symbol eats the boned meat, an effect is performed in which part or all of the holding symbol that ate the boned meat lay eggs. In FIG. 305 (c), a mode in which the holding symbol Dh2 and the holding symbol Dh4 lay eggs Dh2a and Dh4a, respectively, is illustrated. The holding symbol that laid the egg is displayed to indicate to the player that the holding symbol is based on a high expectation holding ball. More specifically, when the holding ball indicated by the holding symbol in the selection range includes a holding ball that causes reach, the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball completely eats the meat with bone The production which lays eggs later is performed. In the case where the selection range does not include the holding symbol corresponding to the holding ball for which the reach occurs, the effect of laying eggs is not executed. As a result, the player can be made to perceive the reach effect before the lottery of the first special symbol based on the holding ball is executed, so that the player can enjoy playing the reach effect. it can. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, it is comprised so that it will be easy to determine execution, when the holding | maintenance ball which a reach | attainment production | generation generate | occur | produces exists. Therefore, if the effect of laying eggs is not executed after the effect of eating the boned meat, the reach effect occurs on the hold symbol outside the range of the hold symbol selected by the player by the operation of the frame button 22 There is a high probability that a holding symbol corresponding to the ball is included. Therefore, if the effect of laying an egg is executed by the holding symbol within the range selected by the player, it is possible to expect a big hit against the holding ball corresponding to the holding symbol that laid the egg, and furthermore, the egg is When the production effect is not performed, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected to the holding balls corresponding to the holding symbols outside the range selected by the player. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  After execution of the effect that the holding symbol lays eggs, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), an image prompting continuous hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed in the display area Ds1a. With this image, the player can be made to recognize that the effect is developed by continuously hitting the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 continuously. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the on-hold notice effect.

  When the player continuously strikes the frame button 22 in accordance with the instruction of the image displayed in the display area Ds1a, and reaches the prescribed number of consecutive strikes determined when the effect is generated, the inside of the house Ds1c displayed on the right of the reserved symbols Dh1 to Dh4. The effect of moving the egg to is executed. In addition, eggs are moved in order from the old holding symbol in the order of holding. FIG. 306 (b) illustrates a case where only the egg Dh2a displayed at the top of the retention symbol Dh2 moves into the house Ds1c. The move to the house Ds1c suggests that it may develop into a super reach in the variable display based on the holding ball. The super reach is easy to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and difficult to be selected when it is out of the case, so the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is high. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continuously hit the frame button 22 more seriously. In addition, it is undecided whether super reach will occur or not by moving to the house Ds1c, and as shown in FIG. 306 (c), the egg Dh2a is broken, and the character "super reach" is displayed from the inside. Super reach is decided when it occurs.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the range of the hold symbol for generating a notice when the hold notice effect is executed is determined by the selection of the player. As a result, depending on the content of the on-hold notice effect, it is possible to make the holding balls in the range selected by the player have a sense of expectation, and the holding balls outside the player's selection range to have a feeling of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel pending notice effect which has never been seen before.

  In the fourth control example, although it is configured to notify whether or not the symbol of the egg moves to the house Ds 1 c by the continuous hitting of the frame button 22, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1 c may be omitted, and the effect of performing the aspect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by the continuous hit may be performed. That is, it may be configured to collectively notify all the egg patterns whether or not the player will develop into the super reach by one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make an effect that is easier to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307 and FIG. 308, the push-over effect performed during the latent state will be described. This pressing and adding effect is a effect that indicates that by pressing (operating) the frame button 22, there is a possibility that the remaining number of latent states on the display may be added. In this pressing addition effect, there are provided a normal mode in which the number of times of addition is relatively small (or 0) when the player operates the frame button 22 and a special mode of the number of times of addition It is done. In the special mode, the difference between the number of remaining latent states on display and the number of actual remaining latent states is 30 or more, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit This is an aspect that is easy to select. On the other hand, the normal mode is an aspect which becomes easy to be selected when the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number is less than 30.

  First, the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308 (a). FIG. 307 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the execution of the pressed additional effect in the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), when the pressing and adding effect is started, a button D2 in which the character "push" is written is displayed near the center of the main display area Dm, and "" Is displayed. Furthermore, a display area D3 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape is displayed below the button D2, and a display area D4 on which the characters "Press the button in a timely manner!" Is displayed below the display area D3. Is displayed. In the display area D3, the small areas D3b and D3f with the letters "?", The small areas D3c and D3e with the letters "Chance!", And the letters "Super heat !!!" It comprises a small area D3d and a scroll bar D3a which scrolls each small area from the left side to the right side in a front view. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that there is a possibility that the number of definite variations on the display may increase by operating the frame button 22 with good timing. The number of additions is the largest when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d, and the frame button at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small areas D3b and D3f. This is the smallest when 22 is pressed.

  FIG. 307 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d. As shown in FIG. 307 (b), when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3d to which the word "super heat !!!" is attached, The superimposition count display area D5 in which the character "+5" is displayed is displayed, and the letter "GET" is displayed above the superimposition count display area D5. In addition, five times are displayed in addition to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. Furthermore, the text "5 times for GET on top!" Is displayed in the display area D4. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand the remaining number of times displayed on the display added in the press addition effect this time. The correspondence between the timing of pressing the scroll bar D3a and the number of remaining times on the display to be added is defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 308 (a) shows the display content when the player presses the frame button 22 at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged on the small area D3f to which the letter “?” With a low degree of expectation to be added is attached. FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), the button D2 is divided into two, and the text "Sorry ..." is displayed above the button D2. In addition, the characters "overlay failure ..." are displayed in the display area D4. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is bad. Therefore, when the press-on effect is performed next, the frame button 22 can be thought to be pressed at a better timing, and therefore the player's willingness to participate in the press-on effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 308 (b), the push-up effect in the special mode will be described. When the special mode push-on effect is executed, a button D2 larger than that displayed in the normal mode is displayed in the vicinity of the screen center of the main display area Dm, and the super-super opportunity chance is displayed above the button D2. "" Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special effect that apparently is clearly different from the normal mode is started.

  In addition, in each of the small areas D3b to D3h of the display area D3, the number of times (5 to 30) displayed in a superimposed manner when the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing when the scroll bar D3a is arranged is displayed. In the display area D4, the characters “The number of additions is determined by one's own power!” Are displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 influences the number of times of addition (so-called, it is not a finished race). Therefore, since the player can more positively press the frame button 22, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the depression additional effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 and 310, the non-display mode during the latent state will be described. As described above, this non-display mode may be set when the remaining number of latent states on the display is 0, and it is unclear to the player when the latent state ends It is an effect to give a sense of tension.

  As shown in FIG. 309 (a), when the number of remaining latent states displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is zero, as in the first control example, the character 811 imitating a rabbit falls to the ground Set to Further, in the present control example, the characters “end ...?” Are displayed in the display area 812 displayed above the character 811. That is, the display content is set as if it is not yet known whether the latent state ends.

  Then, when the remaining number of times of the actual latent state is not 0, the non-display mode shown in FIG. 309 (b) is entered. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309 (b), an effect of an aspect in which the rock 813 approaches from behind the character 811 imitating a rabbit is executed, and “Pinch!” Below the main display area Dm. A display area appears in which a plurality of characters “!” Are displayed. Furthermore, in place of the indication of the number of remaining latent states, the word "???" is displayed inside the remaining number display area D1. These displays make it possible to recognize that although the latent state has not ended yet, it has become unknown when it has ended. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game to be tense from the anxiety that the end of the latent state may be near.

  FIG. 310 (a) is a diagram showing display contents when the number of remaining actual latent states is 0 in the non-display mode and the latent states are ended. As shown in FIG. 310 (a), when the latent state is finished with the non-display mode set (when the value of the probability change counter 203k becomes 0), the effect is that the character 811 is crushed by the rock 813 It will be. In the display area 812 above the crushed character 811, the characters “END !!” are displayed. These displays allow the player to clearly understand that the latent state has ended.

  Further, FIG. 310 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode (pinch escape effect) when the player is set to the non-display mode and the jackpot occurs when the remaining number of latent states is 5 or less. . When the jackpot of the second special symbol is reached near the end of the latent state, basically 120 latent states are set after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player. In this case, as shown in FIG. 310 (b), an effect is performed in which the character 811 jumps over the rock 813 coming from behind. Further, the text “pinch escape !!” is displayed on the left side of the rock 813, and the display of the remaining number display area D1 is updated to “remaining 100 times”. Since this pinch escape effect is performed only when a jackpot occurs near the end of the latent state (the latent state remains within 5 times), the latent effect is made for the player who confirmed the pinch escape effect. It is possible to make a big hit at the end of the state and to recognize that a new latent state has been given. Therefore, it is possible to please the player that the jackpot occurred in a timely manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electric configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 to 315. First, FIG. 311A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 311 (a), in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the fourth control example includes an additional effect selection table 222da, a pressing period table 222db, and a hold notice determination table 222dc. And are provided.

  The additional effect selection table 222da is a data table referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the pressed additional effect in the latent state, and to determine the mode (either the normal mode or the special mode) of the pressed additional effect to be performed. is there. The details of the additional effect selection table 222da will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313.

  FIG. 312 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the additional effect selection table 222da. As shown in FIG. 312 (a), in the additional effect selection table 222da, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and the player's participation degree in the additional effect is normally (the game is played with the additional effect within the past 5 times Table for the degree of participation usually referred to when the player is operating the frame button 22 and the lottery result of the special symbol are small wins, and the degree of participation in the player's depression additional effect is low (past 5 Table 222da2 for low degree of participation, which is referred to when the player does not operate the frame button 22 in the extra effect over time, and jackpot table 222da3 that is referred to when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery And are provided.

  First, details of the participation level normal table 222da1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). FIG. 312 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the participation level normal table 222da1. As shown in FIG. 312 (b), the participation level normal table 222da1 has the value of the effect counter 223h for each difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states. The range and the type (mode) of the pressed additional effect are defined in association with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 312 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on display and the remaining number of actual latent states is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of effect counter 223h “No additional presentation effect” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 95”. On the other hand, the “normal mode” is defined in association with the range of “96 to 99” of the value of the effect counter 223 h. Therefore, when the special symbol drawing is a small hit and the participation level normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect is selected" is selected at a rate of 96% (96/100), so that the pressed additional effect is performed. Will not run. Moreover, the pressing addition effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 4% (4/100). The difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the number of remaining latent states actually does not select the special mode within the range of 5 to 29 times. This is to prevent an additional display exceeding the difference with the remaining number of times being performed.

  In addition, when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “overlayed” with respect to the range of “0 to 90”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, the “normal mode” is defined in association with the range of “91 to 97” of the value of the effect counter 223 h, and the “special mode” is defined in the range of “98, 99” of the value of the effect counter 223 h. It is defined in association with it. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is a small hit and the participation level normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect is selected" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the pressed additional effect is performed. Will not run. Further, the pressing addition effect of the normal mode is executed at a rate of 7% (7/100), and the pressing addition effect of the special mode is executed at a rate of 2% (2/100).

  As described above, if the difference between the number of remaining times on the display and the actual number of remaining times is large (if it is 30 or more), the probability of occurrence of the depression additional effect is increased. can do.

  Next, the details of the participation degree low table 222da2 will be described with reference to FIG. 313 (a). FIG. 313 (a) shows the defined contents of the participation degree low table 222da2. As shown in FIG. 313 (a), when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is within the range of 5 to 29 times, the value of the effect counter 223h “No additional presentation effect” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 90”. On the other hand, the “normal mode” is defined in association with the range of “91 to 99” of the value of the effect counter 223 h. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is a small hit and the participation level normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect is selected" is selected at a rate of 91% (91/100), so that the pressed additional effect is performed. Will not run. In addition, the pressing addition effect in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 9% (9/100). That is, when the player's degree of participation in the pressed additional effect is low, the frequency of the pressed additional effect is increased (4% → 9%). As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressed additional effect can be improved.

  In addition, when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 times or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “over” to the range of “0 to 80”. “None” is defined in association with it. On the other hand, the “normal mode” is defined in association with the range of “81 to 94” of the value of the effect counter 223 h, and the “special mode” is defined in the range of “95 to 99” of the value of the effect counter 223 h. It is defined in association with it. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is a small hit and the participation level normal table 222da1 is referred to, "no additional effect is selected" is selected at a rate of 81% (81/100), so that the pressed additional effect is performed. Will not run. Also, the pressing addition effect in the normal mode is executed at a ratio of 14% (14/100), and the pressing addition effect in the special mode is performed at a ratio of 5% (5/100). That is, even when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 or more, the frequency of the press-over effect is increased (9% to 19%). . As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the pressed additional effect can be improved.

  Next, the jackpot table 222da3 will be described with reference to FIG. 313 (b). As described above, the jackpot table 222da3 is a table to be referred to when the jackpot occurs in the special symbol lottery during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 313 (b), when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on display and the remaining number of actual latent states is within the range of 5 times to 29 times, the value of effect counter 223h The “normal mode” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 99”. That is, the depression addition effect in the normal mode is always executed.

  In addition, when the difference between the remaining number of latent states on the display and the remaining number of actual latent states is 30 or more, the value of the effect counter 223h is “normal mode” with respect to the range of “0 to 49”. The “special mode” is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99” of the value of the effect counter 223 h. In other words, the push addition effect in the normal mode or the special mode is always performed. As described above, in the latent state, when the difference between the number of remaining times on display and the actual number of remaining times is a big hit in a state of 5 or more, the depression additional effect is always executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to expect that the jackpot has been made when the press-plus-effect is generated. In particular, the additional effect of the special mode is significantly higher in selectivity as compared to the expectation degree normal table 222 da 1 and the expectation degree low table 222 da 2. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the jackpot becomes stronger more strongly when the press addition effect in the special mode occurs. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game paying attention to the mode of the depression additional effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the fourth control example, when the difference between the number of remaining times on display and the actual number of remaining times is 5 or more, the pressing additional effect is always set if the second special symbol wins However, it is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the pressing addition effect is set may be lowered, and the pressing addition effect may be set at a rate of 80%. With this configuration, it is possible to easily generate a difference between the number of remaining times on display and the actual number of remaining times, so that it is possible to more effectively execute the pressing and adding effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 311, the description will be continued. The pressing period table 222 db is a data table that defines the number of times of additional display according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed during execution of the pressing additional effect. Details of the pressing period table 222db will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 (c) and 314.

  First, FIG. 313 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222db. As shown in FIG. 313 (c), a table for normal use 222db1 which is referred to when the press-on effect in the normal mode is set and a press-on effect in the special mode is set in the press period table 222db. Table for special purpose 222db2 is included. When the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined, a table corresponding to the determined pressing addition effect is read out and stored in a pressing period storage area 223da of the RAM 223 described later. When pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing addition effect, the number of additions is determined with reference to the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da.

  First, the details of the normal table 222db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (a). FIG. 314 (a) shows the defined contents of the normal table 222db1. As shown in FIG. 314 (a), the number of times (overlay value) to be added to the remaining number display area D1 is defined in the table for normal use 222db1 in association with the elapsed time since the depression addition effect was started ing. The elapsed time from the start of the effect is counted by the pressing period timer 223db of the RAM 223.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (a), "0" is associated with the elapsed time in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds as an additional value. In the meantime, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this time (in the range of 0 to 699 milliseconds from the start of the pressed additional effect), the scroll bar D3a moves over the small area D3b to which the characters "?" It becomes an aspect. In addition, "3" is associated as an additional value in the range of 700 milliseconds to 999 milliseconds as the elapsed time. In addition, as for the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this time (in the range of 700 to 999 milliseconds from the start of pressing additional effect), the scroll bar D3a moves over the small area D3c to which the characters "chance!" It becomes an aspect to Moreover, "5" is matched as an additional value in the range of 1000 milliseconds-1499 milliseconds of elapsed time. In the meantime, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during this period (in the range of 1000 to 1499 milliseconds from the start of the pressed additional effect) is a small area D3d to which the scroll bar D3a is given the character of "super heat !!!" It becomes an aspect to move up.

  Similarly, "2" is associated as an additional value in the range of elapsed time of 1500 to 1799 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3e), and the elapsed time is in the range of 1800 to 2500 milliseconds. As a period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f, "0" is associated as an additional value.

  As described above, the correspondence table between the elapsed time and the added value according to the effect mode (time change of the position of the scroll bar D3a) of the normal mode is defined in the normal table 222db1. Thus, the number of times according to the display mode (the position of the scroll bar D3a) when the player presses the frame button 22 can be additionally displayed.

  Next, the details of the special table 222db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 314 (b). FIG. 314 (b) shows the defined contents of the normal table 222db2.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (b), "5" is associated as an additional value in the range of 0 to 799 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small region D3b), and the elapsed time is 800. In the range of -999 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps with the small area D3c), "10" is associated as an additional value, and the elapsed time is a range of 1000-1099 milliseconds (the scroll bar D3a is a small area D3d "20" is associated as an overlay value in a period overlapping with (), and "10" as an overlay value in an elapsed time range of 1100 to 1299 milliseconds (a period when the scroll bar D3a overlaps with the small area D3e). In the range of 1300 to 1999 milliseconds (period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3f), which is associated, “5” as an additional value "30" is associated as an additional value in the range of 2000 to 2049 milliseconds (the period in which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3g) that is associated, and the elapsed time is in the range of 2050 to 2500 milliseconds As a period during which the scroll bar D3a overlaps the small area D3h, "5" is associated as an additional value.

  With this special table 222db2, it is possible to accurately display the number of times of addition displayed in the small area through which the scroll bar D3a is passing at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, in the remaining number display area D1.

  Referring back to FIG. 311 (a), the description will be continued. The on-hold notice determination table 222dc is a table referred to in order to determine whether to perform on-hold notice effect. As described above, the reserve announcement effect may be executed when the reserve ball of the first special symbol increases in the normal state or the odd change state in the gaming state, and the lottery result with a high degree of expectation in the reserve ball It is a rendition to be executed to suggest that there is. The details of the hold notice determination table 222dc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 315 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the hold advance notice determination table 222dc. As shown in FIG. 315, in the suspension notice determination table 222dc, a reach effect is generated in the reach presence table to be referenced when there is a suspension ball for which reach effect occurs in the suspension ball, and in the suspension ball And a reach no time table which is referred to when there is no holding ball. Each table is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h for which the execution of the on-hold notice effect is determined for each of the number of holding balls.

  As shown in FIG. 315, in the reach-time table, the value of the effect counter 223h is not defined in the range of 0 to 2 for the number of holding balls. That is, when the holding ball number is 2 or less, the holding advance notice effect is not set. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is three, "0 to 9" is associated as the range of values of the effect counter 223h, and when the number of holding balls is four, the range of values of the effect counter 223h “0 to 15” are associated with each other. That is, it is comprised so that it is easy to perform reservation alerting | reporting production | presentation, so that there are many balls holding | maintenance. Therefore, the ball can be actively fired in an attempt to store more holding balls for the player, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 315, even in the no reach table, the value of the effect counter 223h is not defined in the range of 0 to 2 for the number of holding balls. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is 3, the teeth are associated with "0" as the value of the effect counter 223h, and when the number of holding balls is 4, "0, 1" as the value range of the effect counter 223h. Are associated with each other. That is, the no-reach-time table has smaller random number values (counter values) for which the execution of the on-hold notice effect is determined as compared to the reach-time table. Therefore, if there is a holding ball on which the reach effect is performed in the holding ball, the hold notification effect is more easily executed, so the player is developed into reach effect for the player at the stage when the hold notification effect is started. Can be made to expect strongly.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 311 (b). FIG. 311 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. It is. The RAM 223 in the fourth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a pressing period storage area 223da, a pressing period timer 223db, and a continuous hitting counter 223dc are added.

  The pressing period storage area 223da is a storage area for storing the pressing period corresponding to the determined type of pressing addition effect when execution of the pressing addition effect is determined. That is, when the start of the depression additional effect is determined, the table (the normal table 222db1 or the special table 222db2) read from the depression period table 222db is stored (see S4392 in FIG. 321). If pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing addition effect, the adding value is determined based on the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da and the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db described later. The remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is updated.

  The pressing period timer 223db is a timer that counts an elapsed time from the start of the pressing addition effect. Based on the timer value of the pressing period timer 223db and the table stored in the pressing period storage area 223da, the additional value in the pressing additional effect is determined.

  When an effect (see FIG. 306 (a)) for prompting continuous hitting of the frame button 22 occurs in the hold notification effect, the continuous hit counter 223dc has an upper limit value set in advance for each effect set, and the player during the effect Is a counter which is decremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated (see S5703 in FIG. 318). If the value of the hit counter 223dc becomes 0 while the effect of prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 continuously, the effect develops to the next stage (the egg symbol moves into the house Ds1c).

  The pressed flag 223dd is a flag indicating whether or not the player has performed the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 in the pressed additional effect of 1. If this pressed flag 223dd is on, it means that the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 has been detected in the pressed additional effect of 1, and if it is off, the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is It means that it is undetected. When the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected during execution of the pressing addition effect, the pressed flag 223dd is referred to, and the pressing stored in the pressing period table storage area 223da only when the state is off. The added value corresponding to the period is read out, and is added to the remaining number display area D1 (see S5605 in FIG. 317). That is, even if the player performs the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 a plurality of times in the effect of 1 addition, only the addition to the first operation (depression) is executed. When the pressed addition effect is finished with the pressed flag 223 dd off, 1 is added to the value of the participation degree counter 223 df described later. In other words, the participation degree counter 223 df counts the number of times the player has not participated in the pressed additional effect (pressed the frame button 22). In the present control example, the execution frequency of the pressed additional effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df.

  The pending notice flag 223de is a flag indicating whether or not the pending notice effect (refer to FIG. 305, FIG. 306) is being executed, and if it is on, the pending notice effect is in progress; Indicates that the production is not in progress. The on-hold notice flag 223de is set to ON when execution of the on-hold notice effect is determined (see S5808 in FIG. 322), and is turned off at the end of the on-hold notice effect (see S5835 in FIG. 325). While the on-hold notice flag 223de is on, the execution of a new on-hold notice effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by the holding notice being executed redundantly.

  The participation degree counter 223 df is a counter that indicates the degree of participation of the player with respect to the pressed additional effect. In this participation degree counter 223df, when the pressing addition effect ends without detecting the operation of the frame button 22, its value is incremented by one (see S5509 in FIG. 316), and the pressing addition effect of the frame button 22 is added. When an operation is detected, the value is reset to 0 (see S5609 in FIG. 317). That is, the value of the participation degree counter 223 df counts the number of consecutive times the player did not press the frame button 22 in the press-on effect (does not participate). In this control example, the execution frequency of the pressing and adding effect is varied according to the count value of the participation degree counter 223df. That is, if the count value of the participation degree counter 223 df is larger than 5 (if the player does not participate in the depression additional effect continuously six times or more), the determination ratio of the depression additional effect is increased. As a result, an opportunity to further urge the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 can be increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the depression additional effect can be improved.

  The non-display setting flag 223 dg is a flag indicating whether or not the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set as the display mode in the latent state. If the non-display setting flag 223 dg is on, it indicates that the non-display mode is set, and if off, it indicates that the non-display mode is not set. The non-display setting flag 223dg is set to ON when the non-display mode is set (see S5896 in FIG. 324), and the additional effect (press additional effect, special additional effect) is set (FIG. 321) In step S4395 (see S5860 in FIG. 323), when the latent state ends in the non-display mode (see S5858 in FIG. 323), it is set to off.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 325. First, with reference to FIG. 316, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 236) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see FIG. 316) is started, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5501), and it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 is detected Then (S5501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a pressing addition effect is being executed (S5502).

  In the process of S5502, when it is determined that the pressing addition effect is being executed (S5502: Yes), the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 in the pressing addition effect is superimposed on the remaining number display area D1 A pressing process is performed during the additional effect for causing the game to be performed (S5503), and this process ends. The details of the pressing process during superimposition effect (S5503) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the press addition effect is not being executed (S5502: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold notification effect is being executed (S5504). In the process of S5504, when it is determined that the pending advance presentation effect is being performed (S5504: Yes), the pending advance announcement pressing processing for executing the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the pending advance presentation effect is executed ( S5505), this processing ends. The details of the hold notification pressing process (S5505) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the on-hold notice effect is not being executed (S5504: No), a process according to the other pressing timing is executed (S5506), and the process ends. The other pressing timing is, for example, a timing at which the back image can be changed. In the fourth control example, as described above, a plurality of back images are defined, and the back type is switched each time the player operates the frame button 22 in the fluctuation stop state. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  When it is determined in the process of S5501 that pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected (S5501: No), next, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of pressing additional effect (S5507), and pressing If it is determined that it is the end timing of the additional effect (S5507: Yes), it is then determined whether the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508). When it is determined that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5508: No), the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 in the pressed-over effect, and the pressed-over effect is ended (the player Since this means that the player has not participated in the press addition effect of this time, 1 is added to the value of the participation level counter 223 df to update it (S 5509), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5507, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the pressed additional effect (S5507: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5508 that the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5508: Yes) This process is ended without executing the process of.

  By executing the processing of S5507 to S5509, it is possible to accumulate the degree of participation of the player for the pressed additional effect over a plurality of additional effects. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the additional effect for pressing according to the player's participation degree.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the details of the additional effect production pressing process (S5503) will be described. As described above, the during-addition effect pressing process (S5503) is a process for causing the additional value corresponding to the operation timing of the frame button 22 to be added to the remaining number display area D1.

  When the addition effect pressing process (S5503) is started, it is first determined whether the pressed flag 223dd is on (S5601). If it is determined that the flag is on (S5601: Yes), Since the additional value has already been displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in the pressed additional effect and there is no need to execute a new additional, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5601 that the pressed flag 223dd is off (S5601: Yes), then the pressing period set in the pressing period table storage area is read (S5602), and the reading is performed Among the pressing periods, the additional value corresponding to the value of the pressing period timer 223db is read (S5603). Next, it is determined whether the read additional value is 0 (S5604), and if it is not 0 (S5604), an effect is displayed to display the read additional value in the remaining number display area D1 (S5605).

  After the process of S5605, the additional value read in the process of S5603 is added to the number stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p to update (S5606), and the process proceeds to S5608. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5604 that the read-out added value is 0 (S5604: Yes), an add-on failure effect (see FIG. 308 (a)) for notifying that the add-up has failed is set (S5607) ), The process proceeds to S5608.

  In the process of S5608 executed after the process of S5606 or S5607, the pressed flag 223dd is set to ON (S5608), the value of the participation degree counter 223df is reset to 0 (S5609), and this process is performed. Finish. By executing the pressing process during the additional effect (see FIG. 317), when the additional pressing effect is generated, the additional value corresponding to the position where the scroll bar D3a is displayed is displayed in the remaining number display area D1. It can be displayed by adding to the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect without a sense of discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the details of the hold notification pressing process (S5505) will be described. As described above, the hold notification pressing process (S5505) is a process for executing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 in the hold notification effect. In this holding advance notice processing (S5505), it is first determined whether it is a depression period (see FIG. 305 (a)) in the hold announcement effect (S5701), and if it is not a depression period (S5701: No), then It is determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (see FIG. 306 (a)) (S5702).

  If it is determined in the process of S5702 that the continuous hitting period is not reached (S5702: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5702 that the continuous hitting period is in progress (S5702: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting counter 223dc is updated by subtracting 1 (S5703), and the updated counter value is 0? Is determined (S5704). Then, if it is determined that the updated counter value has become 0 (S5704: Yes), a development effect (see FIG. 306 (b)) in which the egg pattern moves to the house Ds1c is set (S5705). End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5704 that the value of the consecutive hit counter 223dc after update is 1 or more (S5704: No), the process of S5705 is skipped, and the present process is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in the process of S5701 that the present is a pressing period (S5701), first, at the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is designated in the third symbol display device 81 (tray Ds1b is displayed immediately below The winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol is read out from the winning information storage area 223a (S5706). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning information within the range designated by pressing of the frame button 22 includes the winning information for generating the reach effect (S5707). In addition, reach production refers to any of out-of-normal reach, out-of-super reach A, B, per-normal reach, and per-super reach A to C.

  If it is determined in the process of S5707 that the designated range includes the winning information for which the reach effect is generated (S5707: Yes), then, with respect to the holding symbol corresponding to the winning information for which the reach is generated. The egg pattern is displayed (the reserved pattern lays the egg) to set the effect (S5708). Then, the continuous hitting period for executing the continuous hitting effect which urges the continuous hitting of the frame button 22 is set (S5709), the value corresponding to the value of the continuous hitting counter 223dc is set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5707 that the designated range does not include the winning information for generating the reach effect (S5707: No), the on-hold notice flag 223de is displayed to indicate the end of the on-hold notice effect. It sets to OFF (S5711) and this processing is ended.

  By executing the hold previewing pressing process (see FIG. 318), when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the holding notice rendering, it is possible to set an appropriate rendering mode according to the pressing timing. Further, as described above, in this control example, the range of the hold symbol for executing the hold notice effect can be selected by the operation of the player. As a result, when a notice (display of an egg symbol) is not given to the holding symbol within the selection range, it is possible that there is a high expectation symbol among the holding symbols outside the player's selection range. It can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel effect that a big hit can be expected to the holding ball even when the holding preview effect is not generated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 319, details of the command determination process 4 executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in the first control example will be described. Among the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, the command determination process in the first control example is performed in each process of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311, S4313 to S4315 and S4319 (see FIG. 238). The same processing as the processing of each of S4301 to S4306, S4309 to S4311 to S4315, and S4319) is executed.

  In command judgment processing 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4306 (S4303: Yes), fluctuation start of the second special symbol Is executed (S4361), and this processing is ended. The details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described later with reference to FIG. In command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 319) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that a winning command has been received in the processing of S4311 (S4311: Yes), based on the winning information notified by the winning command. Then, a holding notice setting process for judging the execution of the holding notice is executed (S4362), and this process is ended. The details of the suspension notice setting process (S4362) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S4315 that neither the special view 1 standby command nor the special view 2 standby command has been received (S4315: No), it is determined whether the remaining certainty number change command has been received (S4363) ) If the remaining certainty variation count command is received (S4363), the remaining certainty variation count command processing for executing the process according to the number notified by the remaining certainty variation count command is executed (S4364) to execute this process. finish. The details of the remaining certainty number change command process (S4364) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S4363 that the remaining certainty number command has not been received (S4363: No), then at least one of the special figure 1 determination command or the special figure 2 determination command is received or not. If it is determined (S4364) and at least one of the special figure 1 determination command or the special figure 2 determination command has been received (S4364: Yes), the final display of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol according to the command Is executed (S4364), and this process ends. The details of the confirmation command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the details of the special view 2 fluctuation start process (S4361) will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the details of the special view 2 change start process. When this special view 2 change start process (see FIG. 320) is started, first, the special view 2 change start flag 223e is set to ON (S4371), and then notified by the received special view 2 change pattern command. The fluctuation pattern is extracted (S4372).

  When the processing of S4372 is completed, it is then determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4373). If the latent state is the latent state (S4373: Yes), it is determined whether or not the depression additional effect is to be set. An additional effect setting process (S4374) is performed (S4374), and the process proceeds to S4376. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4373 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4373: No), a display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S4372 is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. , Shift the process to S4376. In the process of S4376, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern selected is set (S4376), and the process is ended.

  Next, details of the additional effect setting process (S4374) will be described with reference to FIG. This pressing addition effect setting process (S4374) is a process for determining execution of the pressing addition effect in the latent state, as described above.

  When the additional effect setting process (see FIG. 321) is started, it is first determined whether or not the lottery of the second special symbol this time is the lottery result of the stop type of the small hit (S4381), not the stop type of the small hit If it is determined that (S4381: No), then the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern command is received when the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is being set, and the remaining number of definite variations is 5 or less It is determined whether it is (S4382). In the process of S4382, if the setting of the non-display mode is not in progress or the remaining number of definite variations is 6 or more (S4382: No), the process proceeds to S4391.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4382, when it is determined that the non-display mode is set and the remaining number of probability variations is 5 or less (S4382: Yes), the second lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit E ~ It is determined whether it is a lottery result that is the G stop type (S4383), and when it is determined that none of the jackpots E to G (S4383: No), the process proceeds to S4391. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4383 that any of the jackpots E to G (S4383: Yes), as a table for determining the setting of the press-over effect, for the jackpot from the additional effect selection table 222da The table 222da3 is read out (S4384). Next, the difference between the number of latent accuracies 120 given after the big hit and the number of times stored in the effect probability variation storage area 223p is calculated (S4385), and the process proceeds to S4391.

  If it is determined in the process of S4381 that the current stop type is a small hit (S4381: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (S4386), If the value of the participation degree counter 223df is larger than 5 (S4386: Yes), the participation degree normal table 222da1 is read out from the additional effect selection table 222da as a table for determining the setting of the pressed additional effect (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent state stored in the remaining number of variations in the number of times area 223o and the remaining number of latent states on the display stored in the number of effects of variation in presentation area 223p is calculated. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4386 that the value of the participation degree counter 223df is less than 5 (S4386: No), the participation degree low table 222da1 is read out from the additional effect selection table 222da (S4387). Next, the difference between the remaining number of actual latent state stored in the remaining number of variations in the number of times area 223o and the remaining number of latent states on the display stored in the number of effects of variation in presentation area 223p is calculated. Migrate to

  In the processing of S4391 executed after any one of S4385, S4388, and S4391, the difference calculated by the processing of any of S4385, S4388, and S4391, and the processing of any of S4384, S4387, and S4388. Based on the read-out table, the mode of any of the push-over effect (any of the over-effect, the normal mode, and the special mode) is specified (S4391), and the process proceeds to S4392.

  In the process of S4392, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined (S4392), and when the execution of the pressing addition effect is determined (S4392: Yes), the mode of the pressing addition effect determined this time is The corresponding pressing period is read out from the pressing period table 222db (see FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b)) and is set in the pressing period storage area 223da (S4393). The depression period set here is referred to when the player's operation (depression) on the frame button 22 is detected during the execution of the depression addition effect determined to be performed this time, and the addition corresponding to the operation (depression) timing is performed. The value is additionally displayed on the remaining number display area D1. As a result, the player can actively operate (press) the frame button 22 in anticipation that the number of remaining latent states on the display will be added. You can improve your willingness to participate. After the processing of S4393, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to OFF (S4394), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4392 that the execution of the press addition effect is not determined (S4392: No), the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is specified from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. (S4395), this processing ends. By executing this additional effect setting process, it is possible to select the appropriate additional additional effect according to the player's past participation in the additional effect, the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the like.

  In this control example, in the latent state, only when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a large hit E to G, it is configured to set the pressing addition effect, but it is not limited to this . For example, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, it may be possible to set the pressing addition effect. This can increase the freedom of presentation.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 322, the details of the suspension notice setting process (S4362) will be described. As described above, the on-hold notice setting process (S4362) is a process for determining execution of on-hold notice based on the winning information notified by the win command. When the pre-hold setting process (S4362) is executed, it is first determined whether the gaming state is in the latent state (S5801), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in the latent state (S5801), The processing of S5802 to S5809 for setting the advance effect is skipped, and the present processing ends. In addition, it is because the main fluctuation | variation in a latent state is a fluctuation display of 2 special symbols which can not be stored on hold that a latent advance notice production is not performed in a latent state. For this reason, in the latent state, in most cases, the holding ball of the first special symbol is 0, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the holding advance notice. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the latent state can be reduced by skipping the execution judgment itself of the suspension notice.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5801 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (the normal state or the definite change state) (S5801: No), then whether the flag 223de on hold is on or not If it is judged (S5802) whether or not the pending advance announcement effect is already being executed (S5802), and if it is decided that the pending advance announcement flag 223de is on (is already under execution of the pending advance announcement effect) (S5802) : Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5802 that the on-hold notice flag 223de is off (S5802: No), then the winning information of the first special symbol is read out from the winning information storage area 223a (S5803) It is determined whether or not the read-out winning information includes the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect occurs (S5804).

  When it is determined in the process of S5804 that the prize information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which reach effect is generated is included (S5804: Yes), as a table for determining execution of the on-hold notice effect, for reach-when available The table is read out from the suspension notice determination table 222dc (see FIG. 315) to determine the execution of the suspension notice, and the process proceeds to S5807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5804 that the winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect is generated is not included (S5804: No), there is no reach as a table for determining the execution of the on-hold notice effect. The time table is read out from the on-hold notice determination table 222dc to determine the execution of the on-hold notice, and the process proceeds to S5807.

  In the process of S5807 executed after the process of S5805 or S5806, it is determined whether or not the execution of the on-hold notice effect is determined in the process of S5805 or S5806 (S5807), and it is determined that the on-off notice effect is determined If it is determined (S5807: Yes), the flag 223de for holding notification is set to ON (S5808). Next, an effect (see FIG. 305 (a)) prompting the user to press the frame button 22 is set (S5809), and the present process is ended.

  By executing the on-hold notice setting process, it is possible to set on-off notice effect at an appropriate ratio according to the number of balls held and the contents of each on-hold ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the details of the remaining certainty number-of-variations command processing (S4364) will be described. As described above, the remaining certainty number change command process (S4364) is a process for executing control in accordance with the certainty change number notified by the remaining certainty change number command. When the remaining certainty variation command processing (S4364) is started, first, the remaining certainty variation count notified by the remaining certainty variation count command is stored in the remaining certainty variation number area 223o (S5851), and then, the current gaming state is latent It is determined whether it is a state (S5852).

  If it is determined in the process of S5852 that the gaming state is not the latent state (S5852: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5852 that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), then whether the non-display setting flag 223dg is on or not (non-display mode is set or not) (S5853) and if the non-display setting flag 223dg is off (S5853), the non-display setting process for executing determination of whether or not to set the non-display mode is executed (S5861) ), End this processing. The details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5853 that the non-display setting flag 223dg is on (S5854), the non-display mode (refer to FIG. 309 (b)) is set. It is determined whether the number of remaining certainty changes stored in the remaining certainty number change area 223o in the process is 5 or less (S5854). If it is determined in the process of S5854 that the number of remaining variation is 6 or more (S5854: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining certainty variation number is 5 or less (S5854: Yes), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is any of jackpot E to G (S5855), jackpot E ~ If it is determined that G is not any (S5855: No), then whether the remaining certainty number of changes is 0 or not (whether the number of times stored in the remaining certain number of times change area 223o is zero) It discriminates (S5856).

  If it is determined in the process of S5856 that the number of remaining probability variations is not 0 (S5856: No), this process is ended as it is to continue the non-display mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5856 that the remaining number of probability variations is 0 (S5856: Yes), this means that the latent state in which the non-display mode is set has ended, so the end effect of the non-display mode (See FIG. 310 (a)) is set, the non-display setting flag 223dg is set to off (S5858), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5855 that the present lottery result is any of the jackpots E to G (S5855: Yes), since 120 latent states are set after the jackpot, first of all, , Set the execution of the special addition effect (see FIG. 310 (b)) (S5859), and then overwrite 100 times on the effect probability variation number area 223p, and set the non-display setting flag 223dg to off ( S5860), the process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, when the non-display mode is set, the second remaining number of times (the value of the probability variation counter 203k) of the actual latent state is within the predetermined number of times (five times). When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol (ie, when the number of remaining in the latent state is updated to 120 immediately before the latent state is over), a special superimposing of a mode different from the normal pressing and adding effect It is configured to execute an effect (special additional effect). As a result, the player who confirms the special addition effect can be made to win a big hit immediately before the actual number of remaining times becomes 0, and it can be recognized that the latent state is newly set. Can give greater pleasure to

  Next, the details of the non-display setting process (S5861) will be described with reference to FIG. The non-display setting process (S5861) is a process for executing determination of whether or not to set the non-display mode, as described above. As shown in FIG. 324, when the non-display setting process is executed, it is first determined whether the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 or not (S5891), and is 1 or more. If it is determined (S5891: No), the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is decremented by 1 (S5892), and the remaining number display area D1 is displayed according to the storage value of the effect probability variation number area 223p after subtraction. The number of times of display is updated (S5893), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5891 that the remaining number stored in the effect probability variation number area 223p is 0 (S5891: Yes), the actual remaining number stored in the remaining probability variation number area 223o is It is determined whether or not it is 0 times (S5894), and if the actual remaining number is not 0 times (S58994: No), the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) is set (S5895) The setting flag 223dg is set to on (S5896), and the process ends. By setting the non-display mode, it is possible to make it impossible to know when the latent state ends, so that the player can be tense in the remaining latent state games.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5894 that the remaining number of actual latent states stored in the remaining number of times of variation area 223o is 0 (S5894: Yes), on the display at the end timing of the latent state. Since the remaining number of times also means being updated to 0 times, a normal end effect (see FIG. 188 (a)) is set (S5897), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the non-display setting process in the fourth control example, the non-display mode is set if the latent state does not end when the number of remaining times on the display becomes zero. This makes it possible to form a state in which the latent state does not know how long it lasts. Therefore, while the non-display mode is set, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 325, details of the confirmation command processing (S4366) will be described. The confirmation command process (S4366) is a process for setting the finalized display of the third symbol as described above. When this confirmation command process (see FIG. 325) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 determination command is received (S5831), and it is determined that the special figure 1 determination command is received. (S5831), the final display of the first special symbol is set (S5832). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-hold notice flag 223de is on (S5833), and if it is determined on (on S5833: Yes), the on-hold notice effect is displayed while the variable display is set. It is determined whether the process has ended (S5834). In the process of S5834, when it is determined that the on-hold notice effect is finished (S5834: Yes), the on-hold in-progress flag 223de is set to off (S5835), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5833, when it is determined that the pending announcement flag 223de is off (S5833: No), or when it is determined that the pending announcement effect is continuing in the process of S5834 (S5834: No) ), This processing ends. When it is determined in the process of S5831 that the received confirmation command is the special figure 2 confirmation command (S5831: No), the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set (S5836), and the present process is ended. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the on-hold notice effect as the entertaining effect in the normal state or the positive change state. In this on-hold notice effect, a on-hold symbol for executing a notice can be selected by an operation on the frame button 22 of the player.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing on-hold notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of the pending variable display. In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to change the color and shape of the reserved symbol, thereby suggesting an expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big win, before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the player's sense of expectation.

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, when a holding advance notice effect occurs, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the holding pattern which is not the target of the holding advance notice. This is because it was usual to set a holding advance notice effect for a holding symbol corresponding to a holding ball with a high degree of expectation in the holding.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, it is possible to designate the range of the suspension symbol for executing the suspension notice effect. Further, the configuration is such that the ratio of executing the on-hold notice effect is higher if the on-hold ball having a high degree of expectation to be a big hit is included. This corresponds to a reserved symbol outside the range designated by the player in the case where the reserved announcement effect is not set for the reserved symbol in the designated range or when the reserved announcement attraction in the aspect with a low degree of expectation is executed. It can be expected to be a big hit against the holding ball. Therefore, when a high-preceding reservation notice effect occurs in the selection range, the user can have a feeling of expectation of becoming a big hit against the holding ball corresponding to the holding symbol for which the pre-notice warning has been generated, and does not generate a reservation notice? It is possible to provide a novel effect of being able to have a sense of expectation with respect to the holding ball outside the selection range when a low-predicted holding notice occurs.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the remaining number of latent states displayed in the remaining number display area D1 in accordance with the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 as a type of pressed additional effect executed in the latent state. There is an effect to add the number of times.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, one having operation means such as an operation button operable by the player and capable of executing an operation effect for prompting the player to operate the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect is there. In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated or a hit is notified, etc. to improve the player's interest.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined lottery, the player's operation result with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect. It was irrelevant to whether or not to be notified. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, there is provided a case where there is a difference between the actual remaining number of latent states and the remaining number on the display. Then, when the pressing addition effect is executed, the different displaying value is additionally displayed according to the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 in a range where the remaining number on the display does not exceed the actual remaining number. And As a result, since the remaining number of additions on the display can be varied according to the operation timing of the player, it is possible to make the player participate in the additional effect more positively (set the timing of the frame button 22). . Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the fourth control example, the number of remaining latent states is set to the non-display mode in which the number of remaining latent states is not displayed in the latent state, and the actual number of remaining latent states is set. If the second special symbol has become a big hit within a predetermined number of times (5 times) (the latent state is set anew 120 times), it is possible to execute a special overlay effect of an aspect different from the normal overlay effect Configured.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which sets an advantageous state more advantageous than the normal state over a predetermined number of times of drawing based on a predetermined trigger such as a win. In such a conventional game machine, by performing an effect of a mode in which it is difficult to know how long the advantageous state lasts when it shifts to the advantageous state, a sense of expectation for a longer lasting advantageous state is realized. Some are trying to improve interest.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, it is not clear at which stage of the advantageous state the advantageous state is reset when the advantageous state is a predetermined trigger such as a hit in the advantageous state and the advantageous state is reset (overwritten). There is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the fourth control example, since the special overlay effect is provided which is executed only when the remaining number of times of latent determination is 5 or less, the player who confirms the special overlay effect On the other hand, it can be clearly recognized that the latent state has been added near the end of the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to bring greater joy to the player who recognizes that he has won the jackpot in a timely manner. In addition, since the remaining number of latent states at the time of the jackpot becomes clear, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fourth control example, the special addition effect is executed only when the non-display mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the remaining number is displayed in the remaining number display area D1, if the actual number of remaining latent states (the value stored in the remaining probability change number area 223o) is five or less, a special different from normal It is good also as composition which performs additional production. As described above, in the fourth control example, there may be a difference between the number of remaining latent states on the display and the number of remaining actual latent states. That is, even if the remaining number on the display is less than five, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the actual remaining number is less than five. Therefore, even if the remaining number on the display is a big hit under the condition of 5 or less, even if the remaining number on the display is added, the actual remaining number is 5 or less (that is, just before the end of the latent state) For example, it may be unclear whether the actual remaining number of times is sufficient, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, if the actual number of remaining times is five or less, the special superimposing effect is executed regardless of whether the non-display mode is set or not, so that it is just before the end of the latent state When the jackpot is won, the player can be made to recognize that fact. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, according to whether the non-display mode is set, it is good also as a structure which changes the production | presentation aspect of special top effect. That is, in the case where the non-display mode is not set, for example, an effect may be performed in which the traveling character 811 is enlarged and 100 times is added to the remaining number displayed in the remaining number display area D1. . By performing different special addition effects depending on whether or not the non-display mode is set, it is possible to perform more natural flow effects in each display mode. Also, the presentation mode can be diversified.

  In the fourth control example, it is configured to notify whether or not the symbol of the egg moves to the house Ds 1 c by the effect of prompting the player to hit the frame button 22 in the holding advance notice effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, the effect of moving to the house Ds1 c may be omitted, and the effect of performing the aspect that the super reach is determined if the egg is broken by the continuous hit may be performed. That is, it may be configured to collectively notify all the egg patterns whether or not the player will develop into the super reach by one continuous hit by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make an effect that is easier to understand.

  In the fourth control example, when the on-hold notice effect is generated and the player does not operate (depress) the frame button 22, the range of the on-hold symbol for performing on-off notice is automatically determined. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the player does not operate (press) the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the occurrence of the on-hold notice effect, the on-off notice effect itself may be ended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who does not want to see the hold notification effect (purely enjoy the variable display). That is, when the expectation of the jackpot is suggested by the holding advance presentation effect, there is a possibility that the user can not enjoy the variable display corresponding to the holding ball with the low expectation. Therefore, the player can select not only the range of the holding symbol for executing the holding notification effect but also whether or not to perform the holding notification effect itself, so that the variation display corresponding to each holding symbol is expected. I can have a feeling. Therefore, the needs of each player can be widely met.

  In this fourth control example, the configuration is suggested to indicate the degree of expectation of each suspension symbol depending on whether or not the suspension symbol lays an egg and whether or not the egg is broken, but the mode of the suspension notice effect is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. The holding symbol may be changed to a different mode according to the degree of expectation of the corresponding holding ball, for example, the configuration of changing the color of the holding symbol in the range selected by the player according to the degree of expectation Good. More specifically, for example, the expectation is set to increase in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow. Then, when the player selects a hold symbol for performing hold notification effect, the hold symbol of the selection range is changed to white. Then, when the player continuously strikes the frame button 22, the color of each holding symbol may be changed. In this case, it may be determined in advance at the start of the hold notification or when the player selects the hold symbol, to what extent the color changes according to the number of times of continuous hitting for each hold symbol. Specifically, for example, when the holding design corresponding to the holding ball which becomes the variation pattern of the short out, the normal reach, and the variation pattern of the hit super reach A is selected, the holding symbol corresponding to the short out is from white to another color Set so as not to change, the holding symbol corresponding to the out of the normal reach is set to change up to yellow according to the number of consecutive strokes (white → blue → changes in the order of yellow), hold for the corresponding Super Reach A The design may be set so as to change up to iridescent in accordance with the number of consecutive hits (change in the order of white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player positively perform a continuous hit to the player, looking forward to which color each reserved symbol changes. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

First Modification of First Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 331, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modified example of the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the same (0.5 second) fluctuation time is set regardless of the second special symbol lottery result. It was a composition. Thereby, it is set as the structure which aims at efficiency improvement of the game in a latent state.

  On the other hand, in the first modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is made different according to the remaining number of times of the latent state. Then, in the first half of the latent state, a relatively short fluctuation time is easily set, and in the second half, a relatively long fluctuation time is easily set. As a result, in the first half of the latent state, the small hit or big hit interval becomes short, and it becomes possible to increase the prize ball in a relatively short time, while in the second half of the latent state, the small hit or the big hit Interval can be made longer, and the increase width of the winning balls can be made relatively gentle. Therefore, since it is possible to add waves to how to increase the number of winning balls, it is possible to give a sharp impression on the balls. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous.

  The first modification of the first control example is different from the first control example in the configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed, This is a point that the partial process executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is changed. The other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described first. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of First Modification of First Control Example
First, an electrical configuration in a first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328. FIG. 327 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in the first modification of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (a), the variation pattern scenario table 202ea is added to the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in the first modification with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first control example (see FIG. 191). Are different in that they Further, in the present modification, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 326 (b). FIG. 326 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in this control example. As shown in FIG. 326 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first modification is replaced with the latent confirmation table 202f4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 194) in the first control example. A latent (first half) table 202f4a and a latent (second half) table 202f4b are provided.

  The latent confirmation (first half) table 202f4a is a table to be referred to in order to select a variation pattern in the first half of the latent state (when the 1st to 50th special symbol lottery is executed) The second half table 202 f 4 b is a table to be referred to in the second half of the latent state (when the 51st to 120th special symbol lottery is executed). The details of the latent (second half) table 202 f 4 b will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (a). The prescribed contents of the latent confirmation (first half) table 202f4a are the same as the latent confirmation table 202f4 (see FIG. 196 (b)) in the first control example, and 0 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol A variation time of 5 seconds is selected. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 327 (b) shows the defined contents of the latent (second half) table 202f4b. Among them, the prescribed content for the first special symbol drawing is the same as the latent (first half) table 202f4a (and the latent table 202f4 in the first control example), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . In addition, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result. That is, when it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the short circuit fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the entire range (0-198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and the lottery of the second special symbol If the small hit in the small type short fluctuation (2 seconds) is selected in the full range (0 to 198) of the possible value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and it is out in the lottery of the second special symbol Is out of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1, and a short variation (2 seconds) is selected.

  Thus, when the latent (second half) table 202f4b is referred to, the variation time is longer (0.5 seconds to 2 seconds) than when the latent (first half) table 202f4a is referred to. By doing this, in the second half (51 times to 120 times) of the latent state, it is possible to lengthen the small hit or big hit interval. Therefore, in the first half of the latent state, the holding balls tend to increase, and in the second half, the increase in holding balls becomes moderate, so it is possible to add waves to how to increase the holding balls, and the game becomes monotonous. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 327 (b). The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea is a table in which the number of drawing times of the special symbol after the big hit ends and the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. When selecting a fluctuation pattern, a table for selecting a fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea.

  As shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the variation pattern regardless of the number of drawing the special symbol from the end of the jackpot when the normal state is set, A normal table A 202 f 1 is associated as a selection table. For this reason, when the normal state is set after the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the table A 202 f 1 for normal use.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when a probability change state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the number of lottery times of the special symbol after the big hit is within the range of 1 to 120, the table for probability change A table 202 f 1 for normal use is defined in association with 202 f 3 in association with a special symbol drawing number 121 or later. Therefore, the table 202f3 for probability change is referred to as a table for selecting a variation pattern selection table when the number of lottery times of the special symbol is 120 times or less, and the table A202f1 for normal is referred to in the case of 121 times or more. Ru.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 327 (b), when the latent state is set as the gaming state after the big hit, the latent probability (first half) with respect to the range where the number of lottery after the big hit ends is 1 to 50. Table 202f4a is defined in association, and the number of drawing times of special symbols is in the range of 51 to 120, the table for latent (second half) is defined in association, and the range of 121, 122 is usually defined The table for the table B 202 f 2 is defined in association with each other, and the table for the normal use A 202 f 1 is defined in association with the table for 123 and subsequent ones.

  Thereby, in the first half of the latent state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (first half) table 202 f 4 a where the short fluctuation time is easy to be determined, so the small hit or big hit interval can be shortened. it can. Therefore, the increase speed of the winning balls can be improved in the first half of the latent state. On the other hand, in the second half of the latent state, the variation pattern can be determined with reference to the latent (second half) table 202 f 4 b where long variation time is difficult to determine, so the small hitting or big hitting interval becomes long. Therefore, in the second half of the latent state, the increase speed of the winning balls can be made slow, so that the degree of increase of the winning balls can be varied. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern can be selected with reference to the table B 202 f 2 for the normal symbol after the completion of the latent state, it is possible to select the result of the latent state as in the first control example. Sufficient presentation time for display can be secured. Furthermore, when the number of times of drawing of the special symbol exceeds 123 times, the table A 202 f 1 for normal use is referred to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 203 in the first modification has a scenario storage area 203ea and a lottery number counter 203eb added to the configuration (see FIG. 198) of the RAM 203 in the first control example. It is different.

  The scenario storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing a scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big win among the scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202ea. In the scenario storage area 203ea, a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit at the end of the big hit is stored (see S2351 in FIG. 331). At the start of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ea.

  The lottery number counter 203eb is a counter for counting the lottery number of the special symbol that is executed after the jackpot is completed. When the variation pattern selection table is selected from the scenario storage area 203ea, the number of lottery times of the special symbol is determined by the value of the lottery number counter 203eb, and the variation pattern selection table is selected.

<About control processing of main controller in first modification of first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the first modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 331. First, with reference to FIG. 329, first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (FIG. 3) executed in the first modification instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (see FIG. 212) in the first control example. 329).

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification, in each of S501 to S503 and S505 to S508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the first control example The same processing as each processing of S501 to S503 (see FIG. 212) and S505 to S508 is performed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see FIG. 329) in the present modification, when the process of S503 ends, next, from the scenario storage area 203ea, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb. Are read out (S551), and the process proceeds to S505. The variation pattern is selected by the process of S505 using the variation pattern selection table read out here. Although illustration is omitted, even in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process, when the variation pattern selection table is read out, the same process as this S551 is executed to determine the table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 330, a game state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) executed in the first modification instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 213) in the first control example will be described. Of the gaming state update processing 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modification of the first control example, in each processing of S601 to S608, S601 to S601 of the gaming state update processing (see FIG. 213) in the first control example. The same process as each process of S608 is performed.

  Further, in the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330) in the first modified example, after the process of S608, the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the lottery number counter 203eb (S651), and this process is ended. In the gaming state update process 5 (see FIG. 330), by updating the value of the lottery number counter 203eb every time, it is possible to make the value of the lottery number counter 203eb always match the lottery number of the special symbol executed after a big hit. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 331, the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 331) executed in the first modification example instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 230) in the first control example will be described. In the respective processes of S2301 to S2308 among the big hit end process 5 (see FIG. 331), the same processes as the processes of S2301 to S2308 in the big hit control process of the first control example (see FIG. .

  Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 331) in the first modification, when the process of S2308 is ended, next, the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the gaming state set in the process of S2302 to S2306 is changed to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ea , And is set in the scenario storage area 203ea (S2351). Next, the value of the lottery number counter 203eb is reset to 0 (S2352), and this processing is ended. By this jackpot end processing 5 (see FIG. 331), it is possible to set an appropriate variation pattern scenario according to the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first control example is in the first half of the latent state (1 to 50 lottery numbers after the big hit) or in the second half (51 lottery numbers after the big hit) The variation pattern selection table to be referred to is selected to select the variation pattern depending on whether it is the number of times. The second half of the latent state is configured to be more likely to select a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time than the first half of the latent state. This makes it possible to make small hit or big hit intervals different between the first half and the second half of the latent state, and to increase the possibility that the first half will be a small hit or big hit at a short interval. That is, in the first half of the latent state, the increase speed of the winning balls can be increased, and in the second half, the increase speed of the winning balls can be relatively slow. Therefore, since the increase speed of the winning balls can be varied, it is possible to add waves to how to increase the winning balls. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game in the latent state becomes monotonous. In addition, since the increase speed of the winning balls is faster in the first half of the latent state, the player's expectation for the first half of the latent state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the jackpot win in the first half of the latent state (before entering the second half) and to play the game in the first half of the latent state again. Thus, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the first modification, a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is always set when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the first half of the latent state, and the second special symbol is displayed in the second half of the latent state Although the variation time of 2 seconds is always set when the lottery is executed, it is not limited to this. For example, even in the first half of the latent state, the variation time of 2 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). Similarly, even in the case of a latent condition, a variation time of 0.5 seconds may be set at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%). This makes it difficult to determine from the fluctuation time whether it is the first half or the second half of the latent state, so even when the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, the game is played expecting it to be the first half be able to.

Second Modification of First Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification of the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, referring to the screen display selection table 222b (refer to FIG. 200), the third symbol display based on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (setting status of each standby flag) It is configured to set the display content (screen display type) to be displayed on the device 81, and in the normal state, it is in the fluctuation status of the second special symbol which is a minor fluctuation (setting status of special figure 2 wait flag 223t) Regardless of the fact that the special figure 1 wait flag 223s is set to ON, which indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed since the change of the first special symbol, which is the main change, is stopped regardless of whether the demonstration display is performed, It was configured to display the main fluctuation reliably.

  Here, in the first control example described above, in the normal state, that is, in the state where left hitting is performed, the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol which is the sub change continues to be stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 Met. This is because the second ball entrance 1640 where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is provided in the right hitting area.

  As described above, when the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small area Dm1 while being stopped, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 where the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When the pachinko machine 10 is broken by looking at the symbol displayed in the small area Dm1 where the change is not started, there is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the second modification, the special view 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON, which indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed since the second special symbol variation, which is a secondary change, has stopped during normal condition. In this case, the sub-variation demonstration display (special figure 2 demonstration display) is configured to be executed in the small area Dm1. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 in which simultaneous change is executed, it becomes possible to suppress the situation where the symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (second special symbol) on the sub change side continues to be displayed while stopped. It is possible to suppress the feeling of incongruity in the contents of the game.

  The second modification of the first control example is different from the first control example in the configuration in that the configuration of the RAM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The first control is performed for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114. It is identical to the pachinko machine 10 in the example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the secondary variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed by the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a sub variation demonstration display (second special symbol demonstration display) displayed in the small area Dm1 in a normal state (or a positive change state).

  As shown in FIG. 332, in the normal state (or positive change state), the first special symbol is in a state of variation, and the second special symbol is not in a predetermined period (30 seconds in this modification). In the state, instead of the stop display (see FIG. 182) indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1, “in-game” indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuated as a demonstration display of sub change Is displayed. As described above, by executing the display other than the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the small area Dm1 as the sub-variation demonstration display, it is possible to execute the left strike game (in spite of executing the game) Gives the player a sense of discomfort by continuously displaying the symbol (the second special symbol) for which the variation is not executed despite the fact that the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the contents of the demonstration display for secondary variation (demonstration display for the second special symbol) can be set based on the variation status of the first special symbol (setting status of the special figure 1 standby flag 223s). As shown in 332, when the first special symbol is changing (when the special figure 1 standby flag 223s is set to off), it is indicated that the first special symbol which is the main fluctuation is changing Since the contents to be displayed are displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Second Modification of First Control Example
An electrical configuration in a second modified example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 333 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the screen display selection 3 table 222b in the second modified example of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 333, the screen display selection 3 table 222 b in the second modification is in the normal state or the probability change state in the gaming state with respect to the screen display selection table 222 b (see FIG. 200) in the first control example. And the special display 1 standby flag 223s is set to OFF, and the special display 2 standby flag 223t is set to ON, so that the screen display type defined in correspondence with the state is changed. There is. The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the first control example described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 333, when the gaming state is the normal state or the definite variation state, the special view 1 standby flag 223 s is set to OFF, and the special view 2 standby flag 223 t is set to ON. “Special figure 2 demonstration display” is defined correspondingly as a display type. This "special figure 2 demonstration display" is a screen display type in which the "in-game" display (see FIG. 332) is executed with the small area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as the demonstration display area of the second special symbol. .

  As described above, in the second modification, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of two types of special symbols is simultaneously executed, one of the two types of special symbols (which is advantageous for the player) The special symbol is variably displayed as the main variation using most of the third symbol display device 81, and the other special symbol (special symbol which is more disadvantageous than the main variation for the player) is a part of the third symbol display device 81 ' An area in which the fluctuation display of the sub fluctuation is executed (sub fluctuation display area) when the configuration in which the fluctuation display is performed as the sub fluctuation using (an area smaller than the display area in which the fluctuation display of the main fluctuation is executed) is used Since the demonstration display corresponding to the sub fluctuation can be executed at this time, it is possible to prevent the situation where the symbol indicating the lottery result of the sub fluctuation is stopped and displayed for a long time (30 seconds or more). Give It is possible to suppress the door. Further, the player can be made to gaze at the fluctuation display (effect display) corresponding to the main fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

  Furthermore, by setting the contents of the demonstration display to be executed for the sub-variation (the second special symbol) based on the variation situation of the main variation (the first special symbol), the sub-variation (the second special symbol) is displayed It is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation state of the main fluctuation (first special symbol) by using the area to be played (the sub fluctuation display area). Therefore, in the state where the demonstration display is executed in the sub variable region, the display regarding the main variation can be performed using all (mostly) of the third symbol display device 81, and the player can be provided with a comprehensible effect be able to.

  In the second modification, the second special symbol demonstration display is executed instead of the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol which is the sub change, but even if other configurations are used Well, for example, the stop symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol may be reduced and displayed, and the second special symbol demonstration display may be executed in the empty space of the sub variation display area, or the sub variation display area You may use the structure which performs a 2nd special symbol demo display in an area | region different from.

  Further, in the second modification, the configuration of the second special symbol demonstration display (sub change demonstration display) in the normal state or the positive change state in which the first special symbol is main change and the second special symbol is sub change is described. However, for example, it is preferable to use the same configuration even in the latent state in which the second special symbol is the main change and the first special symbol is the sub change. In this case, the small area Dm1 of the third symbol display area 81 is set as the variable display area of the first special symbol, and the small area Dm1 is set as the secondary change display area regardless of the gaming state. It is possible to share display data and display control, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of display control on the third symbol display device 81.

First Modification of Fourth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 334 to 350, a first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described. In the fourth control example described above, when there is a difference between the actual number of remaining latent states and the remaining number on the display, the remaining number on the display is additionally displayed, and the variation effect of the special symbol is displayed. Set the non-display mode (see FIG. 309 (b)) when the press addition effect to be executed together and the number of remaining times on display are 0 and the actual number of remaining times is not 0 (one or more). When the non-display mode is set, it is configured to have a special additional effect to be performed when the actual number of remaining latent states is a large number of hits within a predetermined number of times (five times), An effect of performing addition of the remaining number on the display at various timings during the latent state was executed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific gaming state (latency state) in which the player is advantageous is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times), and is updated and managed by the main control device 110 There is a method of making a difference between the actual number of remaining times and the remaining number of times displayed on the third symbol display 81 so as to make it difficult for the player to know how long the specific gaming state continues. In such a gaming machine, the effect of adding the remaining number on the display is executed, and the difference between the actual remaining number and the remaining number on the display is converged to provide the player with a specific gaming state without discomfort. It is configured to play a game.

  In this case, as the effect for adding the remaining number on the display, as described in the fourth control example described above, the additional effect (press-on additional effect) executed based on the variation of the special symbol and the remaining number on the display It can be considered that an additional effect (special additional effect) is executed based on the fact that the number of times is within the predetermined number of times. By executing various additional effects in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the remaining number of times the specific gaming state (latency state) is executed, and a state in which the player feels tense. The game can be continued to be performed, and further, a sense of security can be given when a large number of times is added by the additional effect.

  However, the effect for converging the difference between the actual number of remaining times and the number of remaining times on the display (superimposed effect) is one in which the preference is different depending on the player, and by executing various patterns of additive effects, the player There was a risk that the motivation of Specifically, the player who prefers the effect of continuing the state in which the actual number of remaining times is unknown until the number of remaining numbers on the display decreases, and adding the actual number of remaining times when the remaining number on the display decreases. On the other hand, if the additional effect is performed before the remaining number on the display decreases, the difference between the remaining number on the display and the actual remaining number decreases by the number of times added by the additional effect. When the remaining number of times is reduced, the number of times of being added in the effect of adding the actual remaining number of times is reduced, and there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first modification, as an additional effect to be executed during the latent state, an effect mode (additional chance mode) that can be expected for each fluctuation additional effect, and a predetermined number or less of remaining times on display Since the player can select the effect mode (post-notification mode) in which the additional effect is executed in the case where the additional effect is performed, it is possible to arbitrarily set the additional effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's motivation for the effect is reduced.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the gaming machine capable of selecting the effect mode of the additional effect, for example, the first effect mode capable of executing the additional effect is set each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the rest on display If the second effect mode is selected in which the additional effect is executed when the remaining number on the display reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 revolutions) while three is displayed as the number, the additional effect is displayed. There is a problem that the timing to be executed is missed and the rendering effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this modification, during the jackpot game where 120 times are reset as the actual remaining number, the effect mode of the additional effect can be selected, and further, the remaining number on the display as the effect mode is a predetermined number of times The number of remaining times on display is set to 100 during the jackpot effect based on the selection of the second effect mode in which the additional effect is executed in the case of (for example, 5 rotations).

  As a result, in the gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode of the additional effect, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode regardless of which effect mode is selected at any timing.

  The first modification of the fourth control example is different from the fourth control example in the configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The content of the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and the content of the partial processing performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the fourth control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the effect display performed by the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 337. FIG. In the first modification, as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, some symbols are vertical after the symbol variation display moving in the horizontal direction is stopped (temporary stop) (after reach loss). A fluctuation pattern (scroll change effect) to be moved is set (see FIGS. 334 and 335). Furthermore, when the jackpot G is won during the latent state, a plurality of effect modes in which different additional effect modes are executed during the jackpot game are configured to be selectable (see FIGS. 336 and 337).

  First, the contents of the scroll change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 and 335. FIG. 334 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the reach (first reach aspect) in which the symbol moves in the lateral direction in the scroll change effect is removed and stopped (temporary stop), and FIG. 334 (b) is Fig. 335 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which a part of the symbols is displayed in a suggested mode which suggests that a part of the symbols move in the vertical direction after the first reach mode is detached (stopped temporarily). It is a schematic diagram which shows the state in which the reach (2nd reach aspect) which a symbol moves longitudinally is performed, and FIG. 335 (b) is a schematic view which shows the state which the 2nd reach aspect hit and stopped by the symbol. . In addition, about the reach (1st reach aspect) which a symbol moves to a horizontal direction, since it is the same content as the 4th control example mentioned above, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 334 (a), in the first modification, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into the left display area Dz1 and the right display area Dz2 so as to be controllable. During the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display in the horizontal direction), the display control of the left display region Dz1 and the right display region Dz2 is executed collectively, thereby changing the entire display region of the third symbol display device 81 When the display is executed and a special symbol variation display different from normal (symbol variation display in the vertical direction) is executed, an area to be subjected to symbol variation in the vertical direction (left display area Dz1 and right display area Dz2 Control is performed to update only the display data of. As a result, the appropriate symbol display effect can be performed only by updating the display data of the area suitable for the variable display of symbols, and therefore the processing load of control related to the symbol fluctuation processing can be reduced.

  In this FIG. 334 (a), the symbol row L1 and the symbol row L3 are first stopped and displayed (first reach mode), and as a result, the symbol of the symbol which is stopped and displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit The symbol row L2 is stopped and displayed in a mode shifted by one frame (shifted by one frame in the plus direction) with respect to the combination (combination of symbols in which symbols indicating the same number are stopped and displayed linearly).

  Then, among the symbols (symbol row L1 is a symbol simulating a "lion", symbol row L2 is a sub-pattern, and symbol row L3 is a symbol simulating "snake") displayed in the left display area Dz1 in a stopped state. A symbol imitating a character is displayed in a moving direction suggesting mode indicating an action suggesting a fluctuation in the vertical direction (downward direction), and a row of symbols in the vertical direction (downward direction) is displayed in the left display area Dz1. Specifically, the left symbol is displayed by displaying the sub symbol on the upper side of the symbol string L1 displayed in the left display area Dz1 and by displaying the sub symbol on the lower side of the symbol string L3 displayed in the left display region Dz1. A vertical symbol row (from top, a sub symbol, a symbol simulating a "lion", a sub symbol, a symbol simulating a "snake", a symbol row displayed in a sub symbol sequence) is displayed in the area Dz1 (Refer FIG. 334 (b)).

  As a result, it can be suggested that each symbol displayed in the left display area Dz1 fluctuates in the vertical direction, and an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation can be executed. Furthermore, in the first modification, the display content in the left display area Dz1 is changed (that is, the change display of the display mode of each symbol stopped and displayed in the left display area Dz1 and new in the left display area Dz1) It is suggested that the reach (the second reach mode) in which the symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction will be executed from now only by executing the process of adding a certain symbol and additionally displaying the symbol row in the vertical direction). , It is possible to reduce the processing load of control related to the symbol variation processing.

  In addition, the configuration that suggests that the second reach mode is executed by changing the display mode of the symbol displayed to be stopped (provisional stop display) in the right side display area Dz2 without using the configuration of the first modified example May be used. As a result, since it is possible to execute a suggested effect using the entire third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make a notification that the player can easily understand.

  Then, when the second reach mode (the reach in which the symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction) is executed, as shown in FIG. 335 (a), the symbol row L5 formed in the left display area Dz1 is in the vertical direction (downward) As a second reach aspect, the main symbol (the main symbol imitating an elephant) with the number “1” attached to the effective line V5 or the effective line V6 is stopped and displayed to indicate a big hit Special double reach mode is implemented. As described above, by combining the normal horizontal reach mode (first reach mode) and the vertical reach mode (second reach mode), the variation display of the single-direction symbol row (L1 to L3) It is possible to easily execute complicated symbol variation display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 335 (a), it becomes possible to set a plurality of stop positions where a specific main symbol (main symbol with the number “1” attached) indicates a big hit, thus enhancing the expectation of the big hit A presentation can be performed.

  And when execution of the second reach mode is finished and the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit, the main symbol (the elephant is displayed with a number “1” attached to either of the effective lines V5, V6 The displayed main symbol is stopped and displayed in a row (see FIG. 335 (b)). After that, the jackpot game is executed.

  In the display example described above, the left display area Dz1 is from the state where the first reach aspect is stopped (temporary stop) (see FIG. 334 (a)) to the state where the second reach aspect is stopped (temporary stop) Although the example which does not change the display data of the area other than was shown, it is made not to update the display data which corresponds to each design (the main design and the sub-pattern) stopped and displayed in the right display area Dz2. The update of the display data of (for example, the display of "reach" displayed in the right display area Dz2) may be performed. Thereby, when the special double reach aspect shown in FIG. 334 (a) is executed, the indication of "reach" is displayed as "multi reach" indicating that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the normal reach aspect. It becomes possible to update, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, a display area (the area displaying "reach" in FIG. 334 (a)) indicating the current symbol fluctuation situation is provided in the left display area Dz1, and the contents to be displayed are appropriately changed according to the symbol fluctuation situation. It may be configured to Thus, the second reach mode is executed only by executing the process of updating the display data of only a specific display area (left display area Dz1) among the display areas of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol fluctuation situation Since the display according to can be performed, while being able to reduce the processing load of control regarding symbol variation processing, it is possible to execute the effect of enhancing the sense of expectation of the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, the contents of the additional mode selection effect for selecting the additional effect to be executed during the latent state in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. The additional mode selection effect is displayed on the display in order to converge the difference between the actual remaining number (value of remaining probability variation area 223o) and the remaining number on display (value of presentation probability variation number counter 223p) during the latent state. It is an effect for selecting the effect mode (addition mode) of the addition effect that adds (adds up) the remaining number of times, and it is determined whether or not the addition effect is to be executed each time the variation of the special symbol is started From the effect mode (additional chance mode) and the effect mode (post notification mode) in which the additional effect is executed when the number of remaining times on the display reaches a predetermined number, the player can select an optional effect mode (additional mode). It is an effect that can be selected.

  As a result, the player can select the effect mode in which the additional effect suitable for his / her preference is executed, and it is possible to suppress the unintended additional effect being performed and the decrease in motivation. .

  First, with reference to FIG. 336 (a), the display content of the additional mode selection effect in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 336 (a) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of additional mode selection presentation. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), in the first modification, the additional mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game which is executed when the jackpot G is won in the latent state.

  When the additional mode selection effect is executed, the remaining number (remaining effect variation number on display) at the time of winning the jackpot G continues in the remaining number display area D1 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display area 81. Is displayed. This makes it possible to easily check the remaining number on the display even during the jackpot game. Although the main control unit 110 clears (sets to 0) the value of the probability variation counter 203k when a big hit game is executed, the remaining number on the display in the effect probability variation number area 223p of the sound lamp control unit 113 is displayed. By storing (setting) the (remaining effect probability variation number), it is possible to continuously display the remaining number on the display even during the jackpot game.

  Then, in the central area of the main display area Dm, a button D6a in which the character "push" for prompting the user to operate (press) the frame button 22 is displayed, and "superposition chance mode" is displayed on both sides thereof. A first selection position for displaying the first selected display D6b described and the second selected display D6c described as the "post notification mode", and selecting the first selected display D6b, and the second selected position A selection indication D6d is displayed, which moves at a predetermined interval between the second selection position for selecting the indication D6c. In the display area D4, a display for explaining the contents of the additional mode selection effect is displayed in a telop, and in FIG. 336 (a), a description of “Please select a favorite mode with a button” is displayed. Further, on the left side of the sub display area Ds, the additional effect mode (the additional mode) selected in the jackpot winning state is displayed, and it is easy to determine which additional effect mode the player has selected. It is made to be able to grasp.

  During the addition mode selection effect, the specified addition mode is set by operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in a state in which the selection display D6d specifies the desired addition mode.

  Then, in FIG. 336 (a), when the additional chance mode (first selected display D 6 b) is selected, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), “RUSH continue” informs that the latent state continues. Is displayed, and a character 811 of a display mode is displayed to congratulate the continuation of the latent state. Further, in this case, since the additional effect mode is not changed in the additional mode selection effect (when the big hit is selected, “additional chance mode” → after the additional mode selection effect is “additional chance mode”), the remaining number display area D1 "The remaining 3 times" same as the time of the jackpot is continuously displayed on the. As a result, since the latent state can be resumed in the same situation (the number of remaining times on the display) as the situation (number of remaining times on the display) at the time of winning a big hit, the latent state is not caused to the player. It is possible to play a game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. Thus, by looking at the display content of the sub display area Ds, it is possible to easily grasp both the jackpot addition mode and the addition mode after the addition mode selection effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 336 (a), when the post notification mode (the second selected display D6c) is selected, as shown in FIG. 337, “+97” is superimposed as shown in FIG. Display is executed. Otherwise, the same content as the content described in FIG. 336 (b) is displayed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same location and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. As described above, when the addition mode selected in the jackpot winning mode and the addition mode selected in the addition mode selection effect is different, the addition count mode is newly executed by setting the remaining number display area D1 to be 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly carry out the additive effect without discomfort, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), the jackpot game based on the jackpot G is executed in a state where the remaining number display area D1 indicates "three times", and the jackpot mode selection effect in the jackpot game is performed If the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 remains "3 times" when the addition mode is changed from the addition mode to the later notification mode, the addition effect is executed in the later notification mode. There is a risk of losing the opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is “five times or less”), and there is a problem that a suitable effect can not be provided to the player. However, as in the first modification, when the addition mode is changed, the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is set to 100, whereby the addition effect is executed in the post notification mode. An opportunity (the number of times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 is “five times” or less) can be reliably ensured.

  In the first modification, since it is determined whether or not the latent state is to be awarded after the end of the jackpot game in the seventh round of the jackpot game (the ball passes the ball in the seventh round) Since the latent state is given when the switch 65e3 (see FIG. 179) is passed, the above-mentioned additional effect mode selection effect is configured to be executed after the eighth round of the jackpot game It is done. In this way, it is possible to perform the effect of selecting the additional mode in a state where it is determined that the actual remaining number of times is reset to 120 times, so the ball does not pass through the V passage switch 65e3 during the big hit If no latent state is given after completion, the jackpot game can be ended without executing the additional effect mode selection effect.

<Electrical Configuration of First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 338 and FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. First, FIG. 338 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second normal table A 202 ff 1 provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in the first modified example of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 338, in the second normal table A202ff1, a part of the defined fluctuation pattern is modified with respect to the normal table 202f1 (see FIG. 195) used in the fourth control example described above. Are different in that they The other configurations are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, among the variation patterns defined in the second normal table A202ff1, the variation pattern changed from the normal table A202f1 will be described. In the first modification of the fourth control example, a scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) is configured to be executed as a variation pattern of a special symbol. Specifically, in the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 falls within the range of “101 to 150” and the super reach D (30 seconds) is associated, “151 Super reach E (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “198”.

  Furthermore, the lottery of the first special symbol is out and the number of holding balls is 0 or 1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of “71 to 150”, and the normal reach B (20 seconds) is It is matched and the super reach C (30 seconds) is matched out of the range of "171-198". In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol is out, the number of holding balls is two or three, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "131 to 170" and normal reach B (20 seconds) correspondence And the super reach C (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “186 to 198”.

  When the super reach D (30 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) is executed in which the third symbol moves laterally for the first 17 seconds. A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a drop (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one plus frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect The effect is executed for 3 seconds which is a suggested effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggested effect period, reach effect (second reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the vertical direction is executed for 10 seconds (FIG. See 335 (a)). And the 3rd design is stopped and displayed by the combination which shows a hit (refer FIG. 335 (b)).

  When the super reach E (30 seconds) is set as the variation pattern, reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the lateral direction for the first 17 seconds is executed (see FIG. 183 (b)). A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a drop (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one plus frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect The effect is executed for 3 seconds which is a suggested effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggested effect period, reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. And the 3rd design is stopped and displayed by the combination which shows a hit.

  When the normal reach B (20 seconds) is set off as the variation pattern, reach effect (first reach mode) (see FIG. 183 (b)) in which the third symbol moves in the lateral direction for the first 17 seconds is executed. A mode (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one plus frame) in which the first reach mode indicates a release is displayed for stop (provisional stop display) (see FIG. 334 (a)). Thereafter, after the suggestion effect indicating the scroll change effect is executed for 3 seconds which is the suggestion effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the detachment.

  When the super reach C (30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern, reach effect (first reach mode) in which the third symbol moves in the lateral direction for the first 17 seconds is performed (see FIG. 183 (b)). A mode in which the first reach mode indicates a drop (a mode in which the symbol row L2 is shifted by one plus frame) is stopped (temporarily stopped) (see FIG. 334 (a)), and then suggests a scroll change effect The effect is executed for 3 seconds which is a suggested effect period (FIG. 334 (b)), and after the suggested effect period, reach effect (third reach mode) in which the third symbol moves laterally is executed for 10 seconds. Then, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the disengagement.

  As described above, in the first modification of the fourth control example, as the scroll change effect, the first reach aspect (17 seconds) and the suggested effect (20 seconds in the first 30 seconds of the variation time of 30 seconds) 3 seconds) and the second reach aspect (10 seconds) is performed in the remaining 10 seconds. As a result, after the end of the suggested effect, the third symbol is displayed as a stop combination with the third symbol being dislocated as it is. Out-of-range fluctuation of 20 seconds (out-of-normal reach B) By combining this with the variation (Perch Super Reach E, Off Super Reach C) executed for 10 seconds, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player an expectation of hitting at various timings during symbol fluctuation.

  Specifically, while the suggestion effect is being performed, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the temporarily stopped third symbol is to be restarted. Further, in the first modification, since the hit expectation is different depending on the direction in which the third symbol is restarted, the game is performed while also expecting in which direction the third symbol is to be restarted be able to. In addition, during this suggestion effect execution, as shown in FIG. 334 (b), it suggests whether the third symbol restarts with the third symbol display device 81 or suggests the direction in which the third symbol restarts Since the effect (indication effect) is executed, the player confirms whether or not the third symbol restarts by confirming the contents of the effect to be executed as the indication effect, or the direction in which the third symbol restarts Can be played while predicting the

  In addition, in FIG. 334 (b), although the suggestion effect which the display form of the 3rd pattern changes to the display form (movement direction suggestion display form) which suggests a movement direction (down) is performed, the other than that is suggested As the effect, for example, a display form (second movement) in which the character faces the left side (advancing direction) in the display form of the third symbol in order to suggest that the third symbol restarts in the lateral direction (left direction). Direction suggestion indication form), suggestion effect that the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 changes to the indication form suggesting restart direction of the third symbol, or displayed on the third symbol display device 81 There is a suggestive effect that suggests the restart direction of the third symbol using other display bodies.

  Furthermore, instead of suggesting the restart direction of the third symbol, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect that simply suggests that the third symbol restarts. In this case, during the suggestion effect period, first, the suggestion effect (restart suggestion effect) that suggests that the third symbol restarts is executed, and then, the suggestion that suggests the movement direction of the third symbol when it restarts It is good to constitute so that an effect (restart direction indication effect) may be performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the degree of expectation of hitting stepwise and to make the player keep watching the effect continuously.

  Moreover, in the first modification, when the third symbol restarts, the variation in the vertical direction (downward direction) or the variation in the horizontal direction (left direction) is performed, but The direction in which 3 symbols restart may be provided in other than that, for example, the fluctuation pattern which restarts in the upper direction other than the lower direction mentioned above as restart in the vertical direction may be provided. In this case, the third pattern is set so that the hitting expectation of the fluctuation pattern to be restarted in the vertical direction (up, down) is different, and as a suggestion effect, it is suggested that the third symbol is restarted in the vertical direction By providing the suggestion effect to perform, the suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts upward, and the suggestion effect suggesting that the third symbol restarts downward, for the player The hit expectation can be notified in stages.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 339, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 339 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first modification. As shown in FIG. 399 (a), in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the first modification is provided with an additional mode selection table 222fa.

  In the additional mode selection table 222fa, the contents of each additional effect to be executed in the additional mode (additional chance mode, later notification mode) selectable by the player during the latent state are stored, and the additional mode effect selection is made. An effect corresponding to the additional mode effect selected in the process is read out and executed.

  FIG. 223 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification. In the first modification, the pressed a flag 223fa, the pressed b flag 223fb, the scroll change flag 223fc, the mode change flag 223d, the mode addition flag 223fd, and the addition mode setting area 223fe are added to the fourth control example described above. doing.

  In the pressed a flag 223fa, the frame button 22 is operated during a period (during in-reach pressing period) set during the reach during a period (operation valid period) in which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined. This flag is used to indicate that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the reaching press period, and is set to ON. The pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON when the in-reach pressing process (see S5332 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) is performed (see S8002 in FIG. 341), It is referred in the end-of-pressing process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8201 in FIG. 343), and then set to off (S8204 in FIG. 343).

  The pressed b flag 223fb is operated during the period (during a big hit middle pressing period) set during the big hit game in the period (operation valid period) during which the operation (pressed) of the frame button 22 is effectively determined This flag is used to indicate that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the jackpot middle pressing period, and is set to ON. This pressed b flag 223 fb is set to ON when the big hit middle pressing process (see S5334 in FIG. 341) of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is executed (see S8102 in FIG. 342), It is referred to in the end-of-pressing process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8207 in FIG. 343) and then set to off (S8212 in FIG. 343).

  The scroll change flag 223 fc is a flag which is set to ON when a condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) in which the change direction of the third symbol is switched halfway. The scroll change flag 223 fc is operated (pressed) during the reach period pressing period (indication effect period) of the variation pattern (per hitting super reach D) which can switch the variation direction of the third symbol halfway Then, it is determined that the condition for changing the scroll is satisfied in the scroll change effect, and is set to ON (see S8005 in FIG. 341). Then, it is referred in the end-of-pressing process (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8202 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be on (see S8202 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set to off (see S8203 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end process (see S5537 in FIG. 343), the scroll change effect can be executed by changing the display command to be output to the display control device 114 according to the setting status of the scroll change flag 223fc. doing.

  The mode change flag 223fd is a flag indicating that the currently set overlay mode is changed in the overlay mode selection effect executed during the jackpot game, and is turned on when the overlay mode is changed by the overlay mode selection effect. Is set to This mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105 in FIG. 342) when it is determined that the mode change has been made (S8104 in FIG. 342: Yes) in the large hitting middle pressing process (see S5534 in FIG. 342). It is referred in the end processing (see S5537 in FIG. 343) (S8208 in FIG. 343), and when it is determined to be on (S8208 in FIG. 343: Yes), it is set off (S8209 in FIG. 343). ). In this pressing end process (S5537 in FIG. 343), the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is varied according to the setting status of the mode change flag 223fd, and the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON. If it is, 100 is set to the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p (S8210 in FIG. 343). Thus, when the addition mode is changed by the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is set to 100, that is, displayed in the remaining number display area D1 of the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to execute the game in the latent state from the state in which the number of remaining times on display (the number of remaining effects in the effect is set) is set to 100, and to preferably provide an additional effect to be performed in the added mode after change. it can.

  The additional mode setting area 223fe is an area for setting (storing) at least the additional mode currently set and the previously set additional mode, and is selected in the processing at the time of pressing completion (S5537 processing of FIG. 343). An overlay mode is set (S8211 in FIG. 343). It should be noted that the information indicating that the additional chance rendering mode is set in the initial setting (S4001 in FIG. 235) of the start-up process (see FIG. 235) executed at power on is set in the additional mode setting area 223fe. In the state where the player has not selected the additional mode, the additional chance mode in the latent state is executed. The information (currently set superimposing mode) set (stored) in the superimposing mode setting area 223fe is referred to in the special view 2 fluctuation start process 6 (see S4361 in FIG. 344) (refer to S4391 in FIG. 344) Also, it is referred to in the remaining number command process 6 (see S4364 in FIG. 345) (see S5871 in FIG. 345), and is configured to execute an additional effect corresponding to the currently set additional mode.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 345. First, referring to FIG. 340, the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S4107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) is started, it is first determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5501), and it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected. In the case (S5501: Yes), it is then determined whether the reach pressing period is in progress (S5531).

  If it is determined in the process of S5531 that the reach pressing period is being made (S5531: Yes), the reach pressing process is executed to change the change direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol during the reach (S5532) ), End this processing. The details of the in-reach pressing process (S5532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5531 that the reach pressing period is not to be applied (S5531: No), it is then determined whether it is the big hit middle pressing period (S5533). In the process of S5533, when it is determined that the big hit pressing period is in progress (S5533: Yes), a big hit middle pressing process for selecting one adding mode from a plurality of adding modes different in the type of adding effect to be executed The process is executed (S5534), and the process ends. Details of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S5533 that the big hit is not within the pressing period (S5533: No), a process according to the other pressing timing is executed (S5535), and this process is ended. In addition to the process of S5507 in the fourth control example described above, the other depression timing is the additional effect executed in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (S4107 in FIG. 316) of the fourth control example described above. The middle pressing process (S5503 in FIG. 316) and the holding previewing process (S5505 in FIG. 316) are executed.

  If the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 is not detected in the process of S5501 (S5501: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the depression period (S5536), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the depression period. If it is (S5536: Yes), the processing at the time of pressing completion (see FIG. 343) is executed (S5537), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed), the process at the time of pressing completion (see FIG. 340) is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the contents of the in-reach pressing processing (S5532) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the in-reach press processing (S5532). In the reach-pressing process (S5532), the process is performed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the reach-pressing period. Specifically, processing is executed to determine whether a condition for changing the change direction (scroll direction) of the third symbol has been established in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335).

  When the in-reach pressing processing (S5532) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed a flag 223fa is set to on (S8001), and if it is determined that the setting is not on (S8001: No) The pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8002), and then a display reaching reach pressed command is set (S8003). By setting the in-reach display pressing command, a pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the in-reach pressing period is notified (displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, although this pressed display mode is continuously displayed during the pressing period during the reach (indication effect period) and is not illustrated, whether or not the third symbol is restarted in the scroll change effect It is displayed in a manner that indicates the degree of expectation or the direction to restart.

  When the process of S8003 ends, next, it is determined whether the variation pattern being executed is the hit super reach D (see FIG. 338) (that is, it is the variation pattern corresponding to the scroll change effect) (S8004) . When it is determined in the process of S8004 that the fluctuation pattern is the hit super reach D (S8004: Yes), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8005), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the hit and the super reach D (S8004: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S8001 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8001: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the reaching reach pressing period (for the second and subsequent times Since the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing is ended. In the first modified example of the fourth control example, the in-reach pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is first operated (pressed) in the in-reach pressing period. However, for example, when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times, the in-reach pressing process (S5532) is executed, or each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed), a lottery is executed. When reaching a hit, the in-reach pressing process (S5532) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the content of the effect to be performed can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534). The jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) is to execute a process when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the jackpot middle pressing period (overlay mode selection effect period). Specifically, based on the content of operating (pressing) the frame button 22 in the additional mode selection effect (see FIG. 336), there is a process for setting the additional mode in the latent state to be executed after the big hit ends. To be executed.

  When the jackpot middle pressing process (S5534) is executed, it is first determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8101), and if it is determined that the flag is not set to ON (S8101: No) The pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8102), and then the display big hit middle pressing command is set (S8103). By setting this display jackpot middle pressing command, a pressed display mode indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed within the jackpot middle pressing period is notified (displayed) on the third symbol display device 81. Although this pressed display mode is not shown, it is displayed in a mode in which the button D6a shown in FIG. 336 (a) is pressed, and is displayed stopped at a position where the selection mode D6d is selected and designated. It is displayed in the mode which shows that the selected display (D6b or D6c) of the done side is selected.

  When the process of S8103 is finished, it is next determined whether the superimposition mode has been changed (S8104). Here, the additional mode set before the jackpot game is executed is read out from the additional mode setting area 223fe, and the additional mode is changed by comparing with the additional mode selected in the additional mode selection effect this time. It is determined whether it has been done. If it is determined in the process of S8104 that the superimposition mode has been changed (S8104: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8105), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional mode is not changed (S8104: No), this processing ends.

  When it is determined that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON in the process of S8101 (S8101: Yes), the frame button 22 is already operated within the large hit middle pressing period (for the second time and thereafter) Since the frame button operation has been executed), all processing is skipped and this processing is ended. In the first modified example of the fourth control example, the large hitting middle pressing process (S5532) is executed when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) at the beginning of the large hitting middle pressing period, and the overlay mode is determined. For example, within the jackpot middle pressing period, the superimposing mode may be set again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the contents of the pressing end time process (S5537) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pressing end process (S5537). The end-of-pressing process (S5537) is a process that is executed at the timing when the pressing period (the in-reach pressing period, the large hitting middle pressing period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is ended. Based on the status of the flag set to, to set the contents of the effect to be executed after the end of the pressing period.

  When the end-of-pressing process (S5537) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressed-a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201). Here, when it is determined that the pressed a flag 223fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8201: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the reaching reach pressing period. Since this is not the case, the process (S8202 to S8205) based on the frame button operation in the reaching press period is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8207.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the pressed a flag 223fa is set to ON (S8201: Yes), then it is determined whether the scroll change flag 223fc is set to ON (S8202) If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8202: YES), the scroll change flag 223fc is set to OFF (S8203), a display scroll change command is set (S8204), and the process proceeds to S8206.

  If it is determined in the process of S8202 that the scroll change flag 223fc is not set to ON (set to OFF), a display scroll non-change command is set (S8205), and the process proceeds to S8206. In the process of S8206, the pressed a flag 223fa is set to off (S8206).

  When the process of S8206 is finished, it is next determined whether the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207). Here, when it is determined that the pressed b flag 223 fb is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8207: No), the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the large hit middle pressing period. Since this is not the case, the process (S8208 to S8212) based on the frame button operation in the jackpot middle pressing period is skipped and the present process is ended. That is, when the frame button 22 is not operated in the large hitting middle pressing period (during the superimposing mode selection effect), the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p and the setting contents of the superimposing mode setting area 223fe are not changed. In the state where the jackpot winning state (the number of remaining times displayed in the additional mode and the remaining number display area D1) is continued, the latent state after the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, if the player intentionally does not operate (depress) the frame button 22 during the additional mode selection effect to avoid changing the additional mode in the latent state, the additional mode after the end of the jackpot game and It is possible to prevent the number of remaining times displayed in the remaining number display area D1 from being changed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8207 that the pressed b flag 223fb is set to ON (S8207: Yes), then it is determined whether the mode change flag 223fd is set to ON (S8208), If it is determined that it is set to ON (S8208: Yes), the mode change flag 223fd is set to OFF (S8209), 100 is set as the value of the effect probability variation number area (S8210), and the selected overlay mode is selected. Is set in the additional mode setting area 223fe (S8211). Then, the pressed b flag 223 fb is set to off, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8208 that the mode change flag 223fd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S8208: No), the process of S8209 and S8210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8211 Transition. As described above, when the addition mode is changed during the addition mode selection effect, the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is set to 100 to change the addition mode after the change in the latent state executed after the big hit game is over. The added effect used can be suitably performed. Further, when the addition mode is selected so that the addition mode is not changed during the addition mode selection effect (see S8208), the process (S8210) for setting the value of the effect probability variation number area 223p is skipped, so the latency is confirmed If the player intentionally selects the same addition mode as the addition mode currently set during the addition mode selection effect to avoid changing the addition mode during the state, the addition mode and the remainder are left after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress that the remaining number displayed in the number display area D1 is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the details of the special view 2 variation start process 6 (S4361) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special view 2 change start process 6. This special view 2 change start process 6 (S4361) is an addition effect based on the type of the additional mode currently set, with respect to the special view 2 change start process 4 (see FIG. 319) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 6 (S4361) is executed, first, the same process as S4371 to S4373 and S4375 in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (refer to FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above is executed. If it is determined in the process of S4373 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4373: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391). In the process of S4391, the information (superimposed mode information) set in the superimposed mode setting area 223fe is read, and the determination is executed based on the superimposed mode information.

  When it is determined in the process of S4391 that the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode (S4391: Yes), S4374 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 4 (see FIG. 320) of the fourth control example described above. , S4376, and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the currently set addition mode is not the addition chance mode (post notification mode) (S4391: No), the processing of S4374 is skipped and this processing is ended.

  By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 change start process 6 (S4361) is executed (when the change of the second special symbol is performed), the currently set addition mode is the addition chance mode In the case of, the extra production setting process is executed, and it is possible to provide the extra mode that can be expected for each variation extra production, and when the currently set extra mode is the post notification mode, the extra production setting process is not executed. By not converging the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display, the number of times of addition displayed at the time of later notification (additional effect to be executed when the number of remaining times on the display becomes a predetermined number) It can be enlarged. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the remaining certainty number variation command process 6 (S4364) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining certainty number-of-variations command processing 6 (S4364). This remaining certainty variation command processing 6 (S 4364) is related to the additional effect based on the currently set type of the additional mode with respect to the remaining certain variation count command processing (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether to execute the process is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the remaining certainty number change command process 6 (S4364) is executed, first, the same process as S5851, S5852 in the above-mentioned remaining certainty change number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is executed. If it is determined that the gaming state is the latent state (S5852: Yes), it is next determined whether the currently set addition mode is the post notification mode (S5871). In the process of S5871, the information (superimposed mode information) set in the superimposed mode setting area 223fe is read, and the determination is executed based on the superimposed mode information.

  If it is determined in the process of S5871 that the post notification mode is set (S5871: Yes), the same process as S5853 to S5861 of the remaining certainty number command process (see FIG. 323) of the fourth control example described above is performed. Execute and complete this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5871 that the post notification mode is not set (the additional chance mode is set) (S5871: No), the process of S5853 to S5861 is skipped and the present process is ended. .

  By configuring in this way, when the remaining certainty variation command processing 6 (S 4364) is executed (when the variation of the second special symbol is executed), the currently set overlay mode is the overlay chance mode. In the case of performing the additional effect setting process, it is possible to provide an additional mode in which expectation can be given to each variable additional effect, and when the additional mode currently set is the post notification mode, the additional effect setting process is not performed and actual By making the difference between the remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the display not converge, the number of times of addition displayed at the time of later notification (additional effect executed when the number of remaining times on the display becomes a predetermined number) can do. Therefore, the effect of the effect desired by the player can be enhanced.

Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the first modified example of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 346 to FIG. The present modification is different from the fourth control example described above in that pressing related command processing is added in command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 346), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control apparatus 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the command determination process 6, the processes of S6401 to S6417 are performed as in the command determination process (see FIG. 247) in the fourth control example described above.

  Then, if it is determined in the process of S6416 that the error command has not been received (S6416: No), it is then determined whether a display pressing related command has been received (S6431).

  If it is determined in the process of S6431 that the display pressing related command has been received (S6431: Yes), the pressing related command processing is executed (S6432), and the process returns to the process of S6401. Details of the pressing related command processing (S6432) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6431 that the pressing related command has not been received (S6431: No), then other command processes are executed as in the first control example (S6418). Return to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 347 to 350, details of the pressing related command processing (S6432) will be described. The pressing related command processing (S6432) is processing for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) effects related to pressing.

  In the pressing-related command processing (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not a pressing command during display reach has been received (S8301). If it is determined in the process of S8301 that the in-reach reaching display press command is received (S8301: Yes), the in-reach pressing command process is executed (S8302), and the process proceeds to S8303.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the in-reach press processing (S8302) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing in-reach press command processing. The in-reach pressing command process is a process corresponding to the in-reach in-press pressing command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the in-reach pressing command process, first, the in-reach pressing display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the in-reach reach pressing command is determined, and the determined pressing display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It sets to the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8402).

  Then, based on the in-reach pressing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8401, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8404). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8405), the in-reach pressing command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8301 that the display reach press down command has not been received (S8301: No), it is then determined whether a display scroll change command has been received (S8303).

  If it is determined in the process of S8303 that the display scroll change command has been received (S8303: Yes), the scroll change command process is executed (S8304), and the process proceeds to S8305.

  Here, the details of the scroll change command process (S8304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing scroll change command processing. The scroll change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display scroll change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll change command processing, first, a vertical scroll symbol array is set based on the display content displayed in the display area Dm1 and the pass / fail related information, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Then, the vertical scroll effect display data table corresponding to the display content of the display area Dm1 is determined, and the determined vertical scroll effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8502 ). Thereafter, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8503).

  Then, based on the vertical scroll effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8502, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8506), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8507). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8508), the scroll change command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the pressing related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8303 that the display scroll change command has not been received (S8303: No), it is then determined whether the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305).

  If it is determined in the process of S8305 that the display scroll non-change command has been received (S8305: Yes), the non-scroll non-change command process is executed (S8306), and the process proceeds to S8307.

  Here, the details of the scroll non-change command processing (S8306) will be described with reference to FIG. 350 (a). FIG. 350 (a) is a flowchart showing scroll non-change command processing. This scroll non-change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-press start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the scroll non-change command processing, first, the scroll non-change display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display scroll non-change command is determined, and the determined auto pressing start display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, they are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8602).

  Then, based on the scroll non-change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233 y and the finalized display flag 233 z are set to off (S 8605), and the scroll non-change command processing ends, and the processing returns to the pressing related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8305 that the display scroll non-change command has not been received (S8305: No), it is then determined whether the display large hit middle press command has been received (S8307).

  If it is determined in the process of S8307 that the display jackpot middle pressing command has been received (S8307: Yes), the jackpot middle pressing command process is executed (S8308), and the present process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 350 (b), details of the jackpot middle press command processing (S8308) will be described. FIG. 350 (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot middle press command processing. The jackpot middle press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot middle press command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot middle pressing command processing, first, a jackpot middle pressing display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display jackpot middle pressing command is determined, and the determined jackpot middle pressing display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S8701). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8702).

  Then, based on the jackpot middle pressing display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8704). Then, the demonstration display flag 233y and the finalized display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S8705), the processing of the large hitting middle pressing command ends, and the process returns to the pressing related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 347, the description will be continued. In the process of S8307, when it is determined that the display big hit middle pressing command is not received (S8307: No), this process is ended.

Another Example of First Modification of Fourth Control Example
Next, another example of the first modification of the fourth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In this example, the special reach effect (FIG. 184, FIG. 184, and FIG. 184) is executed in the first control example described above in the scroll change effect (see FIGS. 334 and 335) executed in the first modification of the fourth control example described above. It is configured to be able to execute a combined reach effect combining FIG. 185). In this way, complicated reach effects can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  This example is different from the control examples described above in that the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed, and one of the processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It differs in the point which changed part processing. The other configurations are the same as the respective configurations and various control processes used in the respective control examples described above. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 351 (a), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 used for this example of another is demonstrated. FIG. 351 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 351 (a), the symbol row L4 which is variably displayed by scrolling in the left and right direction is added to the upper side of the symbol row L1 with respect to each control example described above in this example. It is different in that the symbol row L <b> 8 scrolled and displayed variably is added to the lower side of the symbol row L <b> 3.

  Furthermore, in this example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in which symbols are variably displayed is five (five rows) of symbol rows (L1 to L4) which are scrolled in the horizontal direction. , And L8) are configured such that there are three (three columns) symbol columns that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area, and by switching the display area displayed by the main display area Dm in the vertical direction, Of the five (five rows) symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) that are displayed in a variable manner by scrolling in the left-right direction, the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm can be changed.

  Then, the variation control of five (five rows) symbol rows (L1 to L4 and L8) is executed on the variation region Dz3 which is a region wider than the display region where the main display region Dm can be displayed. The display control is performed on the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, when changing the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dmm, it is possible to display the symbol row after the change only by executing display control based on the content of the variation control being executed in advance. It is possible to execute variable display of symbol rows without delay for the player.

  In addition, this example differs in that symbol rows L5 to L7 corresponding to scroll display in the vertical direction (longitudinal direction) used when the scroll change effect is executed are set in advance. That is, when the scroll change effect is executed, a combination pattern of symbols to be displayed in a stop (provisional stop display) in the first reach mode is set in advance, and from the display mode corresponding to the combination pattern of the symbols A symbol row corresponding to the second reach mode is set such that the second reach mode is executed.

  Specifically, when the scroll change effect is executed, display control is performed so that the third symbol is displayed as a stop (provisional stop) with one plus frame as the first reach aspect, and the stop of the first reach aspect (Provisional stop) In the display state, the display area in the vertical direction in which the symbol (reach symbol) showing the combination of reach and the symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop (temporary stop) by one plus frame is not displayed The second reach mode in which the variable display is performed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is performed. Thus, by setting the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode to the predetermined pattern (reach plus one frame stop (temporary stop) display pattern), the initial stage when the second reach mode is executed It becomes possible to pattern pattern arrangement.

  And in this another example, the symbol arrangement corresponding to the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach aspect is stored in advance for each of the symbol arrangement L5 to L7 as the symbol arrangement corresponding to the second reach aspect The second reach mode is configured to be executable in correspondence with the stop (temporary stop) display pattern of the first reach mode. Thereby, when performing a 2nd reach aspect using a part of 3rd symbol stopped by the 1st reach aspect (temporary stop), production can be performed without delay.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 351 (b)-FIG. 352 (b), the content of composite reach presentation in another example of the 1st modification of the 4th control example is demonstrated. FIG. 351 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a state in which symbol variation in the left and right direction is executed among the composite reach effects, and FIG. 352 (a) is a main display area Dm in the composite reach effects. Fig. 352 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a state in which symbol variation in the vertical direction in the composite reach effect is being executed. is there. In this combined reach effect, the symbol variation (normal symbol variation) in the left-right direction using the symbol rows L1 to L3 is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 351 (b)), and then the display region is displayed in the main display region Dm Execute reach effect (first reach mode) in which the symbol row is changed upward or downward for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (a)), and further, change the variation direction of the symbol (scroll direction) from left to right The reach effect (the second reach mode) which has been changed is executed for 10 seconds (see FIG. 352 (b)), and the effect is configured for a total of 30 seconds.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), the normal symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol is stopped in a combination showing the detachment in the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm (temporary stop) )Is displayed. At this time, fluctuation control of the symbol rows (L4, L8) not displayed in the main display area Dm (the fluctuation data is updated according to the progress of the fluctuation time (elapsed time)) is executed. That is, when combined reach effect is executed, first, execution of variation control is started for all symbol rows (L1 to L4, L8) corresponding to symbol variation in the left and right direction, and among them, main display Variation control and display control for 10 seconds are executed for symbol rows (L1 to L3) displayed in region Dm, and for symbol rows (L4, L8) set outside main display region Dm. And fluctuation control of 20 seconds (period until 1st reach aspect (refer FIG. 352 (a)) is stopped (temporary stop)) is performed. As described above, the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed by performing variation control in synchronization with the elapsed time of the reach effect even with respect to a pattern row not displayed in the main display area Dm, and a new pattern is displayed. When displaying a symbol row (for example, symbol row L4 or L8), display can be performed without delay.

  In the example shown in FIG. 351 (b), the third symbol (number 3) (the third symbol with a character imitating an "elephant") is at the center position of the symbol row L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. The temporary display is temporarily displayed in the stopped (provisional stop) off display mode (first temporary stop mode). In addition, when the deviation fluctuation pattern with fluctuation time of 10 seconds is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the deviation display mode shown in FIG. 351 (b), and the symbol fluctuation ends.

  Then, in a state where the third symbol is displayed in a stop (temporary stop) display in the first temporary stop mode, a suggested effect that suggests that the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (for example, FIG. 184 (b) As shown in, the effect of suggesting that the display area is changed by changing the display form of the character attached to the third symbol, and the display that suggests that the display area is changed to the third symbol display device 81 The effect to be executed is executed, and then the symbol row displayed in the main display area Dm is changed (see FIG. 352A).

  In the example shown in FIG. 352 (a), the display area is moved upward (upper moving area) so that the symbol rows L1, L2, L4 are displayed in the main display area Dm (first moving stop mode The symbol row L3 displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 351 (see (b)) is moved out of the main display area Dm. Thus, from the first temporary stop mode which is the stop (temporary stop) display mode indicating the detachment, the third symbol (the third symbol with the character simulating "the elephant") with the number 1 is the symbol row It will be displayed in a reach display mode (first reach mode) stopped (temporarily stopped) at the center position of L1 and the right position of the symbol row L2. Thus, by executing the process of changing the display area (symbol row) displayed by the main display area Dm, the player is hit from the stop display mode (the first temporary stop mode) which is once made to appear to the player. Can be changed to the reach display mode (the first reach mode), which can be expected, so that even after the third symbol showing the disconnection is stopped and displayed, a feeling of expectation for a hit can be continued. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

  In this example, the third symbol in the first temporary stop mode (each third symbol displayed in FIG. 351 (b)) is moved by moving the display area displayed by the main display area Dm upward. The display area of the main display area Dm is moved upward because the stop (temporary stop) is displayed in a combination that can execute the effects (first reach aspect), but the display area displayed by the main display area Dm is displayed. When the third symbol is displayed as a stop (temporary stop) in a combination that enables reach effect (first reach mode) by moving it downward, the display area of the main display area Dm is moved downward Processing is performed. As described above, by configuring the display area of the main display area Dm so as to be movable in two different directions (upper or lower), a combination of the third symbols that can be displayed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop) Can be increased.

  That is, when the display area of the main display area Dm is configured to be movable only in one direction, the main display area Dm before the movement is performed to execute reach effect (first reach mode) in the display area after the movement. It was necessary to display the same third pattern in a row by the symbol row displayed at the upper side and the center of the screen, but the display area of the main display area Dm can be moved in two different directions (upper or lower) In the case of using the configuration, the same symbol row is displayed on the upper side and the center of the main display area Dm before the movement, or in the lower side and the center of the main display area Dm before the movement. By displaying the third symbol in a row, reach effect (first reach mode) can be executed in the display area after movement, so the third symbol can be displayed in the first temporary stop mode (temporary stop) The combination of symbols can be increased, and the symbol Whether develop into first leech aspect, i.e., there is an effect that it is possible to prevent easily predict the symbol variation effect to be executed next, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  Then, in the reach effect (first reach mode) shown in FIG. 352 (a), the third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 (the elephant symbol “1 When the third symbol with the character imitating “) is displayed stopped (temporarily stopped), that is, among the symbol rows displayed in the main display area Dm, the upper symbol row (symbol row L4) and the lower symbol The right third position of the row (symbol row L2) and the same third symbol (the third symbol with the numeral 1 in FIG. 352 (b)) displayed on the middle symbol row (symbol row L1) stopped (provisional stop) display ( When stopped (provisional stop) display in the second temporary stop display mode, as shown in FIG. 352 (b), the symbol displayed stop (provisional stop) at the left position of the symbol row L1, L2, L4 is a symbol It is displayed fluctuating vertically as a column L5.

  Thus, the same reach effect as the second reach mode (see FIG. 335A) described in the first modified example of the fourth control example described above is executed. The second modification is the same as the first modification of the fourth control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, a new symbol is displayed after the temporary symbol display is temporarily displayed in the first temporary stop display mode as a composite reach effect. The display area is changed so that the array is displayed, and the first reach mode can be executed, and the first reach mode is temporarily stopped in the second temporary stop display mode, and then the direction of symbol variation is changed. The second reach mode is configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to execute a reach effect with high effect for the player.

  Moreover, since it is comprised so that it may stop temporarily in a multiple times temporary stop display mode during composite reach production, when a deviation fluctuation pattern is performed by matching the timing to make temporary stop with the stop display timing of a fluctuation pattern It is possible to execute the same effect (when at least part of the display data can be diverted) when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and to reduce the amount of display data used for the effect While being able to do that, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being performed even when the out-of-out variation pattern is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 353, the electrical configuration of another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This example differs from the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described control examples in that the content of the character storage area 234a2 set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other elements are identical. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the character storage area 234a2 according to another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (a). FIG. 353 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the character storage area 234a2. As shown in FIG. 353 (a), in the character storage area 234a2, a command for specifying the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113) The design area memory area 234a2a in which the display area corresponding to is stored, and the pattern arrangement memory which is used when executing the symbol variation display executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 A storage area for arrangement 234 a 2 b and another storage area 234 a 2 c for storing display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined.

  Here, the contents of the display area storage area 234a 2a will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (b). FIG. 353 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the display area storage area 234a 2a. In the display area storage area 234a2a, display area 1 (reference area) in which symbol arrays L1 to L3 are displayed in the main display area Dm as display area types, and symbol arrays L1, L2 and L4 in the main display area Dm. A display area 2 (upper moving area) to be displayed and a display area 3 (lower moving area) in which the symbol arrays L2, L3, and L8 are displayed in the main display area Dm are set. The display area to be displayed in the main display area Dm is set based on the command (display area change information included in the variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113) for specifying the display area of.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 includes information for performing symbol variation on all the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. The display control device 114 is configured to execute processing so that the display content is updated for all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8. Specifically, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 248) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is executed on all of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 based on the received variation pattern command for display . Then, in the drawing process (see FIG. 257), a drawing list is created for the symbol array corresponding to the currently set display area, and the drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller. doing. As a result, all the display information of the symbol arrays L1 to L4 and L8 can be updated in correspondence with the time data, and the display process can be executed only for the symbol rows to be displayed. In this case, of the display area types stored in the display area storage area 234a2a, a flag (storage area) for determining the currently set display area type is provided, and the determination is performed with reference to the flag. Good.

  Next, contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a 2 b will be described with reference to FIG. 353 (c). FIG. 353 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the symbol arrangement storage area 234a 2 b. The symbol array storage area 234a2b stores a normal symbol array (for horizontal scrolling) used when the normal variation is executed and a vertical scroll symbol array used when the second reach mode is executed. It is done. In the symbol array for vertical scrolling, the symbol array (1 for vertical scroll) corresponding to the symbol row L5 (see FIG. 351 (a)) and the symbol array (6) corresponding to the symbol row L6 (see FIG. 351 (a)) 2) for vertical scrolling and a symbol array (3 for vertical scroll) corresponding to the symbol row L7 (see FIG. 351 (a)) are stored, and the second reach mode is executed for each of them A symbol array corresponding to the third symbol stopped and displayed on is stored.

  Specifically, when the second reach mode is executed, the third symbol with the numeral 1 is stopped (provisional stop) display in the reach out display mode as the symbol array of vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5) The third symbol with the numeral 9 is stopped (provisional stop) display in the reach out display mode when “symbol array 1” and the second reach mode set to the case (see FIG. 334) are executed. Nine types are set up to "symbol array 9" which is set when it is set. In this example, the display mode (the first temporary stop mode) of the third symbol displayed as the stop (temporary stop) when the second reach mode is executed is set to be the predetermined stop mode. Therefore, the symbol arrangement type for vertical scrolling stored in the symbol arrangement storage area 234a 2 b can be reduced.

  Similar to the symbol arrays 1 to 9 stored corresponding to the vertical scroll 1 (symbol row L5), the vertical scroll 2 (symbol row L6) and the vertical scroll 3 (symbol row L7) are respectively stored. Nine kinds of symbol arrangement are set. In the case where the third symbol displayed in a stopped (temporary stop) position at the center position of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a variable manner in the vertical direction (vertical scroll display) This is a case in which the third symbol is displayed in a stop (temporary stop) state in a combination showing the third symbol of the kind in the reach state (so-called, double reach state) in the state of coming off.

  As described above, the second reach aspect is delayed by storing in advance the symbol array used in the second reach aspect (the reach aspect executed after changing the variation direction of the third symbol (scroll direction)). Can be run without. Moreover, the kind of symbol array used when performing a 2nd reach aspect can be reduced by defining beforehand the combination of the 3rd symbol displayed by stop (temporary stop) in the 1st temporary stop mode. .

<About Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in Another Example of First Modification of Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, pointer update processing 2 executed for another example of the first modification of the fourth control example will be described. This pointer update process 2 is different from the above-described pointer update process (S7205 in FIG. 254) in that a process for changing the display area displayed in the main display area Dm is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of pointer update processing 2 (S7205). When the pointer update process 2 (S7205) is executed, first, the same process as S7401 of the above-described pointer update process (see FIG. 254) is performed, and it is determined whether it is time to change the display area next (S7431). If it is determined in the process of S7431 that the display area is to be changed (S7431: Yes), then the display area corresponding to the command is set with reference to the display area storage area 234a2a (S7432) The display area data determined is overwritten on the display data table buffer (S7433). Then, the process shifts to S7402.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7431 that it is not the timing at which the display area is changed, the process of S7432 and S7433 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7402. In S7402 to S7406, the same processing as S7402 to S7406 in the above-described pointer update processing (see FIG. 254) is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in another example of the first modification of the fourth control example, a new symbol arrangement is displayed after temporarily stopping normal symbol variation display in the first temporary stop display mode as composite reach effect. The display area is changed so that the 1st reach aspect can be executed so that the 1st reach aspect can be executed temporarily, and the temporary change display of the symbol variation is performed after temporarily displaying the 1st reach aspect in the 2nd temporary stop display aspect. 2 Reach configuration is configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible to execute a reach effect with high effect for the player. In addition, although two types, the left-right direction and the up-down direction, are set as a variation direction of a symbol row in this example of another, you may comprise so that a symbol row may be changed to directions other than that.

  Moreover, since it is comprised so that it may stop temporarily in a multiple times temporary stop display mode during composite reach production, when a deviation fluctuation pattern is performed by matching the timing to make temporary stop with the stop display timing of a fluctuation pattern It is possible to execute the same effect (when at least part of the display data can be diverted) when the combined reach effect is temporarily stopped and displayed, and to reduce the amount of display data used for the effect While being able to do that, it is possible to make the player think that the combined reach effect is being performed even when the out-of-out variation pattern is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the symbol row data used when executing the first reach aspect and the symbol row data used when performing the second reach aspect are stored differently, each symbol row is used. By combining the data, various effects can be performed. Also, the first combination of symbols displayed when the first reach aspect is stopped (temporary stop) matches the combination of symbols set in the symbol row used in the second reach aspect. Since the stop (temporary stop) display mode of the reach mode is set, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player when switching the presentation mode from the first reach mode to the second reach mode.

  In the state where display control of each symbol row (L1 to L4, L8) executed in the first reach mode is being executed, display control of each symbol row (L5 to L7) executed in the second reach mode May be executed in advance. In this case, the layer in which the display of the first reach aspect is executed and the layer in which the display of the second reach aspect is separately provided, and in the state where the first reach aspect is executed, the display of the second reach aspect is played The control may be performed so that the player can not visually recognize, and the display control of each layer may be switched at timing when the second reach aspect is executed, so that the player can visually recognize the second reach aspect.

  In each control example explained above, although the case where the game machine in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed at the same time is used has been described, for example, The variation of the special symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and the normal symbol may be simultaneously displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the technology described in each control example described above may be applied. In this case, as a result of the lottery of the normal symbol, it is possible to achieve more effect by making the privilege to be executed when the win is the same privilege as the bonus to be executed when the special symbol is the win. it can.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the right rotation unit 600 as an example>
Base member, first displacement member and second displacement member displaceably formed with respect to the base member, transmission member transmitting the driving force to the first displacement member and second displacement member, and transmission member The transmission member includes a drive pin, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member respectively include a first groove and a second groove, and The first groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, and the second groove includes at least an action section that receives an action from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the groove and the second groove are overlapped and the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove. Play games A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member The first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member, the effect member having the transmission member transmitting and the driving means for applying the driving force to the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

  According to this gaming machine, when the drive force of the drive means is applied to the transmission member, the effect member drives the transmission member from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member via the first groove and the second groove. Is transmitted, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to the base member.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the first groove and the second groove are juxtaposed, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove is increased, and the front view of the effect member accordingly There was a problem that the external shape in the case became large. In particular, in recent years, the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device has been demanded, and the enlargement of the external shape of the effect member in a front view is not preferable because it hinders the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed on the base member in a posture in which the first groove and the second groove are overlapped. As compared with the conventional product in which the groove and the second groove are juxtaposed, the space required for the arrangement of the first groove and the second groove can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to miniaturize the outer shape in front view. In this case, even if enlargement of the liquid crystal display device is required, the space in the thickness direction (front-back direction) has a relatively large margin, and like the gaming machine A1, the first groove and the second groove In the configuration in which the layers are stacked, the outer shape in front view can be miniaturized by utilizing the space in the thickness direction with a relatively large margin, which is particularly effective for the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, according to the gaming machine A1, since the drive pin is inserted into the first groove and the second groove which are overlapped, the driving force from the transmission member is divided into the first displacement member and the second displacement member by one drive pin. , And it is unnecessary to provide a drive pin for each of the first groove and the second groove. That is, parts can be used in common, and part costs can be reduced accordingly.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the driving force of the driving means is applied to the transmission member, the driving force is transmitted from the transmission member to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement The member is displaced relative to the base member. In this case, in a state where the action section of the first groove and the second groove receives the action from the transmission member, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are respectively displaced, while only the action section of the second groove is from the transmission member In the state of receiving the action (the transmission member does not interfere with the first groove due to the non-interference section), the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the back surface of the first displacement member and has a driven member formed with the second groove, and is connected to the driven portion. A game machine A2 comprising: a connection displacement member disposed displaceably on the back surface of the first displacement member and having a decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the back surface of the first displacement member and a second groove is formed, and the driven member Since the coupling displacement member is coupled to the driven portion and disposed displaceably on the back surface of the first displacement member, the link structure can be formed by the driven member and the coupling displacement member. Thus, when the driven member is driven by the transmission member, the decorative portion of the coupling displacement member can be relatively largely displaced relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member is capable of forming an attitude in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are superimposed on each other.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the second displacement member can form a posture in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are superimposed, and therefore, the second displacement member The outer shape of the displacement member in a front view can be miniaturized.

  In the gaming machine A3, the first displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and the second displacement member is a posture in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are overlapped. And a game machine A4 that can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the second displacement member can be disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member at the retracted position in a posture in which the driven member and the connection displacement member are superimposed. Since it is formed, it is possible to miniaturize the outer shapes of the first displacement member and the second displacement member disposed at the retracted position in the front view, by the amount of the overlap.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member includes an overhanging portion formed to project on the opposite side of the decorative portion with respect to the portion displaceably disposed on the first displacement member. A game machine A5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the connection displacement member protrudes on the opposite side to the decorative portion across the portion displaceably disposed on the first displacement member Since the formed overhanging portion is provided, such an overhanging portion can be made to play a role of a weight.

  For example, when driving the driven portion to lift the decorative portion of the coupling displacement member upward, the overhanging portion is formed on the opposite side to the decorative portion, so that the weight of the overhanging portion is used. , It can be easy to lift the decoration part upwards. Therefore, the overhanging portion can be lifted quickly, and the driving force required for lifting can be suppressed. In addition, after the decorative portion is lifted, the weight of the decorative portion and the weight of the overhanging portion can be suspended together, so that the decorative portion can be compared to a cantilever state in which only the decorative portion is formed. The lifted attitude can be stabilized and the driving force necessary to maintain the attitude can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connection displacement member is formed so as to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the overhanging portion of the connection displacement member is formed to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member, so the driven portion is driven to perform connection. When the displacement member is displaced, rattling of the connection displacement member (decorative portion) can be suppressed by the overhanging portion being in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member. In addition, since the protruding part serving as the weight can also be used to suppress looseness due to contact with the first displacement member, the structure is simplified, and the part cost is reduced accordingly. Can be

  In the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connection displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the overhanging portion of the connection displacement member is formed in a substantially box shape, so that the weight and the rigidity can be secured while reducing the outer size. it can. Therefore, in a state in which the overhanging portion is hidden behind the first displacement member (that is, in a state in which it is not visible from the front), the coupling displacement member is displaceable while the function as a weight and the back surface of the first displacement member And the function of suppressing rattling can be reliably exhibited.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and a protrusion that protrudes from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing, The first displacement member includes an abutment portion formed to be able to abut on the projection, the bearing pivotally supports the first displacement member in a state of being raised from the base member, and the projection A game machine A8 characterized in that the relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is restricted within a predetermined range by the contact of the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the base member includes a bearing that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the bearing is the first displacement member. Since the bearing is supported in a state of being raised from the base member, a space for disposing the second displacement member can be formed between the base member and the first displacement member by such raising. Thus, the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be disposed in an overlapping manner.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A8, the base member further includes a projecting portion formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the first displacement member is an abutting portion formed to be able to abut on the projecting portion. The relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can be restricted within a predetermined range by bringing the contact portion into contact with the projection. That is, in order to arrange the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, the bearing portion which raises the first displacement member from the base member has a relatively high rigidity and on the outer peripheral side thereof. When a dead space is formed, a projecting portion is provided so as to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion, and the abutting portion is brought into contact with the projecting portion, whereby relative rotation of the first displacement member with respect to the base member is achieved. The rigidity of the regulated portion can be secured, and the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A8, a projecting portion of the base member is formed to be able to abut on a back surface of the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the projection of the base member is formed so as to be able to abut on the back surface of the first displacement member, so when the first displacement member is displaced. The rattling of the first displacement member can be suppressed by the projection of the base member being in contact with the back surface of the first displacement member. In addition, since the projection for controlling the relative displacement of the first displacement member with respect to the base member can also be used to abut the first displacement member to suppress rattling, the structure is simplified. The part cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In particular, in the gaming machine A9 subordinate to the gaming machine A2, since the second displacement member (the driven member and the connection displacement member) is disposed on the first displacement member, the first displacement member is the weight of the second displacement member It is necessary to rotate with respect to the base member in a state of supporting the shaft, and rattling is likely to occur. Therefore, a configuration in which the protrusion of the base member abuts against the back surface of the first displacement member to suppress rattling of the first displacement member is effective.

  In the gaming machine A9, one longitudinal end side of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and a projecting portion of the base member is at an edge portion of one longitudinal end side of the first displacement member. A game machine A10 characterized in that it is formed to be able to abut on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, one longitudinal end side of the first displacement member is pivotally supported by the bearing portion of the base member, and the projecting portion of the base member is one longitudinal end of the first displacement member Since it is formed to be able to abut on the back surface at the side edge, the projection can be disposed at a position where the tilting can be suppressed when the first displacement member tilts under its own weight. As a result, rattling of the first displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion is provided so as to protrude from an outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and is continuously provided on the front surface of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, since the projecting portion is provided protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing portion and continuously provided on the front surface of the base member, the rigidity of the projecting portion is enhanced. Can. In particular, when the first displacement member tilts under its own weight, the rigidity of the direction supporting the tilt (that is, the direction in which the projecting portion is pressed against the front surface of the base member) can be enhanced. Stickiness can be effectively suppressed.

  The game machine A12 according to any one of the game machines A2 to A11, wherein the base member is provided with an inclined surface which is formed by beveling a ridge line portion of the side surface and the front surface.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, the base member is provided with an inclined surface which is formed by being beveled by chamfering the ridge line portions of the side surface and the front surface. (2) It can be suppressed that the displacement member is locked to the side surface of the base member and can not be displaced. In this case, in the present invention, since the connection displacement member of the second displacement member is disposed in a cantilever state so as to be displaceable on the back surface of the first displacement member, the first displacement member or (and) the second displacement member is When displaced, the connection displacement member of the second displacement member tends to swing in the direction in which the connection displacement member moves closer to and away from the base member, and the connection displacement member is likely to be locked to the side surface of the base member. Therefore, the configuration in which the base member is provided with the inclined surface is particularly effective.

  In the gaming machine A12, in the second displacement member, the connection displacement member is formed of a light transmitting material, and the base member is protruded from the front surface thereof and extended along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. A game machine A13 having a convex streak.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12, the base member includes a projection which protrudes from the front surface and extends along the displacement direction of the second displacement member. Can be brought into contact with the second displacement member. Therefore, the contact resistance can be reduced by reducing the contact area as compared with the case where the entire front surface of the base member contacts the second displacement member.

  Here, since the second displacement member is formed of the light transmitting material as the connection displacement member, when the connection displacement member is displaced for visual recognition by the player, the emitted light is transmitted to produce a rendering effect. Can be enhanced. In this case, when the entire front surface of the base member abuts on the connection displacement member when the second displacement member is displaced, the connection displacement member is fogged due to rubbing with the front surface of the base member, The effect of transmitting the light of the connecting displacement member is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A12, a convex streak is formed on the front surface of the base member, and only the tip of the convex streak can be made to abut on the coupling displacement member, so that the rubbing of the coupling displacement member Clouding can be partial. As a result, it is possible to exhibit a rendering effect by transmitting light to the connection displacement portion.

  In the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes a connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the convex stripe of the base member is the second displacement member. A game machine A14 that extends along the path of the connection pin when being displaced.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, the second displacement member includes the connection pin that connects the driven member and the connection displacement member and is formed of a metal material, and the protrusion of the base member Since the second displacement member is extended along the locus of the connection pin when the second displacement member is displaced, the connection pin can be made to abut on the protruding tip of the convex strip. Therefore, it is suppressed that fogging is formed in the part which consists of a light transmission material of a connection displacement member by rubbing with a convex stripe, and it is made to exhibit the rendering effect by making light a transmission displacement member. Can.

  The gaming machine A13 or A14 includes a gear interposed between the drive means and the transmission member, and the base member includes a gear receiving portion for pivotally supporting the gear in its internal space, and A gaming machine A15 characterized in that a gear receiving portion is projected from the front surface of the base member, and the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A13 or A14, the ridge is extended to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion that protrudes from the front surface of the base member, so the second displacement member is the base It can be locked to the gear receiving part which protrudes from the side of a member, and it can suppress that displacement becomes impossible, or the displacement is inhibited. In other words, by providing a protrusion on the front surface of the base member and extending the protrusion to a position corresponding to the gear receiving portion, the gear receiving portion can be made to project from the front surface of the base member It can be. Thereby, the gear can be rotatably accommodated in the internal space while reducing the thickness dimension of the base member. As a result, for example, it is unnecessary to fix the drive shaft of the drive means to the gear (that is, since the gear is held by the gear receiving portion of the base member, it is sufficient to insert the drive shaft of the drive only into the gear) ), So that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the first displacement member is at a retracted position located on the front surface of the base member. The rotary shaft of the first displacement member is disposed so as to be closer to the overhanging position than the rotational axis of the transmission member. A game machine A16 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A15, the first displacement member and the transmission member are rotatably supported by the base member, and the rotation shaft of the first displacement member is the transmission member Is disposed on the overhanging position side with respect to the rotation shaft of the second embodiment, so that the area of the first displacement member overhanging to the overhanging position can be further increased, while either of the first displacement member being between the retracted position and the overhanging position Even in the case of (1), the transmission member can be disposed on the back of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the gaming machine A16, the base member includes a bearing that rotatably supports the first displacement member, and the transmission member is configured to move the second displacement member to the overhanging position. A game machine A17 formed so as to be able to abut on the bearing portion.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A16, the base member includes the bearing portion for pivotally supporting the first displacement member, and the transmission member projects the second displacement member to the overhang position. In this case, the relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member can be restricted within a predetermined range because the second displacement member can be abutted against the bearing portion of the base member. That is, the transmission member serving to transmit the driving force of the drive means can also serve as a stopper for restricting relative rotation of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member within a predetermined range. It is possible to simplify and reduce the cost of parts accordingly.

  Further, the bearing portion is a portion for bulking the first displacement member from the base member and arranging the first displacement member and the second displacement member in an overlapping posture, and the rigidity is relatively increased. The dead space is formed on the outer peripheral side, and by configuring the transmission member to abut on the bearing portion, the rigidity of the portion that regulates the relative rotation of the second displacement member to the first displacement member is secured. Thus, the durability can be improved, and the dead space can be effectively used, and the size can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A17, when the transfer member has a concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion recessed and the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position, the bearing portion is received in the concave portion. A game machine A18 characterized in that it is formed as possible.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A17, the transmission member is a bearing when the concave portion corresponding to the outer shape of the bearing portion is recessed and the second displacement member is projected to the overhanging position Since the portion is formed to be receivable in the recess, the movable range of the transmission member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the amount of displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be secured. In other words, since the position of the rotation shaft of the transmission member can be brought close to the bearing while securing the movable range of the transmission member, the first displacement member retracts while suppressing the outer shape of the first displacement member. While displacing between the position and the overhanging position, the transmission member can be easily concealed on the back surface of the first displacement member (that is, in a state invisible from the front).

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the action sections of the first groove and the second groove receive an action from the transmission member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved. After the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the action section of the second groove receives action from the transmission member, and the non-interference section makes the transmission member non-interfering with the first groove, A game machine A19 characterized in that the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other. .

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A18, when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, and then the first The first displacement member is stopped, and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction. In this case, since the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A18, inertia caused by the stop of the first displacement member displaced in the first direction The force can be canceled out by the inertial force when the second displacement member displaces in the second direction. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability by reducing the load on the part due to the action of the inertial force.

  In the gaming machine A19, the gaming machine A19 includes one or more gears interposed between the driving means and the transmission member to transmit a driving force, and the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member. A game machine A20 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, the weight of the first displacement member is heavier than the weight of the second displacement member, so when the transmission member is driven in the forward direction, the weight is The heavy first displacement member may be stopped first, and the light weight second displacement member may be finally stopped. Thereby, the load on the gear can be reduced.

  That is, from the state in which the transmission member is driven in the forward direction and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are each displaced in the first direction, the first displacement member is stopped, and the second displacement member is Since the transition to the direction displaced state is performed by the transfer member moving from the transfer section of the first groove to the non-interference section, the rotation of the drive means and the gear is continued. Therefore, even if the first displacement member is stopped, no load is generated on the gear. On the other hand, the transition from the state in which the first displacement member is stopped and the second displacement member is displaced in the second direction to the state in which the second displacement member is also stopped is the rotation of the drive means and the gear. In this case, since the only member to be stopped is the second displacement member which is light in weight, the load on the gear can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the game machine comprises a third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is displaced by the action of the second displacement member. Game machine A21 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A20, the gaming machine A21 includes the third displacement member disposed displaceably on the first displacement member, and the third displacement member is the second displacement The third displacement member can also be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member because the member is displaced under the action of the member.

  In the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member and the third displacement member includes a drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member includes a third groove, and the third groove is a third groove. A game machine A22 comprising: an action section that receives an action from the drive pin; and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21, one of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is provided with the drive pin, and the other of the second displacement member or the third displacement member is the third groove. Since the third groove includes an action section that receives an action from the drive pin and a non-interference section in which the drive pin does not interfere, both the second displacement member and the third displacement member are displaced with respect to the first displacement member. It is possible to form an aspect in which only the second displacement member or the third displacement member is displaced relative to the first displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A21, the second displacement member is disposed movably on the third displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A23, since the second displacement member is disposed displaceably to the third displacement member, when the third displacement member is displaced relative to the first displacement member, the third displacement member is displaced relative to the third displacement member. The relative displacement of the second displacement member relative to the third displacement member can be superimposed on the relative displacement of the third displacement member relative to the first displacement member by the relative displacement of the second displacement member, and as a result, the first displacement member The amount of relative displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the displacement member can be enlarged.

<About the concept of the invention which makes the left rotation unit 700 an example>
Base member, first displacement member disposed displaceably in the base member, second displacement member disposed displaceably in the first displacement member, first displacement member and second displacement member And a connecting member for connecting between the base member and the second displacement member, wherein the second displacement member is movable in response to the displacement of the first displacement member. In the gaming machine which is relatively displaced with respect to the first displacement member, the connecting member has a connecting first member whose one end is connected to the base member, and the other end is connected to the other end of the connecting first member And a connecting second member whose one end is connected to the second displacement member, and a connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member A game machine B1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a base member, a first displacement member disposed displaceably in the base member, and a second displacement member disposed displaceably in the first displacement member; There is a gaming machine provided with driving means for generating driving force for displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and a connecting member for connecting the base member and the second displacement member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013) -17886)).

  According to this gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the connecting member acts between the base member and the second displacement member, thereby causing the displacement of the first displacement member. The second displacement member can be displaced relative to the first displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction away from the base member, the connection member connecting the base member and the second displacement member is exposed, so It becomes visible to the user and there is a problem that the appearance is lost.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the connecting member is the connecting first member whose one end is connected to the base member, and the other end is connected to the other end of the connecting first member and the second displacement member The first displacement member has a base connected to the first displacement member, and a connection portion between the other end of the connection first member and the connection second member is movably connected to the first displacement member. Even when displaced in the direction away from the member, the connecting member (the connecting first member and the connecting second member) can be disposed on the back of the first displacement member to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection member from being exposed and the appearance from being impaired.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the connection second member of the connection member is slidably disposed on the first displacement member. A gaming machine B2 to be.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and the coupling second member of the coupling member is slidably displaceable on the first displacement member. Since it is disposed, when the first displacement member is rotated relative to the base member, the amount of rotation is large (that is, it is necessary to increase the displacement of the coupled first member and the coupled second member) Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition from the player by maintaining the state in which the connecting second member of the connecting member is disposed on the back surface of the first displacement member. As a result, the connection second member of the connection member can be prevented from being exposed to damage the appearance.

  In addition, even when an electrical connection line is wired to the first displacement member, the connection second member and the connection second member can be slidably disposed on the first displacement member so that the connection second member of the connection member is slidably displaceable. Can easily suppress interference with Therefore, it is not necessary to secure a large space for wiring the connection line in order to avoid interference, and accordingly, it is possible to miniaturize the front displacement shape of the first displacement member.

  The gaming machine B1 or B2 includes a driving body driven by the driving means, the driving body is connected to the connecting first member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is connected to the connecting first body from the driving body. A game machine B3 characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted to the member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driving body driven by the driving means is provided, the driving body is connected to the first connecting member of the connecting member, and the driving force of the driving means is Since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are driven by being transmitted from the driving body to the connecting first member, it is possible to miniaturize the front displacement shape of the first displacement member.

  That is, the connecting member is located between the first displacement member and the base member because the connecting portion between the other ends of the connecting first member and the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member. When the driving body is connected to the first displacement member, the driving body and the connecting member may interfere with each other, so it is necessary to connect the driving body to the first displacement member at a position not overlapping the displacement trajectory of the connection member. There is. Therefore, it is necessary to make the front view shape of the first displacement member a size including the displacement locus of the connection member and the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, and the front view shape of the first displacement member becomes larger accordingly Do. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, it is not necessary to avoid interference between the driving body and the connecting member, and the front view shape of the first displacement member may be set to a size corresponding to only the displacement trajectory of the connecting member. Since it is not necessary to include the connecting portion to which the driving body is connected, the front view shape of the first displacement member can be miniaturized accordingly.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the first displacement member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and the base member is a base side engaging member A displacement side engagement member formed to be engageable with the base side engagement member in a state in which the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the first displacement member or the second displacement member A game machine B4 characterized in that one side is equipped.

  Here, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in a bridging state, and at the retracted position, at a position relatively away from the rotation axis of the first displacement member, The base member and the second displacement member are coupled by the coupling member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction of separating from the base member, the distance between the base member and the second displacement member The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the interlinked member.

  However, in the gaming machine B4, since the connecting member of the connecting first member and the other end of the connecting second member is displaceably connected to the first displacement member, the connecting member is the first displacement member in the retracted position. With the rotation axis as a base end, a portion opposite to the rotation axis (ie, the second displacement member side) is a free end. Therefore, due to its own weight and the weight of the second displacement member, the portion (second displacement member side) opposite to the rotation axis of the first displacement member tends to tilt in the direction away from the base member.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the base member includes the base side engaging member, and one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is in the displacement side engagement. In the state where the first displacement member is displaced to the retracted position, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are formed so as to be engageable. It is possible to prevent the part (the second displacement member side) from being inclined in the direction of separating from the base member.

  In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 characterized in that the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the second displacement member is provided with the displacement side engagement member, so the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is It can be positioned relatively far from the rotation axis of the displacement member. Therefore, by using the engagement of the base side engaging member and the displacement side engaging member, the portion (second displacement member side) opposite to the rotation axis of the first displacement member is inclined in a direction away from the base member Can be effectively suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are formed by bending the tip of the base and a base erected from the front surface of the base member or the back of the second displacement member. The first displacement member is displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position so that the engagement surfaces of the bending portions are engaged with each other. The engagement surface of the bent portion of the base side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip end, and / or the engagement of the bent portion of the displacement side engagement member A game machine B6 characterized in that the surface is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement front end side.

  Here, when the second displacement member includes the displacement side engagement member as in the game machine B5, the engagement position between the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member is from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. Since the positions are relatively far apart, it is difficult to engage the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member due to the swing of the first displacement member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the engagement surface of the bent portion of the base side engagement member is inclined in a direction away from the front surface of the base member toward the engagement tip side or / and displacement side engagement The engagement surface of the bending portion of the member is inclined in a direction away from the back surface of the second displacement member toward the engagement tip side, that is, the engagement surface of the bending portion and the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member And the base side engaging member and the displacing side engaging member, even when the first displacement member sways, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5. Can be engaged easily.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine B6, the first displacement member is directed to the retracted position by being inclined as described above for the engagement surface of the bent portion in at least one of the base side engagement member or the displacement side engagement member. When being displaced, the second displacement member can be brought closer to the base member in accordance with the inclination of the engagement surface of the bending portion. As a result, in the retracted position, the dimension by which the second displacement member protrudes from the base member can be suppressed, and rattling of the second displacement member can be absorbed to maintain its posture.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member bend a tip of the base erected from the front surface of the base member or the back surface of the second displacement member and a tip of the base Each of the first and second displacement members is provided with a bending portion whose inner surface is an engaging surface, and the engaging surfaces of the bending portions are engaged with each other by displacing the first displacement member from the overhanging position to the retracted position. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a bending portion of the other is formed on the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, the front surface of the base member and the back surface of the second displacement member are formed with a receiving portion for receiving the bending portion of the other member. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position (a state in which the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member are engaged), the bending portion is received by the receiving portion and the second displacement member approaches the base member. Displacement in the direction can be tolerated. Therefore, the standing dimensions of the base side engagement member and the base of the displacement side engagement member are increased to facilitate engagement of the base side engagement member with the displacement side engagement member, and at the retracted position, The displacement in the direction approaching the base member of the displacement member can be allowed to prevent damage due to a collision.

  In any one of the gaming machine B3 to the gaming machine B7, the displacement side engagement member is engaged with the first displacement member in a state where the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the displacement-side engaging member is used as the first displacement member when the first displacement member is disposed at the extended position. The first displacement member and the second displacement member can be engaged, that is, coupled via the displacement side engagement member. Thus, it is possible to suppress rattling of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member at the overhanging position. In addition, the displacement side engagement member plays a role of engaging with the base side engagement member in the retracted position to couple the second displacement member to the base member, and engaging with the first displacement member at the overhang position and performing second displacement Since the role of coupling the member to the first displacement member can also be used, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, the game machine further comprises an interposed means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member, and the interposed means is the one for the base member with respect to the base member. The mode of the action produced between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is made different between the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction. A game machine B9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 is provided with an intervening means interposed between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member, and the intervening means The first displacement member is displaced relative to the base member in the first direction and in the second direction, the action occurring between the second displacement member and one end of the connecting second member Since the aspect is different, the aspect of the displacement of the second displacement member with respect to the first displacement member in the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the displacement in the second direction with respect to the base member It can be different.

  In the gaming machine B9, the interposed means includes a guided portion disposed at one end of the first displacement member or the one end of the connected second member, and one end of the first displacement member or the connected second member. And a guide portion disposed on the other side for guiding the guided portion, wherein the first displacement member is displaced in a first direction relative to the base member and in a second direction, A game machine B10, characterized in that the mode of the action generated between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is made different by guiding the guide portion along different paths of the guide portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the interposed means is disposed between the case where the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction and the case where it is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member. Since the mode of the action produced between the second displacement member and the one end of the connecting second member is made different by guiding the guiding portion along different paths of the guided portion, the second portion The mode of displacement of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member can be easily changed. That is, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B9, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposed means acts between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member. When the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is released. A gaming machine B11 to be.

  According to the gaming machine B11, when the first displacement member is displaced in the first direction with respect to the base member, the interposed means causes an action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member. On the other hand, when the first displacement member is displaced in the second direction with respect to the base member, the action between the second displacement member and one end of the connected second member is released, so the first displacement with respect to the base member The displacement aspect of the second displacement member relative to the first displacement member can be easily made to differ greatly between the case where the member is displaced in the first direction and the case where the member is displaced in the second direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Center Frame 86 as an Example>
It is displaceable between a game board having a game area on the front and an opening formed in the center, and a retracted position on the back side of the game board and an overhanging position visible through the opening. And a center frame formed of a light transmitting material and mounted at an opening of the game board, the center frame forming a part of the game area A game machine C1 comprising a region forming unit.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a gaming board having a gaming area on the front and an opening formed at the center, and a tension that can be viewed through an evacuation position and the opening on the back side of the gaming board. There is a gaming machine provided with a displacement member formed displaceably between the delivery positions (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176580).

  According to this gaming machine, the opening of the gaming board is made larger than the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device, and an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized is secured accordingly. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to secure an area for the balls to flow down in the gaming area, there is a limit in enlarging the opening of the game board, and the area where the displacement member can be viewed There was a problem that it could not be secured enough.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the center frame is formed of the light transmitting material and is installed at the opening of the gaming board, and the center frame includes the area forming portion which forms a part of the gaming area. Therefore, the displacement member can be visually recognized through the area forming portion. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the displacement member can be visually recognized while securing an area for the balls to flow down to the game area.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine is characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area. C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the area forming portion of the center frame forms a continuous area from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board to the outer edge of the gaming area as a part of the gaming area Therefore, the area in which the displacement member can be viewed can be secured to the maximum.

  In the gaming machine C2, a gaming machine C3 characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the area forming portion of the center frame is set to a width that allows passage of only one gaming ball, so through the opening of the gaming board ( That is, the area | region which can visually recognize a displacement member can be ensured to the maximum without passing through a center frame.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a gaming machine C4 characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a downstream wall standing upright on the downstream side of the area and integrally formed with the center frame.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and it is not possible to implant nails, the flow-down speed of the game balls becomes fast, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, since the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with the downstream wall standing on the downstream side of the region, the gaming ball flowing down the region forming portion It can be connected. Therefore, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, it is possible to reduce the flow-down speed of the gaming ball and make it easy for the player to visually recognize. Further, since the downstream wall portion is integrally formed on the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and fastening and fixing of other parts can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. .

  In the gaming machine C4, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion which is provided in the region and defines a passage through which the game balls flow down, and is integrally formed on the center frame. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is connected to a wall.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a side wall portion which is erected in the region and which divides the passage where the game ball flows down. Because it is connected to the wall, the rigidity of the downstream wall that receives the game balls flowing down can be increased. Thereby, damage to the downstream wall can be prevented. Further, since the connecting wall is integrally formed on the center frame, it can be easily molded by molding, and fastening and fixing of other parts can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly. . Furthermore, since the side wall portion serving to divide the passage through which the game ball flows down can also be used to increase the rigidity of the downstream wall portion, the structure is simplified and the part cost is reduced accordingly. be able to.

  The gaming machine C5 includes an inner rail for guiding a gaming ball erected and fired from the front of the gaming board to the gaming area, and the side wall portion is juxtaposed to the inner rail. Machine C6.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the mode in which the game balls flowing down the game area collide with the inner rail collides with the nail and then collides, and the speed is relatively slow, and this is damage to the inner rail Was not a problem. On the other hand, in the present invention, the width of the area forming portion forming a part of the game area is narrow (for example, the passage of only one game ball is permitted) in order to secure the area where the displacement member can be visually recognized to the maximum. Is set to the That is, the width of the game area is narrowed by the area forming unit. Therefore, on the upstream side of the area forming unit, it is necessary to guide the game balls having flowed down the game area toward the area forming unit, and as a result of that guidance, a part of the game balls is in the inner rail at a relatively high speed. And the inner rail may bend.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is juxtaposed to the inner rail, the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area is guided to the area forming portion, so that the gaming ball is directed to the inner rail Even if it flows down, such a game ball can be received by the side wall portion and collision with the inner rail can be avoided. As a result, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, bending of the inner rail can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine C5 or C6 includes light emitting means disposed on the back side of the area forming portion of the center frame and capable of emitting light, and the side wall portion emits the light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine C7 characterized in that it functions as a light guide leading to the front side of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5 or C6, the side wall portion is formed so as to function as a light guide for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front side of the gaming area. It is possible to demonstrate the effects of In particular, in the gaming machine C7 subordinate to the gaming machine C6, since the side wall portion is juxtaposed to the inner rail, light leakage can be reduced by the inner rail, and the amount of light that can be guided can be increased accordingly. . As a result, the effect of light can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is a back surface of the area forming portion of the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7, the light emitting means is disposed on the displacement member, and the retracted position of the displacement member is the back of the area forming portion of the center frame. In the state in which the light source is disposed at the retracted position, the light emitted from the light emitting means of the displacing member is guided through the side wall while making the displacing member visible through the area forming portion of the center frame. It can be made visible. Thereby, the effect of light can be enhanced.

  In any one of gaming machines C1 to C8, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided in the area to define a passage along which the game balls flow down and a pair of side wall portions integrally formed on the center frame. A game machine C9 characterized in that one or a plurality of projections are provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions.

  Here, when the center frame is formed of a resin material and it is not possible to implant a nail in the area forming portion, the flow velocity of the gaming ball flowing down the passage divided by the pair of side wall portions is increased, and the gaming ball flowing down is played It becomes difficult for the person to see.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, one or a plurality of projections are respectively provided on the facing surfaces of the pair of side wall portions so that the game ball flows down the passage divided into the pair of side wall portions. In addition, the game ball can be made to collide with the projection to inhibit its flow down. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C8, it is possible to slow down the flow-down speed of the gaming balls and make it easy for the player to visually recognize the flowing gaming balls.

  In the gaming machine C9, the protrusions of one facing surface of the pair of side wall portions and the protrusions of the other facing surface are arranged in a staggered manner.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the projections on one of the opposing surfaces of the pair of side walls and the projections on the other opposing surface are arranged in a staggered manner. When the game ball flows down the passage, the game ball can be made to collide with the left and right projections alternately to meander the game ball flowing down. Thereby, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be made slower to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the flowing game ball, and also to the direction perpendicular to the flow-down direction. It can be displaced to change the movement of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine C10, a gaming machine C11 characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a recessed groove which is recessed on the front surface and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a recessed groove which is recessed on the front surface and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape. When the ball flows down, the gaming ball can be guided by the inner surface of the concave groove to meander. As a result, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be reduced, and the player can easily view the flowing game balls. Further, according to the gaming machine C11 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the concave groove can be used as a lens to guide the light emitted from the light emitting means to the front of the game area, and the effect by the light is exhibited. can do.

  In the gaming machine C11, a gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the concave portion is disposed such that the bent portion thereof is offset in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball with respect to the protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the concave portion is disposed with its bent portion shifted in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball with respect to the protrusion, so the gaming ball flows down the area forming portion In this case, the game balls guided by the inner surface of the concave groove can be easily collided alternately with the protrusions. Therefore, a synergetic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by the recessed groove and the action by the protrusion. As a result, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the flowing game balls. Further, the change in movement of the gaming ball can be made larger.

  In the gaming machine C10, a gaming machine C13 characterized in that the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a convex stripe which is provided so as to protrude from the front surface thereof and extends in a substantially sawtooth shape.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C10, the area forming portion of the center frame is provided with a convex stripe protruding from the front surface thereof and extending substantially in a saw blade shape. When the ball flows down, the gaming ball can be guided and meandered by the outer surface of the ridge. As a result, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be reduced, and the player can easily view the flowing game balls. Further, according to the gaming machine C13 subordinate to the gaming machine C7, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be guided to the front of the game area by using the ridge as a lens, and the effect by the light is exhibited. can do.

  In the gaming machine C13, the projected streaks are arranged such that the bent portions thereof are aligned with the protrusions in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C13, the convex portions are arranged such that the bent portions thereof coincide with the projections in the flow-down direction of the game balls, so the game balls flow In this case, the game balls guided by the outer surface of the ridges can be easily collided alternately with the projections. Therefore, a synergetic effect can be obtained by utilizing both the action by the ridges and the action by the projections. As a result, the flow-down speed of the game balls can be made slower to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the flowing game balls. Further, the change in movement of the gaming ball can be made larger.

  In any one of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end side of the recessed groove or the protruding line has the extension direction overlapping the downstream wall portion and pointing the outlet of the passage partitioned by the pair of side wall portions. The game machine C15 which features.

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines C11 to C14, the end of the concave groove or the ridge is divided by the pair of side walls while the extension direction overlaps the downstream wall. Since the exit of the passage is directed, the gaming ball guided to the end side of the concave groove or the convex line can be made to collide obliquely with respect to the downstream wall, thereby suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and Such gaming balls can flow down toward the exit of the passage while reducing the flow down speed. As a result, the gaming balls can be made to flow out smoothly from the exit of the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
The seesaw member rotatably supported between the one end side and the other end by a pivot shaft, the seesaw member, when unloaded, the first end is lowered while the other end is raised. In the gaming machine which forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by forming the state and placing the game ball on the other end side with respect to the rotary shaft. The seesaw member is provided with a receiving surface for receiving the gaming ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving surface is positioned on the one end side with respect to the rotating shaft. A gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the seesaw member rotatably supported between the one end side and the other end by a rotation shaft is provided, and the seesaw member descends in the unloaded state. While the other end side is raised to form a first state, and the gaming ball is placed on the other end side relative to the rotation axis, so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered There is a gaming machine which forms a game machine (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

  According to this gaming machine, when the gaming ball is dropped to the seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation axis and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes The other end is lowered and the one end is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the gaming ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end is discharged, the other end is raised and the one end is lowered to be returned to the first state. That is, it is possible to make the first state and the second state appear alternately by utilizing the weight of the dropped game ball, and effect by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are vertically displaced It can be carried out.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, the other end is lowered and the one end is maintained in the second state where it is raised, and the first state and the second state There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the seesaw member has the receiving surface for receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means positioned on one end side of the rotating shaft, so the other end is lowered and the one end is raised. Even in the second state, one end side can be lowered by the weight of the gaming ball received by the receiving surface. That is, it is possible to form a first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the gaming ball guided from the guiding means is received in the first state, the receiving surface is formed so as to be able to transmit the gaming ball to the other end side. Game machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, when the receiving surface receives the gaming ball guided from the guiding means in the first state, the receiving surface is formed to be able to send the gaming ball to the other end As a result, switching from the first state to the second state can be reliably performed.

  In addition, as a form formed to be able to send out the game ball to the other end side, for example, a form in which the receiving surface is inclined downward from one end side to the other end also in the first state, a projection is formed on the receiving surface, The form etc. which the protrusion forms in the shape where the game ball guided from the guide means is bounced to the other end side are illustrated.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a decorative member rotatably supported, one end side of the seesaw member is connected to the decorative member, and the decorative member is rotated with the seesaw member around the rotation axis. The game machine D3 characterized by being displaced.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the decorative member rotatably supported is provided with one end of the seesaw member connected to the decorative member, and the rotation axis of the seesaw member is centered Since the link mechanism in which the decoration member is displaced is formed along with the rotation, the movable range of the decoration member can be expanded by the link ratio, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to reliably switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member, the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised when no load is applied. Preferably, the seesaw member can be returned early. In this case, according to the gaming machine D3, since the decoration member is connected to one end of the seesaw member, the weight of the decoration member is applied to one end of the seesaw member to lower the one end. be able to. Therefore, when the non-loaded state is achieved, the seesaw member can be easily returned to the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised, and as a result, the first state and the second of the seesaw member It is easy to switch between states.

  In addition, although the weight of the decorative member inhibits raising the one end side of the seesaw member (forming the second state), since the weight of the gaming ball is sufficiently heavy, the gaming ball is more than the rotation axis of the seesaw member. By being placed on the other end side, it is possible to form a second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the game balls pass, and the terminal end side of the passage is extended in a substantially horizontal direction and rolling along which the game balls roll A game machine D4 characterized in that a horizontal passage having a guide surface is formed, and a game ball rolled on a rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is guided from the substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the guide means includes a passage through which the gaming balls pass, so that a plurality of gaming balls can be stored using such a passage. The plurality of gaming balls can be sequentially guided from the passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member.

  However, even in this case, in the form of guiding the gaming balls to the receiving surface of the seesaw member by dropping from above, when the plurality of gaming balls are continuously guided, the plurality of gaming balls are on the receiving surface It is impossible to alternately switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, on the end side of the passage, a horizontal passage is formed extending in a substantially horizontal direction and having a rolling guide surface on which the game balls roll, and the horizontal passage Since the game balls rolled on the moving guide surface are guided from the substantially horizontal direction to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the balls can be sequentially guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member (ie, the receiving surface is horizontal) A plurality of game balls can be prevented from being stacked on such a receiving surface (one ball can be received sequentially from the passage). Therefore, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member alternately.

  In the gaming machine D4, the guide means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, and the extended length of the horizontal passage Is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the gaming ball. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the guiding means includes an upstream passage connected to the upstream side of the horizontal passage and extending in a direction different from the extending direction of the horizontal passage, Since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, even when a plurality of game balls are stored in the passage, one game ball on the receiving surface of the seesaw member It can be guided while being spaced apart.

  That is, since the extension length of the horizontal passage is set to a size smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball, only one game ball can be present in such a horizontal passage, and the horizontal passage can be extended Since the installation direction and the extension direction of the upstream passage are different from each other, when the ball flows from the upstream passage into the horizontal passage, it is necessary to change the inflow direction, and The time required for the flow into the horizontal passage can be increased. Therefore, when the previous game ball existing in the horizontal passage is guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member, the game ball after the upstream passage is flowed into the horizontal passage while taking time to change its direction, The game ball is guided from the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. That is, the later game balls are spaced apart from the previous game balls. As a result, the gaming balls can be guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member while being spaced apart one ball at a time.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, at least in the second state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned above the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4 or D5, the receiving surface of the seesaw member rolls in the horizontal passage at least in the second state (a state in which one end is raised and the other is lowered). Since the step is formed above the guide surface, that is, between the receiving surface and the rolling guide surface, the gaming balls rolled on the rolling guide surface of the horizontal path are guided to the receiving surface of the seesaw member. When being played, it is possible to cause the game ball to ride on the receiving surface (collide with a step), and using the riding operation (collision), it is possible to easily lower the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily form the first state in which one end is lowered and the other end is raised.

  In the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned flush with or lower than the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. A game machine D7 to be characterized.

  Here, the fact that the seesaw member is in the first state means that such seesaw member is in the unloaded state, and the game ball which is guided from the horizontal passage and received on the receiving surface is promptly sent out to the other end side. The weight of the gaming ball is required to act on the other end side of the rotary shaft and to lower the other end side (to form a second state).

  In this case, according to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, at least in the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage or the rotation of the horizontal passage The game ball can be smoothly guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage to the receiving surface of the seesaw member because it is located below the moving guide surface. That is, as in the case of the second state, it is not necessary for the gaming ball to ride on the receiving surface (collide with a step), and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag in such an operation. Therefore, it is possible to quickly send the game ball to the other end side, and as a result, it is possible to easily form the second state in which the one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered.

  In the first state, the receiving surface of the seesaw member is preferably positioned flush with the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage. When the receiving surface of the seesaw member is positioned lower than the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage, the gaming ball guided from the rolling guide surface of the horizontal passage is dropped onto the receiving surface of the seesaw member. As a result, a time lag occurs, and the impact of the drop increases the load on the rotational shaft of the seesaw member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is characterized in that the other end side is bent upward in a substantially V shape as viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft. Machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the seesaw member is bent upward in the substantially U-shape at the other end side as viewed in the axial direction of its rotation shaft Since it is formed, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for arranging the seesaw member.

  That is, when the seesaw member is insufficiently inclined downward on the other end side relative to the rotation axis, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end side (ie, the other end side is lowered and the second state is The formation time is increased, and the switching between the first state and the second state is inhibited. However, if the whole area on the other end side of the rotation shaft is inclined downward, the other end side protrudes from the space allowed for the arrangement of the seesaw member (that is, the space required for the arrangement of the seesaw member increases) ). On the other hand, if the length from the rotating shaft to the other end is shortened so as to fit in the space allowed for the seesaw member, the time during which the gaming ball is placed on the other end (ie, Since the other end side is lowered, the time during which the second state is formed is shortened, and the formation of the second state becomes uncertain, so that the alternate switching between the first state and the second state is inhibited. Also, in order to fit in the space allowed for the seesaw member while maintaining the length from the rotation shaft to the other end side, the descent inclination at the other end side from the rotation shaft is insufficient. .

  On the other hand, each defect mentioned above can be eliminated by forming the other end side of the seesaw member in a shape bent upward in a substantially V shape in the axial direction of the rotation shaft, as a result, It is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state of the seesaw member while suppressing the space required for the arrangement of the seesaw member.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D8, the game machine further comprises an inlet into which the game balls rolled from the rotation shaft toward the other end flow into the seesaw member, and the other end side of the seesaw member A gaming machine D9 characterized in that a claw portion is formed so as to be switchable in the direction toward the inflow port of the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotating shaft to the other end side.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, on the other end side of the seesaw member, the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolled from the rotating shaft to the other end side is directed toward the inflow port Since the claws formed so as to be switchable in the direction are protrusively provided, it is possible to rapidly flow the gaming ball into the inflow port. Therefore, the time during which the game ball is placed on the other end of the seesaw member (that is, the time during which the other end is lowered and the second state is formed) becomes too long, and the first state and the second state It is possible to prevent the alternate switching from being inhibited.

  In the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed to be biased to the side opposite to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D9, the claw portion is disposed on the opposite side to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, so the rolling position of the gaming ball is the seesaw member Even in the case of variations in the width direction, the time during which the gaming ball is placed on the other end side of the seesaw member at the other end (that is, the time when the other end is lowered and the second state is formed) It can be easy to make it constant.

  That is, the game ball rolling on the back side in the width direction of the seesaw member (opposite to the inflow port) is disposed by being biased toward the opposite side to the inflow port in the width direction of the seesaw member, Because the distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member is long, it is made to collide with the claw part at an early stage, and it rolls to the inlet while rolling in the width direction near side (closer to the inlet) of the seesaw member Since the ball has a short distance to the inlet in the width direction of the seesaw member, it can delay the collision with the claws. Thereby, in each of the former and the latter, the time in which the gaming ball is placed on the other end side with respect to the rotation axis of the seesaw member can be made close to equal.

  As a result, even when the rolling position of the gaming ball varies in the width direction of the seesaw member, the time during which the gaming ball is placed on the other end side from the rotation axis of the seesaw member (that is, the other end side is It is possible to make it easy to make constant the time during which the second state is formed.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D10, the seesaw member is provided with an inflow port into which the game ball rolled from the rotation axis toward the other end flows in, and the width of the inflow port is the diameter of the game ball A game machine D11 characterized in that the size is set to be larger than twice.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the gaming machine includes an inflow port into which the gaming balls rolled so as to direct the seesaw member from the rotation shaft to the other end flow Since the size is set to be larger than twice the diameter of the gaming ball, the next gaming ball is further rolled toward the other end with the previous gaming ball existing on the other end side of the seesaw member In this case, each of the gaming balls can smoothly flow into the inflow port. For example, even if the following gaming balls collide with the preceding gaming balls and these gaming balls roll simultaneously to the inflow port, each can be smoothly introduced.

  In the game machine D11, the inflow port is set such that the height dimension on the rotary shaft side is larger than the height dimension on the other end side of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the height dimension at the rotary shaft side is set to be larger than the height dimension at the other end side of the seesaw member. Even when the next game ball is further rolled toward the other end side and collided while the first game ball is present on the other end side of the seesaw member, each of these game balls is smoothly moved to the inflow port. It can be made to flow. That is, even if the game ball after having collided with the previous game ball is bounced up, the height dimension at the rotary shaft side of the inflow port is increased, so using the height, the after game ball is It can be discharged smoothly. On the other hand, even if the first game ball is hit by the second game ball, it is difficult to jump up, so the height dimension at the other end side is lowered to smoothly flow the first game ball into the inlet. While reducing the space required for the inflow port, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other members.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D12, the game machine further comprises a restraining means for restraining the guidance of the game ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member in a state where the seesaw member is disposed in at least a second state. Gaming machine D13.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, in the state where the seesaw member is disposed at least in the second state, the gaming machine includes the suppressing means for suppressing the guidance of the gaming ball from the guiding means to the seesaw member. The time when the game ball on the other end side of the seesaw member is discharged can be secured. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  In the gaming machine D13, the guiding means includes a delivery port for delivering the gaming ball to the seesaw member, and the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotating shaft. When the seesaw member is rotated to at least a second state, at least a part of the regulation portion is protruded to the delivery port, thereby suppressing delivery of the gaming ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member. A gaming machine D14.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D13, the suppressing means includes a restricting portion disposed closer to one end of the seesaw member than the rotation shaft, and the seesaw member is rotated at least to the second state. And, by making at least a part of the regulation part project to the delivery port, the delivery of the game ball from the delivery port to the seesaw member is suppressed, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. That is, the mechanism for causing the restriction portion to protrude to the delivery port can be used as the seesaw member, and the drive mechanism for displacing the restriction portion and the control means for controlling the displacement timing can be eliminated.

  In the state where the restricting portion is projected to the transmission port and the transmission of the gaming ball is suppressed, the case where the gaming machine can not pass through the transmission port and the case where the gaming ball is allowed to pass the transmission port Includes both. Even in the case of the latter (passable), the game ball is collided with the inner wall of the delivery port and the outer wall of the regulation part by projecting the regulation part to the delivery port and narrowing the passage width of the delivery port. Since it is sent from the sending port, the throwing of the gaming ball is suppressed. That is, it is possible to separate the game balls in the connected state.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Winning Device 65 as an Example>
The seesaw member rotatably supported between the one end side and the other end by a pivot shaft, the seesaw member, when unloaded, the first end is lowered while the other end is raised. In the gaming machine which forms a second state in which one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered by forming the state and placing the game ball on the other end side with respect to the rotation axis. A game machine E1 comprising discharge means for facilitating discharge of the game balls placed on the other end side.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the seesaw member rotatably supported between the one end side and the other end by a rotation shaft is provided, and the seesaw member descends in the unloaded state. While the other end side is raised to form a first state, and the gaming ball is placed on the other end side relative to the rotation axis, so that one end side is raised and the other end side is lowered There is a gaming machine which forms a game machine (for example, JP-A-2007-283136).

  According to this gaming machine, when the gaming ball is dropped to the seesaw member in the first state and the gaming ball is placed between the rotation axis and the other end side, the weight of the gaming ball causes The other end is lowered and the one end is raised to form a second state. On the other hand, when the gaming ball placed between the rotating shaft and the other end is discharged, the other end is raised and the one end is lowered to be returned to the first state. That is, it is possible to make the first state and the second state appear alternately by utilizing the weight of the dropped game ball, and effect by an operation in which one end side and the other end side of the seesaw member are vertically displaced It can be carried out.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, the other end is lowered and the one end is maintained in the second state where it is raised, and the first state and the second state There was a problem that it was not possible to switch alternately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the seesaw member is provided with the discharge means for facilitating the discharge of the game ball placed on the other end side, the other end is lowered and the one end is raised. Even in the state, the game ball can be discharged from the other end by the discharging means, the weight of the game ball on the other end can be removed, and the one end can be easily lowered. That is, the state where the gaming ball is placed on the other end side of the rotary shaft (that is, the state in which the second state is formed) is ended early, one end is lowered and the other end is raised. The first state can be formed. As a result, even when a plurality of gaming balls are dropped continuously, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  In the gaming machine E1, the discharge means includes a pivot portion rotatably supported, a receiving portion disposed on one side of the pivot portion and receiving the game ball guided from the guiding means, and the receiving portion And a push-out unit disposed on both sides of the shaft support, and when the receiving unit receives the game ball guided from the guiding means, the push-out is performed by rotation around the shaft support unit. A game machine E2 characterized in that a part is projected to the other end side of the seesaw member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, when the receiving unit receives the gaming ball guided from the guiding unit, the pushing unit is rotated by the rotation around the pivot unit. Since it is projected to the other end side, the game ball placed on the other end side of the seesaw member can be pushed out by the push-out unit and discharged from the seesaw member. Thus, the other end side of the seesaw member can be raised by discharging the gaming ball by the pushing portion, and one end side of the seesaw member can be lowered by the weight of the gaming ball received by the receiving portion. It is possible to terminate early and to make it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately. In addition, since the receiving unit rotates the discharge means (projects the push-out unit) using the action of receiving the game ball, the drive mechanism for such rotation and the control means for controlling the rotation timing can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine E2, a game machine E3 characterized in that the discharge means is pivotally supported by the seesaw member in a rotatable manner.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the discharge means can rotatably fix the relative position of the discharge means to the seesaw member since the pivot portion is rotatably supported by the seesaw member. . Therefore, the game ball guided by the guiding means can be easily received by the receiving portion, and rotation around the pivotal portion can be formed reliably, and the pushing portion projected to the other end side of the seesaw member by the rotation is played The ball can be easily brought into contact with the ball, and the gaming ball can be reliably pushed out (discharged) from the seesaw member. As a result, it is possible to easily switch between the first state and the second state.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, with respect to the imaginary plane orthogonal to the rotation shaft of the seesaw member and the pivotally supporting portion of the ejecting means, the ejecting means has a larger recovable amount of the receiving portion than the pushing portion. Game machine E4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the discharge means has a larger recovable amount than the push-out portion, so the discharge means when receiving the game ball by the reception portion The angle of rotation of the lens can be secured, and the energy received from the received gaming balls can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to secure the pushing force of the gaming ball by the pushing unit in association with the backward movement of the receiving unit. That is, the game ball can be easily discharged quickly.

  On the other hand, when the game ball rolling the seesaw member toward the other end retracts the pushing portion by making the retraction amount of the pushing portion smaller than that of the receiving portion, the rolling locus of the game ball increases. Can be suppressed, and such game balls can be easily discharged quickly.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the discharging means raises one of the seesaw members in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction to place the discharge means on the other end side with respect to the rotational shaft. A game machine E5 characterized by making it easy to eject a placed game ball.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, one of the axial directions of the rotating shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other by the discharging means. The angle of the downward inclination of the seesaw member from one axial direction to the other axial direction of the rotary shaft can be increased, and the gaming ball placed on the other end side from the rotary shaft can be discharged from the seesaw member. This makes it easy to switch between the first state and the second state alternately.

  The fact that one axial direction of the rotating shaft is relatively raised relative to the other axial direction of the rotating shaft means that it is sufficient if the amount of one axial increase is larger than the amount of the other axial increase. Therefore, the state after raising may be arrange | positioned in a position where one axial direction is lower than the other axial direction.

  In the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state in the gaming machine E5, in the first section, one of the axial directions of the rotational shaft of the seesaw member is in the axial direction In the second section closer to the second state than the first section, the axial direction of the rotational axis of the seesaw member is relative to the other in the second section, which is not relatively raised with respect to the other. Game machine E6 characterized by raising it.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the discharging means rotates the seesaw member in the first section when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state. In a second section closer to the second state than the first section without raising one of the axial directions relative to the other, the axial direction of the rotational axis of the seesaw member is the other in the axial direction. As a result, it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state while ensuring that the second state can be formed.

  That is, when an operation to raise one of the seesaw members in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction is performed from the first section, the game balls are discharged early, and the second state is reliably formed. Can not. On the other hand, if it is not possible to perform an operation to raise one of the seesaw members in the axial direction relative to the other in the axial direction, the discharge of the gaming balls will be delayed (the residence time will be long). It will be easier to maintain.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E5, when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, in the first section, one axial direction of the rotational shaft of the seesaw member is set to the other axial direction On the other hand, since the game ball is not raised relatively, it is possible to suppress the discharge of the game ball from being accelerated (that is, to hold the game ball) and to make it easy to form the second state. On the other hand, in the second section, since one of the seesaw members in the axial direction is relatively raised relative to the other in the axial direction, the gaming balls can be discharged quickly, and the gaming balls are placed The time (ie, the time during which the second state is formed) can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to smoothly switch between the first state and the second state while ensuring that the second state can be formed.

  In the gaming machine E5 or the gaming machine E6, the seesaw member has a cam formed at least on one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axial center of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam A game machine E7 characterized in that one of the axial directions of the rotation axis of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other by increasing the distance of the above.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a cam is formed at least on one side in the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and along the rotation of the rotating shaft, from the axial center of the rotating shaft to the outer peripheral surface of the cam As one of the axial directions of the rotational axis of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other with respect to the other, the drive mechanism for operating the rotational axis and the control of controlling the drive timing thereof are increased. The means can be eliminated. Moreover, while being able to form the 1st area and the 2nd area certainly, the freedom of design of the ratio of the 1st and 2nd area can be raised.

  In any one of the game machines E5 to E7, the seesaw member includes a push-up portion disposed on a movement locus when the first state is rotated to the second state, and the push-up portion contacts the seesaw member. By being brought into contact with one another, the one in the axial direction of the rotation shaft of the seesaw member is raised relative to the other in the axial direction, and the game machine E8 is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the gaming machine E8 is provided with a push-up portion disposed on the movement trajectory when the seesaw member is rotated from the first state to the second state, When the push-up portion abuts against the seesaw member, one of the rotational direction of the seesaw member in the axial direction is raised relative to the other in the axial direction. Therefore, a drive mechanism for operating the rotational shaft and its drive The control means for controlling the timing can be eliminated. Moreover, while being able to form the 1st area and the 2nd area certainly, the freedom of design of the ratio of each area can be raised.

<About the concept of the invention taken as an example of the base side engagement member 12726>
In a gaming machine including a base member, and a displacement member rotatably disposed on the base member at a base end side and rotated between a retracted position and an extended position, the base member includes a base side engaging member. In addition, the displacement member has a displacement side engagement member formed so as to be engageable with the base side engagement member at the retracted position, and in a state where the first displacement member is disposed at the overhanging position, the base A game machine F1 characterized in that the base side engagement member is formed so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize in a front view of the member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member The first displacement member and the second displacement are provided via the first groove and the second groove provided in the transmission member, the effect member having the transmission member transmitting and the driving means for applying the driving force to the transmission member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is connected to a transmission member (for example, JP-A-2009-100994).

  In this conventional gaming machine, the connecting member connects the base member and the second displacement member in a bridging manner, and at the retracted position, the base member and the second displacement member are relatively separated from the rotation axis of the first displacement member. The two displacement members are coupled by the coupling member. Therefore, even if the first displacement member tries to tilt the portion opposite to the rotation axis (that is, the second displacement member side) in the direction of separating from the base member, the distance between the base member and the second displacement member The tilting can be suppressed by the action of the interlinked member.

  However, in the gaming machine F1, the proximal end side of the displacement member is rotatably supported, while the opposite side (distal end side) of the proximal end side is a free end. Therefore, at the retracted position, due to its own weight and the weight of the decorative portion provided on the front side, the base end side and the opposite side (tip end side) tend to tilt (forwardly fall) in the direction away from the base member.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F1, the base member includes the base side engaging member, the displacement member includes the displacement side engaging member, and the base member is engaged when the displacement member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the member and the displacement side engagement member are formed to be engageable, it is possible to suppress tilting of the side opposite to the proximal end side (distal end side) of the displacement member in a direction away from the base member.

  On the other hand, when the base side engaging member is provided on the base member and the displacement side engaging member is provided on the displacement member, the front surface of the base member is extended when the displacement member is extended to the extended position. Is exposed, the base side engaging member is visually recognized from the player, and the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the base side engaging member is formed so as to be difficult to visually recognize from the player in a front view of the base member, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed so as to be able to protrude and retract in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is in front of the base member. And the base side engaging member is retracted toward the back side of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed to be able to protrude and retract in front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the overhanging position, the base side engaging member Since the joint member is recessed toward the back side of the base member, the base side engagement member can be hardly visible from the player in a front view of the base member, and the appearance can be suppressed from being impaired.

  Further, when the displacing member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is protruded from the front of the base member, and accordingly, the protruding height of the displacing side engaging member from the back surface is reduced accordingly. be able to. Thereby, when the displacement member is rotated, interference of the displacement side engagement member with other members can be suppressed. In other words, since the protrusion height of the displacement side engagement member can be lowered, a space for displacing other members can be secured.

  The gaming machine F2 includes drive means for rotationally driving the displacement member relative to the base member, and the base side engagement member is protruded from the front of the base member by the action of the drive force of the drive means. A game machine F3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the driving means for rotationally driving the displacement member relative to the base member is provided, and the base side engaging member is the base member by the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since it protrudes from the front, it is possible to reduce the product cost by using the drive means. That is, the driving force for rotationally driving the displacing member can also be used as the driving force for causing the base side engaging member to project, and it becomes unnecessary to separately provide a driving means for the projection.

  In addition, as a form in which the base side engaging member is protruded by the action of the driving force of the driving means, when the displacement member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the base side engagement is directly or indirectly by the displacement member. When the member is displaced in the projecting direction, or when the transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member is displaced, the displacement member displaces the base side engaging member in the projection direction directly or indirectly And the like.

  The gaming machine F3 includes biasing means for biasing the base side engaging member in the retraction direction, and when the action of the driving force of the driving means is released, the biasing force of the biasing means acts. A game machine F4 characterized in that the base side engaging member is returned to the retracted position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the biasing means for biasing the base side engaging member in the immersing direction is provided, and the action of the driving force of the driving means is released. Since the base side engaging member is returned to the retracted position by the action of the biasing force of the biasing means, it is not necessary to interlock both of the projecting direction and the retracting direction with the action of the driving force of the driving means. Since the construction can be done, the structure can be simplified accordingly.

  In the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is disposed so as to be retractable from the front of the base member, and when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position, the base side engaging member is the front side of the base member. And the base side engagement member is advanced toward the front side of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the base side engaging member is retracted from the front of the base member when the displacement member is rotated to the retracted position. Not only can the base end side and the opposite side (tip end side) of the displacement member be prevented from tilting away from the base member by the engagement of the base side engagement member and the displacement side engagement member, the base side engagement By narrowing the distance between the engagement surfaces (inner surfaces) of the member and the displacement side engagement member, it is possible to suppress back and forth rattling of the distal end side of the displacement member.

  In addition, when the displacement member is rotated to the extended position, the base side engagement member is advanced toward the front of the base member, so that the base side engagement member is visually recognized from the player in the front view of the base member. It can be difficult to prevent the loss of the appearance.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the right rotation unit 18600 as an example>
Base member, first displacement member disposed displaceably in the base member, second displacement member disposed displaceably in the first displacement member, first displacement member and second displacement member The first displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least in a first direction, and the second displacement member is capable of abutting on the first displacement member or the base member. Forming an inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member as a force in a direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. A game machine G1 to be characterized.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as pachinko or the like, a base member, a first displacement member and a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driving force to the first displacement member and the second displacement member There is a gaming machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, JP-A-2009-100994). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to form an aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced and an aspect in which only one of the first displacement member or the second displacement member is displaced.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, for example, in the aspect in which only the second displacement member is displaced, while the load of the drive means is relatively small, in the aspect in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, Since the load on the drive means is relatively large, the load on the drive means rapidly changes (increases) when such a mode is switched. Therefore, there is a problem that stable (constant) displacement is difficult, such as decrease in the durability of the drive means and decrease in displacement speed at the time of mode switching.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the second displacement member is formed so as to be able to abut on the first displacement member or the base member, and occurs due to the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member Since the force of inertia is applied as a force in the direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction, switching from the first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced to the second mode in which the first displacement member is displaced In this case, the action of the inertial force can be used as an auxiliary force, and the load on the drive means can be prevented from being rapidly changed (increased). As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the drive means and to suppress a decrease in displacement speed at the time of switching from the first aspect to the second aspect, and to facilitate stable (constant) displacement. .

  In the first and second modes, for example, the first mode displaces only the second displacement member, and the second mode displaces both the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Alternatively, a mode is exemplified in which the first mode displaces only the second displacement member and the second mode displaces only the first displacement member. The latter aspect is particularly effective when the load required to change the first displacement member is sufficiently larger than the load required to displace the second displacement member (e.g., the weight of the first displacement member compared to the second displacement member) If you think enough, etc.) will be effective.

  In the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. The game machine G2 is characterized in that the directions of the rotation axes of the second displacement member and the second displacement member are parallel to each other.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the second displacement member is rotatably supported by the first displacement member. Since the directions of the rotation axes of the first and second displacement members are parallel to each other, the inertia force generated by the second displacement member coming into contact with the first displacement member or the base member is The first displacement member can be efficiently applied to the first displacement member as a force for displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is a direction including a component directed downward in a gravity direction. A game machine G3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the direction of displacement of the second displacement member when the second displacement member abuts against the first displacement member or the base member is downward in the direction of gravity. Since the direction includes the component to be directed, it is possible to easily secure the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base member.

  One of the game machines G1 to G3, wherein the first direction is a direction including a component directed upward in a gravity direction.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, since the first direction is a direction including a component directed upward in the direction of gravity, the second displacement member and the first displacement member or the base It is particularly effective to utilize the inertial force generated by the contact with the member as an auxiliary force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member in the first direction.

  In any one of the gaming machine G1 to the gaming machine G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. The second displacement member is rotatably supported on the other end side of the second displacement member, and the other end side of the second displacement member is brought close to one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction. A game machine G5 characterized in that the other end side of the game machine is in contact with the base member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is the first displacement. When the other end side of the member is rotatably supported at the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches one end side of the first displacement member from the direction opposite to the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the base member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the base member is efficiently applied as a force in the direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Can. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacing member to the second mode for displacing the first displacing member, assistance for displacing the action of the inertia force in the first direction It can be used efficiently as a force.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, and to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machine G1 to the gaming machine G4, one end of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end of the second displacement member is the first displacement member. The second displacement member is rotatably supported at the other end side of the second displacement member, and the other end side of the second displacement member is brought close to one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction. A game machine G6 characterized in that the other end side of the game machine is in contact with the first displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, one end side of the first displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and one end side of the second displacement member is the first displacement When the other end side of the member is rotatably supported at the other end side and the other end side of the second displacement member approaches one end side of the first displacement member from the same direction as the first direction, the other end of the second displacement member Since the side is in contact with the first displacement member, the inertial force generated by the contact between the second displacement member and the first displacement member is efficiently used as a force in the direction to displace the first displacement member in the first direction. Can act on. That is, when switching from the first mode for displacing the second displacing member to the second mode for displacing the first displacing member, assistance for displacing the action of the inertia force in the first direction It can be used efficiently as a force.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a sudden change (increase) in the load of the drive means, and to improve the durability of the drive means, and to reduce the displacement speed at the time of switching from the first mode to the second mode. It can be suppressed to facilitate stable (constant) displacement.

  In any one of the game machines G1 to G7, the game machine comprises a transmission member having a drive pin for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member being the drive pin And a first groove having a non-interference section which is connected to the action section and which the drive pin does not interfere with the action section, and the second displacement member receives the action section from the drive pin. The first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced by displacing the drive pin with the first groove and the second groove superimposed. Gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G7, the first groove of the first displacement member is connected to the action section receiving the action from the drive pin and the action section, and the drive pin interferes And the second groove of the second displacement member at least includes the action section that receives the action from the drive pin, so that the drive pin displaces the non-interference section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove The first mode in which the second displacement member is displaced while the first displacement member is maintained in the stopped state, and the drive pin is displaced in the action section of the first groove and the action section of the second groove Thus, it is possible to form a second mode in which both the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced, and to smoothly transition from the first mode to the second mode.

<Feature H group> (Demo control with special figure 1 waiting in AT type)
A first acquisition unit that acquires first information based on satisfaction of a first acquisition condition; and a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit; Based on the establishment of a first effect execution unit that executes a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination unit in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, Second acquisition means for acquiring second information, second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and second determination means for the second determination by the second determination means Second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the second effect is executed, the execution of the first effect is ended, and the first acquisition means When the first information is not acquired, the first time counting means for starting the first time counting, and the execution of the second effect is finished, and the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means Execution of the first notification mode is started based on the second clocking means for starting the second clocking and that the first clocking has become the first set value, and the second clocking is the second set value The notification execution means for starting the execution of the second notification mode on the basis of the above, and the first period for ending the first notification mode being executed when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and the continuation Setting means capable of switching and setting the second period to be Gaming machine H1, characterized in that those having.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbol is not changing (during playing), and allows the player to easily find a vacant platform. .

  In addition, among the above-described conventional game machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening There is a second symbol on which a variable display is performed based on the second symbol, and each symbol can be simultaneously changed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, the fluctuation period of the first symbol and the second symbol is made different, and a long fluctuation period (for example, 10 minutes) is executed as the fluctuation period of one symbol. There is something.

  In such a conventional game machine, if the specific screen (demo screen) is configured to be displayed when the variable display of both symbols is finished, the player immediately after the long fluctuation period is executed. When the game is over, there is a problem that the operation of the game is reduced because the next player is difficult to execute the game with the game machine (even the screen) continues. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on the first effect executing means, the first effect is executed for a first effect period. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means based on the result for a second effect period. Then, a specific second effect based on the result of the specific first effect or the second determination based on the specific first determination result as the result of the first determination is the specific second determination result When it is executed, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquiring means. In the case where the first timekeeping is started by the first timekeeping means, the execution of the second effect is ended, and the second timekeeping is started by the second timekeeping means when the second information is not acquired by the second acquisition means Be done. Execution of the first notification mode is started by the notification execution means on the basis of the fact that the first timekeeping has become the first set value, and on the basis of the fact that the second timekeeping has become the second set value, the second notification Execution of the aspect is initiated. In addition, when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the setting unit switches and sets a first period in which the first notification mode being executed is ended and a second period in which the second notification period is continued.

  Thereby, even in the state in which the second effect is being performed, it is possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the game. Furthermore, since the setting means can switch between the first period in which the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not performed is ended and the second period in which it is continued when the second effect is performed. An appropriate effect corresponding to the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  The configuration of the gaming machine H1 is, for example, a gaming machine configured such that the first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously executed, and a period during which the second effect is not substantially executed according to the gaming state, and the second It is good to use for the game machine which has and the period which makes a presentation perform substantially. In this case, during a period in which the second effect is not substantially executed, the first notification mode in progress is continued even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and in a period in which the second effect is substantially executed. In the case where the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode in progress can be ended.

  The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state which facilitates the execution of the first determination and a second gaming state which facilitates the execution of the second determination. Game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming state setting means sets a first gaming state that facilitates the execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates the execution of the second determination.

  Thereby, it is possible to set the first period or the second period in accordance with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Thus, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine H2, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the setting means sets the second period, and the second state is set by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine H3 characterized by setting the first period when a gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the second period is set by the setting means when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and the first period is set when the second gaming state is set.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which the first determination is easy to be executed, the first notification mode in execution is continued even if the second acquisition condition is satisfied, and in the gaming state in which the second determination is easy to be executed, the second When the acquisition condition is satisfied, the first notification mode in progress can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect according to the gaming state, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the notification execution means ends the second notification mode being executed based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition. .

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H3, the second notification mode being executed is ended by the notification execution means based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition, so It is possible to execute an effect according to the execution state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the notification execution means executes the second notification mode by suppressing the prevention of the first effect even when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are exerted. That is, even while the first effect is being performed, the second notification mode is performed by suppressing the prevention of the first effect by the notification performing means.

  Thus, it is possible to notify that the second effect is not being executed while the first effect is being executed, by suppressing the interference with the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a game in which the game situation can be easily understood.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means are characterized in that the first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously executed. A gaming machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the first effect and the second effect are configured to be simultaneously executable by the first effect executing means and the second effect executing means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation of the first effect and the second effect which are simultaneously executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a gaming machine H7 characterized in that the notification execution means is capable of simultaneously executing the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are simultaneously executed by the notification execution means, so There is an effect that it is possible to inform the player of the situation of the effect and the second effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the notification execution means notifies, as the second notification mode, predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect, when the first effect is executed. A game machine H8 characterized by executing a predetermined notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first effect is being executed, the notification execution means executes a predetermined notification mode in which predetermined information other than the information indicating the result of the second effect is notified as the second notification mode.

  Thereby, when the first effect is being performed, it is possible to suppress notification of information indicating the result of the second effect which has been previously performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress confusion between the result of the first effect and the result of the second effect by the player, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the notification execution means indicates that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode when the first effect is being executed. A gaming machine H9 characterized by executing a middle notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first effect is being executed, a notification mode during first effect execution indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode is executed by the notification execution means.

  As a result, it is possible to easily make the player understand the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide the gaming situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Furthermore, according to the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine H6, of the first effect and the second effect that can be executed simultaneously, information on the first effect that is actually executed is displayed as a second notification mode. The game situation can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, a first display area for displaying one of the first notification mode or the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means, and a second display for displaying the other. A display unit having at least a region; and a display control unit configured to control display contents in the first display region and the second display region of the display unit, the display control unit including the setting unit Displays the first notification mode in the first display area when the first period is set, and displays the second notification mode in the first display area when the second period is set. A game machine H10 characterized in that the display content of the display means is controlled so as to.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, the following effects are exerted. That is, the display means has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed, and a second display area in which the other is displayed. The first notification mode is displayed in the first display area when the first period is set by the setting means, and the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area when the second period is set. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.

  Thereby, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute an intelligible notification mode display according to the gaming state, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

<Feature I group> (demo control when the game state is changed)
A first acquisition unit that acquires first information based on satisfaction of a first acquisition condition; and a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit; Based on the establishment of a first effect execution unit that executes a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination unit in a first effect period, and a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, Second acquisition means for acquiring second information, second determination means for executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and second determination means for the second determination by the second determination means Second effect executing means for executing a second effect based on the result in a second effect period, and a specific first effect or the second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result Identification based on the determination result being a specific second determination result In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the second game is performed, the first game and the second game when the specific condition is satisfied. According to the first determination, when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player until the effect is executed a predetermined number of times, and the advantageous state setting means is set. The variable control means that makes the determination easy to be performed and makes the first determination easier to be executed than the second determination when the advantageous state ends, and the case where the first effect is not performed for a predetermined first period Setting means for setting the first setting and setting the second setting when the second effect is not performed for a predetermined second period, and the first setting when the advantageous state is set Based on the setting of And display setting means for setting the first display setting as the display means, and setting the second display setting as the display means based on the setting of the second setting when the advantageous state is set. , And the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting when the advantageous state is ended in a state in which the second display setting is performed. A game machine I1 characterized by

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-000392). Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbol is not changing (during playing), and allows the player to easily find a vacant platform. .

  In addition, among the above-described conventional game machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening There is a second symbol on which a variable display is performed based on the second symbol, and each symbol can be simultaneously changed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). Furthermore, there are those configured to set the gaming state in which the first symbol is likely to be variably displayed and the gaming state in which the second symbol is likely to be variably displayed according to the gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional game machine, when the game state shifts while the specific screen (demonstration screen) indicating that the variable display of one of the symbols is finished is displayed, the player displays the display content. Was difficult to grasp.

  For example, in a predetermined gaming state, when the display area for the symbol which is easily displayed in a variable manner is set larger than the display region for the symbol which is hard to be displayed in a variable manner, the displayed content is largely changed by the transition of the gaming state. There is a problem that the game is different and the game can be provided with a game that is difficult to understand. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the first acquisition means acquires the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first determination means executes the first determination based on the first information. The first effect based on the result of the 1 determination is executed by the first effect execution means in the first effect period. Further, based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, the second information acquiring unit acquires the second information, and the second determination unit executes the second determination based on the second information. The second effect based on the result of the second determination is executed by the second effect execution means in the second effect period. The specific second effect based on the result of the specific first effect or the second determination based on the result of the first determination being the specific first determination result is the specific second determination result When it is determined, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game which is advantageous to the player. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state setting means sets an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player until the first effect and the second effect are performed a predetermined number of times. When the advantageous state is set, the variable control means makes the second determination easier than the first determination, and when the advantageous state is finished, the first determination becomes easier than the second determination. The setting means sets the first setting when the first effect is not performed for a predetermined first period, and the second setting is set when the second effect is not performed for a predetermined second period. . Furthermore, based on the fact that the first setting is set when the advantageous state is set by the display setting means, the first display setting is set to the display means, and the second state is set when the advantageous state is set. The second display setting is set to the display unit based on the setting being set. In addition, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is made, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting.

  As a result, when the advantageous state ends in the state where the second display setting is made, the display setting means sets a specific display setting different from the second display setting, so the second display setting is made. Even in the state, the player can easily grasp that the advantageous state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine I1, the first display setting is set such that a predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display means, and the second display setting is a predetermined second display mode. A game machine I2 characterized by being displayed on a display means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exerted. That is, by setting the first display setting, the predetermined first display mode is displayed on the display unit, and when the second display setting is set, the predetermined second display mode is displayed on the display unit. Ru.

  As a result, the player can easily grasp the execution status of the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the second effect is executed during a period in which the second display setting is being executed, the second effect corresponds to the second effect while the second display setting is maintained. A game machine I3 characterized in that an effect mode is displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second effect is performed during the period in which the second display setting is being performed, the effect mode corresponding to the second effect is displayed on the display means while the second display setting is maintained. .

  As a result, when the second effect is performed during the period in which the second display setting is being performed, the second effect can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the configuration of the gaming machine I3 may be provided, for example, in a gaming machine where the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is set short. In this case, when the second effect is performed in the period in which the second display setting is being performed, the second effect in which the short second effect period is set can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the second display setting is performed such that a setting to display a suggestion display mode suggesting that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display means. A game machine I4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects can be achieved. That is, by setting the second display setting, a suggestion display mode that suggests that the advantageous state is set is displayed on the display unit.

  As a result, it is possible to display information on the gaming state to the player using the period in which the second effect is not being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player by effectively utilizing the period in which the second effect is not executed.

  Discrimination means for discriminating establishment of a specific condition by information based on execution of the first effect and the second effect when the advantageous state is set in any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, and the discrimination A game machine I5, comprising: restricting means for restricting the setting of the second display setting when establishment of a specific condition is judged by the means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the advantageous state is set, the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the information based on the execution of the first effect and the second effect, and the control means is determined when the specific condition is satisfied. Setting restricts the setting of the second display setting.

  Thus, by not setting the second display setting, it is possible to notify the player that the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, when the second determination is performed, second effect period determination means for determining the second effect period from a plurality of second effect periods, and 1 other than the advantageous state When the normal gaming state is set, the probability that a longer period is selected as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means is set higher than in the case where the advantageous state is set. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it comprises:

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second determination is performed, the second effect period determination means determines the second effect period from the plurality of second effect periods. And, when the normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set by the probability variable means, it is longer than the case where the advantageous state is set as the second effect period determined by the second effect period determining means The probability that a period is selected is set high.

  As a result, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to execute the second determination more than when one normal gaming state other than the advantageous state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly aiming at the advantageous state in which the second determination is frequently performed.

  In any one of game machines I1 to I6, a game machine I7 characterized in that the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executable.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I6, since the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed, it is possible to efficiently execute the game.

<Feature J group> (in AT type, securement of result effect)
A first acquisition unit that acquires first information based on satisfaction of a first acquisition condition; and a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit; The first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in the first effect period, and the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition (2) second determination means for performing determination, second effect execution means for performing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in a second effect period, and a result of the first determination If a specific first effect based on being a specific first determination result or a specific second effect based on the result of the second determination being a specific second determination result A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player Game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state which is advantageous to the player from the plurality of game states until the first effect and the second effect are executed a predetermined number of times, and the game Second effect period setting means for making it easy to set the second effect period short when the advantageous game state is set by the state setting means, and the first effect and the first effect when the advantageous game state is over It has a first effect period determining means for setting a specific first effect period as the first effect period until the second effect is performed a predetermined number of times. Gaming machine J1.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. As described above, in the gaming machine, an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player is set by increasing the winning probability as a win or making the lottery easy to be performed, and the advantageous state is maintained. There is a game which displays a game result display such as the number of hits and the number of winning balls obtained on the display screen (e.g., JP-A-2010-35664). In such a gaming machine, the game result display is displayed on the display screen after the advantageous state is ended.

  In addition, among the above-described conventional game machines, the first symbol in which the variable display is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening There is a second symbol on which a variable display is performed based on the second symbol, and each symbol can be simultaneously changed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221).

  In such a conventional game machine, since both symbols are configured to change simultaneously, it is possible to determine whether the first symbol or the second symbol is the first symbol to be executed after the end of the advantageous state. May be different. In such a gaming machine, when only the first fluctuation time after the end of the advantageous state is set as the fluctuation period in which the game result can be displayed, depending on the symbol which is first fluctuated after the end of the advantageous state, There is a problem that the player can not be displayed for a sufficient period of time, and the player's motivation is lowered. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on the first effect executing means, the first effect is executed for a first effect period. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means based on the result for a second effect period. Then, a specific second effect based on the result of the specific first effect or the second determination based on the specific first determination result as the result of the first determination is the specific second determination result When it is executed, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the game is performed until the first effect and the second effect are performed a predetermined number of times from a plurality of gaming states. When the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player is settable by the gaming state setting means and the advantageous gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the second effect period setting means sets the second effect period short. The first effect period specified as the first effect period is the first effect period until the number of times the first effect and the second effect are executed is performed a predetermined number of times when the advantageous gaming state ends. Decided by the decision means That.

  As a result, since it is possible to set a specific period as the first effect period when the advantageous game state is ended, the player is made to grasp the contents of the effect to be executed when the advantageous game state is ended. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation where the player's motivation is lowered due to the fact that the content of the effect can not be grasped.

  In addition, it is good to execute an effect (for example, the number of big wins and the total number of award balls executed during the advantageous game state) indicating the game result in the advantageous game state as the effect to be executed when the advantageous game state is ended. In this case, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp the game result in the advantageous game state after the end of the advantageous game state.

  Further, as in the gaming machine J1, by setting the first effect period to be executed after the end of the advantageous gaming state as the specific first effect period, the first effect to be executed using the specific first effect period is advantageous. It can execute after the game state ends. As a result, for example, since it is not necessary to set the first effect period to be executed at the end (last stage) of the advantageous game state as the first effect period, it is possible to allow the player to smoothly execute the advantageous game state effective.

  In the game machine J1, the predetermined number of times is two or more.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1, the predetermined number of times is twice or more, so the first effect is provided even when the first effect and the second effect are simultaneously executed. The player can execute the game using a specific first effect period, can cause the player to grasp the contents of the effect to be executed when the advantageous gaming state is ended, and the player can not grasp the contents of the effect. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation where the motivation is lowered.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the gaming state different from the advantageous gaming state is set, the first effect period determining means selects the shortening first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period. A game machine J3 characterized by having a high ratio.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a game state different from the advantageous game state is set, the ratio for selecting the shortened first effect period shorter than the specific first effect period is increased by the first effect period determination means.

  This makes it possible to set a period longer than the other first effect periods only for the specific first effect period set for the predetermined number of times after the advantageous gaming state ends, so the first effect is By setting the first effect period to be executed to be long as a whole, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being delayed and the player's motivation from being lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the probability that the first determination determines the first determination result and the probability that the second determination determines the second determination result are set to be the same. If the second determination means does not determine the specific second determination result in the second determination, the special second determination result different from the specific second determination result has a predetermined probability It is determined, and the bonus game execution means executes a special bonus game in which a benefit below the bonus game is given when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed. A game machine J4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the probability of being determined as a specific first determination result in the first determination and the probability of being determined as the specific second determination result in the second determination are set to be the same, and the specific second determination result in the second determination If not determined, the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result with a predetermined probability. Then, when the second effect based on the special second determination result is executed, a special benefit game is executed by the benefit game execution means, in which a benefit less than the benefit game is provided.

  Thus, the second determination in which the second effect is performed can be more advantageous to the player than the first determination in which the first effect is performed. Therefore, the advantageous gaming state in which the second effect period in which the second effect is executed is likely to be set short can be reliably made advantageous to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. .

  According to the gaming machine J4, the special benefit game is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the special second determination result, thereby forming an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. However, it is sufficient if the gaming state in which the second effect period is set short is configured to be an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, for example, the second judging means based on the judgment result of the first judging means The special bonus game may be executed with a lower probability than that of the second decision means, and the special bonus game (first special bonus game) executed based on the judgment result of the first judgment means is of the second judgment means. It may be configured to be a bonus game of lower value than the special bonus game (second special bonus game) executed based on the determination result.

  When the advantageous gaming state is set in any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, a state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and the second when the advantageous gaming state ends. A game machine J5 having variable control means for changing the state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the determination.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the advantageous gaming state is set, there are a state in which the second determination is easier to be executed than the first determination, and a state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination when the advantageous gaming state ends. It is variable by the variable control means.

  Thereby, the second determination can be made easier to be executed in comparison with the gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state. As a result, the advantageous gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and there is an effect that the gaming intention of the player aiming at the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced.

  In addition, as a variable control means of the gaming machine J4, for example, the configuration for varying the length of the rendering period between the first rendering period and the second rendering period, and the configuration for varying the easiness of establishment of the second acquisition condition. Is considered.

  In the gaming machine J5, the variable control means variably sets the selection ratio so as to vary the length of the effect period between the first effect period and the second effect period. Gaming machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the selection ratio is variably set so as to vary the length of the effect period of the first effect period and the second effect period by the variable control means.

  This has the effect that the ease of execution of the first determination and the second determination can be easily varied.

<Feature K group> (in the case of the AT type, while the other variation effect is continued even when the small hit occurs, the variation effect is performed to adjust the book end after the small hit)
A first acquisition unit that acquires first information based on satisfaction of a first acquisition condition; and a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit; A first effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period, and the first effect of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means A first effect period determination means for determining an effect period from a plurality of effect periods, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition, and the second The second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the result of the second determination by the judging means in the second effect period, and the second effect period of the second effect to be executed by the second effect executing means Second production period decision hand determined from multiple production periods And a specific second effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific first determination result or a specific first effect based on the result of the first determination being a specific second determination result In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when a game effect is executed, the game is executed when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Temporary stop means for temporarily stopping clocking of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means based on the end of the bonus game Even when the clocking is temporarily stopped by the releasing means for releasing the second time and the temporary stopping means, the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means is continuously caused to execute the first effect or the second effect Means and the first In the case where there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period even when the second effect is finished, the specific effect executing means performs the specific effect in the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period. A game machine K1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game symbol is executed for a first symbol and a second starting winning opening where variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening. There is a type that has a second symbol based on which variable display is performed for a predetermined period, and each symbol can be simultaneously changed (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). In such a gaming machine, when one of the first symbol and the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating that one of the symbols has been won, the variation period of the other symbol being displayed in a variable manner There is one that is configured to interrupt measurement and resume measurement of the suspended fluctuation period when the hit game is over.

  In such a conventional game machine, when the variable display based on the symbol whose measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted during the fluctuation display is stopped based on the fact that the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, the player is expected to However, there was a problem that the variable display that I was watching was suddenly stopped, which was a cause of losing the interest of the game. Further, even if the measurement of the fluctuation period is interrupted, if the fluctuation display is continuously displayed, an error occurs between the end timing of the fluctuation period and the end timing of the fluctuation display (that is, the error for the interruption period ), Which causes the player to feel discomfort, which causes a loss of interest in the game. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the result of the first determination is Based on the first effect executing means, the first effect is executed by the first effect period determining means for the first effect period determined from the plurality of effecting periods. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. Based on the result, the second effect execution means executes the second effect period in which the second effect is determined by the second effect period determining means from the plurality of effect periods. Then, a specific second effect based on the result of the specific first effect or the second determination based on the specific first determination result as the result of the first determination is the specific second determination result When it is executed, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, the first effect being executed The timing of the first effect period or the second effect period of the second effect is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means, and the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is canceled by the release means based on the end of the bonus game. Even when the clocking is temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means, the continuing means makes the first effect executing means or the second effect executing means execute the first effect or the second effect, and the first effect or the second effect When there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the remaining period even when the end of.

  Thereby, even when the timing of the first effect period of the first effect or the second effect period of the second effect being executed by the temporary stopping means is temporarily stopped, the first effect or the second effect is continuously performed. A presentation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to continue to perform the effects he / she was watching while expecting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, even when the first effect or the second effect ends, when there is a remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the remaining period Even if an error occurs between the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the timing at which the first effect period or the second effect period ends, it is possible to suppress a situation that gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that the stage effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K1, the first effect is preset in effect periods corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is the second effect. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that it is preset in an effect period corresponding to a plurality of the second effect periods determined by the effect period determining means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first effect is preset in effect periods corresponding to the plurality of first effect periods determined by the first effect period determining means, and the second effect is determined by the second effect period determining means. It is preset by the presentation period corresponding to the presentation period.

  Thereby, the effect period in which the first effect is executed and the effect period in which the second effect is performed are set in advance, and the timing at which the first effect or the second effect ends and the first effect period or the second effect period It becomes possible to execute a specific effect when an error occurs in the timing of the end of. Therefore, since the period during which the first effect or the second effect is executed can be set in advance regardless of the temporary stop by the temporary stopping means, the processing load for setting the effect period can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the first effect and the second effect are the results of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or the second effect period elapses. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that a determined effect mode indicating is set.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exerted. That is, for the first effect and the second effect, a determined effect mode indicating the result of the first determination or the second determination in a predetermined period until the respective first effect period or the second effect period elapses is set.

  As a result, even when the temporary stop by the temporary stop means is not executed, the result of the first determination or the second determination can be shown by executing the first effect or the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized in that the specific effect is constituted by at least a part of the determined effect mode.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K3, the specific effect is constituted by at least a part of the determined effect mode, so the specific effect is executed after the first effect or the second effect is finished. Also, the effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the bonus game executing means is executed based on the fact that the first determining means determines that the special first determination result is different from the specific first determination result. The special second effect to be executed based on the fact that the special first effect is executed or the special determination result different from the specific second determination result is determined by the second determination means A gaming machine K5 characterized by performing a special game which is advantageous to the player over the bonus game when executed.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, when the first special effect to be executed is executed based on the fact that the first determination means determines that the first determination result is a special first determination result different from the specific first determination result, or the second determination means identifies When a special second effect to be executed based on the determination as a special second determination result different from the second determination result is executed, the bonus game execution means instructs the player more than the bonus game An advantageous special game is executed.

  As a result, the player can execute the game while having expectation for both the game for which the first determination means is performed and the game for which the second determination means is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the specific effect executing means is different from the specific effect when the first effect or the second effect is ended in a period in which the bonus game is being executed. A game machine K6 characterized by performing special effects at least in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the first effect or the second effect is ended by the specific effect executing means during the period when the bonus game is being executed, the special effect different from the specific effect is executed at least in the remaining period.

  As a result, when the first effect or the second effect ends, a special effect different from the specific effect is performed when the remaining period of a period longer than the remaining period of the first effect period or the second effect period occurs. be able to. Therefore, even when the error is generated to an extent that is not sufficient only with the specific effect, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, as a special effect used for the gaming machine K6, an effect different from the specific effect using a period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. The first effect or the second effect is ended during the period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. From this, a new effect may be executed in the period until the end of the bonus game, and the specific effect may be executed in the period after the end of the bonus game until the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. . In this case, the latter configuration is advantageous in that the volume of effect data can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K6, a remaining period to determine the length of the remaining period from the end of the first effect or the second effect to the end of the first effect period or the second effect period. A game machine K7 comprising: a period determination means; and a specific effect mode determination means for determining an effect aspect of the specific effect based on the result of the determination by the remaining period determination means.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effects are exerted, that is, the first effect period or the second effect from the end of the first effect or the second effect. The length of the remaining period until the end of the period is determined by the remaining period determining means, and the effect mode of the specific effect is determined by the specific effect mode determining means based on the result of the determination.

  As a result, since it is possible to determine the effect mode of the specific effect based on the length of the remaining period, an effect suitable for the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, as the specific effect determined based on the length of the remaining period, for example, it is determined that the remaining period is so short that the player has difficulty grasping the content of the specific effect performed during the remaining period. In the case, the effect mode using all or part of the first effect or the second effect is taken as the effect mode of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In this case, the specific effect may be executed including an aspect informing that the first effect or the second effect is extended. Thus, for a player who can not grasp the content of the specific effect, the specific effect is executed as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and the player who can grasp the content of the specific effect is Informing that the 1st effect or the 2nd effect's effect mode is extended prevents misunderstanding that the first effect or the 2nd effect is not ended due to the malfunction of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to

  Also, when it is determined that the remaining period is long enough for the player to sufficiently grasp the content of the specific effect to be executed during the remaining period, the information indicated by the first effect or the second effect in the specific effect It is good to set it as the production | presentation aspect which can display information other than (information which shows the determination result of a determination means). As a result, new information can be provided to the player using the remaining period, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming intention.

  In the gaming machine K7, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is smaller than a predetermined period, the bonus effect mode determining means determines at least one of the determined effect modes as an effect mode of the specific effect. A game machine K8 characterized by determining a specific effect mode constituted by a section.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when it is determined that the remaining period is shorter than the predetermined period by the remaining period determining means, the specific effect aspect configured as at least a part of the finalized effect aspect as the effect aspect of the specific effect is the benefit effect aspect determining means Determined by

  As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect as if the first effect or the second effect is extended, and it is possible to execute the specific effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine K7 or K8, when it is determined that the remaining period is longer than a predetermined period by the remaining effect determining unit, the first effect or the first effect or the specific effect is determined. A game machine K9 characterized by determining a specific effect aspect including information different from the information included in the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific effect mode including information different from the information included in the first effect or the second effect as the effect mode of the specific effect is It is determined by the privilege presentation mode determination means.

  As a result, new information can be provided to the player using the remaining period, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming intention.

<Feature L group> (ST number display control)
The specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number update means for updating the number of times the specific game has been executed by the specific game execution means The remaining number determining means for determining the remaining number of times of the specific number, the number notifying means for notifying the number of times less than the remaining number determined by the remaining number determining means, and the number of times notified by the number notifying means A gaming machine L1 comprising bonus notification execution means capable of executing bonus notification based on a predetermined rule, and rule switching means capable of switching the predetermined rule.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, by increasing the winning probability of winning or making the lottery easy to be executed, a specific game which is advantageous to the player is configured to be executable a specific number of times, and the specific game is executed There are some which display the number of remaining times on a display screen (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional game machine, since the remaining number of times a specific game is executed is displayed on the display screen, the player's motivation is lowered when the number of remaining times for which the advantageous state is set is reduced. There was a problem of It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine L1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific game execution means performs the specific game advantageous to the player a specific number of times, and the specific game execution means updates the number of times the specific game is performed. Updated by means. The remaining number of times of the specific number of times is determined by the remaining number of times determination means, and the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times determined by the remaining number of times determination means is notified by the number notification means. The benefit notification to increase the number of times notified by the number notification means is executed by the benefit notification execution means based on a predetermined rule, and the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means.

  Thereby, it is possible to notify the number of times equal to or less than the remaining number of times that the specific game is executed. Therefore, even if the number of times of notification is reduced, it is possible to perform the game while expecting that the specific game is continuously performed, and to suppress the player's motivation from being lowered. Has the effect of

  Furthermore, by executing the benefit notification to increase the number of times notified by the number notification means, it is possible to increase the number of times that it is determined that the specific game is to be performed for the player. As a result, the player can execute the game while maintaining a sense of appropriate security.

  Further, since it is possible to switch the rule on which the benefit notification is executed, it is possible to increase the number of times notified by the number notification means in various patterns. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine L1, a gaming machine L2 having operation means operable by a player, wherein the rule switching means switches the predetermined rule based on an operation on the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit based on the operation on the operation unit operable by the player.

  Therefore, the player can switch the predetermined rule in accordance with his / her preference, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the rule switching unit executes a lottery whether or not to execute the benefit notification every time the number of games is updated, and executes the benefit notification based on the result of the lottery It is configured to be switchable to a first rule and a second rule that determines whether to perform the benefit notification based on the fact that the number of times notified by the number notification means has become equal to or less than a predetermined number. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exerted. That is, every time the number of games is updated by the rule switching means, it is judged whether or not the benefit notification is to be executed, and the first rule in which the benefit notification is executed based on the judgment result, and the number notification means The second rule is configured to be switchable to a second rule in which it is determined whether the benefit notification is to be performed, based on the fact that the number of times of notification by the number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

  As a result, it is possible to execute benefit notification according to rules different in taste, so that it is possible to improve the interest in games.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, when the predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit, the benefit notification execution unit executes the benefit notification if the remaining number of times is equal to or more than a predetermined number. A gaming machine L4 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, when a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching unit by the benefit notification execution unit, the benefit notification is executed if the remaining number of times is equal to or more than the predetermined number.

  Thereby, the privilege notification can be performed at the timing when the predetermined rule is switched. Therefore, it becomes possible to play a game while expecting that a predetermined rule is switched by the rule switching means, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the gaming machine L4, the benefit notification execution means executes the benefit notification indicating that the possible number of times within the range of the remaining number is increased among the preset upper limit number. Game machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the benefit notification execution means executes the benefit notification indicating that the possible number is increased within the range of the remaining number among the preset upper limit number.

  As a result, it is possible to complicate the mode of benefit notification, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

<Feature M group> (Attacker winning effect determined by lottery)
A bonus game for performing one bonus game among a plurality of different bonus games based on a determination unit that executes determination based on establishment of the determination condition and that the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result When the bonus game is executed by the executing means and the bonus game executing means, the predetermined condition is satisfied from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball to the second state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first state. It is determined that the execution condition is satisfied by the variable ball entering means which varies until the game is performed, the condition judging means which judges the establishment of the execution condition based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the condition judging means A ratio changing unit configured to variably set a ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied based on a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing unit; With Gaming machine M1, which is a shall.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. As described above, in the gaming machine, there is one in which the specific winning opening is opened when the winning game is executed, and the specific winning opening is notified that the gaming ball has won (for example, JP-A-2014-138735) . In addition, there is also one which is configured to set a plurality of winning games different in the opening pattern of the specific winning opening, and to vary the number of game balls that can be won in the specific winning opening depending on the winning game to be executed. In some cases, it is difficult for the player to predict the game by making it difficult to determine which hit game is being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, the notification is executed each time the game ball is won in the specific winning opening, so that the player can easily grasp that the hit game is being executed. Because there was a notification every time the game ball has won in the specific winning opening, the winning is performed only by grasping the notification content to be executed every time the game ball wins in the specific winning opening There was a problem that the player could easily grasp the type of game.

  Furthermore, in a gaming machine in which the gaming state after the end of the winning game is shifted to a state advantageous to the player depending on the type of winning game to be executed, it is interesting to make the type of winning game played incomprehensible In the case of using such a gaming machine, if notification is executed each time the game ball is won in the specific winning opening, while expecting the gaming state to shift after the end of the winning game There is a problem that it is not possible to play a hit game and the player's willingness to play is reduced. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the fact that the discrimination result is a particular discrimination result, one bonus game is selected among different privilege games. It is executed by the bonus game execution means. When a bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, the variable entering means establishes a predetermined condition from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter the ball to the second state in which the ball is easier to enter than the first state. It is variable until it does. Based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, the condition judging means judges that the execution condition is satisfied, and when the condition judging means judges that the execution condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means Be done. Then, based on the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set by the ratio variable means.

  Thereby, based on the type of the bonus game, it is possible to change the rate at which the effect is executed based on the game ball having entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the bonus game by the effect executed by the effect executing means and lowering the gaming intention.

  The gaming machine M1 has a payout means for paying a predetermined number of gaming balls determined in advance to the player as a winning ball based on the game ball entering the variable entering means, and the effect is A gaming machine M2 characterized by being set based on the number of the winning balls to be paid out by the payout means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, a predetermined number of game balls predetermined by the payout means are paid out to the player as a prize ball, and the payout means paid out by the payout means An effect is set based on the number.

  As a result, by the effect being executed by the effect executing means, it becomes possible to easily make the player grasp that the bonus game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed, and to perform an effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the bonus game execution means makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the first bonus game where the game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and the first bonus game. Two bonus games can be executed at least, and the ratio changing means sets the ratio lower than when the second bonus game is performed, when the first bonus game is performed. A game machine M3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine M3, the first bonus game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entering means by the bonus game executing means, and the second bonus game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. And / or is performed. Then, when the first bonus game is executed, the ratio of the execution condition is set to be lower by the ratio variable means than when the second bonus game is executed.

  Thereby, when the first bonus game and the second bonus game, which are different in the ease of entering the ball into the ball entering means, are executed, it is possible to approximate the number of times of the effect executed by the effect executing means It becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the bonus game by the effect executed by the effect executing means and lowering the gaming intention.

  Here, in the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine M2, regardless of the type of the bonus game executing means, the gaming ball that has first entered the ball entering means is always (with high probability) by the effect executing means It is good to be made to perform an effect. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the bonus game has been executed, and it is possible to provide an effect in which the type of the bonus game being executed can not be easily grasped by the player.

  In any one of the game machines M1 to M3, a game machine M4 characterized in that the effect is to display a display mode as at least one of the effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine M4, since the display mode is displayed on the display means as at least one of the presentation modes in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines M1 to M3, the player can use the contents displayed on the display means There is an effect that it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the bonus game has been executed based on the above.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, in the first bonus game, a period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state to when the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than the second bonus game. A game machine M5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the first bonus game, the period from when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state until the predetermined condition is established is set longer than in the second bonus game.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first bonus game can be surely executed as the bonus game which is easier to enter than the second bonus game.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M5, a gaming machine M6 characterized in that the number of times the first bonus game is changed to the second state is set to be more than the number of the second bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of times the first state is changed to the second state by the first bonus game is set larger than that of the second bonus game.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first bonus game can be surely executed as the bonus game which is easier to enter than the second bonus game.

  In any one of claims M1 to M6, the variable ball entry means has second ratio variable means for variably setting the rate at which the execution condition is satisfied based on the number of game balls entering the ball. A game machine M7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the ratio at which the execution condition is satisfied is variably set based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means by the second ratio variable means.

  This makes it possible to change the rate at which the effect is executed based on the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the execution ratio of presentation more complicatedly.

  In the gaming machine M7, the bonus game execution means is a first bonus game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means, and a second bonus game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. And the second ratio variable means is characterized in that the execution condition is less likely to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases. M8.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exerted. That is, at least one of the first bonus game in which the game ball easily enters the ball entering means by the bonus game execution means, and the second bonus game in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first bonus game. Is executed. Then, the execution condition is less likely to be satisfied as the number of game balls entering the variable means increases by the second ratio variable means.

  Thereby, it is possible to approximate the number of effects to be executed by the effect executing means between when the first benefit game is executed and when the second benefit game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the bonus game by the effect executed by the effect executing means and lowering the gaming intention.

  In any one of the game machines M2 to M8, the effect execution means is paid out by the payout means as a divided display mode indicating a number obtained by dividing the number of the prize balls to be paid out by the payout means as the effect. A game machine M9 characterized by being set to correspond to the number of prize balls.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines M2 to M8, the following effects are exerted. That is, the divided display mode indicating the number obtained by dividing the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means as the effect into a plurality by the effect execution means is set to correspond to the number of prize balls paid out by the payout means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to display a plurality of divided display modes in one effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the type of the bonus game by the effect executed by the effect executing means and lowering the gaming intention. In addition, even with a gaming machine having a bonus game with different numbers of winning balls, the same effect can be achieved by executing effects using the divided display mode.

<Feature N group> (the number of additions can be changed by PUSH effect)
At least among the benefit information determination means for determining benefit information to be advantageous to the player, the storage means capable of storing the benefit information determined by the benefit information determination means, and the benefit information stored in the storage means Reward granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to a player corresponding to a part, and when the benefit is given by the benefit giving means, the benefit corresponds to the benefit information stored in the storage means Privilege information updating means for updating the benefit information reduced from the benefit, display means for displaying identification information based on the benefit information less than the benefit information stored in the storage means, and the display means When the determination means for determining the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated A setting unit configured to variably set the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing; a variable setting unit configured to vary the privilege information set by the setting unit based on a specific condition; and the operation unit is operated Display update for acquiring the privilege information set by the setting unit based on the setting unit and updating the privilege information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display unit to the corresponding identification information A game machine N1 characterized by having a means.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has operation means such as an operation button operable by the player, and can execute an operation effect for urging the player to perform an operation on the operation means as a kind of entertainment effect (E.g., JP-A-2006-263523). In this conventional game machine, by operating the operation button in the operation effect, a special effect different from the usual one is generated or a hit is notified, etc. to improve the player's interest.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the operation effect is executed as part of the effect of notifying the result of the predetermined lottery, the player's operation result with respect to the frame button is the result of the effect. It was irrelevant to whether or not to be notified. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the benefit information determination means determines the benefit information that is advantageous to the player. The benefit information determined by the benefit information determining means is stored in the storage means, and the benefit giving means provides a benefit which is advantageous to the player corresponding to at least a part of the stored benefit information. When the benefit is provided by the benefit applying means, the benefit information updating means updates the benefit to the benefit information reduced from the benefit corresponding to the benefit information stored in the storage means. Identification information based on privilege information less than the privilege information stored in the storage unit is displayed on the display unit. The privilege information to be displayed on the display means is determined by the determining means with the privilege information stored in the storage means as the upper limit. When the player operates the operation means, the privilege information corresponding to the operation timing is variably set by the setting means. The privilege information set by the setting means is varied by the variable setting means based on the specific condition. The privilege information set by the setting means is acquired based on the operation of the operation means, and the benefit information corresponding to the identification information displayed on the display means is updated by the display update means to the corresponding identification information .

  Thus, the privilege information can be updated based on the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect.

  In the gaming machine N1, on the basis of the establishment of the determination condition, a determination means for performing the determination and a benefit for performing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. A game execution means, and the privilege giving means performs the determination by the determination means a predetermined number of times in a high probability state of increasing the probability that the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A gaming machine N2 characterized by continuously setting as the benefit every time the determination is executed.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination is performed by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. Then, the high probability state of increasing the probability of being determined as a specific determination result by the determination means is performed as a benefit each time the determination is performed until the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times by the benefit giving means. It will be set continuously.

  As a result, the high probability state is set since the benefit is continuously set until the determination is performed a predetermined number of times in the high probability state in which the probability that the determination means determines that it is a specific determination result is increased. The player can easily grasp what he is doing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine N2, the identification information is information indicating the number of times that the high probability state is determined to be continued and notified, and the gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the identification information indicates the number of times that the high probability state is determined to be continued and notified.

  Thus, the player can easily grasp the number of times that the high probability state is determined to be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, a suggestion display control means for displaying on the display means a suggestion display mode for suggesting a timing of operating the operation means, and the suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means Gaming machine N4 characterized by including: suggestion display mode determination means to determine based on the timing of the privilege information set in the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the indication display mode that indicates the timing of operating the operation means is displayed on the display means by the indication display control means. The suggestion display mode displayed on the suggestion display control means is determined by the suggestion display mode determination means based on the timing of the benefit information set in the setting means.

  As a result, by operating the operation means on the basis of the suggestion display mode displayed on the display means, the privilege information is given, so that it is possible to provide an effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine N4, the suggestion display mode is a variable display mode that is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and a determination mode in which the benefit information set in the setting means can be determined by the variable display mode. Is at least displayed. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the suggestion display mode, the variable display mode is variably displayed based on the passage of time, and the discrimination mode capable of discriminating the privilege information set in the setting means is displayed by the variable display mode.

  As a result, it is possible to determine the benefit information to be given according to the display content displayed as the variable display mode, it is possible to aim the player to aim the timing for operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game eagerly.

<Feature O group> (suppress small hit frequency)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, and privilege giving means for imparting a privilege to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, A determination condition storage unit capable of storing a plurality of establishments of the determination condition, and a suppression unit that suppresses the frequency at which the determination is performed by the determination unit, the suppression unit stores the determination condition storage unit A game machine O1, characterized in that the frequency at which the determination is performed is more easily suppressed when the number of the determined conditions is the predetermined number or more than when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  Here, on a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and a symbol is variably displayed, and a lottery is made to the player after the variation display ends. There are some that report the result of Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine which is configured to be able to hold and store a lottery which is executed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening a plurality of times (for example, JP-A-2010-35664) .

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, when the winning frequency of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is high, more gaming balls are paid out than in the case where the winning frequency of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening is low. Since many benefits are to be paid out, and the winning frequency of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening, the benefits that the player receives will be greatly different, so the winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening There is a problem that the operation of the gaming machine which is less frequent is reduced. In addition, in order for the player to determine whether or not the winning frequency of the gaming ball to the start winning opening is appropriate, it is necessary to execute many games, and the player performing the game is provided with a fair gaming machine. There was a problem that I could not do it. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition, and the bonus granting means is the player based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. Benefits are granted. A plurality of satisfaction of the judgment conditions are stored by the judgment condition storage means. The frequency at which the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means is suppressed by the suppression means. In addition, the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number is more likely to be suppressed by the suppression means when the number is more than the predetermined number.

  This makes it possible to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, as compared to the case where the number is less than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player performing a game with a fair gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine O1, a display means on which identification information indicating the discrimination result of discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means, and its dynamic display Dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed by the execution means; and the suppression means is configured to set the dynamic display period setting means longer to the dynamic display period setting means. A gaming machine O2 characterized by suppressing the frequency of executing the determination by setting a period.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. A dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display period setting means. By setting a long dynamic display period by the dynamic display period setting means, the frequency at which the determination is performed by the suppressing means is suppressed.

  Thereby, by setting a long dynamic display period, it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing the determination, it is possible to reliably suppress the frequency of performing the determination, and it is fair to the player who executes the game. There is an effect that the accuracy of providing a gaming machine can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and dynamic display of the second identification information performed by the second dynamic display execution means The second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and the second judgment of the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. A game machine O3 comprising: second benefit granting means for granting a benefit, wherein the second judgment condition is easily established by the benefit granting means imparting the benefit. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of the second determination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. Dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second motion in the dynamic display of the second identification information performed by the second dynamic display execution means The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. The second benefit is awarded to the player by the second benefit awarding means based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means has become the specific second discrimination result. Then, the second determination condition is easily established by the provision of the benefit by the benefit applying means.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress that a benefit that facilitates the establishment of the second determination condition by the suppressing means is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player performing a game with a fair gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine O2, a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition, and a second display means for displaying second identification information indicating a result of determination by the second determination means A second dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means, and dynamic display of the second identification information performed by the second dynamic display execution means The second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period, and the second judgment of the player based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. The game is characterized by having a second benefit granting means for granting a benefit, and by the provision of the second benefit by the second benefit granting means, the determination condition is easily established. Machine O4.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the establishment of the second determination condition, and the second identification information indicating the result of the determination by the second determination unit is displayed on the second display unit. Dynamic display of the second identification information in the second display means is executed by the second dynamic display execution means, and the second motion in the dynamic display of the second identification information performed by the second dynamic display execution means The target display period is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. The second benefit is awarded to the player by the second benefit awarding means based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by the second discrimination means has become the specific second discrimination result. Then, the determination condition is likely to be satisfied by the second benefit giving means giving the second benefit.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress the provision of the second benefit that facilitates the establishment of the determination condition by the suppressing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player performing a game with a fair gaming machine.

  In any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the suppression means is characterized in that it is easy to suppress the frequency at which the determination is performed when the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific determination result. With gaming machine O5.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the suppression means is likely to suppress the frequency at which the discrimination is performed.

  Thereby, when a privilege is provided by the privilege giving means, it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where many benefits are given in a short period of time.

  In any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the suppressing means may be configured to reduce the number of the determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means to less than the first predetermined number less than the first predetermined number. 2. A game machine O6 characterized in that the frequency at which the determination is performed is easily suppressed in the case of a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O2 to O4, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is a second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number than the first predetermined number less than the predetermined number, the frequency at which the determination is performed by the suppression means is It becomes easy to be suppressed.

  Thus, the determination is performed when the number of determination conditions stored in the determination condition storage means is less than the predetermined number and the second predetermined number less than the first predetermined number is smaller than the first predetermined number. Frequency is easily suppressed, so that when the game is intentionally performed while continuing the state where the number of stored determination conditions is small, the frequency at which the determination is performed can be suppressed, and the player who executes the game can There is an effect that a fair game machine can be provided.

<Feature P group> (Vary the range of suspension notice)
An information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, an information storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined upper limit number, and the information storage means Based on the information, based on the determination means performing the determination in response to the establishment of the determination condition, and based on the determination result of the determination by the determination means to perform a bonus game advantageous to the player In a gaming machine provided with bonus game execution means, based on the information stored in the information storage means, advance discrimination means capable of performing prior discrimination before the discrimination condition is established, and the information The identification symbol display control means for displaying on the display means an identification symbol corresponding to the number of information in which the information is stored in the storage means for each of the information, and the information before being determined by the determination means Of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the variable means changes the identification symbol based on the result of the prior identification by the prior identification means. A game machine P1 comprising: determination means for determining a combination of identification symbols.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to be held a plurality of times, and the holding symbol corresponding to the number of holding memories is displayed, and the displayed holding symbol is displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending advance presentation effect that can notify in advance information related to a corresponding lottery using (for example, JP-A-2009-297071).

  In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to change the color and shape of the reserved symbol, thereby suggesting an expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big win, before the variable display is started. , It was possible to raise the player's sense of expectation.

  However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, when a holding advance notice effect occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the holding pattern which is not a target of the holding advance notice, thereby reducing the gaming intention. There was a problem of It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine P1, information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on satisfaction of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored by the information storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the determination is executed by the determination means triggered by the establishment of the determination condition, and it is advantageous for the player based on the result of the specific determination by the determination by the determination means. The special bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. Then, based on the information stored in the information storage unit, prior determination is performed by the prior determination unit before the determination condition is established. The identification symbol display control means displays the number of information stored in the information storage means on the display means by the identification symbol display control means. The identification symbol is varied by the variable means based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means with respect to the information before being determined by the determination means. Among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means, the combination of the identification symbols changed by the variable means is determined by the determination means.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the combination of the identification symbols which are changed by the variable means among the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the identification symbol display control means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress that the variable means is executed for all the identification symbols displayed on the display means, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game intention of the player.

  In the gaming machine P1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the determination condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied, the variable means corresponds to the information corresponding to the identification symbol. A game machine P2 wherein information based on the result of the prior discrimination with respect to is variably displayed.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period until the judgment condition of the information corresponding to the displayed identification symbol is satisfied by the variable means, the information based on the result of the prior discrimination with respect to the information corresponding to the identification symbol Is variably displayed.

  This makes it possible to cause the player to gaze at the variable contents of the identification symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine P1 or P2 has specific display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol for a specific period by using the identification symbol changed by the variable means. A game machine P3 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a specific display mode corresponding to the identification symbol is displayed for a specific period on the display unit by the specific display control unit using the identification symbol changed by the variable unit.

  As a result, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect mode using the identification symbol changed by the variable means, and it is possible to execute an effect that is advantageous to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, when the identification symbol is changed by the operation means operable by the player and the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means A game machine P4 characterized by comprising specific effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the identification symbol is changed by the variable means, the setting of the specific effect is performed by the specific effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

  Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a specific effect mode during a specific period by using the identification symbol changed by the variable means.

  In the gaming machine P4, when it is determined that the specific determination result by the prior determination means, the number of the identification symbol that is varied by the variable means than when it is determined to be other than the specific determination result A game machine P5 characterized by having variable number setting means for setting a large number.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable number setting means sets a larger number of identification symbols that can be changed by the variable means than when it is determined that they are other than the specific determination result when it is determined as the specific determination result by the prior determination means. Ru.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to change the frequency at which the identification symbol is displayed according to the gaming state, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

<Feature Q group> (A specific effect is executed when the remaining number of ST is less than a predetermined number and a big hit)
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions, and bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended If the second game state is set by the game state setting means for setting the game state of 1 from among the game state setting means, the specification that is more easily established as the number of times of execution of the determination by the determination means increases Based on the specific condition judging means for judging whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the fact that the specific condition is judged to be satisfied by the specific condition judging means, the gaming state is determined from the second gaming state from the second gaming state Indication effect execution means for executing suggestion effects suggesting the easiness of establishment of the specific condition when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state changing means for changing to the gaming state and the gaming state setting means And comparison means for comparing the ease of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggested effect with the ease of establishment of the actual specific condition, and the comparison result by the comparison means is a specific comparison result In this case, a game machine Q1 comprising: specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, symbols are variably displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and the player is notified of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. In this way, in the gaming machine, by increasing the winning probability of winning or making the lottery easy to be executed, a specific game which is advantageous to the player is configured to be executable a specific number of times, and the specific game is executed There are some which do not notify the player of the number of times the game is played (for example, JP-A-2015-6562).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the number of times the specific game is executed is not notified to the player, the remaining number of the specific game can not be grasped when the winning is made during the execution of the specific game. There is a problem that the player can not be sufficiently provided with a sense of satisfaction with the result. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, the bonus game advantageous to the player is a bonus game It is executed by the executing means. A plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is finished Among the game states, one game state is set by the game state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, it is judged by the specific condition judging means whether or not the specific condition which is easily satisfied as the number of times of the judgment by the judging means increases. The gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means from the second gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determining means. In the case where the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the suggestion effect indicating the easiness of establishment of the specific condition is executed by the suggestion effect performing means. When the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishment of the actual specific condition are compared by the comparison means, and the comparison result by the comparison means is the specific comparison result, the predetermined condition The specific effect corresponding to the specific comparison result is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the establishment of.

  Thereby, when the easiness of establishment of the specific condition suggested by the suggestion effect and the easiness of establishment of the actual specific condition are the specific comparison result, the comparison result is based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The corresponding specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. Therefore, the player can be made to grasp the current state of the second gaming state by executing the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, by configuring the predetermined condition to be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the player can grasp the state of the second gaming state when the bonus game is executed. It will be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied when the bonus game is executed near the end of the second game state.

  The gaming machine Q1 has specific condition setting means for setting a predetermined number of times of execution by the determination means when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means and the specific condition is satisfied. Game machine Q2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the specific condition setting means sets the predetermined number of times of execution by the judging means that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, since the specific condition can be set based on the number of times of execution of the determination means, the number of times the second gaming state is set can be set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while making the player aware of the remaining number of times the second gaming state is set, and it is possible to enhance the motivation for the game.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, when the suggestion effect is being executed by the suggestion effect executing means, the suggestion effect being executed is easy to establish the actual specific effect based on the fulfillment of the effect condition. A game machine Q3 characterized by having variable effect means for changing to a suggested effect brought close to.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, the suggestion effect performed by the variable effect means approaches the easiness of actual specific effect being realized based on the fulfillment of the effect condition. It is variable to production.

  As a result, the number of times indicating that the second gaming state is set can be increased, and there is an effect that the player can safely carry out the game.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the number of remaining determinations by the determination means until the specific condition is established, and the variable effect means indicates the number of determinations close to the number of remaining determinations Game machine Q4 characterized by being variable.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the number of remaining determinations is suggested by the determination means until the specific condition is established by the suggested effect, and the variable effect means is variably set to the suggested effect indicating the number of determinations close to the remaining number of determinations.

  As a result, since it is possible to suggest the number of determinations close to the number of remaining determinations, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of tension.

  If any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4 is other than the specific comparison result, if the bonus game is executed, it has a means for executing an effect different from the specific effect. Feature game machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the case where the bonus game is executed in the case other than the specific comparison result, an effect different from the specific effect is performed.

  As a result, by performing an effect different from the specific effect, it is possible for the player to grasp that the second benefit game has been executed, in the case other than the specific comparison result. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

<Feature R group> (after temporary stop, form reach using new symbol row)
Dynamic display execution means for performing dynamic display of a plurality of identification information strings composed of a plurality of identification information arranged in a predetermined order, and display means for displaying identification information A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on stop display of a combination of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the display execution means In the machine, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the identification information sequence is displayed in the dynamic display based on the display of the combination of the identification information different from the combination of the predetermined identification information being stopped. Identification information sequence display means for dynamically displaying a new identification information sequence while at least a part of the combinations of identification information being displayed being stopped, and the new identification information by the identification information sequence display means In the case where the combination of the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed using at least a part of the combination of the stopped and displayed identification information and the new identification information column based on the displayed column: A game machine R1 comprising: execution means for performing the bonus game by the bonus game execution means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a plurality of symbols are variably displayed and each symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, there is a case where a winning condition advantageous to the player is provided (for example, JP 10-265). In such a gaming machine, in a state in which one symbol is changing and the other symbols are stopped and displayed, a reach state in which the symbols displayed being stopped form a part of a predetermined combination is generated and becomes a win. We are aiming to improve interest by making players expect them.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, even if all symbols are not displayed in a stopped state when the reach state is not generated, there is no possibility of being hit at that time, and the player's game is not performed. There was a problem of losing interest. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the display means executes the dynamic display of the plurality of identification information strings composed of the plurality of identification information arranged in the predetermined order by the dynamic display execution means. Based on the stop display of the combination of the identification information determined in advance in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence by the dynamic display execution means, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the identification displayed in the stopped state based on the fact that the combination of the identification information different from the combination of the identification information determined in advance is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information sequence. A new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means while at least a part of the combination of information is stopped and displayed. Based on the new identification information string being displayed by the identification information string display means, the combination of identification information determined in advance using at least a part of the combination of identification information stopped and displayed and the new identification information string When the stop display is performed, the bonus game by the bonus game execution means is executed by the execution means.

  As a result, a new identification information string is dynamically displayed by the identification information string display unit while stopping and displaying at least a part of the combination of identification information that has been temporarily displayed once stopped. Can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the identification information string display means is a direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays a special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information items displayed in the plurality of identification information strings. A game machine R2 characterized by dynamically displaying in different directions.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the special identification symbol string combined with the plurality of identification information displayed in the plurality of identification information strings by the identification information string display means is dynamically moved in a direction different from the direction in which the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays Is displayed.

  As a result, since the dynamic display direction of the symbol row can be changed to a different direction, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R2, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution device. A game machine R3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays the special identification symbol string in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the identification symbol string dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution device.

  As a result, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the direction of the dynamic display has been changed, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the gaming machine R1, the identification information sequence display means dynamically displays a new identification information sequence different from the identification information sequence dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information sequence A non-display setting in which at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to non-display when the new identification information string is displayed by the display unit A game machine R4 characterized by having a means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the identification information string display means dynamically displays a new identification information string different from the identification information string dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, and the identification information string display means displays the new identification information string In the case of being set, at least one of the plurality of identification information strings dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is set to non-display by the non-display setting unit.

  This makes it possible to dynamically display a new identification information sequence without changing the area for displaying the identification information sequence. Therefore, there is an effect that control load of dynamic display can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R4, display data for displaying the new identification information string dynamically displayed by the identification information string display means and the identification information string dynamically displayed in the dynamic display execution means The display data to be displayed are set at the same timing, and among the set display data, the display data to be displayed is determined as an area set in the display area of the display means. A game machine R5 characterized by having a means.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R4, the following effects are exerted. That is, display data for displaying a new identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the identification information sequence display means and display data for displaying the identification information sequence dynamically displayed on the dynamic display execution means, Among the set display data, display data to be displayed is determined by the determination unit as an area set at the same timing and set in the display area of the display unit.

  This has the effect of reducing the control load of the dynamic display.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display symbols variably based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the end of the fluctuation display. Such a gaming machine is configured to display a specific screen (demonstration screen) when the symbol is not changing (during playing), allowing the player to easily find a vacant platform, It is suppressing that the operation of a game falls (for example, patent documents 1: JP, 2006-000392, A)
).
However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further suppresses the decrease in the operation of the game.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which suppresses the decrease in the operation of a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a first acquisition unit for acquiring first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the first acquired by the first acquisition unit. A first determination means for performing a first determination based on information, a first effect execution means for performing a first effect based on a result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period, and the first effect A second determination is performed based on establishment of a second acquisition condition different from the one acquisition condition, and a second acquisition unit acquiring the second information, and the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit. A second determination means, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means in a second effect period, and a first determination that the result of the first determination is specific Of a specific first effect or the second determination based on being a result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when a specific second effect based on the result being a specific second determination result is executed, When the execution of the effect is ended and the first information is not acquired by the first acquisition unit, the first clocking unit which starts the first clocking, and the execution of the second effect are ended, the second Execution of the first notification mode on the basis of the second clocking means for starting the second clocking when the second information is not acquired by the acquiring means, and that the first clocking has become the first set value Notification execution means for starting the execution of the second notification mode based on the fact that the second time count has become the second set value, and the second process under execution when the second acquisition condition is satisfied. 1 Switch between the first period for ending the notification mode and the second period for continuing A setting unit capable of setting, and has a.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, it is possible to set a first gaming state that facilitates the execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates the execution of the second determination. It has a game state setting means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first effect executing unit and the second effect executing unit execute the first effect and the second effect simultaneously. It is possible to do.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the notification execution unit is configured as the second notification mode when the first effect is performed. The notification mode during execution of the first effect indicating that the first effect is being executed is executed.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein any one of the first notification aspect or the second notification aspect to be executed by the notification execution means Display control for controlling display contents in display means having at least a first display area to be displayed and a second display area to display the other, the first display area of the display means, and the second display area And the display control means displays the first notification mode in the first display area when the first period is set by the setting means, and the second period is set. The display content of the display means is controlled to display the second notification mode in the first display area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination is performed by the first determination unit based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first effect is executed by the first effect executing means on the basis of the result of the first determination. The second determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means based on the result for a second effect period. Then, a specific second effect based on the result of the specific first effect or the second determination based on the specific first determination result as the result of the first determination is the specific second determination result When it is executed, the bonus game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the execution of the first effect is finished, and the first information is not acquired by the first acquiring means. In the case where the first clocking is started by the first clocking unit, the execution of the second effect is ended, and the second clocking is started by the second clocking unit when the second information is not acquired by the second acquiring unit Be done. Execution of the first notification mode is started by the notification execution means on the basis of the fact that the first timekeeping has become the first set value, and on the basis of the fact that the second timekeeping has become the second set value, the second notification Execution of the aspect is initiated. In addition, when the second acquisition condition is satisfied, the setting unit switches and sets a first period in which the first notification mode being executed is ended and a second period in which the second notification period is continued.
Thereby, even in the state in which the second effect is being performed, it is possible to continue the first notification mode indicating that the first effect is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the situation of the gaming machine, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the gaming state setting means sets a first gaming state that facilitates the execution of the first determination and a second gaming state that facilitates the execution of the second determination.
Thereby, it is possible to set the first period or the second period in accordance with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the first effect and the second effect are performed by the first effect executing device and the second effect executing device. Since it is configured to be executable at the same time, there is an effect that it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation of the first effect and the second effect which are simultaneously executed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the first effect is being executed, a notification mode during first effect execution indicating that the first effect is being executed as the second notification mode is executed by the notification execution means.
As a result, it is possible to easily make the player understand the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide the gaming situation in an easy-to-understand manner.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, the display means has a first display area in which one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode executed by the notification execution means is displayed, and a second display area in which the other is displayed. The first notification mode is displayed in the first display area when the first period is set by the setting means, and the second notification mode is displayed in the first display area when the second period is set. The display contents of the display means are controlled by the display control means.
Thereby, the notification mode displayed in the first display area can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute an intelligible notification mode display according to the gaming state, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
113 Voice lamp control device (display control means)
S301 First acquisition means S306 First judgment means S307 First effect execution means S803 Second acquisition means S804 Second judgment means S805 Second effect execution means S2004 Benefit game execution means S4202 First clock means S4206 Second clock means S4212 Setting means S4213 notification execution means

Claims (1)

A first acquisition unit capable of acquiring first information;
A first determination unit capable of performing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit;
First effect execution means for executing a first effect based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means in a first effect period;
A second acquisition unit capable of acquiring second information;
A second determination unit capable of performing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit;
A second demonstration execution means for executing a second effect based on the second determination result by the second judging means in the second effect period, the gaming machine having a
First clocking means for starting the first clocking when clocking conditions are satisfied after the execution period of the first effect has elapsed ;
A second clocking means for starting a second clocking when a clocking condition is satisfied after the execution period of the second effect has elapsed ;
Execution of the first notification mode is started based on the first time count becoming the first set value, and execution of the second notification mode is started based on the second time count becoming the second set value gaming machine, characterized in that those having a notification executing unit to start.